1TechnicalBid T6 PDF

Construction of Tunnel T-6 Tender Documents
Sivok - Rangpo Rail Link Project Top Sheet
IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED

(A Government of India undertaking)
Tender
For
Construction of T-6 (between Km 14+904 to Km

18+816 approx.) on Sivok (West Bengal) to Rangpo
(Sikkim) New Single line BG Railway Line Project
VOLUME –I
(TECHNICAL)
(Packet I)
JAN - 2019
Delhi Office Siliguri Office
The Chief General Manager / RP, Sivok Rangpo- Rail Link Project
IRCON International Ltd., SUKRITI, Satyajeet Roy lane,
C-4, District Centre, Jyoti Nagar, P.O. – Sivok Road,
Saket, New Delhi – 110 017. Siliguri – 734 001 Dist.Darjeeling
(West Bengal).
INDEX
1 TOP SHEET Page – 3
2 SECTION-I / e-PROCUREMENT NOTICE Page – 4 -18
3 SECTION-II / FORM OF BID Page – 19-20
4 SECTION-III / INSTRUCTION TO TENDERERS Page –21-77
5 SECTION-IV / APPENDIX TO TENDER Page – 78-79
6 SECTION-V / SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT I Page – 80-115
7 SECTION-VI / SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT IIA Page – 116-136
8 SECTION-VII / SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT IIB Page –137-322
9 SECTION-VIII/ ANNEXURES/PERFORMAS Page – 323-332
10 SECTION-IX/ STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF Page 333- 336 and A

CONTRACT NOV 2018 separate booklet is
enclosed.
11 Volume II A separate booklet is
enclosed.
12 Volume III - FINANCIAL BID & BOQ A separate booklet is
enclosed /attached
2
TOP SHEET
Tender No:-IRCON/CC/TN/SR-2046/Const./T6/18/04 Date: 01.01.2019
Name of work : Construction of Tunnel T-6 (between Km 14+904 to Km 18+816

approx.) on Sivok (West Bengal) to Rangpo (Sikkim) New Single
line BG Railway Line Project.
Tendered cost / : Rs. 261.41 Crores

Estimated Cost
Earnest Money : Rs. 1.37 Cr.

Completion Period : 27 (Twenty Seven Months)
Last Date of : 22/01/2019 at 15:00 hrs.

Submission
Date of Opening : 22/01/2019 at 15:30 hrs.
IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED,

District Centre, Saket,
New Delhi-110 017,
Ph. No. 011-29565410,
Fax: 011-26522000, 26854000
3
Sivok Rangpo Rail Link Project Form of Bid
SECTION-I
e-PROCUREMENT NOTICE
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 e-PROCUREMENT NOTICE 6
2 ANNEX : I TO e-PROCUREMENT NOTICE – SCOPE OF WORK 14
3 ANNEX : IITO e-PROCUREMENT NOTICE – ESSENTIAL QUALIFYING CRITERIA 16
5

(A Government of India Undertaking)
इरकॉन
Tender No.:IRCON/CC/TN/SR-2046/Const./T6 /18/ 04 Date: 01.01.2019
e-PROCUREMENT NOTICE
Sub: Construction of Tunnel T-6 (between Km 14+906 to Km 18+816 approx.) on Sivok
(West Bengal) to Rangpo (Sikkim) New Single line BG Railway Line Project.
1.0 The Chief General Manager/Railway Projects, IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED, C-4, District
Center, Saket, New Delhi-110017, , Contact: 9560595273;, 2046.Contact No: 9560595025,
011-26530462, E-mail id: surender.singh@ircon.org & mk.poddar@ircon.org invites
online bids in two packet system on prescribed forms from bonafide firms/companies/JV
having requisite experience and financial capacity for execution of the work detailed in the
table given below. The bidder is advised to examine carefully all instructions including
addendum/corrigendum, condition of contract data, forms, terms, technical specifications,
bill of quantities in the bid document.
S Name of work Estimated Cost of Earnest Completion

No. Services (Rs.) Money (Rs.) Period
1 Construction of Tunnel T-6 (between

Km 14+904 to Km 18+816 approx.) 261.41 Crores 1.37 Cr. 27 Months
on Sivok (West Bengal) to Rangpo
(Sikkim) New Single line BG Railway
Line Project
2.0 Website https://www.tenderwizard.com/IRCON may be referred for detailed

terms and conditions of the bidding documents, which is available on line.
Amendments/Corrigendum/Addendum, if any would be hosted on the website only.
3.0 ELIGIBILTY CRITERIA
Eligibility of the applicants shall be assessed for fulfilling the technical capability and
competence as well as for financial capacity and organizational resources as
specified in Annexure-II of e-PROCUREMENT NOTICE.
4.0 Accessing/ Purchasing of Bid Documents
4.1 The complete Bid Document can be viewed / downloaded from the e-Procurement
portal i.e. https://www.tenderwizard.com/IRCON free of cost.
4.2 A Vendors’ Manual containing the detailed guidelines for e-Procurement system is
also available on e-Procurement portal of IRCON.
6
4.3 It is mandatory for all the bidders to have class-III Digital Signature Certificate (in
the name of person having power of attorney to sign the Bid) from any of the
licensed Certifying Agency (Bidders can see the list of licensed CA’s from the link
www.cca.gov.in) to participate in e-Procurement of IRCON.
4.4 It is mandatory for the bidders to get their firm/company registered with e-
procurement portal of IRCON, i.e. https://www.tenderwizard.com/IRCON to have
user ID & password by submitting a non-refundable annual registration charge of Rs
2,500/-(exclusive of taxes, levies, etc.) which can be paid online through Debit/
Credit Card in favour of “M/s ITI Limited”, payable at New Delhi using the payment
gateway of Punjab National Bank. The registration so obtained by the prospective
bidder shall be valid for one year from the date of its issue and shall be subsequently
renewed.
4.5 Tender documents will be available online on website
https://www.tenderwizard.com/IRCON from 01.01.2019 (18.00 Hrs) which can be
downloaded free of cost till the last date and time of submission of tender. However,
to participate in the online bidding process, bidders are required to pay a non-
refundable fee of Rs. 57,800.00 (Rupees Fifty-Seven Thousad Eight Hundred
only) towards the cost of one set of tender documents through NEFT or RTGS only
in IRCON’s bank account no.: 57500000076024, IFSC Code: HDFC0000003 at HDFC
Bank Ltd., Surya Kiran Building, KG Marg, New Delhi.
4.6 In addition to this, Bidder shall submit a non-refundable fee of Rs. 5900/-(Rupees
Five Thousand only) inclusive of all taxes towards e-bid processing fee paid online
through Debit/ Credit Card in favour of “M/s ITI Limited” using the payment
gateway.
5.0 Validity of Bidder’s Registration on the e-Procurement portal of IRCON
Bidders may note the following:
(a) It shall be the sole responsibility of the bidder(s) to keep the Registration valid
up to the original/extended date of submission of bid.
(b) Bids can be submitted only during the validity of their registration.
6.0 IRCON may issue addendum(s)/corrigendum(s) to the tender documents. In such
case, the addendum(s)/corrigendum(s) shall be issued and placed on website
https://www.tenderwizard.com/IRCON at least three days in advance of date fixed
for opening of tender. The tenderers who have downloaded the tender documents
from website must visit the website and ensure that such
addendum(s)/corrigendum(s) (if any) is also downloaded by them. This shall be the
responsibility of the prospective registered bidders to check the web site for any
such corrigendum/addendum at the time of closing time of tender and ensure that
bid submitted by them are in accordance with all the corrigendum(s)/addendum(s).
Suitable time extension (not less than 3 days beyond the date of last amendment)
for submission of bids will be granted.
7.0 The tender documents shall be submitted online on or before 15:00 Hrs on
7
22.01.2019 in the prescribed format given on the websites and technical bids
received online shall be opened at 15:30 Hrs on 22.01.2019 No other mode of
submission is acceptable. Detailed credentials as per the requirement of eligibility
criteria and all tender papers except Bill of Quantities are to be submitted in
“Technical Bid”. Bill of Quantities with rates duly filled in are to be submitted in the
format provided online in the name of “Financial Bid”. Hence, physical submission of
the documents is limited to submission of original Earnest Money Deposit in the
form Pay Order/ Demand Draft/ Fixed Deposit Receipt/ Bank Guarantee as per
provision given in the sub clause 9.1 of Instructions to Tenderers. Representative of
the bidder, who chooses to attend, may attend the online opening of the technical
bids on 22.01.2019 at 15:30 Hrs. However, such representatives shall be allowed
to attend the opening of the Technical Bids, only, if such person presents the letter of
authority issued in his name by the bidder on his letter head.
8.0 Bidders cannot submit the tender after the due date and time of e-bid submission.
Time being displayed on e-procurement portal of IRCON (“Standard Time”) shall be
final and binding on the bidder. e-Bids are required to be submitted by bidders, only
as per the Indian Standard Time (IST) and not the time as per their location/country.
9.0 The bidders are advised to submit their e-bids well before the e-bid due date. IRCON
shall not be responsible for any delay in submission of e-bids for any reason
including server and technical problems.
10.0 The Technical and Financial Bid shall be digitally signed by the Authorized Signatory
of the bidder & submitted “on-line” only. The authorized signatory of the bidder
must be in possession of Power of Attorney before submitting the digitally signed
bid. Scanned copies of various documents can be prepared in different file format
(PDF, JPEG). Bidders can upload a single file of size 5 MB only but they can upload
multiple files.
11.0 Tender shall be submitted as per “Instructions to Tenderers” forming a part of the
tender document.
12.0 Any tender received without original Earnest Money in the form as specified in
tender documents shall not be considered and shall be summarily rejected.
13.0 IRCON reserves the right to cancel the tender before submission/opening of tenders,
postpone the tender submission/opening date and to accept/reject any or all
tenders without assigning any reasons thereof. IRCON’s assessment of suitability as
per eligibility criteria shall be final and binding on tenderer/s.
14.0 Tenderer/s may note that they are liable to be disqualified at any time during
tendering process in case any of the information furnished by them is not found to
be true. EMD of such tenderer/s shall be forfeited. The decision of IRCON in this
regard shall be final and binding on tenderer/s.
15.0 IRCON reserves the right to pre-qualify the bidder(s) provisionally based on the
documents submitted by them and open financial bid(s), subject to their final
verification. In the event of any document being found false, the provisional
qualification shall stand withdrawn, and the next lower bidder shall automatically
8
come to the position of such disqualified bidder. Action
against such disqualified tenderers shall be taken as per above clause no.: 14.0 of e-
Procurement Notice.
16.0 Information as required as per various Annexures to Tender Document should be
submitted by the tenderer/s without fail & strictly as per formats.
17.0 The validity of the offer shall be 90 days from the date of opening of the tender
of the said package.
18.0 Pre-bid Meeting:

18.1 A pre-bid meeting of all prospective bidders will be held on 11.01.2019 at 11:00
Hrs. in conference room of IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED, C-4, District Centre
Saket, New Delhi 110017.
18.2 The Purpose of the pre-bid meeting is to clarify issues and to answer questions on
any matter that may be raised.
18.3 The bidders shall submit their queries to Cheif General Manager/Railway Projects at
the address given in Para 1.0 above latest by 17:00 Hrs. of 09.01.2019.
18.4 Any prospective bidders desirous of attending the pre bid meeting shall send a letter
of authority on its letter head specifying the name and designation of the person
who will be attending the pre bid meeting on its behalf to the Chief General
Manager/Railway Projects, IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED, C-4, District Centre,
Saket, New Delhi-110017. Any such letter of authority shall reach IRCON at least
three days before the date of pre-bid meeting.
19.0 SCOPE OF WORK: -
The scope of work is enclosed as Annexure I.
19.1 A firm/company, partnership firm will submit his/their tender either as individual
firm/company or as partnership firm only. JV for this tender is allowed.
20.0 If it is found that any tenderer/s has/have furnished misleading/wrong or
fraudulent information/documents, his/their tender shall not be considered and the
EMD of the tenderer/s will be forfeited.
21.0 If the documents/information submitted are found to be wrong/fraudulent at any
stage after award of work, the contract may be terminated and performance deposit
and security deposit will be forfeited.
22.0 The tenderer/s is/are requested to visit the place of work and ascertain himself /
themselves with the proposed works, surroundings and prevailing law and order
condition.
23.0 In case of any disputes/differences, the jurisdiction shall be in Delhi courts only.
24. Purchase Preference Policy for Micro and Small Enterprises (MSEs) Registered
Firms:-
24.1 Purchase Preference to Micro and Small Enterprises (MSEs) as admissible under
Government’s existing policy on the date of acceptance of tender shall be applicable
9
to Micro and Small Enterprises (MSEs) registered with any statutory bodies
specified by Ministry of Micro, Small & Medium Enterprises having Udyog Aadhaar
Memoranda shall also be given all benefits under Public Procurement Policy Order
2012.
24.2 The tenderer(s) shall submit photocopy of current and valid MSEs registration
certificate inclusive of all the pages showing the category of entrepreneur – whether
the registered firm is owned by General or SC/ST entrepreneurs, monetary limit of
their registration for the items tendered to avail the benefits under the policy. The
MSEs shall also submit a copy of “Entrepreneur’s Memorandum (Part-II)” of the
concerned district center where the unit is established. The MSEs must also indicate
the terminal validity date of their registration.
24.3 Such MSE registered firms shall be exempted from payment of tender document cost
and payment of Earnest Money Deposit.
24.4 Definition of MSEs owned by SC / ST is as given below:
24.4.1 In case of proprietary MSE, proprietor(s) shall be SC/ST.
24.4.2 In case of partnership MSE, the SC/ST partners shall be holding at least 51% shares
in the unit.
24.4.3 In case of Private Limited Companies, at least 51% share shall be held by SC/ST
promoters.
24.5 All bidders registered under Micro and Small Enterprises (MSEs) shall have to
satisfy the eligibility criteria at par with other bidders. There shall not be any
relaxation in eligibility criteria/ tender process or other tender requirements and
L.1 price.
24.6 If lowest valid bidder is non-MSE firm, then in such a case -

(a) IRCON may offer up to 25% of the tendered quantity to those firms registered under
Micro and Small Enterprises (MSEs) Act whose quoted rate falls within + 15% of the
lowest valid bid quoted price by non-MSE (L.1 offer) provided that they are willing
to bring down their price matching to that of L.1 bidder and subject to their
monetary limit.
IRCON may split the total quantity of 25% proportionately amongst those MSEs
firms whose rate fall within price band of L.1 + 15% in case of more than one MSEs
firms falling within this purview. While splitting the quantity amongst MSEs firms
the first preference for 4 percent out of 25% shall be given to MSEs owned by
Scheduled Castes or Scheduled Tribes and 3% out of 25% shall be given to MSEs
owned by women Entrepreneurs subject to their monetary limit.
(b) Purchase preference facilities shall not be applicable in the tender where quantity
cannot be split. In such situations the total quantity shall be offered to the lowest
valid bidder irrespective of their registration status and the benefit to MSEs shall be
limited to exemption from cost of tender document and Earnest Money Deposit only.
10
(c) The total quantity shall be offered to non-MSE lowest valid bidder, in case suitable
offer of MSEs firm is not available or they do not agree to match the price to that of
L1 bidder and the quoted price by MSEs is beyond +15% of the lowest valid price
bid.
24.7 The above facilities shall not be applicable for the items for which they are not
registered.
25.0 Policy for Startup India for Startups Registered Firms:

25.1 Relaxation of criteria of prior experience and prior turnover for Startups
(whether Micro, Small Enterprises or otherwise) as admissible under Government's
existing Policy on the date of opening of tender, shall be applicable to Startups
registered in the category and within the monetary value of item/ services/ works
tendered for, with Department of Industrial Policy & Promotion, Ministry of
Commerce or by any statutory bodies specified by Government of India or having
a valid certificate of an eligible business from the Inter-Ministerial Board of
Certification specifying the category of registration/ certification and monetary
value subject to their meeting of quality and technical specifications, as envisaged in
the Policy.
25.2 IRCON reserves the rights to deny such exemptions to Startups (whether MSEs or
otherwise) in circumstances, like procurement of items related to public safety,
health, .critical security operations and equipment, etc.
25.3 The tenderer(s) shall submit photocopy of current and valid Startups registration
certificate inclusive of all the pages showing the category of entrepreneur, monetary
limit of their registration for the items tendered to avail the benefits under the
policy.
26.0 Following tender conditions on Make in India shall be applicable for tenders
valuing more than Rs. 5 lacs:
26.1 In procurement, where there is sufficient local capacity and local
competition, and where the estimated value of procurement is Rs. 50 Lakhs or less,
only local vendors* shall be eligible. If the estimated value of such procurement is
more than t 50 Lakhs, the provisions of following clause/ sub-clause 26.3 (i) and
26.3 (ii), as the case may be, shall apply.
(*Local vendors means a supplier or service provider whose product or service

offered for procurement meets the minimum local content as prescribed under the
Order of Ministry of Commerce and Industry, Department of Industrial Policy and
Promotion or by the competent Ministries/Departments in pursuance to this Order.)
26.2 Bidders (manufacturer or principal of authorised representative) who have a
valid/approved ongoing ‘Make in India' agreement/ program and who while
meeting "Essential Qualifying Criteria" as given in Annexure-V to "Instructions to
Tenderers", would also be considered to be qualified provided:
i. their foreign 'Make-in-India' associates meets "Essential Qualifying Criteria" as
given in Annexure-V to "Instructions to Tenderers" without exemption, and
ii. the Bidder submits appropriate documentary proof for a valid/approved
ongoing 'Make in India' agreement/program.
iii. the bidder (manufacturer or principal of authorised representative) furnishes
along with the bid a legally enforceable undertaking jointly executed by
11
himself and such foreign Manufacturer for satisfactory manufacture, Supply (and
erection, commissioning if applicable) and performance of 'The Product' offered
including all warranty obligations as per the general and special conditions of
contract.
26.3 In the procurements not covered by sub-clause 26.1 above, and which are
divisible/ spliltable in nature, the following procedure shall be followed:
26.3-i Among all qualified bids, if the lowest bid (L 1) is from a local vendor, the
contract for full quantity will be awarded to L 1.
26.3-ii If L 1 bid is not from a local vendor, 50% of the order quantity shall be awarded
to L 1.Thereafter, the lowest bidder among the local vendors, will be invited to
match the L 1 price for the remaining 50% quantity subject to the local vendor's
quoted price falling within the purchase preference margin of (L 1+ 20%), and
contract for that quantity shall be awarded to such local vendor subject to matching
the L 1 price. In case such lowest eligible local vendor fails to match the L 1 price
or accepts less than the offered quantity, the next higher local vendor within the
purchase preference margin of (L 1 + 20%) shall be invited to match the L 1 price
for remaining quantity and so on, and contract shall be awarded accordingly. In
case some quantity is still left uncovered on local vendors, then such balance
quantity may also be ordered on the L 1 bidder.
26.4 In procurements not covered by sub-clause 20.1 above and which are not divisible
and such procurements where the bid is evaluated on price alone, the following
procedure shall be followed
26.4-i Among all qualified bids, if the lowest bid is from a local vendor (L 1 }, the
contract will be awarded to L 1.
26.4-ii If L 1 is not from a local vendor, the lowest bidder among the local vendors, will
be invited to match the L 1 price subject to local vendor's quoted price falling
within the purchase preference margin of (L 1 + 20% ), and the contract shall be
awarded to such local vendor subject to matching the L 1 price.
26.4- In case such lowest eligible local vendor fails to match the L 1 price, the local
iii vendor with the next higher bid within the purchase preference margin of (L 1 +
20% ) shall be invited to match the L 1 price and so on and contract shall be
awarded accordingly. In case none of the local vendors within the purchase
preference margin of (L 1+20%) matches the L 1 price, then the contract may be
awarded to the L 1 bidder.
26.5 The local vendor at the time of tender shall provide self-certification that the item
offered meets the minimum local content and shall give details of the location (s)
at which the local value addition is made.
26.6 In cases of procurement for a value in excess of' 10 Crores, the local vendor shall
be required to provide a certificate from the statutory auditor or cost auditor of the
company (in the case of companies) or from a practicing cost accountant or
practicing chartered accountant (in respect of supplies other than companies) giving
the percentage of local content.
12
26.7 A vendor who has been debarred by any procuring entity for violation of this
Order shall not be eligible for preference under this Order for procurement by any
other procuring entity for the duration of the debarment.
We look forward for your active participation.
DA: Annexure ‘I & II
For & on behalf of

Chief General Manager/RP
C-4, District Centre, Saket,
New Delhi –110017,
E-mail ID: surrender.singh@ircon.org,
Contact no.: 9560595025, 011-26530462
13
ANNEX - I TO e-Procurement Notice - SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of work includes Construction of Main Tunnel T-6 (Approx. Ch. Km. 14+904 to Approx.
Ch. Km. 18+816) including one adit of 420m length approximate, portals, structures at the portal
areas, niches, drains and all other ancillary works as per approved drawings. It generally
includes the following:
1) The Survey work shall involve taking over of sight, contouring of tunnel portal area and
nearby area, with centre line pegs, checking and verification of bench marks and protection of
the same, taking & recording cross sections of natural ground levels
2) Excavation in all kinds of soil/rock at the Portals approach of the tunnel including disposal of
muck as per approved drawings.
3) Slope stabilization and slope protection at the Portals approach as per approved drawings or
as per site requirement. This also includes temporary slope stabilization and slope protection
for safe excavation of work.
4) Construction of the Main Tunnels T-6 Km 14+904 for south end portal and Km 18+816 for
north end portal and adit (approx. 420 m) including excavation and disposal of muck, support
installation, concrete or shotcrete inner lining and other concrete works, and all other ancillary
works required for the start of the interim construction of the main tunnel as per proposal of
the CONTRACTOR and as approved by the ENGINEER and as per approved drawings.
5) Construction of the final portal structures including backfilling as per approved drawings.
6) The supply and installation of geotechnical instruments and 3D monitoring, such as bireflex
targets or pressure cells, shall be done by the contractor including the recording of geotechnical
instruments.
7) Any other incidental / ancilliary works connected with the above and as directed by the
ENGINEER.
8) The profile and longitudinal section of the tunnel as indicated in the relevant drawings are
approximate. The exact location of tunnel and evacuation tunnels portals, if any, for
commencement of work may be subject to modifications at site.
9) The drawings with tender documents are for guidance only and the work shall be done as per
final approved 'Good for Construction drawing' and as per the instructions of Engineer. The
tenderer/s will not have any claim on account of this.
10) Methods for selection and adjustment of cross sections and related support measures will be
according to NATM.
11) Construction of Bituminous all-weather approach road with 5.0 m wide (or as per site
condition or as directed by the Engineer) carriageway with earthen shoulder (one side)
including protection work for North Portal and South Portal location from NH31A/ NH10
including maintenance till the competition of the project.
12) Earthwork in cutting in all kinds of soils/rocks at approaches of tunnels including
disposal of surplus spoils.
13) Submission of detailed construction schedule, excavation advance rate, method
statements with related detailed drawings and equipment planning, for various items of
14
work. Resource based construction program shall be prepared by the contractor and
submitted within 21 days from date of LOA. After submission of this resource based
construction program, contract will be signed and it shall be part of the contract
agreement.
14) Maintenance of the existing access road to tunnel and construction of any other
internal roads or any other road which will be required to be constructed /
developed by the contractor till completion of the project in all respect, is the
responsibility of contractor.
The above items of work shall include but not limited to the following:
1. Excavation and disposal of all types of soils and rocks from open excavation etc. as
per NEERI guidelines.
2. Excavating and disposing of all types of soils, rocks and conglomerate from yard as
directed by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR/s has/have to make his/their own
arrangements for dumping the excavated material. The dumping sites shall be
indicated by IRCON. However, in case IRCON is unable to do so CONTRACTOR shall
arrange the land. The cost accrued on this account shall be paid as per the actual
expenditure made by the CONTRACTOR. (as per NEERI guidelines).
3. The contract envisages all permanent and temporary works, which are necessary
for the efficient execution and completion of work.
4. The information and data stated herein and incorporated in contract elsewhere is
for the general guidance only and may vary as a result of more detailed site
investigation and construction drawings.
5. Drilling and grouting.
6. Providing Supply, Installation and Monitoring of Instrumentations with real time
monitoring including 3D monitoring and geo-tech instrumentation and providing
the data to IRCON/DDC, as required by them and as per the specifications
mentioned in Special Conditions of Contract.
7. Contractor shall do pre condition survey of existing structure i.e. building,
houses, bridges etc. at his own cost before starting of work and submit the
data to IRCON.
8. Providing, handling, erection and installation of soil and rock supporting systems
such as fiberglass elements, fiber reinforced sprayed concrete, steel ribs/lattice
girders, rock bolts, wire mesh, swellex rock bolts/dowels (forepoling), SN type rock
bolt, self drilling rock Bolts, shear dowels, etc. as per the site conditions and as/or
directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
9. Concrete manufacture, delivery and placement including providing and installing
form works and scaffolds.
10. Supply, Handling, cutting, bending, binding and placing of reinforcement steel.
11. Construction of side drains, deep drains, collection and channelizing of the water by
different ways, including sealing processes and installation of provisional cutting
valves, etc.
12. Construction and Maintenance of the approach roads required during entire period
15
of construction and defects liability period.

13. All safety arrangements as per relevant IS, IRC and IRS Codes of practice and as
specified in the tender documents.
14. Ventilation in tunnel during construction works.
15. Conveyance of explosives from main magazine to work site, storage of explosives at
work site as per site requirements by arranging contractor’s own stationary &
mobile magazine, storage, security etc.
16. Construction of all temporary diversions roads.
17. Lighting during construction in tunnels, pumping of water, construction of
provisional sump pumps, tanks for decantation, other kind of tanks because of
health, safety or environmental issues.
18. Provision and maintenance of quality control laboratory at site with office in the
laboratory for IRCON/DDC’s quality control engineer.
19. Provision of Temporary Site Offices including Furnishing for IRCON Site Staff/
Northeast Frontier Railway Staff & IRCON’s nominated representatives at Site will
be provided by the contractor within four months from the date of the award of the
work at his own cost. Plan for the site office is enclosed in Special Conditions of
Contract - I.
20. Submission of tunnel survey reports i.e. regularly as decided by the ENGINEER.
21. Submission of video of tunnel construction operations and progress reports with
digital photographs in both hard and soft copies.
22. Maintenance of all works for the specified period.
23. Provision of all drainage and services pipe as per approved drawings.
24. Provision of river training works as per directions of Engineer.
25. Regular submission of tunnel survey reports as decided by Engineer.
NOTES:
a) IRCON has already appointed DDC for the above work. The work shall be done as
per the Instructions of IRCON/DDC
b) The Drawings attached with these tender documents are for tender purpose and
for guidance only. The works shall be done as per good for construction drawings
which shall be issued during the course of construction. The tenderer/s will not
have any claim on account of this.
c) For tunnel excavation, it is mandatory to sub-divide the excavation of the Main
tunnel and Escape Tunnels into Top heading, bench and invert, if specified in
drawings and/or as directed by DDC / Engineer.
d) Tenderer may please note that chainage, co-ordinates, span of bridges, height of the
bridges and length for tunnels given above are tentative and may change. Due to
change in any of above parameter, IRCON will not entertain any claim on this
account
16
Essential Qualification Creteria
17
Rev. Annexure-II: ESSENTIAL QUALIFYING CRITERIA

: No Requirement Single Joint Venture
Entity
All parties Lead Each
combined Partner Partner
1.1 The bidder should possess experience of Must Must Meet Requirements as per
having successfully completed similar civil Meet clause 17.15.1 of Annexure-I,
works during last 10 years (ending last day of Require Part-I of Indian Railway
month previous to the one in which tender bids ments Standard General Condition of
are invited) which should be anyone of the Contract, Nov’2018.
following:
i. Three similar civil works costing not less
than the amount equal to 30% of advertised
value of the tender, or
ii. Two similar civil works costing not less than
the amount equal to 40% of advertised
value of the tender, or
iii. One similar works costing not less than the
amount equal to 65% of advertised value of
the tender.
1.2 The bidder should possess experience of Must Must meet requirement by
having executed/completed at least one Meet either the JV firm or any
tunneling work of minimum 25 Sqm finished Require member of the JV.
cross section area (Tunnel constructed with ments
TBM and cut and cover method shall not be
considered) with minimum continuous Stretch
of 1.5 km or equivalent volume with minimum
length of tunnel not less than 500 meter, in last
7 years ending last day of month previous to
the one in which tender bids are invited.
NOTES TO ELIGIBILITY CRITERIA:
(i)a. Similar Work(s) for the purpose of Essential Qualifying Criteria at 1.1 above, shall mean
execution of any civil work which includes underground tunneling work of minimum 25 sqm
finished cross sectional area. In case of foreign firms RBI exchange rate as on Ist April of the
corresponding financial year shall be used for experience certificates for evaluation of the
eligibility criteria.
(i)b. Similar Work(s) for the purpose of Essential Qualifying Criteria at 1.2 above, shall mean
execution of any civil work which includes underground tunneling work of minimum 25 sqm
finished cross sectional area. Tunnel constructed with TBM and Cut and Cover method shall
not be considered as similar works for this purpose. In case of foreign firms RBI exchange rate
as on Ist April of the corresponding financial year shall be used for experience certificates for
evaluation of the eligibility criteria.
18
(ii) For evaluation of 1.1 &1.2 above, in case the total length of tunnel in single contract is more
and the tenderer/s has/have partially successfully completed partial length with
mining/underground excavation with primary support system, such partial completed length
shall also be considered. Such partially completed work should be part of ongoing work (i.e.
work is not terminated).
(iii) The contractor should submit performance certificates in reference to S.No.1 above issued by
Government Organizations/ Semi Government Organizations/ Public Sector Undertakings/
Autonomous bodies/ Municipal bodies/ Public Limited Company / Concessionaire Company/
Private Company/ JV* Company for having successfully completed similar works in the last 7
years. Certificates issued by such Public Limited Company / Concessionaire Company/
Private Company/ JV* Company must be supported by Tax Deducted at Source (TDS)
Certificates in evidence of the value of work executed.
*JV Company shall have one member either Government Organization/ CPSEs/ Public Limited
Company listed on BSE & NSE.
No Requirement Single Joint Venture

Entity All parties Lead Each
2 Financial Eligibility Criteria: The tenderer Must Must Meet Requirements as per
must have received contractual payments in the Meet clause 17.15.2 of Annexure-I, Part-I
previous three financial years, ending Requir of Indian Railway Standard General
31.03.2018 (or 31.12.2017) in case of Foreign
ements Condition of Contract, Nov’2018.
Firms where Gregorian calendar if followed)
and the current financial year upto the date of
opening of tender, at least 150% of the
advertised value of the tender
Note:
(i) The financial turnover shall be judged from ITCC or Annual reports including Profit and Loss
Account.
(ii) Foreign component shall be converted into INR at the buying rate of State Bank of India as
on 1st April of that year (in which work executed) for turnover purpose.
Audited Balance sheet for latest last three audited FY has to be submitted by the tenderer. In
case audited balance sheet of the last financial year is not made available by the bidder, he has
to submit an affidavit certifying that “the balance sheet has actually not been audited so far”. In
such a case the financial data of previous three audited financial years will be taken into
consideration for evaluation. If audited balance sheet of any other year than the last year is not
submitted, the tender will be considered as non-responsive.
19
No Requirement Single Joint Venture

Entity All parties Lead Each
3 Bid Capacity: The tenderer/s shall have an Must Must Meet Requirements as per
available Bid Capacity of not less than the Meet clause 17.15.3 of Annexure-I,
estimated cost of the work mentioned in tender Requirem Part-I of Indian Railway Standard
document. The tender/technical bid will be
ents General Condition of Contract,
evaluated based on bid capacity formula
Nov’2018.
detailed as Annexure-VI of Part-I of The
Standard General Conditions of Contract, Nov
2018 of the Indian Railways.
Note: Tenderers are required to submit the self-evaluation sheets given at Rev.
Appendix-VI .
20
SECTION-II
FORM OF BID
21
FORM OF BID
To
Acting through
To
The Chief General Manager/Rly Project
IRCON INTERNATIONAL Ltd.,
C-4, District Centre, Saket,
New Delhi – 110017
Dear Sir,
I/We, ____________________________ (Name and address of the tenderer) have read the various
terms and conditions of the e-Procurement documents attached here with duly signed by me/us and
agree to abide by the same. I/We also agree to keep this tender open for acceptance within the
period of the validity of bids for from the date fixed for opening the same and on default thereof
our Earnest Money is liable to be forfeited.
I/We hereby declare that we have visited the site of the work and have made ourselves fully
conversant of the conditions therein and including the topography of area, soil strata at site of work,
sources and availability of construction materials, rates of construction materials, water, electricity,
all local taxes, royalties, octro is etc., availability of local labour (both skilled and unskilled), relevant
labour rates and labour laws, the existing road and approaches to the site of work, requirements for
further service roads / approaches to be constructed by me / us, the availability and rates of private
land etc. that may be required by me / us for various purposes, climatic conditions, law and order
situation and availability of working days.
I/We also hereby agree to abide by the “Standard General Conditions of Contract, Nov 2018” of
Indian Railway with latest correction slips and to carry out the work according to conditions and
specifications laid down by IRCON in the present tender.
I/We have quoted our rates for various items in the Bill of Quantities taking into account all the above
factors and I/We offer to do the work “ Construction of Tunnel T-6 (between Km 14+904 to Km
18+816 approx.) on Sivok (West Bengal) to Rangpo (Sikkim) New Single line BG Railway Line
Project” at the rates quoted in the attached Bill of Quantities and hereby bind ourselves to complete
the work in all respects within time schedule depicted in tender documents from the date of issue of
letter of acceptance of tender.
I/We also understand that until a formal Contract Agreement is executed, Letter of Acceptance
along with all tender documents shall constitute a binding contract between me/us and IRCON
International Limited.
Our Bank Account No. for the purpose of refund of EMD is……….… (Account No., Name of A/C
Holder, other details for NEFT/RTGS).
Thanking you,
Yours Faithfully,
Signature____________ and name of the signatory_______________________ in capacity
of____________ duly authorized to sign bids for and on behalf of:
________________________________________________________ (In Block capital letters)
Date this________day of __________ 201_.
22
Sivok Rangpo Rail Link Project Instruction to Tenderer
SECTION-III
INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERER (ITT)
23
Instructions To Tenderers
Table of Contents
Clause No. Description Page No.
A.1 General 23
A.2 Cost of Bidding 24
B. The Bidding Documents
B.3 Content of Bidding Documents 25
B.4 Understanding and Amendment of Tender Documents 25
C. Preparation of the Bids 26
C.5 Language of Bid 27
C.6 Signing of All Bid papers and Completing Bill of Quantities 27
C.7 Deviations 28
C.8 Transfer of tender documents 28
C.9 Earnest Money 28
C.10 Integrity Pact 29
C.11 Period of validity of the tender 30
D. Submission of Bids 30
D.12 Deadline for submission of tender 30
D.13 Modification/ Substitution/ Withdrawal of tender 30
D.14 Submission of Tenders 30
E. e-Bid opening and Evaluation
E.15 Opening of the tender 31
E.16 Clarification of the tenders 31
E.17 Preliminary Examination of bids 31
E.18 Evaluation and comparison of tenders 32
E.19 Canvassing 32
E.20 Right to accept any tender or reject all tenders 32
E.21 Award of Contract 32
E.22 Contractor Performance Feedback and Evaluation System 33
E.23 Ineligibility to participate in re-tenders/ future cases 33
E.24 Declaration of non-performance or ban status 33
E.25 Details of Disputed Status of Ban/Non-Performance 33
E.26 No Claim by the Contractor for Additional Payment 34
E.27 Right of IRCON to Deal with Tenders 34
E.28 Identity of Tenderer/s 34
E.29 Eliginility Criteria 34
E.30 Quantities 34
E.31 Negotiations 34
E.32 Execution of Contract Document 34
E.33 Form of Contract Document 34
E.34 Completion Period 34
E.35 Quoting of Rates 34
E.36 Proposed List of Plant and Machinery 36
E.37 Proposed List of Manpower 36
ANNEXURE -I Integrity Pact 36
ANNEXURE -A List of Relatives 42
ANNEXURE-B Procedure for Suspension/Banning of Business Dealings with agencies in 43
IRCON
ANNEXURE-II Check list for list of documents to be scanned, uploaded with the e- 49
tender and submitted online not later than the prescribed date and
time for e-bid submission
ANNEXURE-III Assessment of Performance of working subcontractor 50
ANNEXURE- Reference Organogram for Tender purpose Only 51
24
IV
ANNEXURE-V Affidavit 52
Appendix-I Bidder’s Information 53
Appendix-II Annual Turnover Record 54
Appendix-III List of Minimum Key Personnel/Engineer having tunnel execution 55
experience required.
Appendix-IV A List of Plant & Machinery 57
Appendix-IV B Minimum list of Plant and Machinery proposed to be deployed for 58
this project
Appendix-IV C Minimum Machinery Deployment Schedule Team wise at Tunnel 60
T6 & Adit 1
Appendix-V Undertaking by Bidder 64
Appendix-VI Self Evaluation Sheet 65
Appendix-VII Method Statement 71
Appendix- Certificate of Familiarisation 74
VIII
Appendix-IX Quality Assuarance 75
Appendix-X Work Programme 76
25
Instructions to Tenderers (ITT)

A
1 General
1.1 Name of the Work: As indicated in ‘Appendix to Tender’.
1.2 A bidder in the capacity of Individual or Sole Proprietor, Partnership Firm or Company can
participate in the tender and the bidder must upload attested copies of the constitution of its
firm such as partnership deed, Memorandum & Articles of Association, etc. along with original
the Power of Attorney of authorized signatory.
1.3 The work is proposed to be executed under the following relationship:
a) Client: As indicated in ‘Appendix to Tender’.
b) Employer : IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED address as given in ‘Appendix to Tender’.
c) Contractor: The successful tenderer to whom the work is awarded shall become the
contractor for the execution of this work.
1.4 Throughout these bidding documents, the terms “bid” and “tender” and their derivatives
(“bidder”/ “tenderer”),“bid/tendered”, “bidding”/ “tendering”, etc.) are synonymous. Day
means calendar day. Singular also means plural.
1.5 Scope of Work:
The scope of work is indicated in Annex-I of e-Procurement Notice. The scope given is
only indicative.
1.6 Approximate Tender cost of the work is as indicated in the ‘Appendix to Tender’.
1.7 A bidder shall submit only one bid in the capacity of an Individual or Sole Proprietor,
Partnership firm, Joint Venture or Company. Violation of this condition is liable to disqualify
the tenders in which such bidder has participated and EMD of all such tenderers shall stand
forfeited.
1.8 Site Visit

To obtain first-hand information on the assignment and local conditions, the bidders must visit
the site at their own cost. For assistance such as any field related information/site visit,
required in this connection, Project Head/SRRP, IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED, Siliguri
may be contacted at the following address-
Project Head/SRRP,
“Sukriti” Satyajeet Roy Lane,
Jyoti Nagar, Opp. Uttar Banga Marwari Bhawan
P.O –Sevoke Road, Siliguri
District. Darjeeling , West Bangal-734005
Ph. 0353-2541011
It shall be deemed that the tenderer has undertaken the visit to the site and is aware of site
conditions at the time of submission of tender.
26
1.9 Site Data

1.9.1 The Employer will, wherever applicable, make available, as far as possible, to the Contractor
all the data in connection with present tender available with IRCON and attached as Volume II
(Technical Documents), which have been obtained by or on behalf of the Employer from
investigations for the Works. The accuracy or reliability of the data/studies/reports and of any
other information supplied at any time by the Employer or Engineer-in-charge shall be
ascertained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for interpreting all data and
shall conduct any further investigations considered necessary by him, at his own cost. The
Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected and examined the Site, its surroundings, the
above data and other available information, and to have satisfied himself before submitting the
Tender, as to:
The form and nature of the Site, including the sub-surface conditions;
The hydrological and climatic conditions;
The extent and nature of the work, Plant, and Materials necessary for the execution and
completion of the Works and the remedying of any defects;
The means of communication with and access to the Site and the accommodation he may
require; and
1.9.2 The Contractor shall be deemed to have obtained all necessary information as to risks,
contingencies and all other circumstances, which may influence or affect the Tender.
2.0 COST OF BIDDING
2.1 The bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of the bid and
the Employer will in no case be responsible or liable for these costs regardless of the conduct
or the outcome of the bidding process.
B. The Bidding Documents
The tenderers must use the online technical and financial sheets available in excel format in
this Tender Document for submission of their Technical as well as Financial Bid. Any Bid not
conforming to the prescribed format is liable to be declared non-responsive.
3 CONTENT OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
3.1 The bidding documents include the following:
VOLUME – I
The complete list of Tender Documents – Volume I – General Documents is given as under.
 e-Procurement Notice
 Form of Bid
 Appendix to Tender
 Instructions to Tenderer/s
 Special Conditions of Contract – Section I
 Special Conditions of Contract Section II A and IIB
 Annexures/Proforma
 Indian Railways Standard General Conditions of Contract
VOLUME – II – Technical Documents
The complete list of Tender Documents – Volume II - Technical Documents (Drawings and
Reports meant for tender purpose only) is given as under:
27
 Annexure A - Tender Drawings
 Annexure B - Geotechnical Interpretative report
 Annexure C - Safety & Disaster Management during Construction
 Annexure D - Attachment for Clause 22.2 of SCC-I
 Annexure E -Guidelines for Design & Construction of Tunnels – Report

No RDSO/2012/GE:G-0017, June 2012
 Annexure F -Guidelines for Safety in Tunnels during Construction –
Report No RDSO/2011/GE: G-0016. June 2012
 Annexure G -Guidelines for Civil Engg. Inspection, Maintenance and
Safety in existing Tunnels – Report No RDSO/2009/GE: G-
0015, August 2012
VOLUME – III – Bill of Quantities

3.2 The bidder is expected to examine all instructions, terms, conditions, forms, specifications and
other information in the bidding documents. Failure to furnish all information required by the
bidding documents or submission of a bid not substantially responsive to the bidding
documents in every respect will be at the bidders’ risk and may result in rejection of his bid.
3.3 Except where specifically stated otherwise in the Tender Documents, the work is to be carried
out in accordance with General Conditions of Contract, Nov 2018 of Indian Railway, corrected
up to date with all amendments and with definition as mentioned in these tender documents.
4.0 UNDERSTANDING AND AMENDMENT OF TENDER DOCUMENTS
4.1 The bidder must obtain for itself on its own responsibility and its own cost all the information
including risks, contingencies & other circumstances in execution of the work. It shall also
carefully read and understand all its obligations & liabilities given in tender documents.
4.2 The bidder is advised to visit and examine the site where the work is to be executed and its
surroundings or other areas as deemed fit by the bidder and obtain for itself on its own
responsibility all information that may be necessary for preparing the bid and execution of the
contract. The cost of visiting the site and collecting relevant data shall be at the bidder’s own
expenses. It is a condition of the tender that the tenderer is deemed to have visited the site
and satisfied him-self with all the conditions prevailing including any difficulties for executing
the work.
4.3 Bidders will examine the various provisions of The Central Goods and Services Tax Act, 2017
(CGST)/ Integrated Goods and Services Tax Act, 2017 (IGST)/ Union Territory Goods and
Services Tax Act, 2017 (UTGST)/ respective state’s State Goods and Service Tax Act (SGST)
also, as notified by Central/State Government and as amended from time to time and
applicable taxes before bidding. Bidders will ensure that full benefit of Input Tax Credit (ITC)
likely to be availed by them is duly considered while quoting rates.
4.4 The successful bidder who is liable to be registered under CGST/IGST/UTGST/SGST
Act shall submit GSTIN along with other details required under
CGST/IGST/UTGST/SGST Act to IRCON immediately after the award of contract,
without which no payments shall be released to the contractor. The contractor shall be
responsible for deposition of applicable GST to the concerned authority.
28
4.5 In case the successful bidder is not liable to be registered under CGST/IGST/UTGST/SGST Act,
IRCON shall deduct the applicable GST from his/their bills under Reverse Charge Mechanism
(RCM) and deposit the same to the concerned authority.
4.6 At any time prior to the deadline for submission of bids, Employer may for any reason whether
at its own initiative or in response to any request by any prospective bidder amend the
bidding documents by issuing Corrigendum, which shall be part of the Tender documents. The
amendment shall be advised to all the prospective bidders.
4.7 Employer may at its discretion extend the deadline for submission of the bids at any time
before the time of submission of the bids.
4.8 The term “Correction slip” if any and where referred to in this tender document includes the
following terms also.
a) Addendum slip.
b) Correction slip.
c) Addendum slip and Corrigendum slip which are issued in consecutive serials.
C PREPARATION OF THE BIDS
5 LANGUAGE OF BID
5.1 The bid prepared by the bidder and all documents related to the bid shall be written in
English.
6 SIGNING OF ALL BID PAPERS AND COMPLETING BILL OF QUANTITIES
6.1 It shall be deemed that e-bid uploaded by the tenderer is digitally signed by his authorized
representative holding the Power of Attorney. All the pages of documents submitted physically
shall also be signed and stamped by the tenderer or his authorized representative holding the
Power of Attorney.(Enclose Power of Attorney).
a) In case of sole proprietorship, an Affidavit of Sole Proprietorship and if the tender is
signed by any other person, Power of Attorney by the Sole Proprietor in favor of Signatory.
b) In case of Partnership, if tender is not signed by all the partners, Power of Attorney in favor
of the signatory authorizing him to sign the documents. The person signing the documents
should also have a specific authority to refer disputes with the partnership firm to
arbitration.
c) In case of a Company, copy of the Board Resolution authorizing the signatory to sign on
behalf of the Company.
6.2 While filling up the rates in the Bill of Quantities, tenderer shall ensure that the rates are filled
up in figures only. System will automatically convert such filled up rates into words. In case of
item rate tenders, the system will automatically calculate the total price by multiplying the unit
rate with quantity.
6.3 The bid should be submitted online only in the prescribed format given in the e-procurement
portal of IRCON. No other mode of submission is accepted. The Technical and Financial Bid
shall be digitally signed by the authorized signatory of the bidder & submitted “online” only.
No hard copy of Technical and Financial bid is required to be submitted.
The tenderer may download financial bid form and upload the same duly filled through online
e-Procurement process.
29
6.4 The tenderer must fill and submit the prices as per instructions given in Bill of Quantities. The
system does not permit any addition or alteration in the tender documents. The requisite
details should be filled in by the tenderer wherever required in the documents. Incomplete
tender or tender not submitted as per instructions is liable to be rejected. If a tenderer does
not quote a price/rate for entire BOQ, the system will not accept the tender document.
7 DEVIATIONS
7.1 The tenderer should clearly read and understand all the terms and conditions, specifications,
drawings, etc. mentioned in the original tender documents. If the tenderer has any
observations, the same may be indicated in his forwarding letter along with the tender. All
implicit and explicit deviations, remarks and comments mentioned elsewhere in the
Tenderer's proposal shall be treated as Null and Void and considered withdrawn
unconditionally.
8 TRANSFER OF TENDER DOCUMENTS
Tender Documents will be received in electronic form only after payment of Tender document
fee and tender processing fee.
9 EARNEST MONEY
9.1 The tenderer must furnish the Earnest Money as indicated in ’Appendix to Tender’ for the
work as specified failing which the tender shall be summarily rejected. The Earnest Money
may be in any one of the following forms:
a) Pay Order/Demand Draft of any Scheduled Bank in India in favor of Ircon International
Limited payable at a place given in Appendix to Tender. It is mandatory for bidders to provide
their Banker’s details (Name of Bank & Branch) along with their own bank details (Account
No., Name of Account Holder, NEFT/RTGS details).
b) Fixed Deposit Receipt issued by any Scheduled Bank in India endorsed in favor of IRCON
INTERNATIONAL LIMITED.
c) EMD value up toRs 10.00 Lacs must be in the form of Pay Order/DD/FDR. In addition, EMD
may also be paid through NEFT or RTGS in IRCON’s Bank Account no.: 57500000076024,
IFSC code: HDFC0000003 at HDFC Bank Ltd., Surya Kiran Building, KG Marg, New Delhi in
favor of “IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED” payable at New Delhi and email ID
emgbg@ircon.org. In case of EMD amount being more than Rs 10.00 Lacs, it can also be
deposited in the form of irrevocable Bank Guarantee valid for minimum 180 days beyond the
last date of submission of bid, issued by a Scheduled Bank situated in the State Capitals of India
or cities listed in the Annexure-G of ‘Annexures/ Forms’, as per the format enclosed at
Annexure-D of “Annexures/ Forms’’ of Section-VIII. B.G. not valid for 180 days beyond the
last date of submission of bid, will not be considered a valid EMD instrument. The B.G. must be
made invokable at any branch in Delhi/NCR/Project HQ branch of the issuing bank.
d) The scheduled bank issuing the Bank Guarantee must be on the Structure Financial Messaging
System (SFMS) platform. A separate advice of the B.G. shall invariably be sent by the issuing
bank to the Employer’s above-mentioned Bank account through SFMS and only after this, the
B.G. shall become operative and acceptable to the Employer.
e) Earnest Money in the form of Pay Order/DD/FDR/BG shall be scanned & uploaded through
online e-Procurement process. Further EMD in original form along with a copy of ‘SFMS-
Messaging Report’ sent by the BG issuing Bank sealed in an envelope must be received by
Employer at the address specified in the “e-procurement Notice not later than the prescribed
date and time for e-bid submission.
f) Proof of transaction towards payment of Earnest Money through NEFT or RTGS shall be
scanned ether in PDF or JPEG format such that file size is not more than 5 MB and uploaded
30
during the online submission of the e-bid. These documents must be received in ‘ORIGINAL’ by
Employer at the address specified in the “e-procurement Notice” not later than the prescribed
date and time for e-bid submission
g) No interest shall be allowed on Earnest Money Deposit.
EMD in the form of BG shall be strictly as per format attached as Annexure-D of “Annexures/
Forms’’.
9.2 Forfeiture of Earnest Money:
9.2.1 The Earnest Money of the tenderer shall be forfeited if he withdraws his tender after opening
of the tender during the period of tender validity specified in the “Appendix to Tender” or
extended validity period as agreed to in writing by the tenderer.
9.2.2 In case it is found that, the tenderer/s has furnished misleading/wrong or fraudulent
information / documents, the Earnest Money of the tenderer/s will be forfeited.
9.2.3 The Earnest Money of the successful tenderer is liable to be forfeited if he fails to;
i) sign the Contract Agreement in accordance with the terms of the tender, or
ii) furnish Performance Guarantee in accordance with the terms of the tender, or
iii) Commence the work within the time period stipulated in the tender.
9.2.4 In case of forfeiture of EMD, the tenderer shall be debarred from bidding in case of re-
invitation of the tenders.
9.3 Return of Earnest Money:
9.3.1 The Earnest Money of the unsuccessful tenderers in the form of FDR/BG shall be discharged
and returned as promptly as possible & the Earnest Money in the form of DD/Pay Order/ shall
be directly credited to his bank account through Electronic Fund Transfer, under advice to the
bidder.
9.3.2 The Earnest Money Deposit of the successful tenderer shall be dealt as under:-
i) If the Earnest Money Deposit is in the form of Fixed Deposit Receipt (FDR)/Bank
Guarantee (BG), the FDR/BG shall be returned after deduction of an equivalent amount
from the first on account bill and further deduction of retention money from the bills
shall commence after adjusting this EMD amount.
ii) If the Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) is in the form of Demand Draft/Pay
Order/NEFT/RTGS, the same shall be retained towards retention money and further
deduction of retention money from the bills shall commence after adjusting this EMD
amount.
10 INTEGRITY PACT (IP)

10.1 Integrity Pact attached as Annexure I to ‘Instructions to Tenderers’ shall become a part of
tender.
10.2 Integrity Pact shall be signed by the authorized signatory of the tenderer and witnessed in the
format attached as Annexure-I at the time of signing Contract Agreement. Bidders shall abide
by the provisions of Integrity Pact by signing the Affidavit attached as Annexure-V of
Instructions to tenderers.
10.3 If the bidder is a partnership or a consortium, this pact will be signed by all partners or
consortium members at the time of signing Contract Agreement.
10.4 Only those vendors/ bidders who sign the Affidavit shall be qualified to participate in the
bidding process.
10.5 The Integrity Pact will be signed by IRCON at the time of execution of Agreement with the
successful tenderer.
10.6 Name, Designation & Address of Nodal Officer of IRCON: Shri (As per nomination)
(Designation as per nomination)
LRCON International Limited,
31
C-4, District Centre, Saket, New Delhi-17
10.7 Name & Address of IEM:

Shri Sudhir Kumar,
Ex Add. DG CPWD,
B-128, Triveni SFS
Sheik Sarai, New Delhi-110017
Ph.: +919871054454
e-mail: stomar2@gmail.com
11 PERIOD OF VALIDITY OF THE TENDER
11.1 The tender shall remain valid for the period indicated in “Appendix to Tender” after the date of
the opening of the tender. If the Tenderer gives validity period less than that fixed/prescribed
by Employer, the tender shall be liable to be rejected.
11.2 Notwithstanding the above clause, Employer may solicit the tenderers’ consent to extend the
validity period of the tender. The request and the response shall be made in writing.
D. SUBMISSION OF BIDS
12 DEADLINE FOR SUBMISSION OF TENDER
12.1 Earnest Money Deposit required in physical form as per sub-clause 9.1 of "Instructions to
Tenderers" must be received by Employer at the address specified in the “e-Procurement
Notice” not later than the prescribed date and time for e-bid submission.
12.2 Any tender related documents received after opening of the tender shall be rejected.
12.3 Tenderers must upload the good scanned copy of relevant documents required to be
submitted on e-Procurement website as mentioned in the tender documents. The document
which is not readable or legible will not be given cognizance. e-Bids which are not supported
by relevant documents shall not be considered during evaluation of bid.
13 MODIFICATION/ SUBSTITUTION/ WITHDRAWAL OF TENDER
13.1 The tenderer may modify, substitute or withdraw his e-bid after online submission prior to the
date and time of e-bid opening
13.2 For modification of e-bid, bidder has to first detach its old e-bid from the e-procurement portal
of IRCON and then upload / resubmit digitally signed modified e-bid in the e-procurement
portal of IRCON.
13.3 For withdrawal of e-bid, bidder can withdraw his e-bid by clicking on withdrawal icon at e-
procurement portal.
13.4 Before withdrawal of an e-bid, it may specifically be noted that after withdrawal of an e-bid for
any reason, tender processing fee will not be refunded. The bidder trying to re-submit the e-
bid will have to pay the processing fee and cost of tender document again.
14 SUBMISSION OF TENDERS
14.1 All documents/ forms/instructions/specifications etc listed in item 3.1 of this notice and those
attached as per the Annexure-II are deemed to be a part of the bid/tender and accepted by the
bidder.
14.2 In case of any discrepancy between uploaded documents and those submitted in physical
form, the physical form will prevail. In case of any ambiguity, IRCON will be free to seek
confirmation of information from the issuer of the document
14.3 Submission of an e-bid by a tenderer implies that he had read all the tender documents
including amendments if any, visited the site and has made himself aware of the scope and
specifications of the work to be done, local conditions and other factors having any bearing on
the execution of the work.
32
14.4 Care in Submission

14.4.1 Before submitting the tender, the tenderer/s will be deemed to have satisfied himself by his
actual inspection of the site, climatic condition records from state government and/or Indian
Meteorological Department and the locality of the works that all conditions liable to be
encountered during execution of the works are taken into account and that the rates quoted
by the tenderer/s in the tender schedule are adequate and all-inclusive for the completion of
works to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer in charge.
14.4.2 The tenderer/s should visit the sites and assess by himself the availability of resources such
as steel, cement, aggregates, water, electricity, fuel, land for disposal and skilled/ unskilled
manpower as these shall have important bearing on the cost.
14.4.3 The tenderer/s shall submit with his/their bid a detailed method statement as per Appendix
– VII and programme of construction. The tenderer/s shall also submit the details of
equipment in good working condition (Old/New/type/numbers etc) which he/they intend/s
to deploy for completion of the project.
14.4.4 The tenderer/s shall assess the geological/geo-technical conditions by his own field survey
and interpretation of all geological/geo-technical information available including information
which is provided in the tender documents for guidance.
14.5 Earnest Money required under Annexure-II of ITT shall be sealed in an envelope super-
scribed with the name of the work as indicated in “Appendix to tender”.
In addition to the above, the envelope shall also contain the name and address of the tenderer
to the enable tender to be returned unopened if so required.
E. e-BID OPENING AND EVALUATION
15 OPENING OF THE TENDER
15.1 Tenders will be opened at the address mentioned in “e-Procurement Notice” in presence of
tenderers or authorized representatives of tenderers who wish to attend the opening of
tenders. Physical presence during e-Bid opening is optional.
15.2 Tenderers or their authorized representatives who are present shall sign register in evidence
of their attendance.
15.3 Tenderer’s name, presence or absence of requisite Earnest Money, total cost of work quoted or
any other details as Employer may consider appropriate will be displayed with list to all
participating bidders online after bid opening.
16 CLARIFICATION OF THE TENDERS
16.1 To assist the examination, evaluation and comparison of the tenders, Employer may at his
discretion ask the tenderers for any clarifications as considered essential. All such
correspondence shall be in writing and no change in price or substance of the tender shall be
sought or permitted. The above clarification for submission of the details shall form part of the
tender and shall be binding on tenderer.
17 PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION OF BIDS
17.1 The Employer shall examine the bids to determine whether they are complete, whether
physical copy of all relevant documents have been received not later than the prescribed
date and time for e-bid submission and generally in order.
17.2 Prior to the detailed evaluation, Employer shall determine whether each bid is of acceptable
quality, is generally complete and is substantially responsive to the bidding documents. For
purposes of this determination, a substantially responsive bid is one that conforms to all the
terms, conditions and specifications of the bidding documents without material deviations,
objections, conditionality or reservation. A material deviation, objections, conditionality or
reservation is one;
33
(i) That affects in any substantial way the scope, quality or performance of the contract.
(ii) That limits in any substantial way, inconsistent with the bidding documents, the
Employers’ rights or the successful Bidder’s obligations under the contracts; or
(iii) Whose rectification would unfairly affect the competitive position of other Bidders
who are presenting substantially responsive bids.
17.3 If an e-bid is not substantially responsive, it shall be rejected by the Employer.
17.4 In case of tenders containing any conditions or deviations or reservations about contents of
tender document, Employer may ask for withdrawal of such
conditions/deviations/reservations. If the tenderer does not withdraw such
conditions/deviations/ reservations, the tender shall be treated as non- responsive.
Employer’s decision regarding responsiveness or non-responsiveness of a tender shall be final
and binding.
18 EVALUATION AND COMPARISON OF TENDERS
18.1 The tenders, which are determined as substantially responsive, shall be evaluated based on
criteria as given in Annexure–II of e-Procurement Notice. The tenderer/s must scan and
upload all necessary authentic data with necessary supporting certificates of the various items
of evaluation criteria failing which his/their tender is liable to be rejected.
18.2 The Employer/Engineer reserves the right to negotiate the offer submitted by the tenderer to
withdraw certain conditions or to bring down the rates to a reasonable level. The tenderer
must note that during negotiations of rates of items of BOQ can only be reduced and not
increased by the tenderer. In case the tenderer introduces any new condition or increases
rates of any item of BOQ, his negotiated offer is liable to be rejected and the original offer shall
remain valid and binding on him.
19 CANVASSING
19.1 No tenderer is permitted to canvass to Employer on any matter relating to this tender. Any
tenderer found doing so may be disqualified and his bid may be rejected.
20 RIGHT TO ACCEPT ANY TENDER OR REJECT ALL TENDERS
Employer/Engineer reserves the right to accept, split, divide, negotiate, cancel or reject any
tender or to annul and reject all tenders at any time prior to the award of the contract without
incurring any liability to the affected tenderers or any obligation to inform affected tenderer,
the grounds of such action.
If the tenderer, as individual or as a partner of partnership firm, expires after the submission
of his tender but before award of work, the Employer/Engineer shall deem such tender as
invalid.
21 AWARD OF CONTRACT
21.1 Employer/Engineer shall notify the successful tenderer in writing by a Registered
Letter/Courier/ Speed Post or per bearer or delivering the same by e-mail duly attached with
scanned copy of proof of dispatch (POD) that his tender has been accepted.
21.2 Letter of Acceptance after it is signed by the Contractor in token of his acceptance shall
constitute a legal and binding contract between Employer/Engineer and the contractor till
such time the contract agreement is signed.
34
22 CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE FEEDBACK AND EVALUATION SYSTEM

The employer will have a “Contractor Performance Feedback and Evaluation System” for
periodic evaluation of Contractor performance during execution of Contract. In case
Contractor’s overall performance is found unsatisfactory (<85% of works Contracts) based on
the parameters as listed in Annexure – III of Instructions to Tendrers, the Contractor is liable
to be declared a “Non-Performer” and will become ineligible for participation in future tenders
of this Organization for a period of 2 (two) years from the date of such decision. This decision
is to be conveyed to the Contractor in writing. The non–performer status may be revoked
during currency of the contract on improvement of performance parameters during the next
annual review.
This is without prejudice to any other recourse available to the Employer under the Condition
of Contract.
23 INELIGIBILITY TO PARTICIPATE IN RE-TENDERS/ FUTURE CASES
Notwithstanding anything contained in the Qualification Clauses of ITT, if a bidder withdraws
from an offer after having been declared a preferred bidder or after notification of Award or
does not sign the Contract Agreement pursuant to the Letter of Acceptance or does not submit
an acceptable performance security which results in tender being annulled then such bidder
shall be treated as ineligible for participation in re-tendering of this particular work and also
for any other work for a period of 6 months. A repeat incident of similar type within a period
of 2 (two) years will render the bidder ineligible for participation in all future tenders for a
further period of 2 (two) years.
24 DECLARATION OF NON – PERFORMANCE OR BAN STATUS
Tenderers are not eligible to participate in the tender process under the following conditions:
(a) They have been declared a non-performer by Central/ State Government Department in
India including authority controlled by them during the last two years prior to the date of
bid submission.
(b) They are currently debarred for tendering, blacklisted, suspended in Central/ State
Government Department in India including authority controlled by them.
(c) Any previous contract awarded to them has been terminated by IRCON on account of
contractor’s default during the last two years prior to the date of bid submission.
Accordingly, tenderers are required to sign an Affidavit as per the enclosed pro-forma in
Annexure-V, declaring their status of non-performance or debarment/ termination.
25 DETAILS OF DISPUTED STATUS OF BAN/NON-PERFORMANCE
Tenderers will clearly state the status of dispute in the cases of ban/ non-performance
pending in courts against them as on the date of opening of tender. Merely, pending appeal
with the Departments concerned and Courts will not merit change of status. Grant of stay
order by a Competent Court will be taken into account while considering the status of ban/
non-performance.
25.1 Tenderer to be fully responsible for the consequences of misrepresentation
(a) Any suppression of information and misrepresentation will render the tenderer ineligible
for the tender along with the forfeiture of Earnest Money. The tenderer will also be liable
for disqualification for future tenders of IRCON for a period of 2 years.
35
(b) If any suppression of information and misrepresentation is found after the award of
Contract, the Contract may be terminated with forfeiture of EMD, PG and SD (if any). The
Contractor will also be disqualified for future tenders of IRCON for a period of 2 years.
26.0 No claim by the Contractor for additional payment or any extension of time shall be allowed on
the ground of any misunderstanding or misapprehension in respect of the matters on the
grounds that incorrect or insufficient information was given to the Contractor by any person
whether or not in the employment of the Employer or that the Contractor failed to obtain
correct and sufficient information. The Contractor shall not be relieved from any risk or
obligation imposed on or undertaken by him under the Contract on any such ground or on the
ground that he did not or could not foresee any matter which may affect or have affected the
execution of the Works, or compliance with his other obligations under the Contract.
26.1 IRCON will not be bound by any Power of Attorney granted by the tenderer/s or by changes in
the composition of the firm made subsequent to the execution of contract. It may, however,
recognize such Power of Attorney and changes after obtaining proper legal advice, the cost of
which will be chargeable to the Contractor.
27.0 RIGHT OF IRCON TO DEAL WITH TENDERS
27.1 IRCON reserves the right not to invite tenders for any work or works, to invite open or limited
tenders and when tenders are called, to accept a tender in whole or in part or reject any tender
or all tenders without assigning reasons for any such action.
28.0 IDENTITY OF TENDERER/S
28.1 Tenderer/s should specifically and fully disclose in their respective tenders, their respective
constitutions and submit along with each tender attested Photostat copies of documents like
partnership deed, Articles and Memorandum of Association, Certificate of incorporation etc. If
a tenderer/s is a firm i.e. partnership business, it should be stated whether the same is
registered under the Indian Partnership Act 1932, and the name and address of all the
partners of the firm should be fully disclosed. IRCON shall always have the liberty to demand
production of the original of the said documents and also to make such further and other
requisitions regarding the constitution of the tenderer/s as may be considered necessary.
28.2 Foreign Bidders/Partners of a JV shall obtain requisite attestation to their Notarization from
their respective Embassies in India.
29.0 ELIGIBILITY CRITERIA

29.1 FOR TECHNICAL BID
Eligibility will be based upon the bidder meeting with all the criteria regarding technical
capability and competence and financial capability including having adequate organizational
resources as per Annexure-II of e-Procurement Notice.
29.2 FOR OPENING FINANCIAL BID
The bidders who qualify in Technical bid shall only be considered for opening of finalcianl bid.
30.0 QUANTITIES
Thequantities shown in the various schedules are approximate and subject to variation
according to needs. IRCON shall not be responsible for the accuracy or otherwise of quantities
and IRCON shall not guarantee work under each item of the schedules.
31.0 NEGOTIATIONS
31.1 The Employer / Engineer reserves the right to negotiate the offer submitted by the tenderer/s
to withdraw certain conditions or to bring down the rates to a reasonable level. The
tenderer/s called for negotiations shall be required to furnish the following form of
36
declaration before commencement of negotiation:

“I ______________________________________________ do declare that in the event of failure of
contemplated negotiations relating to Tender No. ___________________________________________
dated _____________ my original tender shall remain open for acceptance on its original
terms and conditions.”
31.2 The tenderer/s must note that during negotiations, percentage (%) given for schedule of BOQ
can only be reduced and not increased by the tenderer/s which means the rates can only be
reduced. In case the tenderer/s introduces any new condition or increases rates of any
schedule of BOQ, his/their negotiated offer is liable to be rejected and the original offer shall
remain valid and binding on him/them.
32.0 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENT
32.1 The tenderer/s whose tender is accepted shall be required to appear at the office of the IRCON
International Ltd, 2nd Floor, District Centre, Saket, New Delhi in person or if a firm or
corporation, the duly authorized representative shall so appear, to sign the contract
documents. Failure to do so, shall constitute a breach of contract and in that case the full value
of the earnest money accompanying the tender shall stand forfeited without prejudice to any
other rights or remedies.
32.2 In the event of any tenderer/s whose tender is accepted shall refuse to execute the contract
agreement, IRCON may determine that such tenderer/s has/have abandoned the contract and
there upon his/their tender and the acceptance thereof shall be treated as cancelled and
IRCON shall be entitled to forfeit the full amount of earnest money and to recover the
liquidated damages for such default as decided by IRCON.
33.0 FORM OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
33.1 Every contract shall be complete in respect of the documents it shall constitute. Necessary
copies of the contract documents shall be signed by the competent authority of IRCON and
Contractor and one copy shall be given to the Contractor.
33.2 These instructions to the tenders shall be deemed to form a part of the tender documents.
34.0 COMPLETION PERIOD
34.1 The entire work is required to be completed in all respects within the time mentioned in
‘Appendix to Tender’ from the date of issue of the acceptance letter/telegram.
35.0 QUOTING OF RATES:
The bidders have to quote a single rate for all the Schedules in percentage Above/Below/At
Par as mentioned in Summary of Bill of Quantities.
a) Bidders may propose technically equivalent material in line with technical
specifications in place of proprietary Items mentioned in the relevant items of BOQ and
quote their rate for that respective items.
b) Equivalency of proposed brand will be decided by Engineer-in-charge. In case the
proposed brand is not found acceptable, the brand as mentioned in the description of
item will prevail and the agency will have to execute the item as per BOQ at the same
rates.
c) Bidders should note that they have to quote the rates (in perentage) in summary of Bill
of Quantities Vol.-III only. If bidder quote the rates other than Bill of Quantities Vol.-III,
his bid shall be summarily rejected.
37
36.0 PROPOSED LIST OF PLANT AND MACHINERY:

36.1 A list of Minimum Plant & Machinery required for completion of the work within the time
frame is given at Appendix IV B of ITT and Minimum Machinery Required Face wise is given At
“Appendix IV C” of ITT. Please note that the list given at this Appendix is only for guidance
however bidders are free to evaluate and work out the requirement at their own and submit
the same as per proforma given at Appendix IV A of ITT. It will entirely be the responsibility
and cost of the Contractor to mobilize sufficient plant and machinery in very good working
condition and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All plants and machinery shall be approved
by the engineer before start of work. This will not absolve the contractor of the responsibility
for replacing machineries and plants from site. Rejected machineries and plants shall be
replaced immediately with accepted machineries and plants.
37.0 PROPOSED LIST OF MANPOWER:
37.1 A list of Minimum Skilled Manpower required for completion of the work within the time
frame is given at “Appendix-III” of ITT and Facewise requirement of the Minimum Skilled
Manpower Required is given at “Annexure IV” of ITT. However, bidders are free to evaluate
and work out the requirement at their own and submit the same as per proforma given at
Appendix-III of ITT.
38
Annexure-I
INTEGRITY PACT
General
This Agreement (hereinafter called the Integrity Pact) is made on -------------- day of the month
of ------ 201---- between Ircon International Limited (hereinafter called “IRCON”), a
government company under the Ministry of Railways, and M/s ----------------------------
(hereinafter called the “BIDDER”)…………….. Description of Bidder.
The expressions “IRCON” and “BIDDER” shall mean and include their respective legal
representatives, successors in interest, and assigns and shall collectively be referred to as “the
Parties” and individually as “the party”.
WHEREAS IRCON intends to award, under laid down organizational procedures, contract(s)
for …………………………………. (Name of the tender/work)…………..(hereinafter referred to as the
‘Contract’).
WHEREAS IRCON necessarily requires full compliance with all relevant laws of the land, rules
and regulations, economic use of resources, and fairness/transparency in relations with its
Bidder(s) and/or Contractor(s).
WHEREAS in order to achieve these goals, IRCON has appointed Independent External
Monitors (IEMs), as detailed in para 7 of this Pact, to monitor the entire tender process till the
final completion of the contract for compliance with the Integrity Pact by all the parties
concerned for all works covered in the Contract.
NOW THEREFORE,
To Avoid all forms of corruption by following a system that is fair, transparent, and free from
any influence/prejudiced dealings prior to, during, and subsequent to the currency of the
contract to be entered into, ;
To Enable IRCON to obtain the desired works/stores/equipment at a competitive price in
conformity with defined specifications by avoiding high cost and distortionary impact of
corruption on public procurement, and
To Enable BIDDERs to abstain from bribing or indulging in any corrupt practice in order to
secure the contract by providing assurance to them that IRCON will commit to prevent
corruption, i8n any form, by its officials by following transparent procedures.
THE HERETO HEREBY AGREE TO ENTER INTO THIS INTEGRITY PACT AND AGREE AS
FOLLOWS:
1. Scope
THE Integrity Pact, in respect to the said contract, would be operative from the stage of
invitation of bids till the final completion of the contract. Any violation of the same
would entail disqualification of the BIDDERs and exclusion from future business
dealings as specified in this Integrity pact.
2. Commitments of IRCON
2.1. No official of IRCON, connected directly or indirectly with the contract, will demand,
take a promise for or accept, directly or through intermediaries, any bribe, any benefit,
or any other advantage from the BIDDER, either for themselves or for any person,
organization, or third party related to the contract in exchange for an advantage in the
bidding process, bid evaluation, contracting, or implementation process related to the
contract.
39
2.2. IRCON will, during the entire tender process stage, treat all BIDDERs with equity and
reason. It will provide to all BIDDERs the same information and will not provide any
such information to any particular BIDDER which could afford an advantage to that
particular BIDDER in comparison to other BIDDERs.
2.3. IRCON shall obtain bids from only those party /parties who have been short-listed or
pre-qualified or through a process of open advertisement/ web publishing or any
combination thereof.
2.4. In case in any misconduct on the part of any official(s) of IRCON is reported by the
BIDDER to the Chairman & Managing Director of IRCON with full and verifiable facts
and the same is prima facie found to be correct by the Chairman & Managing Director of
IRCON, necessary disciplinary proceedings, or any other action as deemed fit, may be
initiated by IRCON and such a person shall be removed from further dealings related to
the subject contract process, in such situations of misconduct, while an enquiry may
stand initiated or may be going on, the progress of bidding execution, etc. under the
contract shall not be stalled.
3. Commitments of BIDDERs
3.1 The BIDDER commits itself to take all measures necessary to prevent corrupt practices,
unfair means, and illegal activities during any stage of bid including pre-contract,
contract, or post-contract stage. In particular the BIDDER undertakes to abide by the
measures given in the following paragraphs.
3.2 The BIDDER will not offer, directly or through intermediaries, any bribe, benefit, or any
other advantage like commission, fees brokerage or inducement to any official of
IRCON, connected directly or indirectly with the bidding process, or to any person,
organization or third party related to the contract in exchange for any advantage in the
bidding, evaluation, contracting, and implementation of the contract.
3.3 The BIDDER has not given, offered, or promised to give, directly or indirectly, any bribe
or any benefit or other advantage like commission, fees, brokerage, or inducement to
any official of IRCON or their family members or otherwise in procuring the Contract or
forbearing to do or having done any act in relation to the obtaining or execution of the
contract.
3.4 The BIDDER will disclose the name and address of its agents and representatives, if any,
in India and/or abroad.
3.5 The BIDDER disclose the payments to be made by them to agents/ brokers or any other
intermediary, in connection with this bid/contract.
3.6 The BIDDER further confirms and declares to IRCON that the BIDDER has not engaged
any individual or firm or company, whether Indian or foreign, to intercede, facilitate, or
in any way to recommend to IRCON or any of its functionaries, whether officially or
unofficially, award of the contract to the BIDDER, nor has any amount been paid,
promised, or intended to be paid to any such individual, firm or company in respect of
any such intercession, facilitation, or recommendation.
3.7 The BIDDER will not collude with other parties interested in the contract to impair the
competition, transparency, fairness, and progress of the bidding process, bid evaluation,
contracting, and implementation of the contract.
3.8 The BIDDER will not accept any advantage in exchange for any corrupt practice, unfair
means, and illegal activities.
3.9 The BIDDER will not use for purpose of competition or personal gain, or pass on to
other, any information provided by IRCON as part of the business relationship,
regarding plans, technical proposals, and business details, including information
contained in any electronic data carrier. The BIDDER also undertakes to exercise due
40
and adequate care lest any such information is divulged.

3.10 The BIDDER commits to refrain from making any complaint, directly or through any
other manner, without supporting it with full and variable facts. If the BIDDER submits
frivolous or false complaints, it will be liable to attract sanctions as mentioned in para 5
of this Pact.
3.11 The BIDDER will not instigate or cause to instigate any third person to commit any of
the actions mentioned above.
3.12 If the BIDDER or any employees of the BIDDER or any person acting on behalf of the
BIDDER, either directly or indirectly, is a relative of any of the officers of IRCON, or
alternatively, if any relative of an officer of IRCON has financial interest/ stake in the
BIDDER’s firm, the same will be disclosed by the BIDDER at the time of filing of the
tender.
The term ‘relative’ for this purpose would be as defined in Section 6 of the Companies
Act, 1956 or any amendment thereto (Annexure-A).
3.13 The BIDDER will not lend to or borrow any money from or enter into any monetary
dealings or transactions, directly or indirectly, with any employee of the IRCON.
3.14 All disclosures required under this Pact shall be included as
Annexure/Appendices there to as in integral part of this Pact.
3.15 If the BIDDER/ Contractor is a partnership or a consortium, this Pact will be signed by
all partners or consortium members.
4. Previous Transgression
4.1 The BIDDER declared that no previous transgression has occurred in the last three
years immediately before signing of this Integrity Pact, with any other company in any
country in respect of any corrupt practices envisaged hereunder or with any Public
Sector Enterprise in India or any other Government in India that could justify BIDDER’s
exclusion from the tender process.
4.2 The BIDDER agrees that if it makes incorrect statement on this subject, BIDDER can be
disqualified from the tender process or the contract and, if already awarded, can be
liable to attract sanctions under this Pact.
5. Sanctions for Violations
5.1 Any breach of the provisions of this Pact by the BIDDER or anyone employed by it or
acting on its behalf(whether with or without the knowledge of the BIDDER) shall entitle
IRCON to take all or any one of the following actions, wherever required: -
5.1.1 To disqualify the BIDDER in pre-award stage without assigning any reason and
without any compensation to the BIDDER. However, the proceedings with other
BIDDER(s) would continue.
5.1.2 To take such actions/ steps as per provisions made in the tender documents/
contract, if contract already signed, without giving any compensation to the
BIDDER.
5.1.3 To debar the BIDDER from participating in future bidding processes as per
IRCON’s policy on “Suspension/Banning of Business Dealings” with Agencies”
(Annexure-B)
5.1.4 To forfeit, either fully or partially, the Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) (in pre-
contract stage) and /or Security Deposit/ Performance Bond (after the contract
is signed), without assigning any reason therefore.
5.2 IRCON will also be entitled to take all or any of the actions mentioned under this para 5
in the event commission by the BIDDER, or anyone employed by it or acting on its
behalf of (whether with or without the knowledge of the BIDDER), of an offense as
41
defined in Chapter IX of the Indian Panel Code, 1860, or Prevention of Corruption Act,
1988, or any other status enacted for prevention of corruption.
5.3 The decision of IRCON to the effect that a breach of any provision of this Pact has been
committed by the BIDDER shall be final and conclusive on the BIDDER.
5.4 The BIDDER shall be liable to pay compensation for any loss or damage to IRCON in the
event of any action under this Para 5 and IRCON shall be entitled to deduct the amount
so payable from the money(s) due to the BIDDER.
6. Independent External Monitors (IEMs)
6.1 IRCON has appointed Independent External Monitor hereinafter referred to as IEM) for
this Pact in consultation with the Central Vigilance Commission Names and Addresses
of the IEM are given below: -
6.1.1 Shri (As Per nomination)
(Address as per nomination)
6.1.2 Shri (As Per nomination)
Name & Address of IEM:

Shri Sudhir Kumar,
Ex Add. DG CPWD,
B-128, Triveni SFS
Sheik Sarai, New Delhi-110017
Ph.: +919871054454
e-mail: stomar2@gmail.com
6.2 The task of IEMs shall be to review independently and objectively whether, and to what
extent, the Parties comply with the obligations under this Pact.
6.3 The IEMs shall not be subject to instructions by the representatives of the Parties and
perform their functions neutrally and independently.
6.4 Both the parties accept that the IEMs would have a right to access, without restriction,
to all Project documentation of IRCON and the BIDDER upon request and
demonstration of a valid interest by the IEMs. The same is also applicable to sub-
contractors of the BIDDER. the IEMs shall be under contractual obligation to treat the
information and documents of all the parties with confidentially.
6.5 In case of non-compliance of the provisions of the Integrity Pact, any complaint/non-
compliance can be sent by an aggrieved party, giving specific details of non-compliance
with supporting documents, to the designated Nodal Officer of IRCON appointed by the
CMD. The Nodal Officer, after verification of the compliant, shall refer the
compliant/non-compliance se received by him to the aforesaid IEM(s) alternatively, as
soon as the IEM notices a violation of this Pact, or has been reason to believe that a
violation has occurred, or had received a complaint, he will so inform the CMD of IRCON
in the first instance.
6.6 The IEMs would then examine all complaints, other than anonymous/pseudonymous
complaints, received by them and give their written report to the CMD of IRCON within
6 weeks from the date of reference or intimation to him by IRCON/BIDDER and, should
the occasion arise, submit proposals for correcting problematic situations.
7. Law and Place of Jurisdiction
This Pact shall be applicable to all tenders invited and finalized in India. This Agreement
is subject to Indian Law and the place and jurisdiction for resolving any issue shall be
New Delhi.
8. Other Legal Actions
42
The actions stipulated in this Integrity Pact are without prejudice to any other legal
action that may follow in accordance with the provisions of the external law in force
relating to any civil or criminal proceedings.
9. Validity
9.1 The validity of this Integrity Pact shall be from the date of its signing and extend up to 5
years or the compete execution of the contract to the \satisfaction of the both IRCON
and the BIDDER including Defects Liability/ Warranty period, whichever is later. In
case BIDDER(s) is (are) unsuccessful, this Integrity Pact shall cease to be valid in the
expiry of two months from the date of award of the contract.
9.2 Should any provision of this Pact turn out to be invalid, the remaining parts of this Pact
shall remain unaffected which shall be honoured and implemented by the Parties in its
intend and spirit.
10. The parties hereby sign this Integrity pact at …….. on ………..
(Full Name & Registered Officer Address)

For and on behalf of For and on behalf of
Ircon International Limited BIDDER (Full name of Bidder & Regd.
Address)
Name of the Authorized Officer. Name of the Authorized Officer

Designation Designation
(SEAL) (SEAL)
Witness Witness
1._____________________ 1________________________
2.______________________ 2________________________
43
Annexure-A
LIST OF RELATIVES
Section 2(77) of the Companies Act, 2013

[Effective from 1st April, 2014]
“Relative”, with reference to any person, means anyone who is related to another, if –
(i) They are members of a Hindu Undivided Family;

(ii) They are husband and wife; or
(iii) One person is related to the other in such manner as may be prescribed;
List of Relative in terms of Section 2(77) [as prescribed under Rule 4 of Companies
(Specification of Definitions Details) Rules, 2014]
A person shall be deemed to be the relative of another, if he or she is related to another in the
following manner, namely: -
1. Father:
Provided that the term “Father” includes step-father.
2. Mother:
Provided that the term “Mother” includes the step-mother.
3. Son:
Provided that the term “Son” includes the step-son.
4. Son’s wife.
5. Daughter.
6. Daughter’s husband.
7. Brother:
Provided that the term “Brother” includes the step-brother;
8. Sister:
Provided that the term “Sister” includes the step-sister.
44
Annexure-B
Procedure for Suspension/Banning of Business Dealings with agencies in IRCON
(Issue No.:01 Date: 10.06.2013)

(A Govt. of India Undertaking)
C-4, DISTRICT CENTRE, SAKET,
NEW DELHI-110017
PHONE:+91-11-29565666; FAX:+91-11-26522000,26854000
E-mail: info@ircon.org ; Web: www.ircon.org
CIN U45203DL1976GOI008171
45
PROCEDURE FOR SUSPENSION/BANNING OF BUSINESS DEALINGS
CONTENTS
SN Description Page
1. Introduction 45
2. Scope 45
3. Definitions 45
4. Grounds on which Suspension/Banning of Business Dealings can 45
be initiated
5. Initiation of Suspension/Banning 46
6. Appeal against the Decision of the Competent Authority 48
46
Procedure for Suspension/Banning of Business Dealings with agencies in IRCON

1. Introduction
1.1 IRCON is a specialized construction organization covering the entire spectrum of
construction activities and service in the infrastructure sector, especially Railways. The
primary objective of IRCON is timely and efficient execution of projects assigned to it and at
the same time ensuring the quality thereof. As a commercial organization IRCON is
expected to adopt ethics of highest standards and a very high degree of integrity,
commitment and sincerity towards the work undertaken. Accordingly, it is not in the
interest of IRCON to deal with such Agencies who commit deception, fraud or other
misconduct in the execution of contracts awarded/orders issued to them. Appropriate
action needs to be taken against them in accordance with the procedure prescribed herein.
1.2 This procedure shall be applicable for effecting suspension/banning of business dealings
with Agencies working for IRCON. It is incumbent upon IRCON to ensure compliance with
the laws and principles of natural justice for banning the business dealings with any
Agency. After issue of the Ban order for dealings in IRCON the Management may consider
whether or not to refer the matter to the Indian Railways to consider imposition of similar
ban by Indian Railways.
1.3 Since banning of business dealings involves severe consequences for the Agency concerned,
it is essential that an adequate opportunity is provided to the Agency to present its case and
any explanation, if tendered, is properly considered. If necessary, a personal hearing may
be given to the Agency, before passing an order of banning based on the facts and
circumstances of the case on record.
2.0 Scope
2.1 The procedure for (i) Suspension and (ii) Banning of Business Dealings with Agencies, is
laid down in these guidelines.
2.2 It is clarified that these guidelines do not cover the process for declaring an Agency as “Non
Performer” for which instructions have been issued separately.
2.3 The suspension / banning shall be with prospective effect, i.e., it will affect future business
dealings only.
2.4 These guidelines shall apply to all the Projects/Regional Offices of IRCON.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 In these Guidelines, unless the context otherwise requires:
i) 'Agency' means a 'Bidder/Contractor/Supplier/Consultant'
ii) 'Competent Authority' and 'Appellate Authority' shall mean the following:
a) 'Competent Authority' shall be the concerned Director of IRCON and
b) 'Appellate Authority' shall be CMD, IRCON
Note: 'Competent Authority' and 'Appellate Authority' shall not be the same
person.
iii) 'Investigating Agency' shall include Central Vigilance Commission (CVC), the
Vigilance Departments of IRCON/Ministry of Railways, Central Bureau of
Investigation, or any Central/State Government Department having powers to
investigate into the propriety of working of the Agency for IRCON.
iv) Other Terms used in this Circular shall have the same meaning as assigned to them in
Clause 1102 of Chapter-XI of Vigilance Manual of Indian Railways.
4.0 Grounds on which Suspension/Banning of Business Dealings can be initiated:
4.1 For security considerations, including suspected disloyalty of the Agency to the State or
IRCON, as the case warrants;
4.2 If any Director/Owner/Proprietor or partner of the Agency, is convicted by a Court of Law
for an offence involving moral turpitude in relation to its business dealings with IRCON, any
Government Department/ Ministry or any other Public Sector Enterprise.
4.3 If there is strong justification for believing that any Director, Proprietor, Partner, owner of
47
the Agency has been guilty of malpractices, such as bribery, corruption, fraud, substitution
of tenders, interpolations, etc.
4.4 If the Agency engages a public servant dismissed/removed from service on account of
corruption or employs a person convicted for an offence involving corruption, moral
turpitude or abetment of such offence; in a position where he could corrupt government
servants.
4.5 If the Agency has resorted to corrupt, fraudulent malpractices including misrepresentation
of facts;
4.6 If the Agency uses intimidation/threats or brings outside pressure on the Company
(IRCON) or/on its officials in acceptance of Tender or performance of the job under the
contract;
4.7 Based on the findings of the investigation report of the Investigating Department against
the Agency that it has resorted to mala-fide/ unlawful acts or improper conduct on its part
in matters relating to IRCON, any Government Ministry/Department or any other PSU;
4.8 If the Agency has submitted a false or wrong Affidavit along with its bid with regard to the
credentials of the firm or misrepresented/ manipulated the facts in regard to or in
connection with any bid submitted to IRCON.
4.9 Established litigant nature of the Agency to derive undue or benefit.
4.10 If the Agency misuses the premises or facilities of the IRCON, forcefully occupies or
damages the IRCON’s properties including land, water, resources, forests / trees or tampers
with documents / records etc.
4.11 If the business dealings with the agency have been banned by the Ministry of Railways.
(Note: The above grounds are illustrative only and not exhaustive. The Competent
Authority may decide to suspend/ban business dealings for any other reasonable cause and
sufficient reason)
5.0 Initiation of Suspension/Banning:
5.1 Suspension of Business dealing
5.1.1 Action for suspension may be initiated by the concerned ED/IRCON on receipt of a report
from the Project head/Functional head/ Investigating Department and if it is considered
that allegations are of a serious nature, which may warrant banning of business dealings
with the Agency. The report should also bring out whether pending banning of business
proceedings it would be in the interest of IRCON to enter into fresh business dealings with
the Agency or order immediate suspension of further business dealings with the Agency.
The ED shall submit his report to the Competent Authority.
5.1.2 As far as possible, the existing contract(s) with the Agency may be continued unless the
Competent Authority, having regard to the circumstances of the case decides otherwise in
the interest of IRCON.
5.1.3 If the Competent Authority, after consideration of the matter, including the
recommendations of the Investigating Department/report of the ED, decides that it would
not be in the interest of IRCON to enter into business dealings with the Agency pending
investigations, he may order suspension of business dealings with the Agency.
5.1.4 The Investigating Department may be advised to complete their investigations and submit a
final report within a period of three months.
5.1.5 The order of suspension of business dealings would not remain effective for a period
beyond three months from the date of the issue of the suspension order unless show cause
notice for banning of business is issued to the Agency within this period. However, if the
final investigation report is not received within this period, the Competent Authority may
extend the period of suspension by another three months, during which period the show
cause notice must be issued. Once the show cause notice is issued the suspension order
will continue till decision by Competent Authority.
5.1.6 In case of suspension the Agency must be informed immediately of the suspension order
with brief charges under investigation. It is not necessary to enter into correspondence
with or offer explanations to the Agency at this stage.
48
5.1.7 The order of suspension can be issued without giving any show cause notice or personal
hearing to the Agency. However, the suspension cannot be continued for an indefinite
period, unless a show-cause notice for banning of business is issued within 6 (six) months,
the period of suspension will either be extended or the suspension shall be revoked.
5.2 Banning of Business Dealings
5.2.1 A decision to ban business dealings with any Agency shall normally apply throughout
IRCON. However, the Competent Authority can impose such a ban project/region wise only
if in the particular case banning of business dealings in respective project/region will serve
the purpose and achieve its objective and banning throughout the Company is not required
in view of the local conditions and impact of the misconduct / default. Any ban imposed by
Corporate Office shall be applicable across all Units of IRCON.
5.2.2 An Investigating committee consisting of ED concerned, ED/Finance and an ED nominated
by Competent Authority shall look into the charge(s) against the agency. The functions of
the committee shall, inter-alia include:
i. To study the report of the project head/Functional head / Investigation agency and
decide if a prima-facie case for banning exists, if not, send back the case to the
Competent Authority.
ii. To recommend for issue of show-cause notice to the Agency by the competent
authority as per clause 5.2.3.
iii. To examine the reply to show-cause notice and call the Agency for personal hearing,
if required.
iv. To submit final recommendations to the Competent Authority for banning or
otherwise.
5.2.3 On receipt of the report of the Investigating Committee if the Competent Authority is prima-
facie of the view that action for banning of business dealings with the Agency is called for, a
show-cause notice may be issued to the Agency after approval by the Competent Authority.
5.2.4 The show cause notice, duly approved by the Competent Authority, may be issued by Regd.
A.D./Speed Post by concerned ED in charge of the project along with a statement containing
the imputation of misconduct or malpractice and the Agency should be asked to submit its
written explanation or statement in defense within 30 days of the date of notice. If no reply
is received, a decision may be taken ex-party by the Investigating Committee based on facts
and evidence on record.
5.2.5 If the Agency requests for inspection of any relevant document mentioned in the show
cause notice in possession of IRCON, the facility for inspection of such documents may be
provided.
5.2.6 After considering the reply of the Agency and other circumstances and the
recommendation of the investigating committee, a final decision shall be taken by the
Competent Authority, if considered necessary after giving an opportunity for personal
hearing to the Agency. The Competent Authority may then consider and pass an
appropriate speaking order:
a) Exonerating the Agency, if the charges are not established;
b) Banning the business dealings with the Agency along with the period for which the
ban would be operative, if the charges are proved.
c) Whether or not to refer the matter to the Indian Railways to consider imposition of
similar ban by Indian Railways.
5.2.7 The order for banning of business dealings by all units of IRCON shall be applicable to the
Agency including its allied firms as defined in Para 1102 of IR Vigilance Manual.
5.2.8 Decision of Competent Authority will be intimated to the concerned ED, who will convey
the same to the delinquent Agency and its allied firms and circulate it to the corporate office
and all Project head / Functional head for applying these orders uniformly in IRCON. The
reasons may not be disclosed in such communications. However, the fact that the
representation has been considered should invariably be mentioned in the communication.
5.2.9 The validity of the banning order shall be for a specified time period, on expiry of which, the
49
banning order shall cease to operate, unless extended further by competent authority.
6.0 Appeal against the Decision of the Competent Authority:

6.1 The Agency may file an appeal against the order of the Competent Authority for suspension
continuing beyond six months or order of banning business dealings with the Agency. The
appeal shall lie with the Appellate Authority. Such an appeal shall be preferred within one
month from the date of receipt of the order banning of business dealings or order of
continuance of suspension order beyond six months.
6.2 Appellate Authority shall consider the appeal and pass an appropriate order which shall be
communicated to the Agency as well as the Competent Authority.
If the decision of the Competent Authority is modified by the Appellate Authority the same
will be intimated by concerned ED to the delinquent agency and its allied firm and
circulates it with advice to all Project Heads and Corporate Office of IRCON.
50
Annexure II
Documents to be submitted by tenderer/s
CHECK LIST for list of documents duly page numbered, signed, stamped by authorized signatory of the
Bidder to be scanned, uploaded (in PDF/ JPG format such that file size is not more than 5 MB) with the
e-tender and submitted online not later than the prescribed date and time for e-bid submission:
i. Forwarding Letter of bidder
ii. Form of Bid
iii. Attested copies of certificates issued by clients for completed works of similar nature.
iv. Attested copies of certificates issued by clients indicating progress of work.
v. Annual Turnover Record of last three years Appendix – II
vi. List of Key Personnel/Engineers proposed to be deployed on this project Appendix–III
vii. List of Plant & Machinery Appendix – IV A
viii. Attested copies of the constitution of its firm such as Partnership Deed, Memorandum
and Articles of Association, etc.
ix. GSTIN
x. Detail of ISO certification for firm.
xi. Key Programme of Execution of Work in Line with the KEY DATES for the Contract
Appendix – X
xii. Method Statement Appendix – VII
xiii. Scanned copy of Earnest Money Deposit
xiv. Proof of transaction towards payment of Earnest Money through NEFT or RTGS and
copy of Earnest Money Deposit of requisite amount in the prescribed form.
xv. Affidavit – Annexure V
xvi. Bidders Information Appendix – I
xvii. Undertaking by Bidder Appendix – V
xviii. Self evaluation Sheet Appendix-VI
xix. Certificate of Familiarization Appendix – VIII
xx. Quality assurance- Appendix – IX
xxi. Power of attorney duly attested by Notary Public in favour of the person signing the e-
bidding documents digitally as well as manually.
xxii. Bankers details (name of bank and branch) along with bidders own bank details
(Account No., Name of Account Holder, NEFT/RTGS details)
xxiii. Work Programme – Appendix X
xxiv. Any other details sought through ITT.
Note:
i) Hard copy of above documents in original must be presented to IRCON, if requested so,
either during the process of finalization or after finalization of the tender.
ii) Financial bid submitted by any bidder in physical form shall not be considered and the
same will be left un-opened.
iii) Submission of Earnest Money Deposit in original in the form of Pay Order/DD/FDR/BG as
referred in clause no. 9.0 of ‘Instructions to Tenderers’.
51
Annexure-III
ASSESSMENT OF PERFORMANCE OF WORKING SUBCONTRACTOR
S. No. Description Weight age Remark

Assigned Obtained
1 Resource Management / Financial Status
1.1 Timely mobilization of manpower, as per the 5
requirement of work and/or as suggested by
Engineer in writing
1.2 Timely mobilization of machinery as per the 5
requirement of work and/or as suggested by
Engineer in writing
2 Physical Progress / Project Execution Capability 75
2.1 Target Vs Achieved review of the progress and

adherence to milestones of the work as per above
submitted & approved programme (May be judged
as below, to be modified depending on availability of
front/ site or as indicated in contract)
A At 33% Time: > 15%
B At 50% Time: > 30%
C At 100% Time: > 60%
D At 175% Time: > 98%
3 Quality Assurance Capability
3.1 Documentation of procedures, work instructions, 4
check list and adherence to the requirements of ISO
9001: 2008
3.2 Rectification of defects/ non conformity to quality 4
standards within 30 days (Nos. mentioned in
writing/ rectified within 30 days of writing)
3.3 Implementation of corrective and preventive 2
measure to control non – conformities/ rejections
4 Claims and Disputes
4.1 Raising unnecessary claims and litigation 5
Total 100
52
Annexure “IV ”
Reference Organogram (Indicative) for tender purpose only
53
Annexure-V
AFFIDAVIT
I/we, the undersigned, do hereby solemnly affirm and declare that-
1. Neither our firm nor any of the members/ partners in any manner as an individual or
the constituent partner in case of partnership firm have been declared non-performer
by Central/ State Government Department in India including authority controlled by
them during the last two years prior to the date of bid submission.
2. As on date our bid submission, neither our firm nor any of the members/ partners in
any manner as an individual or the constituent partner in case of partnership firm are
debarred for tendering, blacklisted, suspended in Central/ State Government
Department in India including authority controlled by them.
3. No contract agreement between IRCON or its wholly owned subsidiaries and either
our firm or any of the members/ partners in any manner as an individual or the
constituent partner in case of partnership firm have been terminated on account of
our default during the last two years prior to the date of our bid submission.
4. We have no objection to IRCON requesting to any bank, person, firm or body and
any such agency furnishing pertinent information as deemed necessary or to verify
this statement or regarding our competence and general reputation.
5. We understand that further qualifying information may be requested by IRCON and

we agree to furnish any such information at the request of IRCON within the
prescribed time.
6. We bind ourselves with all the stipulations of the Bidding Document including
period of completion, provision of adequate equipment, personnel and other
resources required for completion within the stipulated completion period and agree
to augment any resources, if found necessary for timely completion of the project, as
desired by the IRCON.
7. We have read and understood all the provisions included in the Integrity Pact and
abide by them, if applicable.
8. We have read and understood all the provisions included in the bid documents
and abide by them.
9. The information furnished by us is correct and we understand the

consequences in case any of the information furnished is not found to be true.
(Signed by the Authorized Representative of the Firm)
Name of the Authorized Representative:

Name of the Firm:
Dated:
54
Appendix - I - BIDDER’S INFORMATION
All individual firms and each partner of a joint venture are requested to complete the
information in this form.
1. Name of Bidder
2. Head office Address
3. Address on which Correspondence should be done with Tel. Nos., Fax No. & E-mail address
4. Place of incorporation / registration Year of incorporation / registration
5. Constitution of bidder
I) Specify, if the bidder is
(a) An individual
(b) a proprietary firm _____________________
(c) a firm in partnership
(d) a Limited Company or Corporation
(e) a group of firms / joint venture
(If yes, give complete information in respect of
each member)
II) Attach a copy of Proprietorship or Partnership Deed or

Article of Association or Incorporation of Company or JV
___________________
Agreement as the case may be.
6. Give particulars of registration with Govt./Semi Govt./
Public Sector Undertakings/Local Bodies. ____________________
7. Banker’s Details for Payment through Electronic Clearing ___________________-

System (ECS):
Name of bank :
Address of bank :
Account No. :
Name of Account Holder :
IFSC :
Telephone No. with STD Code :
e-mail Address :
55
Sivok-Rangpo Rail Link Project Instructions to Tenderer
Appendix -II - Annual Turnover Record
Bidder should provide information as per this proforma for the firm/company and for each member
in case of joint venture for the annual turnover in terms of gross payment received through various
contracts during the last 3 years ending 31.03.2018.
Use a separate sheet for each partner of a joint venture.
Annual Turnover Data

Financial Year Turnover (In Rs.)
1. 2015– 2016
2. 2016– 2017
3. 2017– 2018
Please attach certified / attested copies of latest Audited Income Tax Returns and / or audited balance
sheet & profit & loss account for the last three years ending 31.03.2018 to support the above
information for the firm/company and for each member in case of JV should be submitted by the
bidder/s.
56
Appendix-III- List of Minimum Key Personnel/Engineers HAVING TUNNEL EXECUTION

EXPERIENCE Required
S.No. Qualification Professional Experience in

Designation Nos.
Relevant Field
1 Project 1 Graduate Civil 15 years professional experience in

Manager Engineer/ tunneling. Project Manager for at least
Mining Engineer 1 project with NATM/ observational
method. The Project Manager shall
attend monthly progress review
meetings, shall be empowered by the
Contractor to handle all financial
issues.
Name 1: CV 1 at Page no.:
2 Works 1 Graduate Civil 12 years of professional experience.
Manager Engineer At least 10 years professional
experience as a NATM
engineer/Geotech Engineer and
completion of at least 1 NATM /
observational method projects.
3 QSS Engineer 1 Graduate Civil 10 years of professional experience as
Engineer a quantity surveyor for major
projects.
4 Quality 1 Graduate Civil 10 years total professional
Manager Engineer experience. Atleast 8 years of
professional experience as a Quality
Engineer.
5 Safety Manager 1 Graduate in 10 years of professional experience

mechanical/ on major projects. At least 5 years as a
Civil/ any safety manager for major projects.
Engineer having
diploma in
safety
6 Site Manager 4 Graduate Civil 10 years of professional experience in
Engineer construction of tunnels. At least 5
years’ experience in NATM /
observational method.
Name 2: CV2 at Page no.:
7 Shift Engineer 8 Graduate Civil At least 2 years professional
57
Engineer experience in tunneling.

8 Geologist 2 Post Graduate in 10 years of professional experience
Geology for underground works’ project. At
least 3 years’ experience as a
geologist for NATM / observational
method projects.
9 Surveyor 2 Diploma in Civil 10 years of professional experience
/ Surveying for surveying of underground works.
10 NATM 4 At least 10 years’ experience intunnel
Foreman excavation and at least 4 years’
experience of NATM / observational
method. Applicable previous
experience includes work as a
foreman, miner, nozzle man, pit boss
and machine operator. He shall have
been involved in excavation of at least
5 km of tunnels.
4 At least 5 years’ experience in tunnel
excavation and at least 2 years’
experience of NATM / observational
method. Applicable previous
experience includes work as a
foreman, miner, nozzle man, pit boss
and machine operator. He shall have
been involved in excavation of at least
5 km of tunnels.
Note: In case of Diploma Holder for the posts except at S No 1, 8, 9 &10 above, the experience should be
at least 5 years more than what has been specified for Graduate Engineer.
58
Appendix – IV A - List of Plant & Machinery

Details of Plant and Machinery already available with the firm and proposed to be deployed on
the project-
S. Type & Number Age of Capacity of Work on Date by Mode of

No. Make of plant & plant & which it is which Mobilization
Plant / machinery machinery being used machinery
Equipment /
equipment
will be
spared for
use on this
work
The firms are required to give the Mode of Mobilization for each Plant & Equipment as under
i) Plant & Equipment already owned by the firm
ii) Plant & Equipment to be purchased by the firm
iii) Plant & Equipment to be arranged from other sources by the firm
59
Appendix-IVB-Minimum List of Plant and Machinery proposed to be deployed for this

project
The following lists indicate the minimum requirements for best practice tunnelling. The
Consolidated list of Minimum Tunnel Construction Plant & Machinery required for the work is
as under:
S. No Type of Plant/Equipment Capacity Min Requirement (Nos)

1 Two boom hydraulic drill jumbo and basket 3
2 Tunnel excavator with swivelling bucket 3
4 Excavator with bucket for invert excavation 3

and loading
5 Working platform with swivelling basket 3
6 Payloader 3
7 Sprayed concrete pump and robot arm outputs down 3
to 6 cum/h
8 Mai pump 3
9 Rotor sprayed concrete device for semi wet 2
process for unforeseen conditions
10 Fork lift 2
11 Trailers 3
12 Grader 1
13 Dozer 1
14 Vibro Compactor 10 Ton 1
15 Dumper (Low Profile) 15 Ton 16
16 Mobile Concrete Mixer Low 6 cum 9
17 Concrete Pumps 3
18 Transit Mixers 6 cum 10
19 Table Circular Saw Blade 3
20 Immersive Concrete Vibrators 12
21 Steel Formwork Gantry (12.1m Traveller) 2
22 Steel Formwork Gantry (6.10m Traveller) 1
for Adit
23 Rock breaker with ripper 2
60
Other Plant & Machinery
S. No. Type of Number Capacity Date by which machinery/equipment

Plant/Equipment will be spared for use on this work.
L. Other Plants & Equipments for Concreting:
1 Aggregate Crushing 1 Within Mobilization Period/at least 15

Plant days before start of Activity as per
Construction Programme, whichever is
2 Hydraulic excavator, PC- 1 0.9 M3
earlier.
200 or equivalent
3 Batching Plant 1 40m3/hr
4 Batching Plant 1 25m3/hr
4 Gantry and equipment 3

for waterproofing
installation
M Miscellaneous equipments
1 Mobile Crane 1 10-20 ton Within Mobilization Period/at least 15

days before start of Activity as per
2 Explosive Van 3 7T
Construction Programme, whichever is
3 Fuel tanker 1 earlier
4 Generator 3 300KVH
5 Strata Grouting Set 1
6 Ventilation Fans 3 100KVH
7 Compressor 3 450cfm
8 Ambulance 3
61
Appendix- IV C Minimum Machinery Deployment Schedule Schedule face wise at

Tunnel T-6
S.No. Type of Plant / Equipment Picture Nos. Capacity
A: Excavation Equipment for T6 starting from South Portal and approaching to T6 North Portal: Team 1
(Main Tunnel)
Two boom hydraulic drill jumbo

1 1
and basket
Tunnel excavator with swivelling

2 1
bucket
Working platform with swivelling

3 1
basket
4 Payloader 1
Sprayed concrete pump and robot

5 1 6 cum/h
arm for outputs down to 6 cum/h
6 Mai pump 1
B: Excavation Equipment for T6 starting from Adit1 Portal and excavating main tunnel towards both
portals : Team 2 (Adit1, Main Tunnel)
1 Two boom hydraulic drill jumbo 1
and basket
Tunnel excavator with swivelling
2 1
bucket
Working platform with swivelling
3 1
basket
4 Payloader 1
Sprayed concrete pump and robot

5 1 6 cum/h
arm for outputs down to 6 cum/h
6 Mai pump 1
62
C: Excavation Equipment for T6 starting from North Portal and approaching towards South
portal : Team 3 (Main Tunnel)
Two boom hydraulic drill jumbo

1
and basket
Tunnel excavator with

2 1
swivelling bucket.
Working platform with

3 1
swivelling basket
Sprayed concrete pump and

4 robot arm for outputs down to 1 6 cum/h
6 cum/h
5 Payloader 1
6 Mai pump 1
D: Equipment made available for T6 for all teams
Spare two boom hydraulic drill

1 1
jumbo and basket
Spare sprayed concrete pump and

2 robot arm for outputs down to 6 1 6 cum/h
cum/h
3 Spare mai pump 1
Rotor sprayed concrete device for

4 semi wet process for unforeseen 1
conditions
5 Fork lift for supply of materials 1
6 Truck for supply of materials 4
63
Trailers for supply and storage of

7 2
materials
8 Dozer for muck deposit site 1
Vibro compactor for muck deposit

9 1
site and road maintenance
Dumper (Low Profile) (no trucks in

10 16
tunnels)
E: Equipment for Inner Lining works for T6 Main Tunnel Single track
Steel Formwork (Gantry) 12.1m,

1 2
Traveller
2 Concrete Pump 2
3 Transmixer 3.0 m3 3 3 cum
4 Immersive concrete vibrators 4
Blade dia.
5 Table circular saw 2
450 mm
6 Mai pump 1
7 Strata Grouting Set 1
8 Compressor 1 450cfm
9 Generator 3 300KVH
10 Ventilation Fans 3 100KVH
64
K: Equipment for Inner Lining works for Escape Tunnels
Steel Formwork (Gantry) 6.10 for

1 1
Escape Tunnel, Traveller
2 Concrete Pump 2
3 Transmixer 2
4 Immersive concrete vibrators 3
Table circular saw

5 2 Blade dia. 450 mm
6 Mai Pump 1
65
Appendix – V - Undertaking by bidder
1. Being duly authorized to represent and act on behalf of …………………. and having
reviewed and fully understood all the eligibility requirements and information
provided, the undersigned hereby declare that:
i) The information/ statements given in support of technical and financial capability as per
Annexure-II of e-Procurement Notice of tender document are true and correct in every
detail.
ii) This tender offer is made in the full understanding that:
a) All information / documents submitted along with tender offers by
tenderer/s will be subject to verification by IRCON or its any authorized
representative who may conduct any inquiries or investigations to
verify the statements, documents and information submitted in
connection with the tender offer and to seek clarification from our
bankers, clients regarding any financial & technical aspects;
(b) In the event that the information/document submitted is found to be
false or misleading, the tender shall be disqualified and the earnest
money deposited shall be forfeited.
2. The client reserves the right to:
(a) Reject or accept any application, cancel the tender and reject all applications.
(b) Modify the scope of work including methodology of construction and the bidders shall have
no claim on this account.
Signed
_____________________
Name
_____________________
For & on behalf of
_____________________
Name of Applicant
_____________________
Firm/Company/JV
66
Appendix-VI- Self evaluation sheet

Sheet-I (SELF EVALUATION) (to be filled by bidders)
Sr. No. Ref. of Page

1 Name of Tenderer
Name of Authorized signatory
2 Power of attorney
3 Form of EMD (Cl. No.9 of ITT)
a Pay order/Demand Draft (DD) / Fixed Deposit Receipt Type of Financial Instrument: ………………………………..
(FDR)/NEFT or RTGS/Bank Guarantee (BG) No. and Date Financial Instrument No………………………. Date:………………………
b Amount of Pay order/Demand Draft (DD) / Fixed Deposit INR……………………………………

Receipt (FDR)/NEFT or RTGS/Bank Guarantee (BG)
c Details of Issuing Bank Name of Bank: ………………………………
Branch Name: ……………………………... Branch
Code:…………………………………
Address:………………………………………………………………………………………
d Payable at/Revokable at Place : DELHI/NCR/PROJECT HEAD QUARTAR (Siliguri)
4 Cost of Tender (paid online)
a Proof of payment Financial instruments No……………………………………… Date

b Amount INR……………………………………
c Details of Issuing Bank Name of Bank: ………………………………
Branch Name: ……………………………... Branch
Code:…………………………………
Address: ………………………………………………………………………………………
5 Submission of Integrity Pact as per Annexure -I Yes / No
6 Submission of Affidavit as per Annexure –V Yes / No
7 Submission of Affidavit as per Appendix –V Yes / No
67
Sheet-II (SELF EVALUATION) for Single Entity / Lead Partner (if applicable, for JV) (to be filled by bidders)
EQC Clause No. 1.1
Sr. no. Item Details Ref. Page no.

1 The bidder should possess experience of having a. Name of Tenderer
successfully completed similar civil works during
last 10 years (ending last day of month previous to b. Name of work for qualification
the one in which tender bids are invited) which of Cl. No. 1.1 of EQC.
should be anyone of the following:
(i) Three similar civil works costing not less
c. Agreement No. & date
than the amount equal to 30% of
advertised value of the tender, or
d. Client Name
(ii) Two similar civil works costing not less
e. Govt. Organization/Semi Govt.
than the amount equal to 40% of
advertised value of the tender, or /PSUs/Autonomous
(iii) One similar works costing not less than the bodies/Municipal bodies/public
amount equal to 65% of advertised value ltd. Company
of the tender.
2 Name of work for qualification of Cl. no. 1.1 of EQC

3 Type of Tunnel Highway/Railway/Metro/
Hydropower/ Irrigation/Other
4 Contract Value
5 Cost of the works completed up to last day of month
previous to the one in which tender bids are invited.
6 Clients Certificate details Certificate
no.:.............Date:.........
7 Scheduled date of completion
8 Status of work Completed/ Ongoing/
Terminated
9 JV share if applicable in above work
68
Sheet-III (SELF EVALUATION) (to be filled by bidders)

EQC Clause No. 1.2
Cl. no. Description Item Details Ref. Page No.

1.2 The bidder should possess experience of a. Name of Tenderer
having executed/completed at least one b. Name of work for qualification of
tunneling work of minimum 25 Sqm Cl. No. 1.2 of EQC.
finished cross section area (Tunnel
constructed with TBM and cut and cover c. Agreement No. and Date
method shall not be considered) with d. Client Name
minimum continuous Stretch of 1.5 km
or equivalent volume with minimum e. Govt. Organization/Semi
length of tunnel not less than 500 meter, Govt./PSUs /Autonomous
in last 7 years ending last day of month bodies/Municipal bodies/ public ltd.
previous to the one in which tender bids Company
are invited. f. Client Certificate Details Certificate no.: ..... Date:.....
g. Method of Tunneling
h. Finished Cross Sectional Area Area (in sqm):...
i. Aggregate length completed with

primary support for work in
Agreement at (c) above: ___________
km ( Not less than 1.20 km)
j. Scheduled Date of Completion
k. Status of Work : Completed / Ongoing/

Terminated
l. JV Share, if applicable, in above
work
69
Sheet-IV-A (SELF EVALUATION) for Single Entity / Lead Partner (if applicable, for JV)
(to be filled by bidders)
EQC Clause No. 2 Financial Eligibility Criteria (For Single Entity/Lead Partner)
Sr. no. Descriptions

1 Name of Tenderer (Single Entity / Lead Partner)
2 The tenderer must have received contractual payments in If annual Financial Year is 1st April to 31st March of next year (Indian
the previous three financial years during the last 3 years, Calendar)
ending 31.03.2018 (or 31.12.2017) in case of Foreign Firms Annual Contractual Payment Received
where Gregorian calendar if followed) and the current 2015-16 2016-17 2017-18
financial year upto the date of opening of tender, at least INR: INR: INR:
150% of the advertised value of the tender.
3 Reference Document e.g. Annual report etc.
page No.
4 Total Contractual Paymant for 2015-16, 2016-17, 2017-18 INR:
5 Percentage(%) of total contractual payment recived w.r.t

advertised cost of tender
OR
1 Name of Tenderer (Single Entity / Lead Partner)
2 The tenderer must have received contractual payments in the If annual Financial Year is 1st April to 31st March of next year
previous three financial years during the last 3 years, ending (Gregorian Calendar)
31.03.2018 (or 31.12.2017) in case of Foreign Firms where Annual Contractual Payment Received
Gregorian calendar if followed) and the current financial year
2015 2016 2017
upto the date of opening of tender, at least 150% of the
advertised value of the tender. .
page No.
70
Sheet-IV-B (SELF EVALUATION) for other Partner (if applicable, for JV)
(to be filled by bidders)
EQC Clause No. 2 Financial Eligibility Criteria (For other Partner)

1 Name of Tenderer (Other partner)
financial year upto the date of opening of tender, at least INR: INR: INR:
page No.

OR
1 Name of Tenderer (Other partner)
financial year upto the date of opening of tender, at least
INR: INR: INR:
page No.
71
Sheet-V (SELF EVALUATION) (to be filled by bidders)
EQC Clause No. 3 Bid Capacity:
Description Item BID CAPACITY
The Bidder should have

Single Entity /Lead Partner MinorPartner
available bid
Capacity not less than the A Value
estimated cost of the work
mentioned in tender B Value
documents.
Single entity / Partner's 1
N' Value for present tender Available Bid capacity
works out to 27 months
÷12= 2.25 year JV Ratio in present tender,if
Applicable
Availaible Bid Capacity =
[A x N x 2] - B Single entity / Partner's
available weighted Bid capacity
A, and B are defined in
considering JV Ratio
relevant Clause.
Available Bid Capacity for INR
tender(a+b)
Reference Page Nos:
WhetherQualify Yes/No
Place:
Date:
Seal of Tendere
Authorised Signatory:
72
Sivok- Rangpo Rail Link Project Instructions to Tenderer
APPENDIX – VII –METHOD STATEMENT
DETAILS TO BE SUBMITTED BY TENDERER ALONG WITH TECHNICAL BID AS PART OF

THEIR METHOD STATEMENT
1. Overall construction program as per latest scheduling program and/or as path time
diagram including all main activities within the specified construction time and
milestone dates.
2. Selected tunnel excavation methods (Excavator, Breaker, Road-Header, Drill & Blast
or combination of thereof) for the geological units as described in the Baseline
Geological Report and Geotechnical Interpretative Report and shown in the Tender
drawings. Criteria for the use of the selected equipment.
3. Method of loading and mucking with description of machinery and equipment.
4. Method statement shall demonstrate execution of permanent lining works, within
the time schedule required, including means of achieving the same.
5. Detail work Cycle using the selected equipment for excavation, loading, mucking and
support application for different rock classes with a break down to single activities
and their duration in minutes. The work cycle has to be drawn in a bar chart,
resulting in minutes required for each complete work cycle.(Details for cycle time
shall be enclosed as per formats for different Advance Class Types)
6. Construction ventilation arrangement with major equipment and ventilation ducts
supported with ventilation calculations considering installed power of equipment
and of number of people working in the tunnel.
7. Dewatering arrangement to handle water ingress into the tunnel including pumping,
water conveying, drilling and other requirements supported by calculations.
8. Equipment, materials and procedures for tunnel supports.
9. List of plant and equipments with their performance and characteristics.
10. List and specification of site laboratory equipment and instruments
11. List and specification of survey and measuring equipment and description of survey
and calculation methods to achieve required accuracy as per specifications.
12. Preliminary plan of site installations (roads, workshops, plants, officers, housing etc.)
13. Energy supply including stand by equipment.
14. Safety and emergency plan-outline
15. Outline organization chart to perform works as specified.
16. CVs of key personnel.
All information of the Method Statement has to be complete along with calculations and
supporting data, so that comprehensive information as given indicate how the bidder
intends to perform the works within the time schedule and sequence of operations.
The formats for submission of proposed tunneling cycle for various activities are attached
The bids with unsatisfactory and unacceptable method statement are liable to be rejected.
73
Proposed Cycle Time Calculation

Main Tunnel / Escape Tunnel– Advance Class Type (1– 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 6) 1
Time
Activity Quantity Remarks
(min)
Preparation of new
face drilling / Details of Equipment and their output
Marking of Drill shall be produced
Excavation2
Pattern
Details of Equipment/drilling rates
Drilling
should be produced
Provide Fresh air calculation along with
Blasting and
blasting details (amount of explosive
Defuming
used and fume characteristics)
Details of Equipment and their output
along with turnaround arrangement for
Mucking
trucks inside the tunnel shall be
produced
Inspection
/Topographical survey
/ Shotcreting Details of Equipment and their output
shall be produced, according with the
Shotcreting
support drawings for the Section Type
Rock bolting
Steel ribs / Lattice Time of erection shall be justified as per
girders / TH44 ribs the excavation and support drawings for
erection/HEB or ISSC etc. the Section Type
Wiremeshelements
installation
Pipe roof umbrella Details of Equipment and their output
Forepoling support drawings for the Section Type
Tunnel face
reinforcement
Steel ribs, lattice girders have to be
completed with final shotcrete layers
Shotcrete final layers /
in the same round length or nearly
Topographical survey /
after, depending on project drawings
for class support.
74

Floor drainage
installation and
drawings for the Section Type. Drainage
formation path for
and path conditions are part of the
vehicles and
tunnel construction process and is
pedestrian
crucial to obtain good progress rates.
Downtime (Cleaning up
shall be produced, according with
and breakdown)
drawings for the Section Type
Total
Section Types and their characteristics vis-à-vis tunneling through them can be inferred from the
Baseline Geological Report and Geotechnical Interpretative Report, witches are for information only.
All the time calculations for different activities shall be separately worked out with backup
calculations for the proposed equipment.
All the quantities shall be in relation to the excavation and support drawings for various Advance
Class Types as per Tender Drawings.
. Tender should provide information as per this proforma for each type of tunnel (Main Tunnel)
and for each Advance Class Typesaccording with Tender Drawings.
. In case of mechanical excavation method, the Tender must indicate the total excavation time.
The Method statement shall be in accordance with the procedures enumerated above.
Main Tunnel – Advance Class Type(1– 2 – 3– 4 – 5 – 6) 1
Progress Per Cycle………………………..m
Progress per week…………………………m
Progress per month………………………..m

Note: -
Bidder should provide information as per this proforma for each type of tunnel (Main Tunnel) and
for each Advance Class Typeaccording with Tender Drawings.
75
Appendix – VIII - CERTIFICATE OF FAMILIARISATION
A. I/We hereby solemnly declare that I/We have visited the site of work and have familiarized
myself/ourselves of the working conditions there-in all respects and in particular, the
following:
a) Topography of the Area.
b) Soil & rock conditions at the site of work.
c) Sources & availability of man power.
d) Borrow areas of earth and Muck dumping sites.
e) Rates for construction materials.
f) Availability of local labour, both skilled and unskilled and the prevailing labour rates.
g) Availability of water & electricity.
h) The existing roads, bridges, culverts and access to the site of work.
i) Availability of space for putting labour camps. Officers, stores, godown, Engineering yard etc.
j) Climatic condition and availability of working days.
k) Political environment and law & order situation of the project/camp area.
l) Soil conditions at the site of work
m) Methodology to be adopted for successful completion of work.
n) Working hours and shifts for completing the work as per tender conditions.
B. I/We have kept myself/ourselves fully informed of the provisions of this tender document
comprising Instructions to the Tenderers, General Conditions of the Contract, Special
Conditions, Specifications and Additional special conditions apart from information
conveyed to me/us through various other provisions in this tender document.
C. I/We have quoted my / our rates as ‘Percentage above / at par “of total cost as per Schedule
of Items Rates and Quantities (BOQ) in TENDER DOCUMENT taking into account all the
factors given above.
(Signature of Tenderer/s)
76
APPENDIX – IX
Quality Assurance
DETAILS TO BE SUBMITTED BY TENDERER ALONG WITH TECHNICAL BID ON FOLLOWING

ASPECTS:
1. Quality policy/objectives relevant to specific elements of the contract works

2. Quality assurance plan for various construction activities specific to the contract works
3. Quality procedure for various stages of procurement and construction
4. Control, review and audit of the quality system
77
Tunnel T-6 Tender Documents
Sivok Rangpo Rail Link Project Instructions to Tenderer/s
APPENDIX – X- WORK PROGRAMME
T6 Tentative Time chart

14904 15923 18816
1019 m 2893 m
T6 - P1 T 6 - P2
420m
Adit 1
1000
1050
1100
1150
1200
1250
1300
1350
1400
1450
1500
1550
1600
1650
1700
1750
1800
1850
1900
1950
2000
2050
2100
2150
2200
2250
2300
2350
2400
2450
2500
2550
2600
2650
2700
2750
2800
2850
2900
2950
3000
3050
3100
3150
3200
3250
3300
3350
3400
3450
3500
3550
3600
3650
3700
3750
3850
3900
3950
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
550
600
650
700
750
800
850
900
950
Year CM SM 50 SM CM Year
0
Design and Construction of Access Roads

1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 Mobilization Mobilization Mobilization 2 2
3 3 3 3
KD-01 Portal Excavation Adit 1 Portal Excavation Portal excavation KD-01
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 Main tunnel Excavation & primary support 3 m /day 8 8
9 9 Adit Excavation & primary support 2.5 m/day 9 9
10 10 10 10
KD-02 KD-02
12 12 Main tunnel Excavation & primary support 3 m/day 12 12
2 1 13 13 1 2
2 14 14 2
3 15 15 3
4 16 16 4
5 17 17 5
6 18 18 6
7 19 19 7
8 20 Inner lining Main tunnel Concrete 4 m / day 20 8
9 21 21 9
10 22 Main tunnel Excavation & primary support 3 m/day 22 10
11 23 23 11
KD-03 Inner lining Adit Concrete 4 m / day KD-03
3 1 25 Inner lining Main Tunnel Concrete 4 m / day 25 1 3
2 26 26 2
KD-04 Demobilization and Site clearances including the remaining auxiliary works KD-04
78
Sivok Rangpo Rail Link Project Appendix to Tender
SECTION-IV
APPENDIX TO TENDER
79
Sivok Rangpo Rail Link Project Appendix to Tender
APPENDIX TO TENDER
Description Reference Clause
Name of the work: Construction of Tunnel T6 (between Km 1.1 of Instruction to tenderers.

14+904 to 18+816 approx.) on Sivok (West Bengal) to Rangpo
(Sikkim) New Single line BG Railway Line Project.
Place of Registration of: Anywhere in India 1.2 of Instruction to tenderers.
Client: Northeast Frontier Railway. 1.3 (a) of Instruction to

tenderers.
Employer: IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED, C-4, District 1.3 (b) of Instruction to
Centre, Saket, New Delhi-110 017. tenderers.
Scope of work: As indicate in ANNEX - I TO e-Procurement 1.5 of Instructions to Tenderers.

Notice - SCOPE OF WORK. and Annexure-I of NI e-T.
Approximate Estimated cost of the work: Rs. 261.41 Crores 1.6 of Instruction to tenderers.
Amount of Earnest Money and in case EMD is submitted in 9.1 of Instructions to Tenderers
the form of Pay Order/Demand Draft/BG, the same shall be and 1.0 of NI e-T.
payable at: Rs. 1.37 Crores
Period of Validity of tender: 90 days from the date of opening 11.0 of Instructions to Tenderers
of tender and 17.0 of NI e-T
Period of Completion: 27 (Twenty Feven Months) 1.0 of NIT
Defect liability period: 12 months from date of issue of 41.0 of SCC-I

completion certificate.
80
Sivok –Rangpo Rail Link Project Revised Special Conditions of Contract Section-I
SECTION-V
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT SECTION-I
81
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Particulars Page No.

S.No
1. DEFINITIONS 82
A GENERAL OBLIGATIONS
2. SUB CONTRACTING 85
3. GENERAL OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR 86
4. COMMUNCATION BETWEEN EMPLOYER/ENGINEER AND CONTRACTOR 87
5. PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENT 88
6. SAFETY PROCEDURES 88
7. INSURANCE 89
8. OCCUPATION AND USE OF LAND 90
9. INDEMNITY BY THE CONTRACTOR 90
10. FACILITIES TO OTHER CONTRACTORS 90
11. CONTRACT AGREEMENT 91
12. CANCELLATION OF DOCUMENTS 91
13. USE OF MATERIALS PROCURED WITH IRCON’S ASSISTANCE 91
14. DISSOLUTION OF CONTRACTOR’S FIRM 91
15. JOINT AND SEVERAL LIABILITY 92
16. SITE OFFICE FOR USE BY IRCON/NFR AND IRCON’S NOMINATED REPRESENTATIVES 92
CONSTRUCTION OF ACCESS ROADS & THEIR MAINTENANCE DURING CONTRACT
17. 97
PERIOD BY THE CONTRACTOR
18. TREATMENT OF TUNNEL EFFLUENT 98
B EXECUTION OF WORKS
19. CONTRACTOR’S UNDERSTANDING 99
20. OFFICIAL SECRETS ACT 1923 99
21. PRIORITY OF DOCUMENTS 99
IMPLEMENTATION OF QUALITY, SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT
22. 100
SYSTEM
23. PROGRAM OF CONSTRUCTION 102
24. PROGRESS REPORTS 103
25. RATE OF PROGRESS 104
26. REJECTION 105
27. WORKING HOURS 105
28. DUTIES AND POWERS OF ENGINEER REPRESENTATIVE 105
29. PROVISION OF EFFICIENT AND COMPETENT STAFF 106
30. ENABLING WORKS 107
31. SITE CLEARANCE 107
32. ACCESS TO SITE OF WORK 107
33. VARIATION IN QUALITY OF ITEMS COVERED BY THE BILL QUANTITIES 107
34. COMPLETION CERTIFICATE 108
D PAYMENTS
35. PAYMENT OF MOBILISATION ADVANCE 110
36. PLANT & MACHINERY ADVANCE 111
37. ACCEPTED RATE APPLICABLE TILL THE COMPLETION OF WORK 112
E LABOUR
82
38. SUFFICIENCY OF LABOUR 113

F COMPLETION AND DEFECT LIABILITY
39. COST OF REMEDYING DEFECTS 114
40. FAILURE TO REMEDY DEFECTS 114
41. MAINTENANCE/ DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD 114
42. GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES 114
43. DEFECT LIABILITY CERTIFICATE 114
44. UNFULFILLED OBLIGATIONS 115
APPENDIX I - PLAN OF TEMPORARY SITE OFFICE FOR USE BY IRCON, NF RLY AND
116
IRCON REPRESENTATIVES
83
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT-SECTION I

1. Definitions:
1.1 In the Conditions of Contract, the following terms shall have the meanings assigned here
under except where the context otherwise requires:
(i) “CLIENT”/”PRINCIPAL EMPLOYER”/”OWNER” means the Northeast Frontier
Railway represented through the Chief Administrative Officer/Construction.
(ii) "EMPLOYER" means the IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED, A Govt. of India
Undertaking (IRCON in abbreviation) acting through its Chairman cum Managing
Director or any other authorised officer and shall include their legal successors in
title and permitted assignees. .
(iii) "ENGINEER OR ENGINEER IN CHARGE" means the Project Head of IRCON
INTERNATIONAL Ltd.(Employer), or any other officer authorised by the Employer
to act on his behalf and for the purpose of operating the contract.
(iv) “Engineers Representative” shall mean officer authorized by IRCON in direct
charge of works.
(v) “DDC” Shall mean the Detailed Design Consultant for design and construction
supervision engaged by IRCON, represented on site through its appointed Chief
Resident Engineer or any other official nominated by DDC.
(vi) TENDER or BID" means the offer (Technical and/or Financial) made by individual,
firm, Company, corporation, Joint Venture or Consortium for the execution of the
works
(vii) “TENDERER or BIDDER” shall mean the individual,firm,Company, Corporation,
Joint Venture or C onsortium submitting a bid/tender.
(viii) “Scheduled Bank” means a bank included in the second schedule to the Reserve
Bank of India Act, 1934, or modification thereto.
(ix) WORKS” shall mean the works contemplated in the drawings and schedules set
forth in the tender forms and required to be executed according to specifications.
(x) “CONTRACT” shall mean and include the Agreement or Letter of Acceptance, the
accepted Bill of Quantities and Rates, the General Conditions of Contract, Special
Conditions of Contract, Appendix to Tender, Form of Bid, and Instructions to the
Tenders, Drawings, Specifications and other Tender Documents.
(xi) “CONTRACTOR” shall mean the person or firm, company, corporation, joint
venture whether incorporated or not who enters into the contract with IRCON and
shall include legal representatives of such individual or persons comprising such
firm or company or successors of such firm or company as the case may be and
permitted assigns of such individual, or firm or company. .
(xii) “Contractor’s Representative” shall mean the person representative for
execution of the contract who shall be so declared by the contractor and
who shall be authorized under the duly executed power of attorney to
comply the instructions and to use, receive materials issued by Engineer to
the contractor for works. He shall be capable of taking responsibility for
proper execution of works.
(xiii) “Sub-Contractor” means the individual, firm, Company, Corporation, Joint
Venture or Consortium, having direct contract with the Contractor and to
whom any part of the work has been sublet by the Contractor and shall be
84
include his heirs, his executors, administrators, successors, legal

representatives, as the case may be.
(xiv) "Other Contractors" means the individual, firm, Company, Corporation,
Joint Venture or Consortium employed by or having a Contract directly or
indirectly with the Client/Employer/Engineer other than the Contractor.
(xv) “SPECIFICATIONS” means the specifications referred to in the Contract and any
modification thereof or addition thereto, or as may from time to time be
furnished or approved in writing by the Engineer.
(xvi) ."Drawings" means the Drawings annexed to the Contract or referred in it and
shall include any modifications of such Drawings and further Drawings as may be
issued or approved by the Engineer
(xvii) "Bill of Quantities (B.O.Q.)"/ “Schedule of Rates” means list of items of work, their
quantities and rates as accepted and forming part of contract agreement.
(xviii) “Original Contract Value” means the sum stated in the letter of
Acceptance/Contract Agreement.
(xix) “Contract Value” means the original contract value subject to the
adjustments in accordance with theprovisions of the Contract.
(xx) “TEMPORARY WORKS” mean all enabling works of every kind required for the
executionof the works.
(xxi) “Permanent Work(s)/ Work(s)” means the works (other than temporary works)
to be executed in accordance with the Contract or part/s thereof as the case may
be and shall include extra or additional, altered or substituted items of work
as required for performance of the Contract.
(xxii) “Construction Plant” means all machinery, appliances or things of whatsoever
nature required for the execution, completion and maintenance of the works,
but does not include material or other things intended to form or forming part
of the permanent works.
(xxiii) ."APPROVAL OR APPROVED" means approval in writing including subsequent
written confirmation of previous verbal approval.
(xxiv) “ACCEPTING AUTHORITY” shall mean the Chairman and Managing
Director/Director of IRCON or Executive Director / General Manager of IRCON or
any other officer authorized for dealing with the works for the purpose of this
tender/Contract.
(xxv) “SITE” shall mean the lands and or other place on, under, in or through which the
works are to be executed under the contract including any other lands or places
which may be allotted by IRCON or used for the purpose of contract.
(xxvi) “Material/s” means all equipment, components, fittings and other
materials including raw materials, which form part of the permanent
works.
(xxvii) “Test” means such tests as prescribed in the Contract or by the Engineer or
Engineer's Representatives, whether performed by the Contractor or by the
Engineer or his Representative, or any agency approved by the Engineer.
(xxviii) “Defect Liability Period” shall mean the specified period of Defect Liability
from the date of completion of the works as certified by the Engineer.
(xxix) “Letter Of Acceptance” means the Employer or the Engineer to conveying
85
acceptance of the Tender.

(xxx) “Month” means the Gregorian calendar month.
(xxxi) “Day” means the calendar day.
(xxxii) “Time” expressed by hours of the clock shall be according to the Indian
Standard time.
(xxxiii) “Tender Date” means closing date fixed for receiptof tenders asper notice
inviting tenderor extendedby subsequentnotification.
(xxxiv) “Rupees “or Rs. in abbreviation shall mean Rupees in Indian Currency.
(xxxv) Definitions mentioned in these tender documents elsewhere will follow.
In Case there is an ambiguity in any definition, the decision of IRCON regarding the
interpretation shall be final and binding.
1.2 Headings & Marginal Headings:-
The top headings and marginal headings/notes in the tender or contract documents
are solely for the purpose of facilitating reference and shall not be deemed to be part
thereof and shall not be taken into consideration in the interpretation or
consideration thereof.
1.3 Notices, Consents, Approvals, Certificates and Determination:
Wherever in the Contract provision is made for giving or issue of any notice, consent,
approval certificate or determination, it shall be in writing and the words notify,
certify or determine shall be construed accordingly.
1.4 Singular and Plural: -
Words importing the singular only also include the plural and vice versa, where the
context requires.Similarly, words importingmasculine gender alsoinclude the
feminine gender.
1.5 Communication and Language of Contract:
1.5.1 Communication to be in writing:

All notices, communications, references and complaints by either party to the
Contract shall be in writing in English or Hindi. Communication from only authorized
representative of the Contractor shall be entertained.
1.5.2 Language of Contract:

The Contract document shall be drawn up in English.
1.6 Commencement Date:
The date of commencement shall be the date of issue of Letter of Acceptance.
1.7 Time for Completion:
Time of completion shall be the time for completing the work or a section with any
extension calculated from commencement date.
1.8 Laws Governing the Contract:
The Contract shall be governed by the laws in force in india.
86
A - GENERAL OBLIGATION
2.0 SUB-CONTRACTING
(Ref. Clause 7 part II of GCC of Indian Railway, November 2018)
2.1 Sub-Contractor/s means any person named in the Contract as a sub-Contractor,
manufacturer or supplier for a part of the Works or any person to whom a part of the
Works has been sub-contracted with the consent of IRCON, but not any assignee of such
person.
2.2 The prior consent of IRCON shall be obtained for any major Sub-Contractors;
(i) Not less than 21 days before the intended date of each Sub-Contractor commencing
work, the Contractor shall notify the Employer's Representative of such intention;
(ii) The Contractor shall not subcontract the whole of the works. Except where
otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall not subcontract
any part of the works without the prior consent of the Engineer in writing.
Any such consent shall not relieve the Contractor from any of his liability or
obligation under the Contract and he shall be responsible for the acts,
defaults and neglects of any subcontractor, his representative, servants
or workmen as fully as if they were the acts, defaults or neglects of the
Contractor and nothing contained otherwise shall constitute a waiver of the
Contractor’s obligations under this Contract.
(iii) Provided that the Contractor shall not be required to obtain such consent for
a) The provision of labour, or
b) The purchase of materials which are in accordance with the
specifications/standards specified in the Contract, or
c) The subcontracting of any part of the works for which the
subcontractor is named in thecontract.
d) The purchase of Plants and Equipment for execution of the works.
e) The hiring of Plants and Equipments for execution of theworks.
Any breach of the above conditions shall entitle the Employer/Engineer to
rescind the contract.
(iv) Provided always that execution of specific works by petty contractors, or on

piecework basis, under the personal supervision of the Contractor, shall not
be deemed to be subcontracting under this clause.
(v) The Contractor shall be responsible for observance by all Sub-Contractors of

all the provisions of the Contract.
(vi) The Contractor shall not, without prior consent of the Employer, assign the
Contract, or any part thereof, or any benefit, or any interest therein, or there under
otherwise than by a charge in favor of the Contractor’s bankers of any monies due,
or to become due, under the Contract. The Contractor shall not sub-contract critical
operations e.g.: complete tunnel excavation, complete lining etc.
(vii) The sub-contracting, shall be limited to 35% of the total contract price
(including materials).
(viii) The terms and conditions of sub-contracts and the payments that have to be made
to the sub-Contractors shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Payments
87
to be made to such sub-Contractors will be deemed to have been included in

Contract price. However, for major sub-contracts (each costing over Rs one crore), it
will be obligatory on the part of the Contractor to obtain consent of Employer to
engagement of the sub-Contractor. The Contractor shall propose alternate sub-
Contractors also so as to save time in case of rejection (by IRCON) of the
subcontractor as proposed by Contractor. The Employer will give his consent after
assessing and satisfying himself of the capability, experience and equipment
resources of the sub-Contractor and the scope of sub-contract proposed. In case the
Employer intends to withhold his consent, he shall inform the Contractor in time to
enable him to make alternative arrangements to fulfill his program to ensure that
the work to be carried out by a sub-Contractor complies with the requirements of
the Contract..
(ix) Notwithstanding any consent to sub-contract given by Employer, if in his opinion he

considers it necessary, the Employer's Representative shall have full power to order
the removal of any sub-Contractor from the Site or off-Site place of manufacture or
storage, which power shall not be exercised unreasonably.
(x) The proposed sub-contract terms and conditions shall impose on the sub-
Contractor such of the terms of the Contract as are applicable and appropriate
to the part of the Works to be sub-contracted, to enable the Contractor to comply
with his obligations under the Contract.
(xi) The Contractor, when requested by the Employer's Representative, shall

supply to the Employer's Representative a copy of the sub-contract terms
and conditions when the sub-contract has been placed, and shall not
thereafter amend, vary or waive such terms and conditions in any respect
materially affecting compliance by the Contractor with his obligations under
the Contract without the consent in writing of the Employer's
Representative.
3.0 General Obligations of the Contractor

3.1 General Responsibility of the Contractor
The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the Contract with due care and diligence
design (to the extent provided for in the Contract), execute, complete and maintain the
works and remedy the defects in accordance with the provisions of the Contract. The
Contractor shall provide all superintendence, labour, materials, plant, & Equipment and all
other things whether of a temporary or permanent nature, required in and for such design,
execution, completion and maintenance of works and rectification of any defects, as
directed by the Engineer or his Representative.
3.2 Site Operations and Methods of Construction
The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the adequacy, stability and safety of all site
operations and method of construction. Provided that the Contractor shall not be
responsible for the design and specifications of Permanent works or for the design or
specifications of any temporary works provided by the Engineer. Where the Contract
expressly provides that part of the Permanent Works shall be designed by the Contractor,
he shall be fully responsible for that part of such works, notwithstanding any approval by
the Engineer.
88
3.3 Appraisal of Errors/ Omissions in the Drawings

The Contractor shall promptly inform in writing to the Engineer of any error, omission,
fault and other defects, in the design, drawings or specifications for the works which are
noticed while reviewing the Contract documents or in the process of execution of the
works.
3.4 Compliance with Regulations and Bye-laws
The Contractor shall comply with the statutory provisions relating to the works, regulations
and bye-laws of any local authority and undertaking, including those controlling the utilities
such as water supply, sewerage, telephones, power supply, etc. in whose jurisdiction the
work is to be executed. The Contractor shall be bound to give all notices required by statute,
regulations or bye-laws, as aforesaid. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
arrange all necessary clearances and approvals from the concerned authorities or
undertakings before the work is taken up. However, assistance, if any, may be provided by
Employer/Engineer/Client.
3.5 Contractor’s Representative
When the Contractor is not in a position to be present, he shall keep responsible
representative at site or work place during all working hours, who shall, on receiving a
reasonable notice, present himself to the Engineer, Engineer's Representative or their
Assistants. The instructions and orders given to the Contractor's representative shall be
deemed to have the same force as if they have been given to the Contractor. The Contractor
should furnish the necessary Power of Attorney in favour of his representative for the
purpose of this clause. Failure on part of the Contractor to comply with this provision shall
constitute a breach of Contract and the Engineer shall have full powers to suspend the
execution of the works until such time a suitable agent is appointed and the Contractor
shall be held responsible for the delay so caused to the works.
4.0 Communication between Employer/ Engineer and Contractor
4.1 Instructions in writing:
Instructions given by the Engineer shall be in writing, provided that if for any
reason the Engineer considers it necessary to give any instructions orally, the
Contractor shall comply with such instructions. Confirmation in writing of such oral
instruction given by the Engineer, whether before or after carrying out of the
instructions, shall be deemed to be instructions within the meaning of this sub-
clause.
The Contractor shall alsobe bound to carry out anyinstructions issued byClient as
confirmed inwriting by the Engineer.
4.2 All certificates, notices, written orders or letters, to be given by the Employer or the
Engineer to the Contractor, shall be deemed to have been served, if the same are
delivered to the Contractor or his authorized representative, or delivered or left at
or posted by speed post/ registered post to the given address of the Contractor or
Contractor's registered office or principal place of business and essentially
delivering the same by e-mail duly attached with scanned copy of such certificates,
notices, written orders or letters and Proof of Dispatch (POD). Such documents shall
be deemed to have been received on the day they are left or delivered, or in the case
of postal transmission, on the day they would ordinarily have reached but not
exceeding 7 days from the date of posting inclusive of day of posting, in any case.
The Contractor shall furnishhis postal address/registered office address ande-mail address
forcommunication.
89
4.3 Notices or letters to Employer and Engineer

All notices or letters to be given by the Contractor to the Employer or to the Engineer,
under the terms of the contract, shall be served by sending by Speed/Registered post or by
delivering the same, to the respective nominated addresses and essentially delivering the
same by e-mail to the Engineer duly attached with scanned copy of such notice(s) or letters
and Proof of Dispatch (POD) with a copy to Employer on nominated e-mail address.
4.4 Subject as otherwise provided in this contract all notices to be given on behalf of IRCON and
other actions to be taken on its behalf may be given or taken by the Engineer or any officer
for the time being entrusted with the functions, duties and powers of the Engineer.
4.5 The Contractor or his representative shall be in attendance at the Site(s) during all working
hours and shall superintend the execution of the works with such additional assistance in
each trade as the Engineer may consider necessary.
4.6 Orders given to the Contractor’s representative shall be considered to have the same force
as if they had been given to the Contractor himself.
4.7 Site inspection register will be maintained by the Engineer or his representative in which
the Contractor or his agent will be bound to sign day to day entries made by the Engineer or
his representative. The Contractor is required to take note of the instruction given to him in
site inspection register and should comply within a reasonable time. The Contractor will
also arrange to receive all the letters etc. issued to him at the site of work.
4.8 Change in Address
Either Party may change the nominated address by prior written notice to the other party.
However, either party shall not change their e-mail address during currency of the contract
without obtaining prior mutual consent for doing so.
4.9 Change in constitution of Firm
In case of any change in the constitution of Contractor’s firm, the same shall forthwith be
notified by the contractor to the Engineer and the Employer.
5.0 PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENT
Please refer to Chapter 17 of Special Condition of Contract-IIB.
5.1 PROTECTION OF TREES
(i) The Contractor must organize his work in such a way that the ecology of the area is
not affected. The instructions issued in this regard will have to be carefully
followed.
(ii) The section passes through forestland. The Contractor or his workers are prohibited
to cut trees. Cutting of trees as required under the items of works indicated in the
tender schedules may be carried out strictly as directed by the Engineer of the
work. Unauthorized felling of trees will result in legal action for which Contractor
shall be responsible.
6.0 SAFETY PROCEDURES
6.1 The Contractor shall
(i) Comply with all applicable safety regulations,
(ii) Take care for the safety of all persons entitled to be on the Site,
(iii) Use reasonable efforts to keep the Site and Works clear of unnecessary obstruction
so as to avoid danger to these persons,
(iv) Provide fencing, lighting, guarding and watching of the Works until completion and
taking over, and
90
(v) Provide any Temporary Works (including roadways, footways, guards and fences)
which may be necessary, because of the execution of the Works, for the use and
protection of the public and of owners and occupiers of adjacent land.
(vi) The Contractor shall supply all necessary safety appliances such as safety goggles,
helmets, safety belts, ear plugs, masks etc. to the workers, staff and also for
consultants, employer, visiting officers/guests etc.
7.0 INSURANCE
7.1 Depending on the nature of works, Contractor’s All Risk (CAR) shall be obtained by
Contractor for the works as per agreement in the name of IRCON at his own cost as per the
requirement. Contractor may take necessary add on covers and voluntary excess specified
elsewhere in the contract, which shall be binding on the Contractor. At the time of taking
policy, possible time over-run, if any, may be taken into account in deciding the period/
validity of the policy. The above Insurance shall cover the risks normally covered under the
CAR policy. Any item not cover under the above policy shall also be the responsibility of the
contractor.
i. Claims on realization shall be passed to the Contractor according to value of the claims
accepted by thr Insurance company for his damaged portion of work. The amount so
disbursed to the contractor shall be limited to the amount calculated on the basis of his
accepted rates in the contract with the Employer/ Engineer.
ii. The contractor will engage a suitable Engineer to liaise with Insurer Company
in the interest of realization of insurance claims at his own cost.
7.2 Before commencing of works, it shall be obligatory for the Contractor to obtain, at his own
cost, insurance cover in the joint name of the Contractor and employer from reputed
companies under the following requirements:
i) Liability for death of or injury to any person or loss of or damage to any property
(other than the work) arising out the performance of the Contract.
ii) Construction Plant, Machinery and Equipment brought to site by the Contractor. Any
other insurance cover as may be required by the law of the land.
- iii) Workmen Compensation Policy.
iv) Any other insurance cover as may be required by the law of the land.
v) Contractor/ insurance Company shall have to indemnify IRCON for all loses and claims
are to be given directly to IRCON. Decision of IRCON will be binding on Contractor &
Insurance Company to distribute claim in part or full.
Note: All insurance covers referred to in the contract shall be effected with an Indian
Insurance Company incorporated and registered in India.
7.3 The Contractor shall provide evidence to the Employer/Engineer before commencement of
work at site that the insurances required under the contract have been effected and shall
within 60 days of the commencement date; provide the insurance policies to the
Employer/Engineer. The Contractor shall, whenever, called upon, produce to the Engineer
or his representative the evidence of payment of premiums paid by him to ensure that the
policies indeed continue to be in force.
7.4 The Contractor shall also obtain any additional insurance cover as per the requirements of
the Contract.
7.5 The Employer/Engineer shall not be liable for or in respect of any damages or
compensation payable to any workman or other person in the employment of the
91
Contractor or his sub-Contractor or petty Contractor. The Contractor shall indemnify and
keep indemnified the Employer/Engineer against all such damages and compensation for
which the Contractor is liable.
7.6 The Policies of the Contractor shall remain in force throughout the period of execution of
the works and till the expiry of the defect liability period except for any specific insurance
covers necessary for shorter period.
7.7 If the Contractor fails to effect or keep in force or provide adequate cover as acceptable to
the Engineer in the insurance policies mentioned above, then in such cases, the Engineer
may effect and keep in force any such insurance or further insurance on behalf of the
Contractor. The recovery shall be made at the rate of 1.5 times the premium/premiums
paid by the Engineer in this regard from the payment due to the Contractor or from the
Contractor’s Performance Security. However, the Contractor shall not be absolved from his
responsibility and/or liability in this regard.
8.0 OCCUPATION AND USE OF LAND
8.1 No land belonging to or in the possession of the Client/Employer/Engineer shall be
occupied by the Contractor without written permission of the Engineer. The Contractor
shall not use, or allow the site to be used for any purpose other than that of executing the
works. The Contractor shall not be permitted to enter on (other than for inspection
purpose) or take possession of the site until instructed to do so by the Engineer in writing.
The portion of the site to be occupied by the Contractor shall be defined and/or marked by
him on the site plan failing which these shall be indicated by the Engineer at site and the
Contractor shall on no account be allowed to extend his operations beyond these areas.
8.2 Such use or occupation shall not confer any right of tenancy of the land to the Contractor.
8.3 Contractor has to vacate the land if required by the employer and no claim on this account
shall be entertained by the employer.
9.0 INDEMNITY BY THE CONTRACTOR
9.1 Indemnity against all Claims of Patent rights and Royalties
The Contractor shall hold and save harmless and indemnify the
Client/Employer/Engineer, his officers and Employees from and against all claims
and proceedings for or on account of infringement by the Contractor of copyright,
any patent rights, design, trademark or name, secret process, patented or
unpatented invention, articles or appliances manufactured or used for or in
connection with the works and from and against all claims, proceedings, costs,
damages, charges, and expenses whatsoever in respect thereof or in relation
thereto. The Contractor shall pay all royalties, taxes, rent and other payments or
compensation, if any, for getting the materials required for the works and due
fulfillment of the contract and indemnify Client/Employer/Engineer against any
claims in this regard.
10.0 FACILITIES TO OTHER CONTRACTORS
The Contractor shall, in accordance with the requirements of the Engineer afford all
reasonable facilities to other Contractors engaged concurrently on separate contracts in
connection with the works and for departmental labour or statutory body which may be
employed at the site for execution of any work not included in the contract or of any
contract which IRCON may enter into in connection with or ancillary to the works.
92
11.0 CONTRACT AGREEMENT

The Contractor shall enter into and execute the Contract Agreement in the form of
agreement (Annexure-B “FORM OF AGREEMENT” of Annexures/Proformas of
Section-VIII) within 28 days after the date of issue of Letter of Acceptance. The
stamp papers of the requisite value and similar charges (if any) as per the prevailing
laws shall be provided by the Contractor at his own cost. Original agreement shall
be retained by the Employer/Engineer and a certified copy shall be made available
to the Contractor.
12.0 CANCELLATION OF DOCUMENTS

The cancellation of any document such as power of attorney, JV Agreement, partnership
deed etc., shall forthwith be communicated by the Contractor to IRCON in writing failing
which IRCON shall have no responsibility or liability for any action on the strength of said
documents.
13.0 USE OF MATERIALS PROCURED WITH IRCON’S ASSISTANCE
13.1 Where any materials for the execution of the contract are procured with the assistance of
the IRCON/ Railway either by issue from stocks or purchased under arrangements made or
permits or licenses issued by the Government, the Contractor shall hold said materials as a
trustee for the IRCON/ Railway and use such materials economically and solely for the
purpose of the contract against which they are issued and not dispose them of without the
permission of the IRCON/ Railway. He shall also return if required by the Engineer to such
destination as may be directed, all or part of surplus or unserviceable materials that may be
left with him after the completion of the contract or at its termination for any reason
whatsoever on payment of such price as Engineer may fix with due regard to the conditions
of the materials. In the event of the contract being terminated for any default on the part of
the tenderer, the freight charges for the return of the materials according to the direction of
the Engineer shall be borne by the Contractor. The decision of the Engineer shall be final
and binding.
13.2 After the acceptance of tender, the Contractor shall make request in writing to the Engineer
for the materials to be supplied by the Engineer, if any, in accordance with the approved
programme for execution of works. However, IRCON does not guarantee any supply of
material.
13.3 If the material is issued by IRCON and consumed in the works by Contractor, then the
recovery shall be made by Engineer from Contractor’s dues at the actual cost of material
plus 15% towards overheads and contingencies from Contractor’s dues.
13.4 In the event of any breach of the aforesaid condition, the Contractor shall in addition to
making himself liable for action for contravention of the terms of the license or permit
and/or for criminal breach of trust, be liable to account to IRCON for all moneys,
advantages, profits resulting or which in the usual course would have resulted to him by
reasons of such breach.
14.0 DISSOLUTION OF CONTRACTOR’S FIRM
If the Contractor’s firm is dissolved due to death or retirement of any partner or for any
reasons whatsoever before fully completing the whole work or any part of it, the partners
shall remain jointly, severally and personally liable to complete the whole work to the
satisfaction of IRCON and to pay compensation for loss sustained, if any, by IRCON due to
such dissolution. The amount of such compensation shall be decided by the Engineer and
his decision in the matter shall be final and binding.
93
15.0 JOINT AND SEVERAL LIABILITY

If the Contractor constitutes a joint venture of two or more firms/companies/persons:
(i) these firms/companies/persons: shall be deemed to be jointly and severally
responsible to IRCON for the performance of the Contract:
(ii) these persons shall notify to IRCON of their leader who shall have authority to bind
the Contractor and each of these firms/companies/persons and
(iii) the Contractor shall not alter its composition or legal status without the prior
consent of IRCON.
(iv) All other conditions mentioned in these documents for Joint Venture shall also be
applicable.
16.0 SITE OFFICE FOR USE BY IRCON/NFR RLY AND IRCON’S NOMINATED
REPRESENTATIVES
16.1 The contractor shall be required to provide Temporary Site office for officers of IRCON/Rly.
and IRCON's nominated representatives at his own cost. This should be provided by the
contractor with in within 4 months from the date of award of the work or prior to start of
physical work on tunnel whichever is earlier, fully functional two site offices for Engineer
made of Ferro-cement concrete element or any other superior quality material, as per
drawing attached (Appendix I of SCC-I) and as per specifications listed below at each face
at each portal location or as decided by Engineer.
16.2 SCOPE OF WORK:

The work consists of construction of temporary site office using precast cement concrete
including Ferro-cement components or superior material as per plans, drawing,
specifications and stipulations given in tender documents.
(i) Superstructure of Brick wall panels and roof panels (of I/C section) and R.C.C.
columns /Steel Column and joists as per enclosed plans and drawing.
(ii) Construction of open foundation using plum concrete as per specifications and
drawings (including excavation).
(iii) Suitable anchorage between superstructure and foundation, between roof panels
and columns/joists.
(iv) Provision of PVC water storage tanks one each on ground and overhead on erected
supports with suitable pipeline connections, electric motor etc. (as per
specifications).
(v) Sanitary installations as per specifications.
(vi) Electrical installations as per specifications.
(vii) Assembling of various pre-cast components at site in case of pre-cast construction
and finishing work including various fixtures as per specifications.
(viii) Provision of ferro-cement /FRP septic tanks underground with suitable connection
to the building and drainage.
(ix) The safe design of structure as whole and its individual components will be solely
the responsibility of contractor. Contractor may suitably modify the drawing in
case considered necessary with the approval of Engineer-in-charge.
(x) Providing and fixing fixed wire mesh and M.S. grills on windows, ventilators as
directed by Engineer-in-charge.
(xi) Providing water and electricity to site offices during currency of the contract
including defect liability period at his own cost.
94
The drawing of site office attached with tender is indicative only.

16.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENT FOR THE TEMPORARY OFFICE BUILDING
Materials required for the works shall be arranged by the contractor himself including wire
mesh /Chicken mesh /Binding wire/G.I. wire and other chemicals required for Ferro-
cement work/Brick work as per specifications. All materials arranged by contractor will be
tested at contractor’s cost, if required by engineer-in-charge.
16.4 MAINTENANCE OF SITE OFFICE
The Contractor shall arrange to maintain the site office during currency of contract and
defect liability period which shall include petty repairs to various parts of the building,
electrical fittings, water supply, sanitary fittings including periodic white/ colour washing
of building, replacing broken window/door/ventilator glasses, etc. The Contractor shall
also provide supply of water & electricity to site offices during currency of contract
including defect liability period at his own cost.
16.5 PAYMENT CONDITIONS

The cost of temporary site offices, including their furnishing as specified in relevant clause
and maintenance of site offices shall be deemed to have been included in rates quoted for
various items of Schedule of Items & Quantities (BOQ) and as such nothing extra shall be
payable for this work.
16.6 SPECIFICATION FOR PREFABRICATED ELEMENTS
Constituents
(i) Foundation and Plinth :- Cast-in-situ plum concrete work of Nominal Mix
concrete all along the periphery up to 300 mm deep below ground level and 450mm
deep at column locations. However, depth may vary depending upon site
conditions. Rise from ground level to Plinth shall be provided by two steps of
concrete of 1:3:6, mix and properly finished or prefabricated as approved by
Engineer-in-charge.
(ii) Wall :- This will consists of R.C.C. precast columns/Steel column and Ferro cement
panels of size 1500 mm x 300 mm (thickness 25mm)/Brick wall 230 mm thick in
1:6 Cement Mortar with1:5 CM plaster on both side. The columns shall be
anchored to foundation to hold the structure to foundation resulting in a rigid
structure which shall be dust and water proof when assembled completely.
(iii) Roofing :-Precast ferrocement roofing channels /Steel section of I/C-Section as per
drawing or corrugated glavanised iron sheet over tubular trusses and purlin or any
better material approved by Engineer in charge as required for the Dead load, live
load, wind load and snow load etc.
(iv) Flooring:-Precast, Hydraulically pressed square or as directed by Engineer-in-
charge, tile flooring over a bed of crusher stone dust mixed with nominal cement in
the ratio of 1:16 Cement & crusher stone dust.
(v) Finishes:-All interior shall be fine finished with Plaster of Paris and oil bound
distemper in two coats, of quality and shade as approved by Engineer-in-charge,
including priming coat of whiting to give an even shade. The outer face (excluded
roof) shall be finished with two coats of cement paint of approved make. The roof
should give concrete finish steel sheet coated with 2 coat of synthetic enamel paint
over one coat of primer.
95
(vi) Water supply: One storage tank of 500 lit. capacity, of approved make, shall be
erected overhead whereas one storage tank of 2000 lit. capacity, of approved make,
shall be fixed on ground over a platform made of 6 solid concrete blocks on leveled
ground. The storage tanks shall conform to provision of IS specifications. Suitable
arrangement in the form of a electrical motor of 0.5 Hp with proper electric
connection shall be made to lift water from ground tank to overhead tank. Water
tank shall be coated inside, with suitable chemical solution (approved by Engineer-
in-charge) in order to make storage potable. The location for ground and overhead
tanks shall be as given by Engineer at site. Overhead tank shall be erected on a
suitable raised supports, independent of the main structure and shall be connected
to ground tank as well as other sanitary installations of the main structure so as to
give adequate water pressure at various taps etc.
(vii) Electrical Installation: -All electric wiring shall be with 3/22 copper wire for
light/fan points (5 AMP) and 7/22 copper wire for power points (15 AMP). The
electrical wiring shall be concealed in covered plastic battens which shall be
securely fitted with the main concrete structure. The electric boxes, of approved
make, at various locations to be provided duly covered with by hylum sheet of
suitable size in which the sockets and switches will be fitted.
(viii) Following electrical fittings should be provided at various locations in each unit as
below :-
(a) Verandah (1 No) - One tube light and 15 W CFL with holder.
(b) Office (1 No.) - One tube light, one CFL 15 W with holder, one ceiling fan,
three pin socket (15 AMP) 1 No. each.
(c) Hall (1 No.) - Two tube Light, 15 W CFL with holder, 5 AMP Socket–2
No., `15 AMP Socket – 2 No., Ceiling fans – 2 Nos.
(d) Lab Room (1 No.) - CFL with holder, tube light – 1 No., 15 AMP Socket, Ceiling
fan.
(e) Toilets (2 Nos.) - CFL with holder, tube light, 15 AMP Socket exhaust fan
(suitable size) 1 No. each in each toilet.
(f) Store (1 No.) - CFL with holder, 5 AMP Socket 1 No. each.
The contractor shall be responsible for internal fittings wirings starting from the main
switch board and the main switch board will be provided with suitable MCB as per
requirement.
Electrical installation shall be of standard make as approved by Engineer-in-charge.
Electrical motor of 0.5 hp shall be installed at approved location to lift water from ground
tank to overhead tank. This arrangement shall be provided with 15A three pin socket and
switch and copper wiring of 7/22.
Arrangement shall be made by contractor in such a way that main switch board with MCB
can be connected to main supply at a later date
ix) SANITARY INSTALLATION: -
Following sanitary fittings shall be provided in each unit separately with cistern.
TOILETS (2 Nos.):- While vitreous glazed W.C. pan with cistern of approved brand
(western style) and ‘S’ trap etc. complete. Wash basin (white vitreous) with water pipe etc.
complete. Looking glass in PVC frame fixed over wash basin, CP brass bib cock (2 Nos.), CP
brass pillar cock (1 No.), single valves (2 Nos.), with suitable connecting pipes to cistern and
wash basin complete, floor trap jail of CP brass (2Nos.) and one no. 20 liter geyser for hot
water shall also be provided in each toilet with all its accessories.
96
Pantry :- White vitreous glazed sink of size 60cm x 45cm x 25cm suitably supported on
brackets or stainless steel kitchen sink of approved quality etc. to be provided with PVC
water pipe, floor trap jail, CP brass bib cock etc. complete.
Sanitary installation as mentioned above shall be provided as complete job and shall be of
standard make as approved by Engineer at site. The description of ancillary fittings is not
exhaustive and contractor shall perform all other jobs in this connection as directed by
Engineer-in-charge/Engineer at site. All sanitary installations shall be connected to main
supply line overhead storage tank, with G.I. pipes (15mm dia) and G.I. fittings and clamps.
16.7 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
(i) Foundation and plinth: - cast in situ plum concrete of nominal mix 1:3:6 Crusher
aggregate shall be used with maximum size of aggregate 20mm.
(ii) R.C.C. Columns: -100mm x 100mm size R.C.C. columns using concrete mix of 1:2:4 with
suitable grooves to house wall panels to be used. M.S. channels to be used as shuttering. To
be cast with power vibrators or vibrating table. In place of RCC column steel column of
suitable section may also be used.
(iii) Wall Panels: -Ferro cement wall panels having thickness of 25 mm/Brick wall 230 mm
thick, to be cast with power vibrators or vibrating table concrete mix of 1:1.5:1.5 (1 part of
cement with 1.5 parts of coarse sand 4.75mm nominal size and 1.5 parts of 5mm downsize
zeera) to be used with water cement ratio of 0.3 to 0.4 depending upon weather conditions
and to be decided by engineer at site. The coarse sand shall consist of 4mm longitudinal
and transverse mild steel wires and 26 gauge wire mesh on both faces (to be placed
symmetrically on the two faces). The steel shuttering will have smooth, properly machined
surface so as to give smooth finish. In place of Z/C section I channels section may also be
used over that CGI sheet of 1 mm thick may also be used for roofing or any better material
approved by Engineer in charge.
False Ceiling with 8 mm thick plywood shall be provided with prime coat and 2 coat of
synthetic enamel paint of required colour as directed by Engineer in charge or any better
material approved by Engineer in charge.
(iv) Horizontal Joists: - Size 100mm x 100mm, it shall be designed with proper joint fastening
arrangement with columns and channels as per drawing 8mm dia reinforcement bars at
corners shall be fastened with 4mm dia. shear stirrups at 225mm c/c spacing. MS channels
shall be used as shuttering.
(v) Z/C-Section Roofing channels: - Masonry moulds shall be used reinforcement details are
shown in the drawing. Double layer of 22 gauge wire mesh shall be symmetrically place on
both faces 1:2 mix of cement and sand will be used. Suitable water proofing chemicals such
as ceco pidlite shall be used as approved by Engineer-in-charge. 28 days compressive
strength of a 70 mm cube shall not be less than 25 N/mm2.
(vi) Joinery:-Door and window frames shall be of precise RCC/ferro-cement, conforming to IS
6523-1983 specifications. The doors and windows shall be suitably fixed to the frames
with suitable hinges. Doors shutters shall be made up of 22 gauge pressed steel of the
approved pattern and design as approved by engineer-in-charge. Door frames shall be 125
x 75mm in size 1.5 x 0.9m, made of steel with steel shutter and suitable locking
arrangement, handle and glass panes, suitable fixed with shutter. Door shutters shall be,
provided with two coats of ready mixed red oxide primer and two coats of enamel paint of
approved quality and shade as approved by Engineer-in-charge. Curtain rods (metallic) of
required length with proper support brackets (wooden/metallic) shall be provided for each
door and window in the manner as approved by Engineer-in-charge.
(vii) Flooring: - Cement concrete flooring (approx. 25mm thick) shall be provided.
(viii) Steps: - Proper steps of suitable size and length to be provided between GL and plinth as
approved by Engineer-in-charge.
97
16.8 SPECIFICATION FOR FERRO CEMENT WORK:

(i) Adequate care should be taken to ensure proper clear cover on both faces of ferrocement
component any component having exposed chicken mesh will not be allowed to be used.
(ii) Power Vibrators Vibrating Table, shall be used to achieve uniform compaction finish and
texture.
(iii) Special care shall be taken while casting Z/C-Section roofing elements. The male type mould
shall be made of brick masonry with clay filling and plastered with cement mortar on the
top. Wire mesh shall be cut to a length equal to twice the length of profile of element plus
an overlap of 50mm and longitudinal direction shall be about 100mm.
(iv) Low alkali cement shall be used.
(v) Constituent material for the mix shall be mixed dry in mortar mixer, water shall then be
added in small quantities until the mix attains stiff consistency. Water quantity should be
such as it should not lead to segregation of particles as well as it should not lead to
shrinkage cracks due to excess water.
(vi) Before placing of mix, a thin coating of rich cement slurry shall be applied to reinforced cage
with a brush.
(vii) Finished elements shall be cured properly by full covering with wet gunny bags.
(viii) All members should be mould finished and no repair with cement mortar shall be allowed
afterwards.
Note - Any superior material approved by Engineer in charge. In case the tenderer/s uses
any superior material than mentioned above, this will be permitted with approval
Engineer-in-charge.
16.9 Handing over of Furnished Site Office at each location as mentioned in Contract Document.
The contractor shall hand over furnished site office at each location of site to IRCON within
4 months from the date of award of work or prior to start of physical work of tunnel
whichever is earlier.
The contractor shall provide furnishing items for use of Corporation at each of the site
offices as given below:-
(i) Steel Almirah – 4 Nos. 1980mm x 915mm x 485mm Godrej or similar make.
(ii) Steel Racks made slotted Angles & M.S. Sheets Godrej or similar make – 3 No.
(iii) Superior quality 10 Nos. Plastic molded chairs
(iv) Steel Table – 8 Nos. 54”x30”x30”(min.) with 3 drawers on one side & one cupboard
on other side with locking system on both sides with frame of 1.25mm sq. pipe of 18
gauge with nova pan/superior top.
(v) Revolving chair - 3 Nos. of revolving chair of Godrej make or equivalent.
Nothing extra shall be payable for providing the above said furnishing items.
16.10 OWNERSHIP OF SITE OFFICE AND ACCOMMODATION
The site offices including all furnishings, furniture and fittings etc. shall be the property of
IRCON.
98
17.0 CONSTRUCTION OF ACCESS ROADS & THEIR MAINTENANCE DURING CONTRACT

PERIOD BY THE CONTRACTOR
17.1 The scope of work includes construction of bituminous all-weather approach road with
carriageway of 5.5 m wide (or as per site condition or as directed by Engineer) carriageway
with earthen shoulder (one side) including protection works leading to North portal and
south portal location from NH 31A.The Contractor shall maintain these roads during
construction period of tunnel work. Upon completion of tunnel work, these access roads to
be further reinstated in good road-worthy-condition with proper drainage, cross drainage,
protection works & parapet wall including proper road sign etc wherever
required/directed by the Engineer. The routine maintenance of road will be within the
scope of work without any additional payment. Contractor has to quote rates in financial
bid accordlingly.
17.2 Any debris/landslides materials that may occur during execution of work, the same shall be
cleared by the contractor at his own cost. Decision of Engineer-in-charge in this matter shall
be final and binding.
17.3 Contractor shall be responsible for construction of any other internal or access roads apart
from the road mentioned in para 17.1, for which nothing extra shall be payable to
contractor. Accordingly, for access to dump yard including the land for contractor’s
establishments, camp office, workshop, laboratory, batching plants, material yards,
fabrication yards, explosive magazine etc. to be acquired/taken on lease basis by the
contractor at his/their own cost.
17.4 In case IRCON has its own paths, service roads, the Contractor/s will be allowed use of such
paths or service roads free of cost. He/they shall however in no way involve IRCON in any
claims or dispute of whatsoever kind due to the inaccessibility of such paths or service
roads or due to their poor condition and or maintenance or their being to be blocked
and/or closed.
17.5 MAINTENANCE OF APPROACH ROADS
17.5.1 Maintenance of all approach roads for Tunnels during the construction shall be the
responsibility of the contractor
NOTE :
1. Contractor should maintain the existing approach roads as above, including pot
holes filling, regularly grading with grader in required profile, watering, rolling,
compacting, maintaining the grade and profile of the roads with contractor’s labour,
tools, plants, material, all lead and lift, loading, unloading, transportation of
materials, complete as per directions of Engineer-in-charge for smooth movement
of Inspection vehicles and also construction equipment & heavily loaded trucks and
trailers carrying equipment and materials.
2. Regular sprinkling of water by mechanical means to ensure dust free, movement of
vehicles to meet the requirement of safety & environmental norms of IRCON shall
be the responsibility of Tunnel Contractor.
3. Maintenance and cleaning of road side drains is also covered in the scope of Tunnel
contractor at their own cost.
4. If any utilities (water line, HT line, fiber optic cable etc) near to the project area are
required to be relocated for construction of road (other than approach road),
establishment etc. The responsibility of same lies with contractor at his own cost.
5. Vehicle movement of the contractor may be restricted on NH-31A/ NH10 as per
local authority. Contractor shall conduct traffic survey on NH-31A/ NH10 and hence
should plan their maximum movements during minimum traffic time period of the
day. Contractor shall submit the NH-31A/ NH10 utilization plan before starting the
works.
99
18.0 TREATMENT OF TUNNEL EFFLUENT

18.1 The water collected at portals North and South side portals of Main Tunnels must be
treated before discharge into the river network/Natural stream.
18.2 Special attention shall be paid from the Contractor to the fact that at the portals the
available areas for positioning water treatment tanks are limited. For this reason, the
Contractor shall also realize small tanks at portal areas and appropriate pumping system
(chosen by the contractor and approved by the Engineer) in order to transfer the water to
the water treatment tanks that will be placed in adequate areas.
100
Sivok –Rangpo Rail Link Project Special Conditions of Contract Section-I
B - EXECUTION OF WORK
19.0 CONTRACTOR’S UNDERSTANDING
19.1 The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself, before tendering, as to the
correctness and sufficiency of his tender for the works and of the rates and prices stated
in the Bill of Quantities, all of which shall except in so far as it is otherwise provided in the
Contract, by actual inspection of the site, nature, the conformation of the ground, locality
of the works, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the
character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the progress of
works, the general and local conditions, the labour conditions prevailing therein and all
other matters which can in any way affect the works under the contract and that all
conditions liable to be encountered during the executions of works are taken into account
and that the rates he quoted in the tender are adequate to cover all his obligations under
the contract and all matters and things necessary for the proper completion and
maintenance of the works including defect liability period.
19.2 Inspection of Site and Site Data:
i. The Employer/Engineer shall make available with Tender Documents such

data on hydrological and sub-surface conditions, if any, obtained from
investigations undertaken relevant to the works. The tender shall be deemed
to have been based on such data, if provided, but the Contractor shall be
responsible for his own interpretation of all such data.
ii. The Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected and examined the site and
information available in connection therewith and to have satisfied himself
fully before submitting his bid about the sub-surface conditions, the
hydrological and climatic conditions, the extent and nature of work and
materials necessary for the completion of the works, the means of access to the
site and accommodation he may require. He shall also be deemed to have
obtained all necessary information regarding risks, contingencies and all other
circumstances which may influence or affect the contract.
20.0 OFFICIAL SECRETS ACT 1923

20.1 Indian Official Secrets Act 1923 (XIX of 1923) shall apply to the Contractor and persons
employed by him for this contract.
21.0 PRIORITY OF DOCUMENTS
21.1 The documents forming the Contract are to be taken as mutually explanatory of one
another. For the purposes of interpretation, the priority of the documents shall be in
accordance with the following sequence:
1. Contract Agreement.
2. Letter of Acceptance.
3. e-Procurement Notice
4. Instructions to Tenderers
5. Appendix to Tender
6. Form of Bid
7. Special Conditions of Contract– SECTION I
8. Special Conditions of Contract - SECTION IIA &IIB
101
9. General Conditions of Contract

10. Annexures / Proformas
11. Relevant codes and standards
12. Drawings
13. Schedule of Items, Quantities & Rates/ Bill of Quantities (BOQ)
14. Technical Documents - The complete list of Tender Documents - Volume II -
Technical Documents (Drawings and Reports).
21.2 If any ambiguity arises as to the meaning and intent of any portion of specifications and
drawings or any documents forming part of the Contract or as to execution or quality of
any work or material, or as to the measurement of the work the Engineer shall issue
necessary clarifications or instruction and decision of Engineer shall be final.
21.3 Any error in description, quantity or rate in Schedule of Quantities or any omission there
from shall not vitiate the contract or release the Contractor from the execution of the
whole or any part of the works comprised therein according to drawings and
specifications or from any of his obligations under the contract.
21.4 Wherever Indian codes are available the same shall be adopted. In case Indian code are
not available for any particular item of work other code shall be referred to, in the order
of preference as follows;- BS, ASTM, EC and other as approved by Engineer in charge. The
code to be followed shall be as per the instructions of Engineer-in-charge/specifications.
22.0 IMPLEMENTATION OF QUALITY, SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
22.1 Quality Management System: IRCON is an ISO Certified Company in Quality
Management System and expects the Contractor to work as per the standards.
22.1.1 The Contractor shall follow various requirement of Quality Management System of
IS/ISO-9001-2008 and Quality Policy of IRCON. The contractor already holding QMS
certificate need to act swiftly to keep it updated and fulfill various requirements at sites.
22.1.2 The contractor shall develop the Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) and Inspection and
Testing Plan (ITP) and get it approved from Project Head/ the Engineer. The records of
tests to be conducted as per ITP and Tests done actually shall also be kept by the
Contractor.
22.1.3 The Contractor shall ensure the timely calibration of all measuring and testing equipment
at his own cost from reputed laboratory and the hard copies of documented information
are to be kept ready for any time inspection by the Engineer.
22.1.4 The Contractor shall ensure maintenance and overhauling of all his plants and machinery
deployed for the works as per guidelines issued by manufacturer/ Supplier/ Vendor/
Legal Requirements/ Engineer.
22.1.5 The Contractor shall keep the hard copies of the documented information of
Manufacturer’s Test Certificates (MTCs) and Third-Party Test Certificates from approved
laboratory at his own cost, as required, for all the materials supplied by him. These
records shall be checked any time by the Engineer.
22.1.6 The contractor shall ensure the use of materials (manufactured either tailor made or
available off the shelf) of branded make/ manufactured by reputed companies. (materials
like rebars, structural steel, cement, chemicals such as admixtures, retarders,
accelerators, curing compounds, de-shuttering oils, bituminous materials- modified,
cationic emulsions, cutbacks, glass, paints of all types, bolts and nuts, all types of fasteners
etc.). To ensure quality output the contractor shall get his batching plant, crushing plant,
other mixing plants and Hot Mix Plant certified from third party existing in the approved
102
list of Quality Council of India, New Delhi.
22.1.7 The Contractor shall provide work instructions/check lists for proper execution of work.
The Contractor shall also maintain all relevant records and documents properly and same
shall be made available to the Engineer as required. The Quality checklist developed by
Quality Management Department of IRCON shall also be followed.
22.1.8 All QAO, ITP, Laboratory Formats and other documents related to quality should wear the
logo of IRCON along with that of the contractor.
22.2 Safety, Health and Environment Management System: IRCON is an ISO Certified
Company in the areas of Occupational Health & Safety and Environment Standards and
expects the Contractor to work as per the standards.
22.2.1 The Contractor shall execute the work as per Safety, Health and Environment Standard of
IRCON (attached with the tender paper). Contractor shall provide and ensure the use of
required Personal Protective Equipments (PPEs) for all workers/ staff and engineers. The
contractor shall provide and erect safety barricades as required, display safety posters
and instructions regarding safety.
22.2.2 The contractor shall prepare a Project Safety, Health and Environment Manual (SHE
manual) and get it approved by the project head. The contractor will own the ultimate
responsibility of all aspects of Safety, Health and Environmental upkeep of the work
place and its surroundings.
22.2.3 The Contractor will facilitate Safety checks, Health Checks, Environmental Checks and
checks on compliance to all the norms as per the SHE Manual and same shall be checked
by PH or the nominated Safety Officer at regular interval. IRCON has developed the
checklists on Safety, Health and Environmental issues and expects the contractor to
follow the same.
22.2.4 All check list and other documents related to SHE should wear the logo of IRCON along
with that of the contractor
22.2.5 The Employer may, at their discretion undertake such corrective measures as deemed fit
for immediate restoration of safe conditions at the work place at the cost of the
Contractor and recover the cost from Contractor's running bills. The contractor will keep
the Employer indemnified against any corrective action by the Employer. In addition to
such recourse, the penalty for each violation will be enforced as under, without issuing
any show cause notice for the same:
Sr. Nature of violation Penalty
No.
1.0 Non preparation of Site Safety Plan Rs. 10,000.00
before the first running bill
2.0 Violation of safety norms pointed out by Rs. 10,000.00 for each violation
inspecting officials, such as deficient subject to maximum 1% of the
documentations or safety gadgets or lack contract value in all.
of supervision/ process control etc.
3.0 Injury to worker leading to stoppage of Rs. 25,000.00 for each case.
work.
4.0 Fatalities to workers at work related Rs. 5.00 Lakh for each mortality.
accidents.
5.0 Repetition of violation May lead to termination of work.
103
23.0 PROGRAMME OF CONSTRUCTION
23.1 The tenderer shall submit with his offer a detailed method statement and programme of
construction. The tenderer shall also submit the details of the equipments (type, numbers
& age) which he will employ for completion of the project in time. The construction
programme shall indicate the forecast of the dates of commencement and mile stones for
completion of various activities of the work using approved software (primavera or
equivalent). In case the methodology and programme requires to be modified at a later
date, the ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR shall agree upon a time and progress chart.
Since agreement is not reached, the previous programme & mile stones remain valid. The
chart shall be prepared in direct relation to the scheduled completion time and Appendix
–X to Instruction to Tenders. It may be amended as necessary by agreement between the
ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR within the limitation of overall completion period. The
CONTRACTOR is also required to submit a quarterly rolling programme (fully trackable
with resource planning etc.) in tune with his approved construction programme for
approval of ENGINEER. This programme shall also clearly specify the catch up measures
for the delays, if any, during the duration of the rolling programme itself.
23.2 The Contractor shall submit programme to the Employer's Representative, for consent,
within the time stated in the document. The programme shall include the order in which
the Contractor proposes to carry out the Works including each stage of procurement,
manufacture, delivery to Site, construction, erection, testing etc. for major site equipment.
The equipment to be used as being part of the list mentioned in clause no. 23.1, shall be
listed for every work.
23.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, the programme shall be developed using
precedence networking techniques, showing early start, late start, early finish and late
finish dates. The links end-begin, end-end begin-begin and others required by the
working sequence shall be identifies and shown. No significant alteration to the
programme, or to such arrangements and methods, shall be made without obtaining
consent of the Employer's Representative. If the progress of the Works does not conform
to the programme, the Employer's Representative may instruct the Contractor to revise
the programme, showing the modifications necessary to achieve completion within the
Time for Completion.
23.4 (i) Within 15 days of the award of the contract, the contractor shall submit to IRCON,
Organization chart of the project with the CV of the key personnel’s to be deployed at the
project site. The scrutiny of the same will be done by the IRCON and will be approved by
the Engineer/ DDC.
23.4 (ii) Within 15 days of the award of the contract, the contractor shall submit to IRCON, date
wise list of Plants and Machinery that will be deployed at the project / work site.
23.4 (iii) Within 15 days of award of contract, the Contractor shall submit to IRCON for approval, a
Detailed Execution Programme, Plant and Machinery and Other resources deployment
programme, Cash flow statement and cumulative monthly progress plan ( in the form of S
curve). These shall be to be incorporated in the Contract Agreement after approval by
Engineer in charge.
23.4 (iv) Within 6 weeks of award of contract, the Contractor shall submit to IRCON Method
statement for various activities and Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) and start the work
after their approval.
23.4(v) Within a period of 60 days, from the date of issue of LOA or the start of construction
activity at site (whichever is earlier), the contractor shall provide & maintain for duration
of the project a web based PMIS (PROJECT MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM)
application with integrated GIS, with central server specially for the project (Contractor
shall host PMIS in a Tier Three Level Data Centre anywhere in India) and provide online
104
access to IRCON officials to monitor the progress. The contractor will prepare the
baseline program in direct relation to the time of completion and ensure weekly updating
of progress by their staff. The contractor will also develop different dashboards for
monitoring at three different levels, i.e. at Project Level, At Co-ordinating office level and
at Corporate office, i.e. Director’s level. The format of the dashboard is to be developed in
consultation with Engineer-in-charge. The contractor shall provide necessary terminal
licences of the software deployed for project management (5 nos) for monitoring by
IRCON. The contractor shall also carry out necessary changes to the work program as per
directions of IRCON.
23.4(vi) The PMIS application shall provide web-based input of Activity Data, Tunnel Attribute
Data and automatically create reports for Progress and Cost monitoring in comparison
with Schedule & Budget. PMIS Mobile Application with GIS and photo application for
Android shall also be provided. The system should have the facility to send progress via
phone messages and emails. PMIS shall also include Drawing & Document management
system; on which contractor shall upload all important documents and drawings. The
contractor shall provide three personnel at Main Project office to do Project management
data update and also uploading of Documents and Drawings for the duration of the
project till final handing over. On successful handing over of project the PMIS system
including Hardware and Software and all data shall be handed over to IRCON for
subsequent access of data. The cost of setting up the system shall be included in the
quoted rates for the work and nothing extra shall be payable
23.5 In the event of a programme being rejected, the Contractor shall, within 7 days thereafter,
submit a revised programme taking account of the reasons given for the rejection or
incorporating further information requested by the Employer's Representative, as the
case may be. Key dates remains valid and prevailing independently from the time
required for programme adjustments & approval.
23.6 Should it appear to the Employer's Representative that there is, or will be, a
significant deviation between the actual or anticipated progress of the works and
the Work Programme, the Employer's Representative shall be entitled, by written
instruction, to require the Contractor to produce a revised version showing such
modifications to the Work Programme as may be necessary to ensure or to be
consistent with the completion of the whole of the Works and the achievement of
all Stages by the Work Programme (Appendix –X to Instruction to Tenders).
Conditions are valid as per clause 23.1of Special Conditions of Contract-I.
23.7 Consent by the Employer's Representative to a Works Programme shall not relieve the
Contractor of any of his duties or responsibilities under the Contract, nor in the event that
a Work Programme indicates that a Key Date has not or will not be met, constitute any
form of acknowledgement that the Contractor is or may be entitled to an extension of
time in relation to such Key Date.
24.0 PROGRESS REPORTS
24.1 The progress reports of work at specified intervals, in the proforma as decided by
the Engineer shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer in
six copies together with soft copy. The first report shall cover the period up to the
end of the first calendar month following the commencement date.
24.2 The Contractor shall submit to the Employer's Representative by the end of each
calendar month his Monthly Progress Report which shall, amongst other things,
highlight actual or potential departures from the Work Programme and state the
measures which the Contractor proposes to take in order to make good or reduce
105
any delay.
24.3 If requested by the Employer's Representative, the Contractor shall submit to the
Employer's Representative, at weekly intervals, a written report as to the
progress of off-Site manufacture of Plant, Machinery and Materials.
24.4 The Contractor shall also submit to the Employer's Representative such other
reports as may reasonably be required by any relevant authority or public body.
24.5 The cutoff date for the progress shall be 25th of the month.
24.6 The monthly report shall include:
a. Mobilization of equipment, engineers and other staff
b. Physical progress measured in percentage terms compared with %
planned as derived from works programme.
c. Programme updates – actual dates as achieved and deviations from the
programme; separately for each activity shown on works programme on
Primavera/other project management software.
d. Copies of quality assurance documents, test results and certificates of
Materials;
e. Status of all payments due and made.
f. A report on status of any outstanding claims.
g. Interface issues with other agencies/Contractors.
h. Safety and environment; review of incidents, action taken, preventive
measures etc.
i. Photographs showing the status of progress on the Site;
j. Copies of quality assurance documents, test results and certificates of
Materials;
24.7 Reporting shall continue until the Contractor has completed all work which is
known to be outstanding at the completion date stated in the Taking-Over
Certificate for the Works.
24.8 Alternately, Contractor shall actively cooperate in case another software DB
platform should be applied on the project as base for information gathering,
management & distribution
24.9 Contractor shall also submit updated weekly progress which includes linear
progress of excavation, lining and manpower & machinery deployed.
25.0 RATE OF PROGRESS
25.1 If for any reason which does not entitle the Contractor to an extension of time, the
rate of progress of the works is at any time, in the opinion of the Employer's
Representative, too slow to ensure timely completion of the Works or
achievement of any Stage by the relevant Key Date the Employer's Representative
may so notify the Contractor in writing. The Contractor shall thereupon take such
steps as are necessary, included the increase on equipment material & workers,
technicians. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional payment for
taking such steps.
25.2 The Contractor shall take such steps as the Employer's Representative may
reasonably instruct in writing, to expedite progress so as to complete the works
or any section in time or achieve any stage by the relevant Key Date. The
Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional payment for taking such steps.
106
26.0 REJECTION
If, as a result of an examination, inspection, measurement or testing, any Plant,
Materials or workmanship is found to be defective or otherwise not in accordance
with the Contract, the Engineer may reject the Plant, Materials or Workmanship
by giving notice to the Contractor, with reasons. The Contractor shall then
promptly make good the defect and take remedial action to ensure that the item
complies with the Contract provisions and specifications. This will happen with no
compensation of costs & time.
27.0 WORKING HOURS
27.1 No work shall be carried out on the site on locally recognized days of rest or
outside the normal working hours unless (i) otherwise stated in the contract (ii)
the Engineer gives permission or (iii) the work is unavoidable or necessary for the
protection of life or property or for the safety of the workers in which case the
Contractor will immediately advise the Engineer.
27.2 If the Engineer is satisfied that the work is not likely to be completed in time
except by resorting to night working, he may permit the Contractor(s) to carry out
the works at night without conferring any right on the Contractor for claiming
extra payment for the same. The Contractor, at his own costs, shall make all
arrangements in this connection.
28.0 DUTIES AND POWERS OF ENGINEER AND ENGINEER’S REPRESENTATIVE
28.1 Duties and Authority of Engineer
The Engineer shall carryout the duties specified or implied in the Contract
including issue of instructions, decisions, certificates and orders, as are specified
in the contract, or necessary for the observance/administration of the Contract
and expeditious and timely completion of the work.
28.2 Duties and authority of Engineer's Representative
The Engineer's Representative shall be responsible to the Engineer. His duties are
to supervise the work and to test and examine any materials to be used or
workmanship employed in connection with the works. He can issue day to day
instructions to the Contractor in Site Order Book, which should be noted and
complied by the Contractor. He shall have no authority to relieve the Contractor of
any of his duties or obligations under the Contract, nor except as expressly
provided hereunder or elsewhere in the Contract, to order any work involving
delay or any extra payment by the Employer, nor to make any variation of or in
the works. He is authorized to measure the works for the purpose of payment.
28.3 The Engineer may from time to time in writing delegate to his representative any
of the powers and authorities vested in the Engineer and shall furnish to the
Contractor a copy of all such written delegation of powers and authorities. Any
written instruction or written approval given by the representative of the
Engineer to the Contractor within the terms of such delegation shall bind the
Contractor and IRCON as if such instructions had been given by the Engineer.
28.4 Failure of the Representative of the Engineer to disapprove any defective work
shall not prejudice the power of the Engineer thereafter to disapprove such
defective work or materials and to order the pulling down or removal thereof.
107
29.0 Provision of Efficient and Competent Staff

29.1 The Contractor shall employ and keep on the works at all times efficient and
competent staff to give necessary directives to his workers to see that they
execute works in a safe and proper manner. The Contractor shall employ only
such supervisors and workmen as are capable, careful, and skilled. The Engineer
shall be at liberty to object to and order the Contractor to remove forthwith from
the works, any person employed by the Contractor in or about the execution of
works or maintenance of works, who, in the opinion of the Engineer, misconducts
himself or is incompetent or negligent in the proper performance of his duties or
whose employment is otherwise considered by the Engineer to be undesirable
and such person shall not be employed again in the works without the written
permission of the Engineer. Any person so removed from the works shall be
replaced as soon as possible by a competent substitute.
29.2 The Contractor shall employ sufficient number of technical staff who shall be
qualified Graduate Engineers and Diploma holders as required for setting out
alignment, taking the established bench marks and the cross section levels
plotting the cross section levels, computation of quantities, taking measurements,
preparation of bills and also for efficient supervision of various works at different
work spots. The list of names, qualification and experience of these personnel
should be furnished along with the tender documents. The Contractor should also
submit a list of names of graduate Engineers and diploma holders with their bio-
data to IRCON within 15 days from the date of issue of letter of acceptance for
approval by the Engineer. Any further changes should be advised and got
approved and enforced without any extra cost.
29.3 The Contractor’s technical staff should be available at site to take instructions
from the Engineer. In case the Contractor fails to employ sufficient number of
qualified technical staff, IRCON reserves its right to take necessary action under
provisions of the General Conditions of Contract. Relevant costs at charge of
contractor.
29.4 Deduction of Payment on account of Non-deployment of Key personnel's:
29.4.1 The Key personnel will be those for which the CV's have been approved and are
indicated in Appendix III of ITT and at Clause No. 4 of SCC-IIA
29.4.2 The effective date of recovery will be the Key date of start of from any face.
29.4.3 Absence for more than 15 days in a month will be considered as equivalent to
non-deployment of manpower.
29.4.4 This deduction will be independent from the other deductions applicable as per
contract.
29.4.5 The maximum limit of deduction on account of non-deployment of Key
personnel's will be 1% of Original Contract Value.
29.4.6 The certification of Engineer-in-charge for non-deployment of Key personnel will
be sufficient ground for effecting deduction from each on account bill.
29.4.7 The rate of recovery per month for non-deployment of Key personal will be as
under:
108
Deduction per month in

case of Non-
Position Unit Nos.
Deployment of Key
personnel (in INR)
Project Manager No 1 1,50,000.00
Works Manager No 1 1,00,000.00
Safety Manager No 1 50,000.00
Quality Manager No 1 50,000.00
Site Manager No 1 50,000.00
Surveyor No 1 50,000.00
30.0 ENABLING WORKS
The rates quoted shall be inclusive of all enabling works such as construction
huts, stores, go-downs, workshops, maintenance places, offices, housing, labour
camp, medical facilities, access roads/service roads, transport arrangements,
drinking water facility, lighting etc. whether expressly specified or not. All
temporary access facility created during execution of works including ramps in
earthwork, concrete or masonry steps, ladders, etc. shall be treated as enabling
works.
31.0 SITE CLEARANCE
Before the work is started, the Contractor shall clear all the jungle, grass, shrubs,
trees etc., to the extent needed for the works and as directed by the Engineer. The
ground has to be leveled and rolled to achieve desired level of compaction before
starting the earthwork. The reference levels have to be taken at initially rolled
ground level. These levels will have to be taken at site by the Contractor and
IRCON representatives.
32.0 Access to Site of work
32.1 Access to Engineer
The Engineer or the Engineer's Representative, shall at all times have access to
the works and to all workshops and places, where work is being performed and
from where materials, manufactured articles or machinery are being obtained for
the works, and the Contractor shall afford every facility and every assistance in
obtaining the right to such access.
32.2 Access Road
The Contractor shall provide necessary access roads to the site of work, from the
nearest public thoroughfare/right of way, at his own cost, unless otherwise
provided for in the contract.
33.0 VARIATION IN QUANTITY OF ITEMS COVERED BY THE BILL OF QUANITITIES
Refer Clause No. 42, Part (2) of GCC Railways, November 2018 with the following
conditions:-
33.1 (i)In case of open / underground excavation, the variation limit of 25% shall apply
to the gross quantity of excavation and variation in the quantities of individual
109
rock classes shall not be subject to these limitations. The Classification of rock
decided by the Engineer shall be final.
(ii)In case of shotcrete application in the tunnel, the variation limit of 25% shall
apply to the gross quantity of shotcrete as per theoretic and surface and
variation in the quantities of individual thicknesses of shotcrete shall not be
subject to these limitations. Rebound and filling of technical over profile are not
payable and the contractor shall include their cost in the rate
(iii)In case of rock bolt installation in the tunnel and at slopes, the variation limit of
25% shall apply to the gross quantity of rock bolts and variation in the
quantities of individual types and lengths shall not be subject to these
limitations. This regulation shall also apply for fore poling and face stabilization
elements.
(iv)In case of Steel Ribs (Lattice girder, TH44 Rib, Wale beams and Conventional
Ribs) installation in tunnel the variation limit of 25% shall apply to the gross
quantity of steel rib and variation in the quantities of individual section shall
not be subject to these limitations. Weight of plates, bolts and other connection
elements is included in the rate.
(v)For the inner (secondary) tunnel lining (concrete/shotcrete) works, no limits
shall be applicable.
(vi)For any kind of dewatering, including pumping of water, and other effects of
water inflows to the tunnel, grouting, exploratory no variation limit shall apply
and the works shall be carried out by the Contractor on agreed rates, terms
&conditions irrespective of any variation.
(vii)In case of Steel Fiber and Wire mesh installation in tunnel the variation limit
of 25% shall apply to the gross quantity of steel Fiber and Wire mesh and
variation in the quantities of individual section shall not be subject to these
limitations.
34.0 COMPLETION CERTIFICATE

34.1 As soon as the work is completed, the Contractor shall give notice of such
completion, whether of the whole of the works, or of any part of the work, for
which a separate date of completion is stipulated in the contract, to the Engineer,
and the Engineer, within 30 days of receipt of such notice, shall inspect the work
and also arrange for carrying out of such tests as may be prescribed under the
contract or ordered by the Engineer. If the Engineer notices any incomplete item
of work or any defect, which is to be rectified by the Contractor, or if any part or
whole of the work fails to pass the specified tests, the Engineer shall furnish to the
Contractor, the list of all such incomplete items of work, deficiencies, defects,
failure to pass tests, etc., and may refuse to issue a Certificate of Completion to the
Contractor. If in the opinion of the Engineer the work has been satisfactorily
completed and has satisfactorily passed final test or tests that may be prescribed,
the Engineer shall issue a certificate of completion showing the date of completion
in respect of the work. The defect liability period, if any, shall commence from the
date of completion indicated in such certificate. Provided that the Engineer may
issue such a certificate with respect to any part of the works, before the
110
completion of the whole of the works, which has been so completed and/or used
by the Client/ Employer/ Engineer. When any such certificate is given in respect
of a part of the work, such part shall be considered as completed and the defect
liability period of such part shall commence from the date of completion indicated
in such certificate.
111
D-PAYMENTS
35.0 PAYMENT OF MOBILISATION ADVANCE

35.1 Conditions for Payment:
If requested by the contractor in writing, the Employer/Engineer shall make an
interest bearing mobilization advance payment to the contractor for an amount not
more than 10% (Ten percent) of the original contract value. The mobilization
Advance shall be interest bearing at the rate of 8.5% per annum for Railways
projects and Marginal Cost of Fund Based Lending Rate (MCLR) of State Bank
of India plus 1% for other than Railway project as effective on the date of
approval of payment of Mobilization Advance by the Competent Authority. Interest
will be compounded annually on reducing balance.
Payment of such advance shall be made after fulfillment of the following conditions to the
satisfaction of the Engineer:
i. Execution of the Agreement between the Engineer and the contractor.
ii. Submission of Performance Security by the contractor in accordance with
Indian Railway GCC nov-2018 cl no. 16.4 .
iii. Submission of an unconditional Bank Guarantee in the format approved by
IRCON, from a scheduled Bank in India for an amount equal to 110% of the
mobilization advance being paid and amount of interest for one year. The
Bank Guarantee may be split into separate six Bank Guarantees & each
having a minimum value of 1.5% of the original contract value. Such Bank
Guarantee shall remain effective until the advance payment along with the
interest has been recovered from the contractor. Bank Guarantee(s) for the
amount recovered from the contractor shall be released to the Contractor
progressively.
35.2 Payment:
After fulfillment of the pre-conditions as described in clause35.1 above, the mobilization
advance shall be released to the contractor in following stages:
Stage-I- Maximum 5% of contract value on fulfillment of the conditions described in clause
35.1 above.
Stage-II-Maximum 5% of contract value on establishment of site camps and offices,
mobilization of necessary Plant and Machinery and man power and other facilities for
commencement of work.
Satisfactory Utilization Certificate from the contractor for stage-I mobilization advance
should be obtained before releasing stage-II advance.
35.3 Recovery:
The recovery of mobilization advance along with upto date interest thereon shall
commence from the Contractor’s on account bills when the value of the work executed
under the contract reaches 15% of original contract value, and shall be completed when the
value of work executed reaches 85% of the original contract value. The installments on each
“on account bill” shall be on pro-rata basis.
112
In the event of amount of outstanding advance with interest thereon becoming more than
the available B.G., the contractor shall have to provide a fresh B.G. with increased amount
or provide a fresh to cover additional amount likely to be overdue beyond the existing value
of Bank Guarantee
35.4 Calculation of Interest:
Interest shall be computed on diminishing balance basis on the amount of advance
outstanding. The date of issue of cheque shall be reckoned as the date on which the
recovery has been made for purpose of computing the outstanding advance and working
out the interest.
36.0 PLANT & MACHINERY ADVANCE

36.1 For advance against new plant and equipment, bank Guarantee from scheduled Bank, on
approved format, valid till the complete recovery of advance is also acceptable in lieu of
hypothecation of plant & machinery against advance are taken.
36.2 The advance to the extent of 10% (Ten percent) of the contract amount shall
be paid to the contractor only after mobilization of new plant & machinery as
approved by engineer to site. The P&M advance shall be interest-bearing at the rate
of 8.5% per annum for Railways projects and Marginal Cost of Fund Based
Lending Rate (MCLR) of State Bank of India plus 1% for other than Railway
project as effective on the date of approval of P&M advance by the competent
authority. Interest will be compounded annually on reducing balance. The advance
shall be paid subject to following conditions-
i) Advance shall be limited only to new machinery equipment, which will not exceed 90% of
the purchase price of such equipment and will be limited to a maximum of 10% of contract
value
ii) The purchase of plant & machinery shall be done with prior approval of the
Engineer.
iii) The Plant & Machinery is to be utilized on that corresponding work till completion.
iv) The total amount of advance for plant & machinery shall be least of the following:
a. 90 % of the purchase value (as per bill) or
b. 10 % of contract value.
v) The recovery of advance shall be made on similar terms and conditions as defined for
mobilization advance.
vi) No advance is admissible for consumables, store and spare parts.
vii) The contractor/s shall hypothecate all plant & machinery to IRCON against which he takes
advances from IRCON. The document of hypothecation shall be registered with appropriate
authority and the cost thereof shall be borne by contractor. He/they shall also take
following measures:
a. Proper Endorsement to be done in registration certificate, if applicable regarding

hypothecation by the concerned transport authorities.
b. The contractor shall display words “Hypothecated to IRCON International Ltd.” In
bold letter on each plant & machinery against which advance is given.
c. The contractor shall not take away the plant & machinery from site of work nor
deploy the same at any work other than work site as per contract agreement
without written permission of site engineer.
d. Machinery for which advance is taken shall be insured by Contractor at his own
113
cost.
viii) If it is considered necessary by IRCON, the registration certificate shall be submitted by the
Contractor for custody of IRCON for grant of advance of such machinery.
37.0 ACCEPTED RATE APPLICABLE TILL THE COMPLETION OF WORK
The rates as per the accepted Bill of quantities, shall be firm and hold good till the
completion of the works, and no additional claim or amount shall be admissible on account
of fluctuations in market rates, increase in fees, royalties unless specifically provided for in
the Contract.
114
E - LABOUR
38.0 SUFFICIENCY OF LABOUR
38.1 The Contractor shall employ labour in sufficient number to maintain the required rate of
progress and to ensure workmanship of the degree specified in the contract and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
38.2 The contractor is to deploy local manpower/resources ranging from 5 to 10% to help local
participation & skill development depending on type of work.
115
F - COMPLETION AND DEFECT LIABILITY
39.0 COST OF REMEDYING DEFECTS

All works required to remedy defects or damage as may be notified by IRCON shall be
executed at the cost of the Contractor, if and to the extent that the work is attributable to:
(i) Any design for which the Contractor is responsible.
(ii) Plant, Materials or Workmanship not being in accordance with the Contract, or
(iii) Failure by the Contractor to comply with any other obligation.
40.0 FAILURE TO REMEDY DEFECTS
The remedial work will be executed at the cost of the Contractor or if the Contractor fails to
remedy any defect or damage within a reasonable time, IRCON may:
i) Carry out the work itself or by others, in a reasonable manner and at Contractor’s cost,
ii) If the defect or damage deprives IRCON of substantially the whole benefit of the Works or
any major part of the Works, terminate the Contract as a whole, or in respect of such major
part, which cannot be put to the intended use. Without prejudice to any other rights, under
the contract or otherwise, IRCON shall then be entitled to recover all sums paid for the
works or for such part plus financing cost and the cost of dismantling the same, clearing the
site and returning Plant and Materials to the Contractor.
41.0 MAINTENANCE/ DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
41.1 The maintenance period shall be 12 (Twelve) months from the date of issue of completion
certificate by the Engineer to the Contractor after satisfying himself that the works have
been carried out by the Contractor fully according to specifications and quality requirements
and are suitable for the intended purpose.
41.2 IRCON shall be entitled to an extension of the Defects Liability Period for the works or a
section if and to the extent that the works, section, after taking over, cannot be used for the
purposes for which they are intended by reason of a defect or damage.
42.0 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
42.1 Within 28 days of issue of the Letter of Acceptance from the Employer/Engineer, the
successful tenderer shall furnish to Employer/Engineer:
i) An Undertaking and/or Guarantee in the approved format from a parent company, the
identity of which shall have been submitted in writing to the Employer prior to acceptance of
the Tender and against which the Employer shall have raised no objection.
ii) In the event that the Contractor comprise of two or more members/ corporations acting in
partnership/ joint venture, each such member or corporation shall submit a parent company
Undertaking and Guarantee.
42.2 Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract Submission by the Contractor of the
requisite Performance Guarantee, Parent Company Undertakings and Written Guarantees
shall be condition precedent to the Contractor's entitlement to any payment, under the
Contract; and
42.3 Failure by the Contractor to provide Undertakings and/or Guarantees from parent company
shall entitle the Employer either to suspend the Works or to terminate the Contract
forthwith by a notice in writing to that effect. Notwithstanding that the Contractor may have
been permitted to proceed with the Works and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any
compensation whatsoever as a consequence of such suspension or termination.
116
43.0 DEFECT LIABILITY CERTIFICATE

43.1 In the contract, the expression "Defect Liability Period" shall mean the period of
defect liability prescribed elsewhere in the contract, commencing from the date of
completion of the works, as certified by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall maintain, rectify and make good at his own cost any defects/
deficiencies, which may develop in the work or as notified by the Engineer during Defect
Liability Period shall not include day to day upkeep, cleaning, custody and security of the
work.
43.2 The contract shall not be considered as completed, until a Defect Liability Certificate has
been issued by the Engineer stating that the works have been completed and maintained to
his satisfaction. Defect Liability certificate shall be issued by the Engineer, upon expiry of
Defect Liability period or as soon thereafter as any works ordered during such period, have
been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
43.3 No certificate other than "Defect Liability Certificate" shall be deemed to constitute final
approval of the work or part of the work for which it is issued.
44.0 UNFULFILLED OBLIGATIONS
Notwithstanding the issue of Defect Liability Certificate, the Contractor and the Engineer
shall remain liable for the fulfillment of any unfulfilled obligations under the provision of the
contract, prior to the issue of the Defect Liability Certificate, and for the purpose of
determination of the nature and extent of any such obligation, the contract shall be deemed
to remain in force between the parties thereto.
117
APPENDIX-I - PLAN OF TEMPORARY SITE OFFICE FOR USE BY IRCON, NF RLY AND
IRCON’S REPRESENTATIVES
Note: Plan of site office is indicative only for reference and it can vary as per site requirement.
118
Sivok –Rangpo Rail Link Project Special Conditions of Contract Section-IIA
SECTION-VI
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT SECTION-II A
119
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT – SECTION - IIA
S.No Particulars Page No
1. General description of site area & climatic conditions 119

2. Description of Works 119
3. Rainfall 119
4. Site requirement 119
5. Quality Assurance 119
6. Safety Procedures 120
7. Organization 121
8. Land 123
9. Water Supply 123
10. Power Supply 123
11. Service Roads 123
12. Working Camps 123
13. Completion Period 123
14. Programme of Work 123
15. Tunnel Construction 123
16. Photo Records of construction work 127
17. Submission of “As BUILT” Drawings 127
18. Supply of Explosives by Contractor 128
19. Laboratory Testing 128
20. Scope of Work 135
21. Non-Itemised works 135
22. Facilities to Other Contractors 135
23. Tender Drawings 136
24. Scope of Specifications 136
25. Functional Requirements 136
120
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT – SECTION– IIA

1.0 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF SITE AREA & CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
Ministry of Railways has decided to provide rail connectivity to Gangtok in Sikkim from North of
West Bengal by constructing a railway line taking off from existing railway line of Siliguri-
Alipurduar section. The line in first phase is proposed to be connected up to Rangpo a township
in Sikkim on the border of West Bengal, to be finally connected to Gangtok. The new broad-
gauge line will facilitate freight and passenger traffic from and to this region. The proposed
tunnel passes through foothills of Himalaya and is running nearly parallel to River Teesta and
National Highway NH-31A and passes through dense reserve forest of Darjeeling District of
West Bengal.
The regional geology and tectonic framework of the area indicates that the region is capable of
generating earthquake. Sikkim region lies within the ambit of the Seismic Zone-IV as per I.S.
code 1893-1984/1998/2000. With reference to the Mercalli (MI) intensity scale used for all
engineering design purposes, the region lies in the high damages risk zone (VIII) corresponding
to a magnitude of 6.7 in the Richter scale.
2.0 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS
The scope of work includes Construction of Tunnel T-6 (between Km 14+904 to Km
18+816 approx.) on Sivok (West Bengal) to Rangpo (Sikkim) New Single line BG Railway
Line Project Adit-1 of 420m including niches, drains and all other ancillary works as per
approved drawings. Cross section of the tunnels shall be as shown in the Tender Drawing in
Volume II.
The drawings are for the guidance only. The work shall be done as per final approved drawing
and as per the instruction of engineer - in -charge.
Methods for selection and adjustment of cross sections and related support measures will be
according to New Austrian Tunnelling Method (NATM).
3.0 RAINFALL
Climate of the area experiences heavy to very heavy rainfall. The average annual rainfall of the
area is of the order of 2700 mm. Monsoon period is normally from end of May to beginning of
October. The Sikkim Himalaya with rugged topography, ongoing seismic activity (by active
tectonics) and heavy rainfall is subjected to intense landslide activities. The CONTRACTOR is
advised to satisfy himself by his actual inspection of the site and also ascertain for himself the
climatic condition records from state government and/or Indian Meteorological Department
before submitting the tender.
4.0 SITE REQUIREMENTS
The bidders should visit the sites and assess for themselves the availability of resources such as
steel, cement, aggregates, water, electricity, fuel, land for disposal and skilled / unskilled
manpower as these shall have important bearing on the cost. The tenderer should also ascertain
for himself the condition of work namely approach roads and accessibility, nature of soil/rock
extent of lead/lift involved in execution of works, security requirements, weather condition etc.
5.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE
DETAILS TO BE SUBMITTED BY TENDERER AFTER AWARD OF WORK ON FOLLOWING
ASPECTS:
1. Quality policy/objectives relevant to specific elements of the contract works and the
contractor top staff organizational structure, showing that quality staff does not
depends on the production staff and that continuous improvement is a general policy of
the company in all of its activities and staff members.
2. Quality on site team members are an independent staff depending directly on the top
quality management staff of the contractor company.
3. Quality assurance plan for various construction activities specific to the contract works
4. Quality procedure for various stages of procurement and construction
121
5. Control, review and audit of the quality system, including internal and external audit’s
procedures and what obligations are assumed after audit’s conclusions.
6. Quality plan outline, where organizational structure, organogram dependencies,
functions and responsibilities, training and formation have to be underlined.
7. Demonstration that the Quality plan take under consideration the technical
specifications for materials and processes and the requirement for the equipment of the
laboratory and the technical certifications for laboratory operators and responsible.
8. Quality controls made to underline maintenance mitigation aspects for: civil works
conditions and for preventive or corrective maintenance activities required to keep or
improve the statistic incident rates for machinery and equipment leading to boost the
progress rates and the Safety Plan results.
Links with the Environmental Impact Mitigation Plan, with the Safety and Emergency Plan
outlined and with the Risk Management Plan (which is part of the Safety and Emergency Plan).
6.0 SAFETY PROCEDURES
The Contractor shall
- Comply with all applicable safety regulations,
- Take care for the safety of all persons entitled to be on the Site,
- Use reasonable efforts to keep the Site and Works clear of unnecessary
obstruction so as to avoid danger to these persons,
- Provide fencing, lighting, guarding and watching of the Works until completion
and taking over
- Provide any Temporary Works (including roadways, footways, guards and
fences) which may be necessary, because of the execution of the Works, for the
use and protection of the public and of owners and occupiers of adjacent land.
- The Contractor shall supply all necessary safety appliances such as safety
goggles, helmets, safety belts, ear plugs, masks etc. to the workers, staff and
visiting officers/guests etc.
- Keep complete functionality of the road approaches, motorable paths inside the
tunnels and exclusive and isolated paths for pedestrians inside the tunnels taken
under consideration safety aspects, rate progress duties and machinery and
equipment and installations maintenance mitigation aspects.
- Elaborate a Risk Mitigation Plan to observe and give the guides, corrections and
required improvements needed for the Safety and Emergency Plan, for the
Quality Management Plan and for the Environmental Impact Mitigation Plan
regarding the correct technical procedures followed for all the activities involved
in the Contract (production, maintenance, environment, safety and
administrative activities).
- Collective and Personal protective equipment has to be identified in the Risk
Mitigation Plan for all the activities and processes carried out on site
(productive, maintenance, environmental, administrative activities).
- Risk Mitigation Plan has to be controlled and reviewed periodically accordingly
the effectiveness of the rules, guides and improvements given in this plan as well
as per the new activities or process that appear along the evolution of the works.
- Safety on site manager and assistants have to be independent from production
site manager and staff. Safety on site manager and assistants shall show an
organization described as below.
- Elaborate an emergency plan that must provide for:
a) emergency procedures including
b) an effective response to an emergency evacuation procedures notifying emergency
service organizations at the earliest opportunity
c) medical treatment and help
d) effective communication between the person authorized by the person conducting
the business or undertaking to co-ordinate the emergency response and people at
the workplace
122
e) testingemergency procedures including the frequency of testing,

andinformation, training and instruction to relevant workers about
implementing the emergency procedures.
7.0 ORGANISATION:
The contractor shall submit to the Engineer, not later than 15 days of the award of contract, the
organization chart showing key positions, and CV’s of the incumbents and the brief job
descriptions. The Engineer shall issue Notice of “No-objection” or otherwise to the appointment
of key positions within one week. IRCON shall have the right to reject, at any time, and ask for
replacements to incumbents, due to their lack of requisite competence.
The following positions shall be considered as key positions for the entire period of tunnels
excavation and supportwith the general organogram indicated below.
Position Nos. Criteria
Project Graduate Civil Engineer/ Mining Engineer with 15 years
1
Manager professional experience in tunneling. Project Manager for at least
1 project with NATM/ observational method. The Project Manager
shall attend monthly progress review meetings, shall be
empowered by the Contractor to handle all financial issues. The
Project Manager shall attend monthly progress review meetings,
shall be empowered by the Contractor to handle all financial issues
and other described functions below.
Works 1 Graduate civil engineer with 12 years of professional experience.
Manager At least 10 years professional experience as a NATM
engineer/Geotech Engineer and completion of at least 1 NATM /
observational method projects.
QSS Graduate civil engineer with 10 years of professional experience
1
Engineer as a quantity surveyor for tunneling projects.
Quality Graduate Civil engineer with 10 years total professional
1
Manager experience. Atleast 8 years of professional experience as a Quality
Engineer.
Safety Graduate mechanical/ Civil/ any Engineer with 10 years of
1
Manager professional experience on major projects. At least 5 years as a
safety manager for major projects.
Site Graduate civil engineer with 10 years of professional experience in
4
Engineer construction of tunnels. At least 5 years’ experience in NATM /
observational method.
Shift 8 Graduate civil engineer with at least 2 years professional
Engineer experience in tunneling.
Geologist 1 Post Graduate geologist with 10 years of professional
experience for underground works’ project. At least 3 years’
experience as a geologist for NATM / observational method
projects.
Surveyor 1 Diploma in Civil/surveying with 10 years of professional
experience in surveying in civil work.
NATM 4 At least 10 years’ experience intunnel excavation and at
Foreman least 4 years’ experience of NATM / observational
method. Applicable previous experience includes work
as a foreman, miner, nozzle man, pit boss and machine
123
operator. He shall have been involved in excavation of at

least 5 km of tunnels.
At least 5 years’ experience in tunnel excavation and at least 2
4
years’ experience of NATM / observational method.
Applicable previous experience includes work as a foreman,
miner, nozzle man, pit boss and machine operator. He shall
have been involved in excavation of at least 5 km of tunnels.
 The Project Manager is responsible for the smooth running of the project and
ensuring that works programme is kept on schedule. He is responsible for their
work sites and all activities and personnel on them. He must ensure that works
conformance with the Technical Specifications. He is the direct contact person
for the Employer and the Engineer.
 The Works Manager has to coordinate and provide to the Engineer all detailed
design and calculations of parts of the works under the Contractor’s
responsibility. He has to actively coordinate the decision flow regarding Bridge
construction and related adjustments of the Support Classes. He is responsible
for construction / as-built drawings. He will work with the survey engineer,
safety manager and quality engineer to get the work mentioned above
completed.
 The Safety Managers are responsible for the safety of the Contractor’s
personnel on their sites and the safe execution of the works in accordance with
the Technical Specifications and Indian Health and Safety codes. Safety
Managers will be required to document all checks and incidents relating to site
Health and Safety.
 The Shift Engineers perform work as directed by the works Manager or his
superiors.
 The Quality Manager are responsible for the quality of all materials being used
for construction. This includes manufacture, storage, laboratory testing, in-situ
testing, compliance with standards, codes and the Technical Specifications.
Quality Engineers shall ensure that the Contractor’s Quality Assurance
Programme is being followed by the Contractor.
 The Contractor shall deploy only skilled or especially trained labour at work
faces. Machine operators are to be suitable trained for the operation of the
machines they are using. Certificates proving the skill level of Contractor
personnel shall be provided to the Engineer upon request.
 No objection by Engineer to the Contractor’s organization, shall not absolve the

Contractor of his responsibility, in any way, under the contract.
124
8.0 LAND
Land needed for sitting labour camps, site offices and workshop/laboratory etc. at work site
shall be arranged by Contractor/s at his/their own cost. Railway land to the extent available and
can be spared, may also be given to the Contractor for this purpose; however, the contractor
shall have no claim on this account.
Land for dumping of excavated material from open excavation as well as the underground
excavation shall be arranged by IRCON/Railway. However, if directed by IRCON, in case of any
delay in acquisition of land, the contractor shall take on lease requisite land through his best
efforts, at their own cost and the cost thus incurred shall be reimbursed to him on production of
proof of payment to land owner witnessed by representative of engineer-in-charge of IRCON. No
claim on account of non-availability of land for muck dumping yard will be entertained.
Dumping of excavated material shall be in accordance with the Technical Specifications.
9.0 WATER SUPPLY

Water for drinking and for the works is scarce in the project area. The Contractor shall be
responsible for making reliable arrangements for suitable water supply at his own cost for his
men and construction purpose.
10.0 POWER SUPPLY
Any electric supply required at the site of works for whatsoever purpose shall have to be
arranged by the Contractor/s. The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for electric
power supply/installation of diesel generating sets etc. as required for the work at his own cost
and the rates quoted shall include the cost of providing such electric supply arrangements
required for the works and offices / accommodations etc. All measures according to
environmental requirements and related noise and smell reduction are to be considered at
contractor’s cost.
11.0 SERVICE ROADS –
Please refer Clause 17 of SCC – I
12.0 WORKING CAMPS
It shall be desirable that the Contractor/s have their labour camps, site offices &
workshops/laboratory in one area keeping the security in view. The Contractor/s must
establish labour camps with proper facilities and should keep the areas in a neat and hygienic
condition. If female labourers are employed, crèches for their children must also be organized.
The Contractor/s shall also provide office accommodation for IRCON & Northeast Frontier
Railway and Ircon’s nominated officials in the so established camps free of any charges. After
completion of the work, the camps, if any, put up on Railway land shall be removed by the
Contractor and the land handed over free of any encumbrance.
The contractor is responsible to guarantee the security and order of the working camps
and office sites.
13.0 COMPLETION PERIOD
The completion period is as mentioned in Appendix to Tender from the date of issue of Letter
of Acceptance.
14.0 PROGRAMME OF WORK
As per relevant clause of Tender Documents – Special condition of Contract Section –I.
15.0 TUNNEL CONSTRUCTION
All tunnel construction shall be carried out according to NATM using a cyclic sequence of
excavation with subsequent installation of a primary support (outer lining) followed by the
delayed installation of a secondary lining (inner lining), according with excavation and support
drawings as per Tender Drawings.
125
The outer lining consists of fiber reinforced /plain shotcrete, steel ribs/lattice girders, rock
bolts, wire mesh, self-boring rock dowels (fore poling), fiberglass elements, as shown on the
drawings or as instructed by the DDC and shall provide the immediate support and stability to
the excavation.
The inner lining, which is either shotcrete or cast-in-place concrete, shall provide the long term
support and durability to the tunnel. It shall be reinforced or no reinforced. Embedded elements
can include in its definition. Also, it can include polypropylene fibers.
Once the working camps are set, the first activity to be done for starting the tunnel construction
is the execution of the portal structures, drains and protections.
The general recommendations and sequence of portal execution is as follows:
• Avoid unnecessary excavations.
• Create drain elements at the top, bottom and limits of the area affected by the portal.
• Arrangement of the space to create the site area required for all the related needs as
said above.
• Create the access to the top of the excavation
• Construct the contour drainage affected by the portal excavation.
• Excavate the affected area by steps, from top to bottom, protecting and supporting the
excavated area with felt, first layer of shotcrete, wiremesh, rock bolts and second layer
of shotcrete.
• Create the deep drains and weep-holes in the already supported steps and all the open
channels associated to the level of excavation.
• Continue prior steps up to reach the level of the umbrella arch.
• Create the umbrella arch, injected micropiles and reinforced beam.
• Continue the steps up to reach the level of the formation level.
• Create the provisional structure for the portal.
• Start the heading excavation accordingly the defined primary stability support. Blasting
pattern and primary stability support must be defined day by day.
• Complete the drainage at the bottom of the excavation area.
• When the excavation inside the tunnel is far enough to guarantee that the blasting does
not affect the portal slopes, start and finish the protection of the portal slopes with the
masonry walls.
• When the position of the portal is located under very steeped slopes, heavy solutions
must be implemented. In this case, micro-piles, definitive anchorages and shotcrete might
be required. As already said, always the drainage of the solution must be constructed
from the beginning of the activities. This solution is prioritized for the construction of the
portals. In the case of poor ground conditions, heavy umbrella arches will be necessary to
guarantee the stability of the portal excavation. If the Contractor has poor experience in
the construction of tunnels in soils or rock with poor characteristics, important problems
can arise as result of this lack of experience.
• Daily controlled blasting pattern. Definition of the blasting pattern day by day, using
appropriate software and experienced professionals.
• Daily controlled Geological Mapping and RESS (Rock Excavation Support System).
• Daily topographical control of the excavated cross section (laser cross section mapping)
after mucking and after applying the primary support.
• Daily 3D monitoring instrumentation control to know the behaviour of the installed
primary support and contained slopes by experienced professionals.
• Correct elaboration, application and testing of shotcrete C30/37 SFRS, energy absorption
class E700, EN14487, EN14488, EN14489.
• Correct application and testing of SWELLEX rock bolts, minimum breaking load 150 KN.
• Optimize the cycles of construction adopting proper equipment and training. For
instance, after blasting, defuming process must be carry out adopting proper aspersion
system and exhaust fans. If no proper equipment is used, only because of this simple
mismanagement in this simple activity, will suppose the delay in the rest of the cycle.
126
Another important aspect is the maintenance of the drainage conditions and the platform
for the circulation of the equipment and workers inside the tunnel. If no drainage is done
or poor maintenance conditions for the path are set, the timing for the mucking cycle
could be duplicated and the consequences for the vehicles will be: increasing damages,
more time for repair and arise of the maintenance cost. These aspects might have no
importance for whom do not have real experience in the tunnel construction, but they can
be critical.
Related with the optimization of the cycle process is the experience, training and discipline of
the team. All the members of the team have a function to fulfill in a specific period. Delays in the
activities cause delays and disorganization on the team.
After defuming the scaling and the inspection are carried out. The roof and walls should be
inspected immediately after blasting or a short section has been excavated and scaling loose
rock carried out. As rock surfaces deteriorate over time, regular follow up inspections and
scaling should be conducted on unlined tunnel areas. A risk assessment with ongoing revisions
based on the inspection results should be used to determine a suitable period for initial and
regular inspection and scaling.
At shift changes there should be a handover discussion about the status of inspections and
scaling including the areas not yet inspected and where dummy ground has been identified as
this will require scaling or ground support.
Scaling should take place:
• for drill and blast excavation after each blast when the face, roof and wall areas and spoil
heap have been washed down, and
• for other excavation methods
• at times determined by the risk assessment
• during the ground support cycle if more loose rock is revealed and as the ground
support installation moves forward from supported ground, and
• whenever the inspection shows there could be loose rock on a wall or roof.
The excavation should be washed down, for example with high pressure water before the initial
inspection. Regular inspections should continue in the unlined tunnel areas to a schedule
determined by the risk assessment.
Inspections and scaling should be conducted from supported and scaled areas. Where possible
machine scaling is preferred to hand scaling. Hand scaling at heights should be from an elevated
work platform (EWP).
Where hand scaling is done from beneath partially completed ground support, the EWP and
people working on it should be protected from falling rocks. Where ground support is needed it
should always be installed immediately after an inspection and scaling.
Dummy ground that cannot be scaled down should have ground support installed.
Mucking.
This activity requires that the path all along the tunnel for vehicles and pedestrian is in perfect
conditions, drained and tough pavement. Otherwise, accidents and breakdowns in the
machinery can happen and the progress rate will be reduced drastically. Also, the path has to be
illuminated and a fence has to separate the path for vehicles from the path for pedestrians.
Proper equipment has to carry out this activity accordingly with the dimensions of the tunnels
and the type of excavation method. Also, it is necessary to consider the flexibility of the
machinery to carry out different activities with the same machine modifying only the tool to
them (e.g. an excavator can use the bucket to load the trucks and use a hammer do the scaling).
The use of wheels or chains for the equipment is important to avoid breakdowns and reduce
corrective maintenance activities.
Signalling system to guide the circulation of the trucks and other machinery and to control the
access to the tunnels can be interesting if many front faces are developed at the same time
inside the tunnel. It is important that the Contractor has to provide to himself the spaces to
allow that two trucks can overpass inside the tunnel and the signalling to indicate the drivers
127
where to wait to avoid wasting times or rear movements during mucking. The control of the
concentration of the gases is also important during this activity. The tunnel ventilation has to
work with more intensity during this period.
The material excavated from the front faces can help in auxiliary activities like obtaining gravel
material to use in provisional paths or provisional drains. The contractor has to consider the use
of part of the excavated material for auxiliary activities to mitigate the environmental impact. If
the rock excavated is useful to use for aggregates for mortars or concretes, the Contractor has to
make the required tests to demonstrate that the material fulfil all the technical for that use.
Topographic control of the excavated tunnel cross sections has to be done after mucking, prior
to installing the primary support and after installing it to control excavated volumes or ground
and to control primary supports geometry, location and shotcrete volumes and thickness. This
control also serves to decide where to apply additional shotcrete to accommodate the water
proofing system, accordingly technical specifications.
Ground support.
Most tunnels need permanent ground support. Temporary support is installed followed by a
permanent lining.
Extra ground support or overhead protection may be needed to provide protection during the
construction phase. Often the planned ground support varies as the tunnel dimensions or
ground conditions change. The locations of changes should be included in the design
documentation. The ground support installed as a tunnel progresses will often alter with
exposure. This change may be from actual ground conditions or experience gained from
monitoring the performance of the supports.
Installing ground support should be done from areas where ground support has already been
installed or using equipment which provides overhead protection for the operator or installer.
Control measures are implemented to avoid ground or materials like shotcrete falling on people.
Risks from falling objects should be minimised, so far as is reasonably practicable, by providing
effective barricading to stop people from accessing high risk areas. The potential for serious
injuries from falling shotcrete is equal to those from falling rock.
The ground conditions should be inspected in line with the inspection plan as the excavation
progresses. The results should be assessed and if conditions have changed from the original
design the ground support control measures may need to change. A competent person should
inspect, test and assess the ground support system including anchor testing of rock bolts,
strength tests for shotcrete and concrete linings so necessary changes can be made to the
specification. Each ground support method or type has its own hazards and risks during the
installation process which must be eliminated or minimised, so far as is reasonably practicable.
Keep drained conditions is a rule to follow to avoid problems with ground instabilities, over
breaks, keep safety conditions inside the tunnel and avoid losses in progress rates.
The environment has been defined to mean surrounding area including human and natural
resources to be affected by execution and after completion of works.
The Contractor shall take all precautions for safeguarding the environment during the course of
the construction of the works. He shall abide by all prevalent laws, rules and regulations
governing pollution and environmental protection.
The Contractor shall prohibit employees from unauthorized use of explosives, poaching wildlife
and cutting trees. The Contractor shall be responsible for the action of his employees.
The Contractor is expected to arrange and execute the Works in such a way that existing
environmental conditions are not deteriorated. Borrow pits and dumping sites used by the
contractor shall be reinstated at his own cost by grass and/or tree plantation.
Written instruction/approval must be given to seek from the Engineer regarding protection and
reinstatement of environment throughout the Contract period. Failure in compliance with
Engineer's instructions in respect of overall standard will lead to reduction or withhold of
payment.
Further, any serious deterioration in the environment including pollution attributable to
Contractor as determined by the Engineer, may result in deduction of actual expenditures
incurred in their reinstatement done through separate agency, from any money due to the
128
Contractor.
The Contractor shall arrange and execute works as well as related activities in such a way that
environmental conditions are reinstated. He may be required to carry out filling, removal and
disposal works along with plantation of grass and trees as directed by the Engineer at his own
costs at identified locations to reinstate environment.
Written instruction/approval shall be given by/sought from the Engineer regarding
reinstatement of environment both during and after completion of works and up to the end of
Defects Liability Period.
16.0 PHOTO RECORDS OF CONSTRUCTION WORK
(1) The contractor is required to take pre-condition survey of the existing conditions of buildings,
Nallahs and Roads by means of photos or videos prior to the starting of work.
(2) The Contractor is required to take and supply to the Engineer coloured photographs on
construction
o activities. The digital photographs shall be taken by the Contractor of all the
construction activities pertaining to the work at regular intervals as directed by the Engineer.
All photos shall be provided to the Engineer in digital forms. Three sets 5” X 3” prints of each
snap shall be supplied. The quantum shall involve a minimum of 20 snaps per month. Out of the
above the Contractor shall be required to supply as directed by the Engineer, blow up size
coloured prints of up to 36” X 24” size of 5 photographs per month. The soft copy of all the
photographs taken shall also be supplied to the Engineer. The Contractor shall show extreme
promptness in taking and supplying the photographs on the action of the Engineer.
(3) The Contractor shall keep a record of the construction activities on the site(s) by having
DVD/VCD. This shall be having script approved by the IRCON and shall have suitable editing,
background music and with special effects so as to have a final 45 minutes to 60 minutes (or as
directed by the Engineer) version of the CD giving the details of the construction activities right
from the beginning to the end for construction site. IRCON shall be supplied the master copy of
the above documentary.
(4) All the cost of reels & CD, taking and recording, developing and printing extra shall be deemed
to have been included in rates quoted against various items and nothing extra shall be paid for
the item of work under this Clause as above.
(5) IRCON shall have full ownership and copyright of all the photographs, Video, CD and the
Contractor shall indemnify IRCON against any claim of any sort.
17.0 SUBMISSION OF “AS BUILT/CONSTRUCTED DRAWINGS & DOCUMENTS”
On completion of the works, the Contractor shall arrange to furnish to IRCON three (3) bound
sets of all “As constructed” drawings for every component of the work, specifications and other
documents in Hard copies as well as in soft copy adopted in the execution of the work at his own
cost. The drawings, specifications and other documents submitted by the Contractor shall be
verified and approved by the Engineer. Then the Contractor shall supply such further copies of
the “As constructed drawings”, specification and other documents as the Engineer may require
for the use of Employer. The completion Certificate of his Work shall not be issued by the
Engineer in the event of the Contractor’s failure to furnish the aforesaid “As Constructed
drawings & other Documents” for the entire works.
Some of the documents which are to be submitted by contractor in the required format are as
under:-
(i) Geological face map after each round.
(ii) Rock classification & support installed in every length of tunnel or in every round.
(iii) Actual Geology encountered chain-age wise in whole length of main tunnel / escape tunnel.
(iv) Support installed during restoration work / rectification work at location of cavity / excessive
deformation
129
(v) Type & location of Geo technical monitoring section & 3D monitoring section installed in the
tunnel
(vi) Record on final lining (class thickness, invert, reinforcement)
(vii) Any other document required for record and future reference in the required format.
18.0 SUPPLY OF EXPLOSIVES BY CONTRACTOR

18.1 The contractor/s will make his/their own arrangements for the procurement & storage of
explosives and detonators needed for the tunneling works at suitably located primary
magazines. The contractors may draw their requirements of explosives from primary magazines
and arrange to transport and store them in convenient quantities at the tunnel site in their own
regular or portable magazines under their own license. The contractor shall maintain day-to-
day record of consumption of explosives & detonators as per latest guidelines of DGMS.
18.2 For the storage as well as use of the explosives, the contractor shall get the necessary
clearance/license from the authorities concerned and shall employ persons with
competency certificates.
Contractor has to guarantee the security and guard of the storage houses for explosives and
detonators. The security and guard also include the transportation time between the storage
house and the different front faces.
Contractor has to record the inputs and outputs of the consumption of explosives day by day for
each front face and has to control the death-line dates of the explosives periodically.
Contractor has to set an emergency plan to follow in case of failure total or partial of the blasting
process. The explosive and detonators with failure after blasting process have to be destroyed
(burnt) and have to be quantified and recorded and, in fact, being witness of its destruction.
19.0 LABORATORY TESTING

Contractor will be required to establish a field laboratory at his own cost at work site or at any
other location as directed by the Engineer to carry out all requisite tests at his own cost. The
laboratory shall be equipped with necessary equipment to carry out various tests such as sieve
analysis, compression test on cubes, slump test, workability test etc. on aggregates, cement
water and concrete as required for ensuring the required quality and standard conforming to
codal provision and specifications. All the pressure gauges, machines, equipment and other
measuring and testing equipment of laboratory shall be got checked/calibrated regularly as
directed by the Engineer and necessary certificates shall be furnished to him.
All tests required as per relevant IS Codes/specifications on cement and steel shall be carried
out by order of the Contractor from authorized Technical Institutions/Test houses as approved
and directed by the Engineer. For other materials such as sand, aggregates, concrete etc. tests
shall be carried out by Contractor in his field laboratory as per relevant specifications.
Laboratory has to be provided to test samples, at least, of aggregates, concrete, plain shotcrete
or SFRS shotcrete and rock bolts.
Minimum equipment include:
Slump Cone with Base and Graduated Tamping Rod 3 Sets
Heavy Duty Concrete Cube Moulds, 150 mm cubes, with Base 12 Sets
Concrete Cube Crushing (set) Machine with Spherically Seated Block
and Platens for Mortar Test 3 Set
Mortar Flow Apparatus with Cone 2 Sets
Vicat Apparatus 1 Set
Standard Sieves for Aggregate 2 Sets
Electric Oven 1 N°
130
Nuclear gauge to control the density for compaction works 1 N°
131
Energy Absorption Class-Plate Test for the shotcrete has to be done, also, in the on site
laboratory installation.
Indoor water tanks to keep samples in saturated conditions is also to include in the laboratory
on site installation.
Drilling machines to extract core samples from concrete or shotcrete for different diameters
on site is also to be provided to test in the on site laboratory the material really installed.
Sets to make pullout tests into the tunnels accordingly the typology of rock bolt have to be
provided (self-drilling swellex, IBO and SN rock bolts).
The ends of all cylindrical test specimens that are not plane within 0.05 mm shall be capped.
Capped surfaces shall not depart from a plane by more than 0.05 mm and shall be
approximately at right angles to the axis of the specimens. The planeness of the cap shall be
checked by means of a straight edge and feeler gauge, making a minimum of three
measurements on different diameters. Caps shall be made as thin a practicable and shall not
flow or fracture when the specimen is tested. Capping shall be carried out according to one of
the following methods. Levelling the cylinder samples of shotcrete and concrete by the way of
the sulphur capping has to be done in all the concrete or shotcrete samples submitted to
compressing tests. Just prior to testing, the cylindrical specimens may be capped with a
sulphur mixture consisting of I part sulphur to 2 or 3 parts of inert filler, such as fire-clay. The
specimens shall be securely held in a special jig so that the caps formed have true plane
surfaces. Care shall be taken to ensure that the sulphur compound is not over-heated as it will
not then develop the required compressive strength. Sulphur caps shall be allowed to harden
for at least 2 hours before applying the load.
Shotcrete, Acceptable equipment and personnel: Prior to placement of any shotcrete for
payment, the contractor should demonstrate the acceptable performance of equipment and
personnel. This is done by the fabrication of a series of test panels for each nozzle man. These
132
test panels may also serve for approval of the materials and mixture proportions.
Test panels: Fabrication of test panels mounted in a framework is the typical way to evaluate
the shotcrete process. A separate panel should be fabricated for each nozzle man, for each
shooting position to be encountered in the structure; e.g., slab, vertical, or overhead. Where
the field shotcrete will contain reinforcement, this should be duplicated in at least part of the
panels to show whether sound shotcrete is obtained behind reinforcing bars or wire fabric.
Each panel should be large enough to obtain all the test specimens needed and also large
enough to indicate what quality and uniformity may be expected in the structure: not less than
30 inches square for mortar mixtures and not less than 36 inches square for concrete
mixtures. The thickness should equal that of the structure but should measure no less than 3
inches.
Specimen testing: At least five cubes or cores should be extracted from the interior (at least 4
inches from the edge) of each panel for testing. Cores should have a minimum diameter of 3
inches and a length-to-diameter ratio (L/D) of at least one, if possible. Core strengths should
be corrected for L/D as described in CRD-C 27 (ASTM C 42). Cube strengths may be reported
as determined, or converted to cylinder (L/D = 2) strengths by multiplying by the factor 0.85.
Panels should be cored or sawn no sooner than after 7 days of standard curing. The specimens
should be tested in compression at 28 days to evaluate the mixture performance.
It is not necessary to test at such a late age to evaluate the process. Depending on the expected
strengths, testing at 7 or 14 days is adequate to determine the suitability of the nozzle men and
process.
Beams for toughness evaluation and flexural strength testing can be sawn from the test panels.
Typical beam dimensions are 4 by 4 by 16 inches.
Beams must be sawn from the interior of the panel and not closer than 4 inches from any edge.
Beams must be tested in the same orientation as shotcrete on the structure. For example,
shotcrete for thin linings results in a fiber orientation parallel to the finished surface. Beams
sawn from test panels should be tested with the shot surface normal to the load application.
Visual examination: Visual examination of sawn surfaces is the best method of determining the
uniformity of the shotcrete. Panels should be sawn into quadrants after 7 days of standard
curing. The cut surfaces of the specimens should be carefully examined, and additional surfaces
should be exposed by sawing the panel when this is considered necessary to check the
soundness and uniformity of the material. All cut and broken surfaces should be dense and
substantially free from laminations and sand pockets.
Accelerated testing: Often it is advantageous to correlate accelerated strength development of
the shotcrete mixtures with the standard laboratory strength development. This correlation will
allow determination of mixture performance at ages of 3 to 5 days. Special equipment and
extensive laboratory evaluations are necessary prior to construction for this testing procedure.
Load deflection testing: Fiber shotcrete performance should be specified by use of toughness
index values as determined by CRD-C 65 (ASTM C 1018). The test procedure should be done
using the specified equipment, preferably a deflection control testing machine of sufficient
stiffness to not bias the results. Toughness index values, termed I5, I10, and I20, should be
selected to be compatible with project service conditions.
133
Other tests: Tests for absorption, drying shrinkage, resistance to freezing and thawing, and
other properties may also be made if desired, using appropriate specimens cored or sawed from
the panels.
Typically, preconstruction testing and evaluation must precede the actual work by more than 30
days to allow time for nozzle man certification at the start and ending with strength testing at
28 days. This protracted start-up period may add significant costs to a small repair contract and
may delay the start of actual construction.
In the case where previous acceptable mixture proportions information is available for the
proposed materials and proportions, it may be advantageous to eliminate the later-age testing
of the shotcrete mixture. Some contracting organizations have found it cost effective to evaluate
the nozzle man and equipment at a site convenient to the contractor, often in conjunction with
the contractor’s ongoing work, to eliminate the early mobilization and extended standby time of
equipment and personnel.
Shotcrete. Main specification for shotcrete C30/37, energy absorption class E700, EN14487,
EN14488, EN14489 with glued steel fibers.
 Use the EN 14889-1 Fibres for concrete – Part 1: Steel fibres – Definition, specifications
and conformity.
 Use of European standard EN 14487-1.
 Minimum fiber recommendations for sprayed concrete
Fibres to comply with European standard EN 14889-1: minimum dosage (kg/m3) required per
fibre type.
Fibres with CE marking system 1, steel fibre for structural use (conform EN 14889-1- 2006).
Fibres out of drawn wire, with a tensile strength of steel wire > 1.000 MPa min.
Dimensional tolerances in accordance with the table below:
Deviation of the
Deviation of the individual
average value
Property Symbol value relative to the
relative to the
declared value
declared value
Length and
developed height I, Id (If ±5%
± 10 %
> 30 mm applicable) ± 1,5 mm
≤ 30 mm
(Equivalent)
diameter ±5%
d ± 10 %
> 0,30 mm ± 0,015 mm
≤ 0,30 mm
Length/diameter
λ ± 15 % ± 7,5 %
ratio
Fibre length: in the range of 30-35 mm.
134
Maximum fibre length: 2/3 of the hose diameter of the spraying machine.
Minimum fibre length: 2 times the maximum coarse aggregate size.
Glued fibres for improving homogeneous distribution.
• Minimum dosage in situ based on minimum overlap. According to the European
standard EN 14487-1, the average distance (s) between steel fibres should be lower than 0,45 lf
in order to ensure a minimum overlap between fibres.
• Minimum total fibre length in situ. In order to ensure the minimum network effect to
provide a specific multicrack process generating the redistribution of the loads through the
crack-bridging steel, it is recommended a minimum steel fibre length per cubic meter concrete
of 10.000 ml/m3.
• The European standard EN 14487-1 mentions the different ways of specifying the
ductility of fiber reinforced sprayed concrete in terms of residual strength and energy
absorption capacity. It also mentions that both ways are not exactly comparable.
The residual strength can be prescribed when the concrete characteristics are used in a
structural design model.
The energy absorption value measured on a panel can be prescribed when - in case of
rockbolting - emphasis is put on energy which has to be absorbed during the deformation of the
rock. (Especially useful for primary sprayed concrete linings). The test plate usually used
(600 x 600 x 100 mm panels) (see EN 14488-5) is designed to determine the energy absorbed
from the load/deflection curve. Conformity for energy absorption capacity is obtained when at
least two of three test panels have an energy absorption capacity not lower than the specified
energy absorption capacity according to the specified class given.
• 700 Joules for medium ground/rock conditions is recommended as minimum value,
accordingly EN 14488-5 test.
• Minimum residual strength S3D1 for a reference concrete M25, accordingly EN 14488-3.
• Characterize the SFRS accordingly RILEM TC 162-TDF.
• Set the quality control tests to check the behaviour of the SFRS for definition and for
construction.
Toughness tests. The test mixtures, in the case of sprayed concrete prepared by the wet method
fiber reinforced steel, should provide enough steel fibers per cubic meter (m) ³ concrete so that
the absorbed energy is at least 700 joules, determined on three test trials under Rule "Energy
Absorption Class-Plate Test" of the EFNARC. Anyway, in no case lower amounts of fiber will be
accepted at 30 kgf / m3 shotcrete placed.
During the construction phase and as an alternative to the Standard EFNARC they may carry
residual strength tests beams to measure the toughness of shotcrete. In these cases at least one
panel for testing residual strength for each test mixture is taken shotcrete. The panel for cutting
the joists used in the assay should be useful residual strength dimensions of 600 mm long, 450
mm wide and 150 mm thick.
The panel thus obtained should be cut three-dimensional beams 150 mm x 150 mm x 600 mm.
The beams are tested at 28 days of the concrete applied after being cured in water for at least
three days immediately before testing. The beams are tested in accordance with the bending
135
test loads at the third light. The strain rate in the center of the light must be 0.25 mm ± 0.05 mm
per minute to a deflection of 0.5 mm. From this point deflection rate can be increased to 1.0 mm
per minute.
The curve load/ deflection at the midspan should be recorded continuously. The test may be
terminated when the deflection at the center of the light is of 4mm. Residual values registered
concrete strength should be at least those listed in next table for different levels of deflection:
Deflection at the Residual Resistance

midspan (mm) (MPa)
0,5 2,5
1,0 2,3
2 2,0
4 1,5
So that the mixture meets the requirements of toughness residual strength test, at least two of
the three beams must meet specifications.
In the event that one of the beams present below those indicated in table above values, are
deemed to meet the requirements shotcrete toughness, only if the toughness values obtained in
the beam that does not meet table above, are higher than those indicated in table below,
minimal residual resistance to the beam that does not meet the criteria in table above.
Deflection at the mid- Residual Resistance

span (mm) (MPa)
0,5 1,5
1,0 1,3
2 1,0
4 0,5
These kinds of tests shall be done to identify the composition and to verify the quality of the
shotcrete along the tunnel construction.
Pull-out test for rock bolts:
Rock bolts are installed in the same manner and material as their intended construction use.
They are pulled out hydraulically and at the same time the displacement of the bolts head is
measured. The rock bolts are pulled until the anchor system or the rock fails. The results from
the testing are calculated from the plot of load versus displacement and that gives us the
ultimate and working capacities of the rock bolts.
The objective of pull out testing is to measure the working and ultimate capacities of a rock bolt
anchor. Ultimate capacity is the maximum load sustained by the anchor system and working
capacity is the load on the anchor system at which significantly increasing displacement begins.
Load is the total axial force on the rock bolt. The displacement is an important measure to find
the ultimate and working capacities. The displacement is the movement of the rock bolt head.
Failure in rock bolt testing happens when the anchor system or rock are not able to sustain
increased load without rapidly increasing deformation. Sometimes the peak load itself cannot
136
be sustained.
Pull-out testing does not measure the entire roof support system nor include tests for pre-
stressed bolts or evaluation on mine roof support system. Pull-out tests apply to mechanically,
cement- and resin-grouted, or other similar anchor systems. Information gathered from pull-out
tests may give a quantitative measure of the relative performance of different anchor systems in
the same rock type. Data from the testing can be used to select a suitable anchor type and
determine bolt length, spacing and size.
Regarding the number of tests to be performed, ensure the suitability of the bolt in the different
ground classes that are to be used, making the tests before the tunnel excavation on slopes with
similar conditions. Subsequently, confirm the results of these tests a priori, by testing in the rock
bolts after into the tunnel.
Quality control ensures proper placement of bolts also during the installation checking the pre-
determined pressure in each of them, which can guarantee the proper expansion and the proper
locking in the ground is reached. Thus, the function of anchor bolts can be controlled at any time
after installation.
As additional quality control, testing and pulling a rock-bolt placed (and no bolts placed
especially for testing) is executed, checking an average of 5% of the installed bolts periodically
1-3 days and randomly selecting the rounds and bolts within it in which the tests will be carried
out. The test has to be representative of a stretch of the tunnel where the rock bolts have been
installed.
In this case the pull-out test is made on the installed rock-bolts. The results has to be coherent
with the length of the tested rock bolt and with the resistance obtained in prior tests carried out.
No failures in the pull strength at a rate higher than 10% of the bolts tested will be allowed. If
this happens, additional 3 pull-out tests will be carry out in the same representative stretch. If
the result shows new failures below 10% of expected resistance, the replacement of defective
bolts has to be done, as well as the installation of additional rock bolts to complete the expected
global rock bolt capacity into the stretch affected by the results.
20.0 SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of work is described at Annexure I of e-Procurement Notice. However, the scope of
work given at Annexure I of e-Procurement Notice is only indicative.
21.0 NON-ITEMISED WORKS
Should there arise any items which may be necessary for the completion of work but which does
not appear in the Schedule of Items, Rates and Quantities attached with tenders, the same shall
be executed at the negotiated rate agreed upon and/or its rate will be fixed by analysis of actual
inputs required of all types including labour, material & machinery before commencement of
such works. The contractor will provide detail price break down & analysis for every such new
rate. No items of work requiring non-schedule rates will be carried unless ordered to do so by
the Engineer. Such works may also be got executed through any other agency at the discretion
of Engineer.
22.0 FACILITIES TO OTHER CONTRACTORS
The Contractor shall be required to hand over the site to IRCON immediately on completion of
the same within the construction period as stipulated and/or as directed by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall immediately remove his/her plant, equipment and machinery etc. from the site.
The Contractor shall, in accordance with the requirements of the Engineer afford all reasonable
facilities to other Contractors engaged concurrently on separate contracts in connection with
the works and for departmental labour or statutory body which may be employed at the site for
137
execution of any work not included in the contract or of any contract which IRCON may enter
into in connection with or ancillary to the works.
23.0 TENDER DRAWINGS

The information contained in the tender drawings shall be indicative and guidance only. The
contractor shall execute the works as per the approved construction drawings and
specifications or as approved by DDC and Engineer.
24.0 SCOPE OF SPECIFICATIONS
1. This Specification defines materials, methods and workmanship required for the
Construction Works under the present work of T-6 & Adit.
2. This Specification covers surface excavation, portal slope stabilization measures as well
as the underground construction works.
3. For the underground excavation works, this Specification has been prepared for the
New Austrian Tunneling Method (NATM). It defines the requirements for the execution
of tunnel works in any type of rock / soil formation.
4. This Specification defines the requirements for the main items for the Construction
Works. For any item, which is not covered by this Specification, a Standard shall be
applied as agreed between the Engineer and the Contractor.
5. Works under this Specification include construction of all underground structures,
including furnishing and servicing of all plants, labour, equipment, and all other
consumables and incidentals required for the execution and completion of the
underground works as specified.
6. All works at the tunnel entrance including support of portal slope and lateral slopes and
any protective safety measures.
7. Following works shall be excluded from this Specification:
a. Installation of bench marks, bi reflex targets, pressure cells,instruments and
geotechnical monitoring except the provision of support by labour and equipment
required for the installation of instruments and monitoring.
b. Works related to the construction and installation of the electrical and mechanical
facilities, except civil works associated with the underground works as specified
c. The CONTRACTOR shall provide for and carry out, in whatever materials encountered
all underground excavation and structural works as specified.
25.0 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS:
The work is required to be completed in a period as mentioned in Appendix to Tender. The
contractor will be required to make good progress consistently, as mentioned hereunder, to
meet the key Dates as per Appendix – XV to Instructions to Tenderers. Following table is for
reference purpose only and indicates the broad requirements for tunnel mining and concrete
lining.
Main Tunnel Average weekly progress in Average monthly progress in all
(Each face) all kind of strata excavation kind of strata excavation 100 m,
25 m upgrading excavation
Adit Tunnel Average weekly progress in Average monthly progress in all
(Single face) all kind of strata excavation kind of strata excavation 120 m
30 m
Tunnel lining Overall Average weekly Overall Average monthly
(Each face) progress 28 m in Main progress 120 m in Main Tunnel
Tunnel
138
In addition to special conditions and specifications, the minimum functional requirements to

meet the schedule are:
1. Only skilled or specially trained workers shall be deployed at the excavation face.
2. Excavation and support sequences in accordance with the Support Class drawings shall
be followed. It is mandatory to subdivide the excavation face into Top Heading, Bench
and Invert (where an Invert is requiredand if that is defined in project drawings) as per
the drawings or as directed by engineer. Drainage system is considered part of the
support system.
3. Lining work along Main Tunnel has to commence as per the program given in Appendix-
XV of Instructions to Tenderer and progress concurrently. Proper logistics for enabling
these activities like properly designed form-work permitting movement across site,
Invert Bridge etc will be required. Lining include all the details and embedded parts
defined in the project drawings and specifications.
4. Properly designed transportation logistics for heavy requirements of muck removal,
feeding of lattice girders, shotcrete, concrete and other construction material at tunnel
excavation and lining locations.
5. Movements of heavy excavation equipment, boomer, shotcrete robots etc as a part of
overall logistics.
6. The proposed selection of Equipment, like tunneling excavators, loaders etc shall meet
the required high-performance rates. Proven machine types and models with rock
cutting/handling capacity as per the tunnel cross section and drive lengths only shall be
deployed.
7. Considering the requirement of high progress and shorter cycle time, special tunneling
excavators e.g. Liebherr Make series 900 or other equivalent make are considered
essential. These shall be equipped with quick-change devices for fast switch over of
various attachments i.e ripping bucket, normal bucket, rock breaker and working
platform etc.
8. Niches at appropriate locations shall be provided for reversing of vehicles passing places
etc. These are not compensated as far not part of the final layout of the project.
9. All electrical & mechanical backup system of the machines including slow and fast
consumable spares and wear parts to be procured/ installed along with training of
personnel in each field. The services like air & water shall be installed in a professional
manner and to be of adequate capacity and quantity to sustain the field requirements.
10. Electrical equipment shall be used to the best possible extent to reduce air pollution in
the tunnel.
11. Equipment with combustion engines shall be fitted with suitable exhaust fume filters.
12. Each tunnel face shall be lit sufficiently during operations, in particular during sprayed
concrete application.
13. All equipment as a liquidity damage appropriate shall have quick couplings for all supply
connections of water, electricity and compressed air.
14. Signaling system to control the circulation of the vehicles and pedestrians inside the
tunnels to mitigate accidents and break downs and improve progress rates.
139
Sivok-Rangpo Rail Link Project Special Conditions of Contract Section II B
SECTION- VII
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT SECTION-IIB
140
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sl. No. Contents Page No.
1.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 176
1.1 Scope of Work 176
1.2 Submittals 176
1.3 Installations and Services for the Contractor's Use 177
1.4 Communication System 178
1.5 Camps for Contractor’s Employees 178
1.6 Medical Facilities 179
1.7 Power Supply and Illumination 179
1.8 Earthing of Wet-Work Areas, Control of Electric Discharges 180
1.9 Air Ventilation System of Underground Works 180
1.10 Ventilation System for Tunnel Excavation 181
1.11 Air Cooling in Underground Works 182
1.12 Control of Dust, Silica And Noxious Gases in Underground Works 182
1.13 Water Supply 184
1.14 Sanitation and Sewerage 184
1.15 Waste and Garbage Disposal 185
1.16 Fencing and Site Security 185
1.17 Setting Up of Field Laboratory 185
1.18 Inspection by the Engineer 186
1.19 Final Clean –Up 186
1.20 Payment for Site Installations and Services 186
2. SURVEYING 187
2.2 Materials and Instruments 187
2.3 Execution 188
2.4 Preparatory Works 188
2.5 Survey of Ground Profiles 189
2.6 Setting out of Works 189
2.7 Setting out Checks 189
2.8 Tunnel Alignment and Gradients 189
2.9 Tolerances 190
2.10 Subsidiary Monuments and Benchmarks 190
2.11 Handing-Over of Basic Survey Data 190
2.12 Measurements 191
3.0 MATERIALS FOR CONSTRUCTION 192
3.2 Submittals 192
3.3 Standards 192
3.4 Stone 193
3.5 Aggregates 193
3.6 Water 197
3.7 Cement 198
3.8 Steel for Reinforcement 199
3.9 Structural Steel 199
3.10 Steel Fibers 199
3.11 Welded Wire Mesh 200
141
Sl. No. Contents Page No.

4. EARTHWORKS 201
4.2 Submittals 202
4.3 Excavation of Open Cuts 203
4.4 Disposal of Excavated Materials 203
4.5 Drainage 203
4.6 Measurement and Payments 204
4.7 Backfill 204
4.8 Payment of Backfill 204
4.9 Exclusions 205
4.10 Micropiles 205
4.11 Permanent pre-stressed anchores 206
5. UNDERGROUND EXCAVATION 210

5.1 General 210
5.2 Execution 211
5.3 Measurement 220
5.4 Payment 221
5.5 Geotechnical and Instrumentation 222
6. PROFILE CONTROL AND TOLERANCES 223
6.1 Profile Control 223
6.2 Construction Tolerances 224
7. ROCK CLASSIFICATION 225
7.1 General 225
7.2 Application and Procedure 225
7.3 System Description 225
7.4 Ground Types 226
7.5 Ground Behaviour Type 226
7.6 Rock Classes 227
7.7 Payment 227
8. PRIMARY TUNNEL SUPPORT 228
8.1 General 228
8.2 General Requirements 228
8.3 Sprayed Concrete (Shotcrete) 229
8.4 Reinforcing steel 245
8.5 Steel Ribs 246
8.6 Fore Poling 250
8.7 Rock Bolts 251
8.8 Grouting 256
8.9 Lining Stress Controllers (LSC) 261
9. GROUNDWATER CONTROL MEASURES 264
9.1 General 264
9.2 Pilot and Drainage Drillings 264
9.3 Strata Grouting 265
10. DEWATERING, DRAINAGE AND PUMPING 270
142
10.2 Submittals 270

10.3 General 270
10.4 Dewatering of Surface Construction Sites 271
10.5 Dewatering Of Underground Construction Sites 272
10.6 Measurements and Payments 273
11. WATERPROOFING AND PERMANENT GROUNDWATER 276
DRAINAGE
11.1 Waterproofing and Protective Felt 276
11.2 Permanent Groundwater Drainage 282
12. CONCRETE WORKS 285
12.2 Submittals 285
12.3 Standards 286
12.4 Quality Control and Testing 287
12.5 Handling of Aggregates 288
12.6 Batching and Mixing 288
12.7 Temperature of Concrete 289
12.8 Conveying 290
12.9 Placing of Concrete 290
12.10 Concreting in Underground and Open Works 294
12.11 Chipping and Roughening of Concrete Surfaces 299
12.12 Defective and Damaged Concrete 299
12.13 Finishing of Concrete 299
12.14 Curing and Protection of Concrete 300
12.15 Repair of Concrete 302
12.16 Construction Joints 302
12.17 Expansion and Contraction Joints 303
12.18 Embedment in Concrete / Rock 303
12.19 Water Stopper 304
12.20 Measurements And Payments 306
12.21 Polypropylene (PP) Synthetic Fiber 308
13. FORMWORK 310
13.2 Submittals 310
13.3 General 310
13.4 Materials 310
13.5 Design, Fabrication, Erection and Maintenance of Formwork 311
13.6 Removal of Formwork 313
13.7 Measurements and Payments 314
14. STEEL FOR REINFORCEMENT 315
14.2 Submittals 315
14.3 Standards 315
14.4 General 315
14.5 Fabrication 316
14.6 Placing 316
14.7 Welding For Reinforcement 317
14.8 Tolerance For Placing Reinforcing Steel 317
14.9 Measurement And Payments 317
14.10 Exclusions 318
15. SHOTCRETE FOR INNER LINING 319
143
15.1 General 319

15.2 Material 319
15.3 Execution 319
16. SCOPE OF ENGINEERING GEOLOGICAL MAPPING AND FOLLOW- 320
UP.
16.1 Introduction 320
16.2 Geological Documentation 320
16.3 Execution 322
16.4 Measurement and Payment 323
17. PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENT 324
17.1 General 325
17.2 Noise and Vibration Monitoring 325
Annexure Environmental Management Plan During Construction 327
17.1
Annexure Environmental Monitoring Plan During Construction 347
17.2
Annexure R-1 and R-2 351
17.3
Annexure Key Environmental Legislations in India 353
17.4
18.0 EARTHING SYSTEM 354
19.0 CABLE DUCT 355
19.1 General 355
19.2 Materials 355
19.3 Execution 355
19.4 Measurement and Payment 355
20. MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC 356
144
1.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 Scope of Work

1) The Contractor should read these specifications in conjunction with Inception report,
BOQ, tender drawings, and shall be responsible for providing plant, equipment, materials
and labour for the provision of all necessary Temporary Works and services adequate for
the execution of the Work under this contract.
2) The Contractor shall design, furnish, install, maintain and operate on the Site
Constructional Plants as specified in this Section, including camps, workshops;
warehouses, storage, explosives magazines and assembly areas, all equipment, machinery,
vehicles, scaffolding, water and power supply etc.
3) Temporary Works and services carried out by the Contractor shall confirm to the
applicable Indian Standard / Codes and sanitary requirements stipulated for such
purpose. For works where no such Indian Standard is applicable other applicable
Standards are to be applied as approved by the Engineer.
4) The design, construction, operation and maintenance of the Contractor’s Temporary
Works and services shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer.
5) The Contractor shall construct and maintain all required temporary site roads to, in and
around the working areas, camps, facilities and other temporary works.
6) Various instructions mentioned in this document for tunnel shall be applicable for main
tunnel as well as Escape Tunnel, Portal areas, Adits, Niches and X-Passages etc.
7) The contractor shall make available and handover to the Engineer and the DDC all
information required in this document in required format as directed.
1.2 Submittals
Within 21 days from the date or issue of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer, updated layout plans showing, to an adequate scale, the locations and
arrangement of all Temporary Works and facilities. These plans shall be consistent with the
plans submitted by the Contractor with his bid as well as with any amendments and additions
subsequently agreed to by the Engineer and the Contractor, and shall include:
1) Camps for Contractor’s employees.
2) Offices, parking areas, warehouses, storage areas and medical-care services.
3) Water supply, sewerage, sewage treatment and disposal, power supply and illumination,
telephone services (radio and cable).
4) Temporary road-works, including public road diversions.
5) Equipment pools and mechanical workshops.
6) Dumping areas, borrow, quarry and stockpile areas with development plans; as per NEERI
Guide lines (National Environmental Engineering Research Institute).
7) Concrete and material processing plants, including cement storage
8) Field Laboratory
9) Underground Ventilation System
10) Drawings and Specification for the establishment of infirmary first aid stations, clinics and
ambulances.
11) Detailed layout drawings for electrical installations and distribution systems, on the Site,
showing voltages, outlets and routing of power lines.
145
12) Detailed design and drawings including manufacturer’s drawings for concrete and
materials processing plants in accordance with the requirements of the pertinent Chapter
of these specifications.
13) Details of the drilling and grouting equipment in accordance with the requirements set out
in the relevant Chapter of these specifications.
14) Details of the underground ventilation system, which shall include all calculations of fresh
air supply volume, type of ventilation scheme, duct diameters, materials and equipment
and position of ventilators and dust arresters. Description of the working cycle including
number of persons employed, number and capacity of diesel powered equipment working
at one time at each heading face shall also be included.
15) Drainage plan during construction.
16) Contractor´s Safety Plan(mitigation risk analysis is mandatory part of the Safety Plan)
17) Contractor Quality Plan
18) Emergency Plan.
1.3 Installations and Services for the Contractor's Use
1.3.1 Site Offices, Stores, Ware houses, Materials Yards
(1) The Contractor shall provide and equip, for his own use, main and secondary offices,
warehouses, materials stock areas, fuel storage areas and explosives magazines, all of
which shall be maintained in good condition until the completion of Works.
(2) The buildings, shops and warehouses expected to be constructed and equipped by the
Contractor for use in the performance of the Work under this Contract, in addition to the
facilities explicitly specified elsewhere in these Specifications shall be, but not limited to,
the following:
 Mechanical repair shop
 Electrical repair shop
 Metalwork fabrication and carpentry shop
 Main warehouse and parts store
 Bulk cement silo/cement stores
 Spare parts store
(3) The Contractor shall be required to have on the Site, a one month's minimum reserve at
the Main Yard and 7 days stack at the localized location of the following materials unless
specifically mentioned otherwise.
 Gasoline, with a minimum reserve of 15 days.
 Diesel and Lubricants, with a minimum reserve of 15 days.
 Cement
 Steel reinforcement
 Rock bolts with accessories
 Steel ribs (TH, lattice girder, etc…) with accessories
 Geotextile, PVC membrane
 Aggregates
 Shotcrete accelerator and additives
 Sufficient timber for propping of a tunnel section in case of emergency
 Each and every material as per construction drawing
 Water proofing membrane rolls
 Pipes for drains, drain collectors and collectors with different diameters and
thickness accordingly drawings.
 Materials that require be protected from the rain or the sun radiation, such as
cements, geotextiles, PVC pipes, water proofing membrane, have to be stored into
covered buildings.
146
 Storage of aggregates have to be done, always under covered installations,

avoiding at any moment its mix and contamination from other sources. The floor
of the aggregates areas has to be in concrete and no water can come in from any
source. So effective drainage has to be done around the storage areas for
aggregates.
 Explosives and explosives magazines shall be stored and special care has to be
taken for protection from heat, fire and water.
1.3.2 Concrete and Materials Processing Plants
(1) The Contractor shall install and erect all necessary material processing plants of sufficient
capacity to meet the planned peak requirements during construction. The plants shall be
subject to approval by the Engineer and shall be well designed and fabricated and kept in
good running order to ensure compliance with the materials quality Specifications. All
control and measuring equipment shall be regularly serviced and calibrated.
(2) The plants required to be assembled/erected by the Contractor shall be, but not limited
to, the following:
a. Concrete aggregates processing plant (crushing and screening) – optional
b. Concrete plant (batching and mixing) with computerised output of concrete
mix/shortcrete etc.
1.4 Communication System
(1) The Contractor shall install and maintain in operating condition, communication system
by telephone or preferably an underground radio system approved by the Engineer
between each heading face and entrance to the underground works.
(2) In the tunnel, an intermediate intercom station shall be located at least every 500meter
(3) This communication system shall have its sources of energy independent of the energy
supply for underground works.
(4) The availability of the communication between tunnel and above ground shall be ensured
at all times throughout the duration of the underground construction.
(5) Emergency Plan has to define also the communication requirements for safety reasons.
(6) The use of mobile phones is not allowed for workers. Only Engineers, Geologist, Auxiliary
Engineers and Foremen are allowed to have mobile phones inside working areas.
1.5 Camps for Contractor’s Employees
(1) The Contractor shall design, construct, provide furnishings, maintain and operate
construction camps at the locations indicated on his bid drawings. The construction camps
shall provide for the housing, feeding and recreation of the Contractor’s employees and
those of his sub-Contractor’s. Kitchens, dining rooms, outdoor and indoor recreation
facilities, family dwellings, dormitories, sanitary facilities, medical service, roadways,
drainage, fire control, commercial centers and all utility services (potable water, power,
lighting, heating, ventilating, sewerage treatment and disposal, cleaning and sanitation,
garbage collection and disposal, etc.), etc. shall be provided. The camps shall be large
enough to accommodate the anticipated peak work force.
(2) Fixtures in the sanitary facilities shall be based on the following user ratios:
a. 1 toilet for not more than 5 users
b. 1 tap for not more than 5 users
c. 1 wash basin for not more than 5 users
(3) At every front face and inside the tunnels chemical mobile toilets have to be provided.
(4) Canteen facilities shall be provided by the Contractor in properly equipped canteen
buildings for all his and his sub Contractor ´s employees, if it is considered expedient.
147
(5) The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the camps and buildings within it, in good
hygienic conditions. The standards and regulations presently in force in the project area
with regard to personnel treatment, sanitary conditions, and fire and accident prevention
shall be duly taken into account.
1.6 Medical Facilities

(1) The Contractor shall construct, equip and maintain on the Site, the following medical
facilities:
a. One clinic with ambulance and driver at his main camp.
b. One first aid station at each work site.
(2) The Contractor shall comply with laws and health standards presently in force in the
project area. In the event of an epidemic breaking out, the Contractor shall carry out and
comply with all orders, arrangements or regulations which may be issued by the
Government or local authorities.
(3) These facilities shall be fully equipped and staffed to meet the requirements of the
maximum anticipated work load and labour force, taking into consideration the nature of
the Works, its occupational hazards, location and accessibility. These establishments shall
be available and fully operational within 60 days after the date of issue of the Letter of
Acceptance.
(4) Medical services in the clinics shall be under the direction of a qualified physician /
surgeon on a 24 hours basis throughout the duration of the construction and shall be
available free of charge to all persons engaged in the Works and their families or
dependents living on the Site.
(5) Treatment facilities and care of seriously ill or injured persons shall be on an emergency
basis until their transfer to an established hospital.
1.7 Power Supply and Illumination
(1) The Contractor shall make his own arrangement for the construction power through
diesel generating set of suitable capacity or wherever possible the power can be taken
from state government power lines on payment basis. The total power to be supplied by
the Contractor shall be as per the deployment of equipment at the site for which the
Contractor shall provide details with 100% backup captive power plant.
(2) The Contractor shall install, operate and maintain electrical distribution system which
shall include transformers, circuit breakers, disconnection and safety switches, voltage
regulators, lines, poles, pole hardware’s, conductors, meters and other equipment
necessary for power distribution throughout the Site and temporary facilities.
(3) The Contractor shall ensure adequate illumination for all his operations on the Site and at
the Camps.
(4) The vaults along the entire length of the tunnel shall be illuminated with electrical light
throughout the duration of construction works. The lamps shall be located to ensure 75
Lux in all areas. Each lamp shall have a minimum capacity of 60 W. The lamps shall be
installed as instructed by the ENGINEER as close as possible to the work face to guarantee
the safe conditions for the tunnel works as per health and safety rules. Special mention has
to be done to the illumination equipment required to do the inspection of the front face
after de-fuming process and after mucking in which the front illumination has to be
reinforced with projectors oriented to the front face.
(5) The work faces have to be illuminated with higher capacities so that safe working
conditions are guaranteed.
(6) The contractor shall ensure that all the access roads to the tunnel, and portals and site
camps and office camp are fully illuminated by halogen lamps and electric poles are
148
provide at 25 meter distance.
(7) Electrical cables shall be well insulated, protected and firmly fixed to the walls of the
tunnel by means of adequate insulators. Lamps shall be well protected against damage.
(8) The Contractor shall also provide suitable movable lamps to illuminate any area in
Underground Works including areas for instrumentation and where the Engineer may
wish to carry out inspection and rock mechanics tests or instrumentation.
(9) No energized electrical cable shall be permitted nearer than 70 m to the heading face
while charging explosives.
(10) Lighting illumination by flame is expressly forbidden in the Underground Works.
(11) Whenever more than one agency is working in the same area, the Contractor, who has
already provided lighting arrangements, shall extend the facilities to the other Contractor,
who shall pay for such facility of utility at mutually agreed rates. In case of disputes, the
matter shall be decided by the Engineer, whose decision shall be final.
1.8 Earthing of Wet-Work Areas, Control of Electric Discharges
(1) All equipment and appliances which are exposed to lightning shall be earthed electrically,
and the effectiveness of such earthing shall be periodically checked by the Contractor’s
specialized personnel.
(2) No equipment electrically powered by more than 24 Volts shall be operated by personnel
standing in water.
(3) Only air, battery-powered or hydraulic tools shall be permitted in the wet areas.
(4) Where electrical blasting is used, equipment shall be installed to control possible electric
discharge in the ground due to storms, electric motors, etc. As soon as such discharges are
noted, electrical blasting operations shall be suspended, or the detonator type changed.
1.9 Air Ventilation System of Underground Works
(1) The Contractor shall design, install and operate ventilation system for the Underground
Works and provide an underground atmosphere monitoring system.
(2) The Contractor shall check and record concentrations of noxious or other harmful gases
and dust throughout the works at every shift. Allowable concentrations shall be as stated
in the applicable laws/standards for underground construction. All items of inspection
records and automatic record data of instruments shall be included in a daily working
report and shall be maintained for the duration of the works.
(3) All parts of the Works shall be maintained in a state which will not be injurious to the
health of the personnel. The air in underground works shall contain no less than 20 %
oxygen (by volume) and shall not contain concentration of gases, vapours or dust greater
than is safe for the health or workmen, having regard to the effects of time, temperature,
humidity and the combined effects of contaminants. Existing limits for air quality and
condition as in 1.10.4 and till shall be satisfied.
(4) The ventilating system shall be kept in operation also after break-through in tunnels in
order to maintain the fresh air- volume requirements stated hereinafter.
(5) Intermediate fans attached to the main duct line shall be provided as required to ensure
satisfactory removal of contaminated air. All ventilation ducts shall be maintained in an
airtight condition.
(6) Ventilation ducts shall be firmly fixed to the vaults in such position that a minimum
clearance of 15 cm remains between the duct and the extremities of vehicular traffic
employed in the Underground Works.
(7) The Contractor shall ensure the required quantity or fresh air at the heading face. The
check of the air-tightness or joints and control of the air ducts for leaks shall be performed
149
periodically. Any deficiency discovered or reported by the Engineer shall be immediately

repaired by the Contractor.
(8) If the volume and quality of fresh air at the heading face is less than that specified, then the
whole duct system shall be pressure and volume tested in portions not exceeding 500
meters. Measuring stations shall be located not closer than 10 times the duct diameter
from any fan or other flow disturbance within the duct.
(9) No work shall be permitted to be carried out unless the ventilation is provided to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.10 Ventilation System for Tunnel Excavation
1.10.1 Operational requirements
(1) The ventilation system used may be either an exhaust or forced fresh air system or a
combination of both.
(2) Exhaust ventilation: Blasting fumes shall be extracted as close as possible to the
excavation face. Exhaust air and blasting fumes shall be discharged sufficiently away from
the portal areas in such a way that they will not be re-used in any other working place or
re-circulated in the fresh air supply system.
(3) Forced fresh air ventilation: With this system of ventilation the Contractor shall ensure
that the following aspects are enforced:
a. All labour shall evacuate the heading face area to a safe place before blasting and
re-enter the heading face area only after blasting fumes have been completely
removed from the working area by ventilation.
b. Blasting fumes shall be discharged from the underground works into a filter system
or diverted adequately to ensure that concentrations of noxious or other harmful
gases or dust are kept to the minimum limit as stated in the applicable
laws/standards or the limits specified in the contract if lower.
c. All equipment and ventilation duct shall be maintained in sound working order at
all times. Any damage to ventilation duct shall be repaired within 12 hours of the
damage.
d. During excavation by hand or machines without use of explosives the ventilation
system shall provide the fresh air quantity requirements listed below in Clause
1.10.3 at all times in the underground works.
e. For effective control of air pollution caused by machinery exhaust, the Contractor
shall select machinery and vehicles in good condition and maintain them in good
condition.
f. Do not permit gasoline-operated equipment anywhere underground.
g. All diesel engines used in the underground works shall be provided with means,
which shall be maintained in efficient order, of cooling exhaust gases and reducing
the concentration of toxic gases to acceptable levels, filtering particulates and
preventing emission of flames or sparks.
h. Ventilation ducting shall be of non-combustible material.
(4) Ventilation ducts have to be maintained in straights alignments as much as possible and
with plain cross sections avoiding unnecessary curves, reduction and rotations of the
cross sections and always without any damage of the ducts.
(5) Ventilation ducts have to follow the advance of the tunnel excavation, being the extremity
of the duct no more distant from the front face than 20m. In any case this distance shall be
reduced if the quality of the air in the front face does not follow health and safety
specifications.
1.10.2 Air velocity
150
The ventilating system shall be of such efficiency that the average air velocity in the largest
excavated profile is not less than 0.3 meter per second. In case the presence of methane gas is
detected or suspected, this value shall be increased to 0.5 meter per second.
1.10.3 Quantity of air
The quantity of air supplied for ventilation shall not be less than 4.75 cubic meters of free air
per minute per person in tunnels. Each diesel kilowatt (kW) of power applied for plant and
equipment underground shall require a minimum of 4.0 cubic meters per minute of air supply.
These fresh air volumes shall be cumulative and the Contractor shall allow, in his design
calculations, for the maximum number of persons and diesel powered equipment deployed in
the Underground Works at any one time. Any estimated losses, e.g. due to the leaks in the ducts,
shall be added to the figures stated above.
1.10.4 Maximum allowable concentrations of hazardous gases
The following are maximum allowable concentrations of some common hazardous gases:
H2S ….. 10 ppm
SO2 ….. 2 ppm
CO ….. 30 ppm
NO ….. 25 ppm
CO2 ….. 5000 ppm
Silica dust concentration5 mg/m3
1.10.5 Instruments to register the concentration of noxious gases
Instruments to register the concentration of common noxious gases (CO, NO, CO2), flammable
gases, dust and oxygen, etc. shall always be available on the site in good working order,
condition and in sufficient numbers. These shall be supplied, maintained and used throughout
the duration of the underground work.
1.10.6 Precautions against flames, sparks and overheating
Where any concentration of methane is found to be present, precautions against flames, sparks
and overheating shall be enforced including prohibition of burning, welding and of smoking. If
concentrations cannot be kept consistently below 0.25 % in the general body of the air,
explosion protection of equipment shall be provided.
1.10.7 Methane concentration of 1.0 %
When a methane concentration of 1.0 % is present, all persons other than those essential for
safety shall be withdrawn from all parts of the tunnel. The use of explosives and locomotives
shall be prohibited and all electrical equipment not intrinsically safe shall be disconnected.
1.10.8 Methane concentration exceeds 1.0%.
All persons shall be withdrawn if the methane content exceeds 1.0%.
1.11 Air Cooling in Underground Works
(1) The Contractor shall make suitable arrangements for cooling of air so as to maintain the
temperature in the underground construction sites below 30 to 35 degrees Centigrade.
(2) The temperature shall be jointly measured by the Contractor and the Engineer at weekly
intervals. Temperature measurements shall be taken during normal working conditions
with the specified degree of ventilation and with the air cooling system turned off.
(3) The maintenance of construction progress and control of temperature shall be entirely
the responsibility of the Contractor. No claim or extension of time for the completion of
Works shall be allowed on the basis of high / low temperatures experienced in the
course of the work for any reason, whatsoever.
151
1.12 Control of Dust, Silica And Noxious Gases in Underground Works

The Contractor shall install and operate equipment for the monitoring and control of dust, silica
and noxious gases in Underground Works as described herein under.
1.12.1 Dust and Silica
(1) To reduce the amount of dust, only wet drilling will be allowed and during mucking,
muck piles shall be kept constantly damp by sprinkling with water. The use of high
pressure water jets for this purpose will not be permitted.
(2) The Contractor shall measure and monitor the concentration of fine dust and content of
silicon dioxide (SiO2) in all dust producing underground operations by a method to be
approved by the Engineer.
(3) Air Samples for this purpose shall be taken within 07 days of commencing underground
excavation, at 30 days intervals thereafter and within 15 days following major changes
in tunnel excavation operation, or whenever required by the Engineer. Samples shall be
taken from actual working areas. The sampling and testing shall be performed by a
qualified person or laboratory to be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer. A copy of the test results shall be submitted to the Engineer within 2 weeks of
the sampling date.
(4) The concentration of fine dust (diameter less than 0.005 mm) may not, in general
exceed the value of 5.0 mg/cum of air and in relation to the silicon dioxide content in the
rock this value is lowered as follows:
Content of SiO2 in fine dust in Concentration of fine dust in

percent by weight. milligrams per cum of air.
1 -15% 8.0 mg/cum

20% 8.0 mg/cum
30% 4.0 mg/cum
60 % 2.0 mg/cum
80% 1.5 mg/cum
100% 1.3 mg/cum
(5) Should the concentration of the fine dust exceed the limits stated above, the
Contractor shall undertake such necessary measures and install such
additional equipment which will ensure that the dust concentrations are
within the specified safe hygienic limits.
1.12.2 Noxious Gas
(1) Use of internal combustion engines, other than approved mobile diesel-
powered equipment will not be permitted in underground construction Sites.
(2) The Contractor shall provide and maintain equipment for measuring and
monitoring the content of noxious gases and oxygen at each heading face
throughout the duration of excavation works. Tests for determining
concentrations of carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, nitrogen dioxide,
methane, other inflammable gases, and oxygen shall be made before and after
each blasting and at the beginning of each shift by qualified personnel. A
record of reading shall be maintained and be made available to the Engineer as
and when asked for.
152
(3) Gas concentrations in underground Sites may not exceed the following limits:
0.005 % (Fifty ppm) of carbon monoxide.
0.5 % (Five thousand ppm) of carbon dioxide.
0.0005 % (Five ppm) of nitrogen dioxide.
0.001 % (Ten ppm) of hydrogen sulphide.
0.1 % (One thousand ppm) of methane.
0.01 milligrams per litre of nitrous oxide.
(4) Concentrations of other inflammable gases shall not exceed 35 % of the lower
explosive limit at the heading face and 15% of the lower explosive limit
elsewhere in the tunnel.
(5) If concentrations of noxious gases or other inflammable gases exceed the
permissible limits set forth above, all operations shall be interrupted
immediately and personnel shall be removed to a safe area. All sources of
ignition shall be extinguished or removed. All equipment with the exception of
ventilation equipment shall be shut down.
(6) The required measures will be mutually determined and agreed to by the
Engineer and the Contractor. In case of need, the Contractor shall engage the
services of an independent consultant experienced in gaseous tunneling.
Re-entry and resuming of the Work shall be prohibited until the Engineer has
authorized re-entry.
1.13 Water Supply
(1) The Contractor shall design, install, operate and maintain two separate water
supply systems on the Sites:
a. Industrial Water
For general construction use, treated to the extent necessary to meet
specified requirements of Works i.e. for concrete. etc.
b. Potable water
For supply to all buildings and plants requiring high quality water meeting
requirements for drinking water supply.
(2) Water shall be supplied by the Contractor from suitable natural sources which
are available within the Project area. The water shall be free of contamination
and unaffected by the Site construction Work.
(3) The Contractor shall furnish, install, operate and maintain all pumps, pipe
lines, fittings, valves, storage, tanks purification plant and chlorination for the
water supply and distribution systems, adequate in quantity and pressure.
Industrial water shall be used for construction purposes only. There shall be
no cross connections of any kind between the industrial and potable water
supply systems. Only potable water shall be piped into buildings.
(4) The Contractor shall provide adequate water treatment facilities so as to
ensure that the treated water is supplied for drinking purposes to all the
camps and construction places.
(5) Ample number of drinking points of potable water shall be provided by the
Contractor for the use of personnel in all working areas.
1.14 Sanitation and Sewerage
(1) Toilets shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor for the use of all
personnel at all work locations, which are remote from the fixed sanitary
facilities. The Contractor shall arrange for all chemical toilets to be attended to
daily for proper sanitary disposal. The chemical toilets have to be provided
iInto the tunnels near the front face and at the portal areas.
153
(2) All offices, workshops, laboratory and other occupied work buildings shall be
provided with toilets connected to properly constructed and regularly
maintained septic tanks approved by the Engineer.
(3) The camp sites shall be provided with a complete, properly maintained and
operated sewerage system, including septic tanks, sewage treatment and
disposal facilities. Facilities for washing clothes shall also be provided and
linked to the sewerage system.
1.15 Waste and Garbage Disposal

(1) The Contractor shall daily collect waste material and garbage from camps,
offices and workshops and transport it to an area approved by the Engineer,
where it shall be incinerated and buried or disposed off as approved by the
Engineer.
(2) The Site shall be kept clean and free of refuse at all times. No waste shall be
dumped in areas other than those approved by the Engineer for waste
disposal. No waste of any kind shall be deposited in any watercourses.
1.16 Fencing and Site Security
(1) The Contractor's offices, workshops and storage compounds, camp sites and
all construction areas, where exclusion of unauthorised personnel is necessary
for safety and security, shall be adequately fenced, gated and guarded. A
central guard house shall be established at each main entrance to the Site.
(2) The Contractor shall employ adequate force of properly trained security
guards at the worksite and at the construction camps on 24-hours duty
including Sundays and holidays. Storage areas shall be fenced, lighted and
regularly patrolled by security guards. Warehouse buildings and explosive
magazines shall be kept locked and keys accounted for at all times.
(3) All employees engaged in the execution and maintenance of the Works shall
wear identification badges when at the worksite.
(4) The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the losses occurring in his
installations and those of the Engineer/ DDC, resulting from carelessness on
the Contractor's part.
(5) The contractor has to guarantee the security and guard of the explosives and
detonators.
1.17 Setting Up of Field Laboratory
(1) The Contractor shall establish a field laboratory for ensuring quality control
measures for the Works. The Contractor shall submit a list of testing
equipment together with his bid.
(2) Prior to setting up of laboratory, Contractor shall submit detailed building
plan with exhaustive equipment-list clearly showing the different area for
equipment with sizes of the equipment and circulating area, and CV’s of
qualified personnel identified for laboratory work to the Engineer for
approval. The laboratory shall be headed by an experienced graduate civil
engineer. All the equipment shall be confirming to either the relevant IS or
international standards.
(3) Upon receipt of Engineer's approval, the Contractor shall construct, maintain
and operate an integrated laboratory which provides sufficient rooms and
equipment to test aggregates, concrete samples, plain shotcrete and SFRS
samples, soil and rock samples, rock bolts capacity tests, nuclear gauge tests to
control the density of the compacted layers for earthworks, etc. The
laboratory shall be established as early as possible as but not later than
three months from the date of issue of Letter of Acceptance.
154
(4) The Contractor shall collect the samples, carry out the relevant tests, prepare
the complete reports and submit them to the Engineer.
(5) Concrete Laboratory: This laboratory shall be of the size and equipped with all
testing facilities recommended in Indian or other equivalent standards
(6) All tests will be made according to approved standards, and the testing
equipment shall comply with the same standards. All relevant standards shall
be made available in the laboratory by the Contractor.
(7) The laboratory shall be provided with light, ventilation, water supply, tank for
curing, toilet, office for operators and responsible for laboratory, archive etc.
and be spacious enough in order to store indoorthe test samples
1.18 Inspection by the Engineer
The Engineer shall have the right at any time, to inspect any part of the Contractor's
temporary facilities without advance notification and to require immediate
rectification of any contravention of the specified requirements.
1.19 Final Clean –Up
(1) Upon the Completion of Works, or when any plant has completed its functions,
the Contractor shall dismantle and demobilize all temporary facilities and
remove all refuse, debris, objectionable material, and fill, grade and dress all
excavated areas in a clean and proper condition acceptable to the Engineer. All
such areas, as far as possible, shall conform to the natural appearance of the
landscape.
(2) No demobilization or removal of temporary facilities and equipment shall be
made without the prior approval of the Engineer.
1.20 Payment for Site Installations and Services
All costs for mobilization and demobilization of Constructional Plant and materials to
the Site, planning, designing, installing, operating, maintaining and removal of all
temporary works, site installations, and other misc. services and facilities as specified
in this section, making submittals to the Engineer, recruiting and transferring staff,
obtaining rights of way, providing and maintaining access roads, provision of captive
power generation along with 100% power backup for construction purposes, clearing
and grading areas for temporary facilities, and any other costs involved in preparation
to carry out the Permanent Works shall not be paid separately, but shall be deemed to
have been included in his quoted rate.
155
2. SURVEYING
2.1 Scope of Work

(1) The Contractor shall render all services for topographical surveys and
measurements required for the performance of the Work.
(2) These services cover in general the establishment of axis centerlines,
alignments of project structures and features; the setting out for construction
thereof; the accompanying control surveys for correct locations, dimensions
and elevations as well as the necessary surveys for measurement to permit
quantity calculations for Invoicing.
(3) Such surveys shall be based on the control points, centre line, bench marks
already established in the project area.
(4) It shall be the Contractor´s responsibility to check the nets and their
compatibility over the whole project area and to perform the tunnel survey so
that the tunnel alignment remains within the specified accuracy.
(5) The Contractor shall specify all his equipment for surveying works in his
Method Statement.
(6) The Contractor shall have the overall responsibility for all surveying works.
(7) Contractor should carry out the NET Survey regularly at least once in two
months while executing the work of Underground excavation and will submit
the results to DDC/ IRCON to ensure progress of excavation is correct as per
design alignment. Besides above the Contractor should also carry the survey
work day to day basis regularly in the tunnel and should submit the survey
results regularly for verification to DDC/ IRCON.
(8) Contractor should carry out GYROMAT SURVEY or EQUIVALENT survey at
regular intervals at least every One Km progress of the main tunnel and escape
tunnel.
(9) Contractor is responsible to install and maintain under perfect conditions the
bench marks and 3D monitoring instrumentation required by IRCON / NFR or
its representative inside and outside the tunnels. If a bench mark is interfering
with the works, IRCON has to be informed of the situation to allow its
demolition and replacement. The bench marks interfering with works have to
be shifted to another agreed position.
(10) Contractor has to make the survey of the earthworks works and control the
tunnel sections after mucking, after installation of the primary support, prior
the installation of the felt for the protection of the water proofing membrane
and after the lining works all along the length of the tunnels to control
alignment, envelopes, excavated areas, primary support thickness and areas
and the position of the work-forms and final lining geometry, thickness and
areas. The quality plan that the contractor has to deliver to IRCON / NFR or its
representatives has to include when the topographical survey of the tunnels
156
and portals has to be carried out.

2.2 Materials and Instruments
(1) The Contractor shall provide, maintain and operate suitable and appropriate
equipment, instruments, materials and auxiliary equipment, commensurate
with various tasks and precision requirements of the survey works.
(2) Type and accuracy of the survey equipment to be used by the Contractor shall
correspond to the nature of the construction, erection works and the
construction technique.
(3) All equipment, instruments, materials and auxiliary equipment shall be in
perfect operating condition. Prior to the start of survey activities, equipment,
instruments, etc., shall be checked as to their proper functioning and accuracy
duly accompanied with “Fit to use” and “Permanent adjustment carried out”
certificate by the manufacturer valid at the start of works.
(4) During the construction period the survey instruments shall be checked and, if
necessary, adjusted/calibrated at regular time intervals. Certificates of
calibration have to be provided and always kept updated.
(5) Instruments and equipment which have suffered from use, damage or
accidents to the extent that they are unfit for further use at the site, shall be
removed from the site and replaced immediately.
(6) The number of sets of instruments shall be sufficient to meet the requirements
of the construction time schedule. Delay of start of construction or
construction progress caused by insufficient quantity and quality of survey
equipment including provision of professional staff shall be at the Contractor's
responsibility.
2.3 Execution
(1) For the execution of the survey/ setting out for work the Contractor shall
employ and provide experienced professionals and auxiliary staff. All survey
and measurement work shall be properly recorded and filed thoroughly.
(2) The Contractor shall provide, maintain, adjust when necessary and operate the
required survey and auxiliary equipment for the performance of the Work.
(3) All survey and measurement activities shall be recorded in maps and field
books as directed/approved by the Engineer in the configuration system.
Where required, the production of drawings and maps shall be deemed to be
part of the Work.
(4) The Engineer shall have the right to check work performance, accuracy,
stations, etc., and all survey results, measurements and calculations as well as
conformity with plans and drawings.
(5) The Contractor shall keep and maintain professional records of all field
surveys and measurements,accordingly with the Quality Plan, the related
computations and calculations, manuscripts, plans, drawings and maps, and
shall make them available to the Engineer whenever requested.
(6) If, in the opinion of the Engineer, deficiencies and/or inaccuracies in field and
office work have been found, such work shall be repeated and made good to
the satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor
shall be solely responsible for accuracy of Survey maps and drawings prepared
out of the surveys.
2.4 Preparatory Work
157
(1) Prior to starting survey works, the Contractor shall inform his surveyors of the
general construction procedure, survey requirements and time limits. The
surveyors shall make adequate terrain investigations with respect to sightings,
vegetation to be removed, placement of monuments, taking into consideration
future construction work which may affect the survey: points, monuments and
benchmarks. Based on these investigations, a survey plan shall be developed
comprising existing basic data, the survey grid to be developed, the equipment
required for the particular survey task, staff and time requirements
arrangement in a way to warrant smooth progress of construction works. The
plan shall be submitted to Engineer in charge for approval.
(2) All survey / setting out works shall be done with greatest care and precision.
2.5 Survey of Ground Profiles

(1) Original Ground Profiles
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in writing, at least 14 days before
commencing such work, of his intentions to perform any work which will result in a
change to the topography of the existing site for the permanent works and or for
temporary works. Thereupon, before commencing any work, the Contractor shall
survey the original topography with the approval of the Engineer over the entire area
to be occupied or disturbed. Such survey may again be required after removal, of
vegetation, topsoil or other overburden. The information so obtained shall be
recorded by the Contractor and the Engineer. The Contractor shall then provide the
Engineer with a non-shrinkable and reproducible copy of each drawing (on RTF) to
serve as a permanent record of the purpose of determining the quantities of
excavation or earthworks carried out in the construction of the permanent structures,
and the extent to which Temporary works shall be removed or temporary excavations
shall be refilled upon completion of the works.
(2) The Contractor shall survey all excavated and final surfaces for the purpose of
recording as constructed details, and for the measurement of quantities.
a. on completions of excavation and prior to placing concrete or other
work;
b. on completion of works.
2.6 Setting out of Works
(1) The Contractor shall perform all setting out and check surveying of the Works
in accordance with methods approved by the Engineer. The methods and
programme of checking shall be such as to ensure the construction of every
part of the Work to be in correct line and level. The Engineer may at any time
ask the Contractor to submit proof that his own setting out has been
satisfactorily checked.
(2) The number of points required for setting out as well as between these points
shall be determined by the Contractor in accordance with the type of work.
The Engineer may require that some or all of the given points and datum levels
be clearly marked during construction in such a way that the marks can be
retained after completion of construction.
2.7 Setting out Checks
(1) The Engineer will perform check surveys during the course of construction
and the Contractor shall cooperate with and provide assistance to him as
required.
158
(2) The Contractor is expected to liaise with the Engineer to program the check
survey to be carried out during non-production periods or in parallel to
construction activities such that the minimum delay or inconvenience is
caused to production works, wherever and whenever possible. The Contractor
shall afford the Engineer, every cooperation and assistance in this regard
including but not being limited to the provision of survey equipment, drainage,
lighting, ventilation and the removal of Contractor's equipment and other
obstructions such that they do not interfere with the setting out checks.
2.8 Tunnel Alignment and Gradients
(1) The Contractor shall establish and maintain at suitable distances from tunnel
portal at least two (2) reference monuments and benchmarks on the extended
tunnel axis/alignment, to warrant that control surveys during "tunnel
construction can always be referred to such reference monuments. They shall
be secured by auxiliary fixed points permitting the location control of the
reference monuments in case these have suffered during tunnel excavation
periods.
(2) Establishing and control surveys of the tunnel alignment and the gradient shall
always be referred to such reference monuments.
(3) Underground alignment and level survey and control thereof shall be
performed by the use of suitable precision instruments preferably of the
pulsed laser type of equivalent instruments, and auxiliary equipment.
Underground survey equipment and methodology shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
2.9 Tolerances
(1) The tolerance given below shall be the maximum permissible deviations from
the specified dimensions, levels, alignments, positions, etc as shown on the
Drawings of the structures of structural elements.
(2) In addition, at the interfaces with mechanical components, concrete surface be
finished flush and shall also meet any additional tolerances required by the
mechanical designs or works, respectively.
(3) Determinations of center lines for alignment of tunnels shall meet the
following criteria:
(4) 10 mm / Km horizontal and vertical offset of the tunnel axis
(5) Max. 25 mm horizontal and vertical offset of the tunnel axis at the break-
through points of the headings
(6) Slopes and Slope displacements must be measured with an accuracy of ±5 mm.
2.10 Subsidiary Monuments and Benchmarks

The Contractor shall erect and establish all necessary additional survey monuments
fix points, benchmarks, etc. required for setting out of the works and construction
control including determination of coordinates and elevations.
2.11 Handing-Over of Basic Survey Data
(1) General Requirements
a. Prior to the commencement of the survey work, the Engineer shall hand
over to the Contractor all information and data of the survey, benchmarks
and control points to which the Contractor's survey work shall refer. Upon
handing-over, the Contractor shall review this information and data and
shall verify the existence and accuracy of the datum points and
benchmarks by field checks. Furthermore, the Contractor shall take
responsibility for maintenance and protection of these basic datum points
159
and benchmarks.
b. Should field checks reveal that points and benchmarks have been
damaged, displaced or destroyed, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer
of this fact, and the Engineer shall give instructions regarding the re-
establishment of such datum points and bench-marks.
c. Should it become necessary that basic datum points and benchmarks be
removed because of foreseeable construction works, the Contractor shall
inform the Engineer of the need thereof and obtain approval and
instruction for the establishment of new basic datum points and
benchmarks and/or auxiliary points.
d. If, upon handing over, inconsistencies within the datum points,
benchmarks and control points are detected by the Contractor, he shall
inform the Engineer immediately thereof and produce the evidence. The
Engineer shall subsequently inform and instruct the Contractor on
remedial measures to be taken. Any survey work, setting out or
measurement already taken or performed prior to the detection of such
inconsistency shall be rechecked and corrected by the Contractor.
e. Additional basic datum points and benchmarks established by the
Contractor for the convenience of this work shall have at least the same
quality and durability as those or the existing points, and meet the
accuracy requirements.
(2) Data and Documents Available
a. Existing topographical maps issued by client covering the area of the
works can be made available to the Contractor upon request to the
Engineer.
b. Topo mapping of areas for temporary facilities like the Contractor's camp,
constructional buildings, construction plant, etc., shall be prepared by the
Contractor prior to the construction of such facilities. Surveys works for
his construction roads also shall be performed by the Contractor including
preparation of maps.
(3) Survey Records and Documentation
The Contractor shall keep records of all survey activities such as sketches,
field-books, calculations, etc., into the configuration system and accordingly
with the Quality Plan, for the duration of the entire construction period. The
Contractor shall upon request of the Engineer put at his disposal all records
and documentation or provide copies thereof in any format as directed.
2.12 Measurements
No item of survey work shall be measured for the purpose of payment. No separate
payment shall be made for survey work and related auxiliary services, as the cost
there-of is deemed to have been included in the quoted rate.
The survey work shall include, but not be limited to, the following activities:
- all survey work, in particular field work, office work, including preparation of
survey maps/drawings/sketches, investigations, provision of skilled personnel,
provision and maintenance of survey instruments and accessories, supply of all
materials required for survey and associated purposes, provision of suitable
labour, protection of all survey points, etc.;
- shifting machinery and temporary plant out of the required sightlines;
- stopping all machinery, drilling, blasting, driving and other work causing
vibrations, dust, gas, etc.;
- restricting or stopping traffic of persons and vehicles near instruments or in
160
sightlines during instrument observations;

- providing adequate lighting or cutting of sources of light which interface with
setting out or survey;
- providing adequate ventilation to ensure the necessary view and to enable
personnel to stay in underground work areas;
- removing all obstructive accumulation of water;
- taking all necessary safety precautions;
- - clearing sightlines by removal of bushes and scrub with the prior approval of
the Engineer.
3.0 MATERIALS FOR CONSTRUCTION
3.1 Scope of Work

(1) The specification described herein under relate to the Work which includes all
labor, materials, equipment and services required to arrange materials for
construction of various works under this Contract.
(2) The use of excavation material for construction purpose (concrete /shotcrete,
aggregates, fill etc.) shall be investigated and proposed to the Engineer /DDC for
approval.
(3) Samples for testing of materials for the concrete shall be supplied by the Contractor
to the DDC/Engineer at the Trial Mix Stage.
(4) The specifications of some of the major construction materials are given hereinafter.
3.2 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall, specify in his bid and subsequently also, if required by the
Engineer, the source(s) from which the cement, steel etc. will be obtained. In case
the specified source(s) is not acceptable to the Engineer, the Contractor shall be
required to substitute the source by an acceptable source. Additional suppliers and
change of suppliers shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
(2) At least 30 days prior to procuring, or dispatch of the materials to site, the
Contractor shall submit, to the Engineer, the following:
a. Certified quality test reports from manufacturers in respect of cement,
steel, and other materials. This will also be necessary whenever the source is
changed or when the sub-standard materials are received on the Site.
If the materials are to be arranged from several sources, the estimated
quantity to be procured from each source and the proposed schedule of
supply.
(3) The layout of the stockpiles and the method of drawing aggregates from them shall
be submitted to the Engineer at-least 30 days prior to the commencement of
stockpiling of aggregates.
(4) The details relating to the source, method of delivery and storage of water to be
used during construction shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for
161
approval at least 60 days prior to the commencement of the Work.

(5) The Engineer reserves the right to require any additional information deemed
necessary to be included in the submitted documents.
3.3 Standards
(1) The specifications, production, sampling, testing and storage of construction
materials shall conform to the following latest Indian Standards or where not
covered by these Standards, to the equivalent International Standards:
a. Aggregates and water
IS: 456-2000
IS: 383-1970 (Reaffirmed)
IS: 2386 (Part-1 to Part-VII) – 1963 (Reaffirmed)
IS: 460
IS: 1607
IS: 2348 all part
b. Cement
IS: 269-1989
IS: 1489-1991
IS: 8112-1989
IS: 12269-1987
IS: 12330-1988
IS: 455-1989
c. Steel for Reinforcement
IS: 432 (Part –I& II) -1982 (Reaffirmed)
IS: 2062-1992
IS: 1566
d. Structural Steel
IS: 2062-1992
IS: 808-1989
IS: 8500-1991
e. Steel for Pipes
IS: 3589-1991
f. Welding Electrodes
IS: 814-1991
(2) In case of conflict between the above Standards and the Specifications given herein,
the Specification shall take precedence.
(3) Any standard specified by the designer in the project documents have to be
mandatorily also followed.
3.4 Stone
(1) All stones used on the Works shall be of sound, hard, durable and tough quality
approved by the Engineer
(2) The stones shall be hard, bright in colour, breaking with a clean fracture and such as
make a ringing sound when struck with a hammer.
(3) It shall be free from decay, vesicles, holes, flaws, cracks and other defects and must
have, as far as possible, uniform colour and texture. Porous stone absorbing water
162
more than 1 (one) percent of its dry weight after 24 hours’ immersion, shall be
rejected. No stones having any skin or earthy cover shall be used.
(4) In case the stone is not considered to be free from dust or dirt etc. by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall get the stone screened washed and/or treated as directed by
the Engineer.
(5) Samples of stone that the Contractor intends to use, shall be submitted for approval
of the Engineer not later than 45 days prior to the date of use
3.5 Aggregates
3.5.1 General
(1) Use of aggregates (coarse and fine) containing excessive amount of zeolites,
secondary minerals and such other components which cause alkali reactivity of the
aggregates and consequent reduction in durability of the concrete is prohibited. The
Engineer may however, allow the use of such material either in part or in full
keeping in view the extent of reactivity, the location, the nature of exposure and the
structure, if the Engineer considers necessary, he may carry out mineralogical tests
to ascertain the absence of harmful minerals in the stones.
(2) The Contractor shall make his own arrangements of aggregate crushing plants etc.
for crushing of aggregates from stones extracted from approved quarries or
obtained after excavation from underground or other works.
(3) The quality of all aggregates used in the works, as also processing such as washing,
classifying, screening, rescreening, crushing and blending necessary to meet the
required Specifications, shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
(4) The aggregates shall be supplied only from the sources/quarries approved by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall supply necessary quantities of aggregates to carry
out the desired tests by the Engineer.
(5) The aggregates shall be sampled and tested by the Engineer in accordance with the
Indian Standards referred under Chapter 3.3 above.
(6) The tests shall be made on samples that are representative of the grading that will
be used in concrete and the aggregates shall be processed by the equipment
proposed for the works.
(7) The Contractor shall at all times, have access to and association with sampling and
testing of aggregates and shall be entitled to discuss with the Engineer, the results
and proposals for grading of aggregates.
(8) Storage areas for aggregates have to be covered, protected against any kind of
contamination, avoid the possibility of mix among aggregates and protected also
against any water inflow. The floor of the storage for aggregates has to be in
concrete and has to be drained. Storage areas for different size of aggregates have to
be independent to avoid any possibility of mix.
3.5.2 Coarse Aggregates
(1) All coarse aggregate shall conform to IS: 383, IS: 2430 and tests for conformity shall
be carried out as per IS: 2386, Part-I to VII. The nominal maximum size shall not
exceed 40mm
(2) The aggregates shall be composed of clean, hard, strong, durable pieces of stone,
angular or rounded in shape obtained naturally or by crushing from suitable stones
approved by the Engineer. Coarse aggregates shall not contain more than 15%
elongated or flat particles. An elongated particle is defined as a particle having a
maximum length of more than 5 times its maximum width. A flat particle is defined
as particle in which its maximum width or length is more than 5 times its maximum
thickness.
163
Designation of size Nominal size range
20 mm aggregate 4.75 mm to 20 mm
40 mm aggregate 20 mm to 40 mm
(3) Coarse aggregates delivered to the batching plant shall have a uniform and stable
moisture content.
(4) The coarse aggregates shall be free from objectionable materials such as wood or
other deleterious substances, the percentage of which in any size of coarse
aggregates shall conform to the relevant Standards except that the coarse
aggregates shall contain not more than 0.30 percent by weight of deleterious
(reactive) iron sulphides. The sum of the percentage of all deleterious substances in
any size shall not exceed 3 percent by weight. Coarse aggregates having a specific
gravity less than 2.60 shall be rejected.
(5) The aggregates shall be resistant to deleterious, chemical or physical change such as
cracking, swelling softening, leaching or chemical alterations after its incorporation
in concrete.
(6) When subject to sodium sulphate soundness test, coarse aggregates shall not suffer
more than 12 percent loss of weight after five cycles.
(7) The aggregates shall be crushed in approved type of stone crushers and different
sizes of the coarse aggregate shall be separated into nominal sizes by screening over
vibrating screens as under:
(8) The grain size distribution of the coarse aggregate for the various maximum sizes of
aggregates shall be as set out in the relevant Standards.
(9) These may be altered by the Engineer from time to time, if necessary, on the basis of
actual tests carried out regularly in the laboratory so as to get the best possible
coarse aggregate grading.
(10) The percentage of weight of all the significant under-sizes shall be less than 5
percent when tested on the designated test screens having opening 5 to 6 times the
normal minimum size of the material. No oversize (i.e. material that would retained
on the designated test screens having opening 7 to 6 times the normal sizes of the
material) shall be permitted.
3.5.3 Fine Aggregates (Sand)
(1) General
The contractor shall provide complete facility at site for determining grading of aggregates
by sieve as per IS: 383, IS:460, IS:1607 and IS:2386.
The grading of fine aggregates when determine as described in IS:2386 Part-1, shall be
within the grading zone I,II,III
Sand or fine aggregates shall be used for mortar in stone masonry and as fine aggregates in
concrete work. It shall be either natural river sand or manufactured sand crushed from
rock/stones or mixture of both in specified proportions. The sand shall be composed of hard,
clean and gritty particles of stone and of a quality approved by the Engineer. It shall be free
from injurious amount of clay, soft and flaky particles, vegetable or organic matter, loam,
mica and other deleterious substances and shall not contain any salts.
164
a. The fine aggregates shall conform to the requirements of IS:383-1970

(Reaffirmed 1990). Varying amount of moisture in fine aggregates contributes to
lack of uniformity in concrete consistency. The fine aggregates shall therefore
have uniform and stable moisture contents. Dry sand shall be preferred. Hence
sand stockpiles shall be protected from rainfall.
b. The percentage of deleterious substances in the fine aggregates shall conform to
relevant Standards except that the fine aggregates shall contain not more than
0.10 percent by weight of deleterious (reactive) ferrous sulphides. The total
percentage of deleterious substances must not exceed 5 percent of the weight in
natural uncrushed fine aggregates and must not exceed 2% of the weight in case
of fine aggregate.
c. Fine aggregates having a specific gravity of less than 2.60 are liable to be rejected.
Fine aggregates when subjected to a soundness test with a solution of sodium
sulphate, after 5 cycles of tests, shall not suffer a loss of weight in excess of 10
percent.
d. The sand shall be well graded and, when tested by standard sieves, shall conform
to the prescribed limited of gradation. The best gradation shall be determined by
the Engineer, after experiments and tests and the Contractor shall follow the
same.
e. The sand, as delivered to the batching plant shall have a fineness modulus of 2.6
to 3. The grading of fine aggregates shall be so controlled that the fineness
moduli of at least 9 out of 10 samples of fine aggregates delivered to the batching
plant shall not vary more than 0.20 from the average of 10 samples tested. All
classifying, batching or other operations on the fine aggregates shall be done by
the Contractor and the cost thereof shall be taken as included in the Unit Rates
for the concrete, shotcrete or masonry item as the case may be.
(2) Natural Sand
a. Natural sand shall be obtained from an approved source. No sand affected by
salty water shall be used. The sand shall be screened and thoroughly washed,
preferably in flowing water so as to remove all earthy impurities and very small
fine unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
b. Natural sand shall be free from laterite and other softer grains and all sources of
sand showing appreciable percentage of these impurities shall be rejected.
c. The presence of mica in the fine aggregate has been found to reduce
considerably the compressive strength of concrete. It is advisable, therefore, to
investigate the mica content of the fine aggregates and make suitable allowances
for possible reduction in strength of concrete or mortar. The decision of the
Engineer whether to use such sand and if so, what allowances to be made, shall
be final and binding on the Contractor.
d. The contents of the organic matter shall conform to relevant Standards.
(3) Manufactured Sand
a. Whenever natural sand conforming to the required Specifications is not
available recourse shall be taken to manufacture sand of desired quality by
crushing of stones. The Contractor shall comply with the directions of the
Engineer in this behalf. The stone that will be used in crushing for getting fine
aggregates shall conform in all respects to the stone/coarse aggregates
specified earlier.
b. In case the natural sand or the manufactured/crushed sand is not considered to
be as per Specifications, the same may be rejected outright by the Engineer or
the sand may be allowed after processing, provided the sand conforms to the
requirements after such treatment.
165
c. For improving workability of pump-able concrete mixes, the Contractor may

consider a combination of natural and manufactured sands. Proposed
proportions shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer.
3.5.4 Storage of Aggregates

(1) The Contractor shall, at all times, maintain a storage of all grades of aggregates for at-
least one month’s requirement.
(2) Adequate drainage of stockpiles shall be provided.
(3) The stockpiling of the processed aggregate and drawl there from shall be such as to
ensure that the variation in the free moisture in the aggregate, during any one shift of
working, does not exceed 1 percent.
(4) The coarse aggregates shall, as far as possible, be stored in a shade or covered
storage and arrangement made for sprinkling of water to ensure wetting of the
aggregates.
(5) Care shall be taken in screening and stocking of the coarse aggregates so as to avoid
intermixture of different gauge materials and inclusion of any foreign materials.
(6) The stockpiles shall be built up in horizontal or gently sloping layers.
(7) Trucks and bulldozers shall be kept off the piles to prevent breakage and impairing
the cleanliness of aggregate.
(8) A hard base in concrete shall be provided to prevent contamination from underlying
materials in storage areas in continuous use.
(9) Overlap of different sizes of materials shall be prevented with suitable walls or by
ample distance between storage piles.
(10) Arrangement shall be made to store natural and manufactured sand in a way that
shall protect it from being contaminated with dust, organic matter or other
deleterious substances external water and rain.
3.6 Water
(1) Water is available from natural sources within the Project area, and shall be in
accordance with the clause of 5.4 of IS: 456. However, the water may be scare during
certain period of the year. The reliable water supply for construction purposes shall
be installed and maintained by the Contractor.
(2) Adequate water storage facilities shall be provided by the Contractor at the batching
and mixing plant and other Work Sites so that various operations of works do not
suffer due to temporary breakdown in the main supply system.
(3) The Contractor shall supply water samples from the intended sources to the
Engineer for suitability testing and approval. The Engineer shall establish the
suitability of water to be used for construction purposes.
(4) Adequate testing arrangements for quality testing during construction as required by
the Engineer shall be provided by the Contractor in his field laboratory.
(5) Water for washing of aggregates, mixing mortar, concrete or grout shall be clean and
free from earth, vegetable or organic matter, injurious amount of oils, acids, sugar,
salt and alkaline substances in solution or in suspension and shall conform to
relevant Standards. The maximum allowable contents of sulphates (SO4) shall be 250
parts per million (ppm) and those of chlorides (Cl) shall be 200 mg per litre for plain
concrete works and 100 mg per litre for reinforced concrete works. Turbidity shall
be within 2000 ppm (or 0.2 percent by weight) and preferably as low as possible.
166
(6) Water used for curing shall be clean and free from contamination and from excess
amounts of acids or alkalis or other matter combining chemically with and thus,
disfiguring the concrete surface. Water shall not contain organic matter causing
stink.
(7) Average 28 days compressive strength of at least three 15 cm concrete cubes
prepared with water proposed to be used shall not be less than 90 percent of the
average of strength of three similar concrete cubes prepared with distilled water.
The cubes shall be prepared, cured and tested in accordance with the standards.
(8) The Contractor shall bring to the notice of the Engineer, the occurrence of hot water
during underground excavation. He shall supply samples of such water to the
Engineer for testing. Suitable measures shall be taken in case such testing reveals
deleterious effect on concrete.
3.7 Cement
3.7.1 General
(1) The Contractor shall procure the cement of the specified quality from the cement
sources/plants approved by client. For this purpose the client will approve at least
two sources/plants out of those intimated by the Contractor so that one is a standby
for taking care of any eventualities.
(2) Cement to be used for various works shall be of different types such as Ordinary
Portland Cement or Portland Pozzolana Cement or Portland Slag Cement or Sulphate
Resistant Cement as approved by the Engineer and shall conform to the relevant
Standards at the time of its use.
(3) The Contractor shall deliver with each supply of 100 MT of cement or as directed by
Engineer a certificate from the manufactures/suppliers by which the cement is
guaranteed to comply with the requirement of the specifications. Client shall have
the right to check or test the cement at any stage of its manufacture or delivery and
the Client test reports shall supersede the test report given in the manufacturer’s
certificate.
(4) With aggregates from the quarries identified to have alkali reactive tendency, the
cement to be used shall not have alkali contents (i.e. Na2O and K2O expressed in
equivalent weight of Na2O) exceeding 0.6 percent by weight of cement.
(5) The cement will be sampled and tested by the Engineer for strength and physical
properties and chemical analysis will be carried out as set out in relevant Standards.
(6) The Cement samples for testing at the source/plant shall be obtained by the
Contractor as the bins are being filled. Tests for false set shall be made on samples
taken at the latest time prior to shipment.
(7) Rapid cements have to be foreseen to use in mortars to use in rock bolting works and
in collection of ground infiltrations.
3.7.2 Transportation
(1) Cement shall be delivered at Site in bulk/bags in bulk containers/trucks approved by
the Engineer.
(2) All bulk containers/carriers shall be clean and dry prior to filling/loading with
cement and equipped with weather proof closures on all openings.
3.7.3 Storage
(1) Sufficient storage facilities shall be provided at the batching plant to enable each new
shipment of cement to be stored separately from the cement stored from earlier
shipments.
167
(2) Cement shall be stored above ground, adequately protected against rain, sun and
moisture. Bulk storage bins and silos shall be emptied complete and cleaned of all
cement accumulation after every 3 months.
(3) Arrangement shall be made such that stock of approved cement are adequate to meet
the work planning at all times, the planning shall allow time for testing and approval
of each shipment before such cement is incorporated in the works.
(4) Cement shall be used in the order in which it is received at Site. Cement of different
brands, if received on Site, shall not be combined in the same mix and structure. Such
cement shall be used in different structures as approved by the Engineer.
(5) Handling and storage facilities shall be such that no cement is stored before use for
more than 120 days. Should any cement be unavoidably kept in storage longer than
120 days, if shall be tested and if found defective, shall be condemned for use on the
Project irrespective of its origin date of manufacture and /or manufacturers test
certificate.
3.8 Steel for Reinforcement
3.8.1 General
(1) Any reinforcement, which is bent should not be bent at the location of the original
bend.
(2) Where the temperature of steel is below 50 C,special precautions may be necessary
such as reducing the speed of bending or with the engineer approval, increasing the
radius of bending.
3.8.2 Special precautions like coating of reinforcement bars shall be taken for reinforced concrete
elements conforming to relevant IRS/IS codes exposed to severe condition.
(1) The Contractor shall procure the steel for reinforcement of the specified quality from
the steel sources/plants approved by client. For this purpose the client will approve
at least two sources/plants out of those intimated by the Contractor so that one is a
standby for taking care of any eventualities.
(2) Steel reinforcement shall conform to relevant Indian Standards or equivalent.
(3) Steel shall be free from loose mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, paint or other
deleterious matter, when examined immediately before concrete is being placed.
(4) Binding wires, used for binding/fixing reinforcement bars shall be galvanized iron
wires.
3.8.3 Transportation and Storage
(1) Transportation shall be undertaken in such a manner that no damage is done to the
steel.
(2) Reinforcement steel shall be stored off the ground in separate groups according to
size and length. Reinforcement steel, which has been cut and bent according to the
schedules of the contractor and approved by the Engineer, shall be marked with bar
number, as shown in the schedule, by using same form of weather proof tag or by
placing marked bins, and shall be stored in such a manner as to be readily accessible
when required and to facilitate inspection.
3.9 Structural Steel
3.9.1 General
(1) The Contractor shall procure the Structural steel of the specified quality from the
structural steel sources/plants approved by client. For this purpose the client will
approve at least two sources/plants out of those intimated by the Contractor so that
one is a standby for taking care of any eventualities.
(2) All structural steel shall be of new/unused stock, clean and straight, free from rust or
scale and without any sharp kinks, bends or other objectionable defects.
168
(3) All structural steel including steel plates and steel to be used for supports for tunnel
and cavities as also for bolts, nuts and washers etc. for steel support shall conform to
relevant Standards, as IS 2062 Steel for general structural purposes.
(4) The material used in splices shall conform to the Specifications of the material being
spliced.
3.9.2 Transportation and Storage
(1) Structural steel shall be transported, handled and stored in such a manner that no
damage is done to the materials or the structure.
(2) All timber to be used for temporary support accessories shall be stored in separate
secure locations.
3.10 Steel Fibers
3.10.1 Fibers
Fibers to comply with European Standard EN 14889-1 “Fibers for concrete - Part 1: Steel
fibers - Definitions, specification and conformity”
Steel fibers shall in general comply with the following requirements
(a) Deformed ends.
(b) Dimensions: minimum length 30mm, aspect ratio (ratio between Fiber length and
fiber diameter) greater than 40 and dimensional tolerances according to EN 14889-1.
(c ) Fibers out of drawn wire, with a tensile strength of steel wire > 1.000MPa min.
(d) Fiber quantity: initially foreseen, depending on result of tests (can be bigger depending
on the tests results): 30 kg/m3.
(e) It is prohibited to use loose steel fibers that cause balls during mixing.
3.10.2 Quality
Performance and control criteria should be specified following the EN 14487-1, taking into
account the requirement of the project.
3.11 Welded Wire Mesh
3.11.1 The Welded Wire mesh to comply with Bureau of Indian Standards IS: 1566–1982
(Reaffirmed) – “Specification for Hard-Drawn Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement”
and IS 1786 for HSDS bars and wires.
Welded Wire Mesh shall in general comply with the following requirements:
(a) Hard-drawn steel wire fabric shall be of either Oblong mesh and/or Square mesh as
shown in the respective drawings.
(b) Quality of Steel - The wire used in the manufacture of fabric shall be hard-drawn steel
wire or HSDS (as per requirement) conforming, in all respects, to the requirements of
IS: 432 (Part II) or IS: 1786 (as per requirement) and suitable for welding. When so
requested by the purchaser, the manufacturer or the supplier shall supply certificates
to this effect.
(c) Manufacture - The fabric shall be formed by spacing the main and the cross wires,
which shall be fixed at their points of intersection by electric welding, so as to be
sufficiently stable to withstand normal handling in transport and during concreting,
without displacement beyond the limits specified. It shall be fabricated and finished in
a workman like manner which will assure accurate spacing and alignment of all
members of the finished fabric to give substantial square or rectangular openings.
Butt joints in the wires of the fabric shall be electrically welded and the joints shall be
staggered.
(d) Calculation of Mass - The nominal mass of fabric shall be calculated on the basis that
steel weighs 0.785 kg/cm2 of nominal cross-sectional area per meter run.
169
(e) Tolerances - The tolerances shall be as per Cl. No. 9 of IS: 1566 – 1982 or IS: 1786
(f) Mechanical Properties - All wires of the finished fabric shall meet the minimum
requirements for physical properties as described in IS: 432 (Part II) or IS: 1786
except elongation.
(g) Tests - The tests shall be as per Cl. No. 11 of IS: 1566 – 1982 and/or IS: 1786.
(h) Delivery, Inspection & Testing - The Delivery, Inspection & Testing shall be as per Cl.
No. 12 of IS: 1566 – 1982 (Latest) and/or IS: 1786.
(i) Identification & Marking - The Identification & Marking shall be as per Cl. No.
13 of IS: 1566 – 1982 and/or IS: 1786.
170
4.0 EARTHWORKS
4.1 Scope of Work
1) The specifications described herein under relate to the Work of open excavation and
shall include all labour, tools, plants, and services, necessary to carry out the
excavation of different materials, transportation and disposal of all excavated
materials.
2) Excavation shall be made to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the drawings
or as otherwise directed by the Engineer.
3) The Contractor shall maintain the excavated slopes, drainage, trenches and prepare
foundations as shown on the drawings or as required by the Engineer.
4) The area of open excavation shall, where, in the opinion of the Engineer, clearing is
necessary, be cleared of all trees, bushes, rubbish and other objectionable matter and
the materials so removed, shall be disposed off suitably or as directed by the Engineer.
5) When additional excavation outside the lines and grades shown on the drawings is
required by the Contractor for his own convenience, such additional excavation shall
be required to be backfilled with acceptable material and compacted by the
Contractor in a matter satisfactory to the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit his
plans and related stability analyses for such proposed work in writing for Engineer’s
acceptance prior to the commencement of the work.
6) The removal of mud and slush resulting from heavy rains or flooding of the sites,
when necessary to ensure the safe and effective performance of the work, shall be
performed by the Contractor. Perimetric gutters have to be implemented around the
slopes to ensure the safe drainage of superficial water, avoiding slope erosion.
7) At all times during construction, the Contractor shall adopt excavation procedures
which ensure the stability and integrity of any slope at any time.
8) The approval given by the Engineer to the Contractor’s methods and equipment shall
not relieve the Contractor of his full responsibility for a proper and safe execution of
excavation, or of liability for injuries to, or death of person(s), or any obligations
under this Contract.
9) The Contractor shall comply with all safety procedures and requirements.
4.2 Submittals
1) At least 14 days prior to the commencement of excavation, the Contractor shall
submit details of his excavating methods and sequences for all open excavation Works
including the equipment.
2) The description of drilling and blasting procedures shall include the following:
o Diameter, spacing, depth, pattern and orientation of blast holes
o Type, strength, amount and distribution of explosives to be used per
hole
o Description and purpose of any special method to be adopted by the
Contractor
o Sequence of various activities of the excavation work with an
indication of corresponding time requirements.
3) To enable the Engineer to verify all necessary setting out and elevations carried out by
the Contractor, the latter shall notify the Engineer in writing, giving at least 7 days
notice of his intentions to start excavation.
4) The Engineer reserves the right to require any additional information deemed
5) The Contractor shall carry out the excavation of open cut rock slopes utilizing the
controlled perimeter blasting technique wherever required by the Engineer.
171
6) Excavation shall be carried out in a descending way by benching. The bench height
shall not exceed 2 m. A horizontal berm with a minimum width of 4 m shall be
provided at least every 10 m of height or as shown on the drawings.
7) Immediately after excavation and sealing to the satisfaction of Engineer and prior to
the excavation of next bench, the Contractor shall install shotcrete, wire mesh, rock
bolts and weep holes, as well as drainage boreholes if considered necessary, as shown
on the drawings or as required by the Engineer. Water ingress behind the shotcrete
lining shall not be allowed.
8) The wire mesh for shotcrete shall have proper overlap between two successive
benches or elsewhere as required. The overlap shall not be less than 300 mm or as
shown on drawing or as directed by the Engineer.
9) At slope surfaces where shotcrete but no rock bolts are to be installed, the Contractor
shall install soil nails to secure the shotcrete lining. The soil nails shall be at least 1 m
long L-shaped steel rebars, diameter 16 mm. At least one soil nail shall be installed
every 4 sqm. Weep holes at least every 2.5 sqm have to be realties provided.
10) Different support systems can be defined in project drawings, such as micropiles
curtains associated or not with retaining RCC walls and permanent anchorages and
have to be followed by the Contractor accordingly specifications and / or indications
given by the Engineer in charge or by DDC. Contractor has to have all the necessary
equipment and materials to carry out that support and excavation process.
11) All blasted rock shall be removed from the bench toe before undertaking further
work.
12) All other specifications pertaining to blasting and scaling etc. relevant to open
excavation as stipulated in the Specification shall be referred.
4.3 Excavation of open cuts
1) The slopes in excavation shall be as shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
2) Any changes in the slopes as shown on the drawings on account of site conditions will
be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3) Every precaution shall be taken to prevent slips. In case slips occur, the slipped
material shall be removed to the designed / modified slope. Utmost care shall be
exercised to cause no harm/structural damage to structures and/or utilities in the
vicinity of the excavation area.
4) Suitable berms shall be left at appropriate places or as shown on the drawings with
necessary approach ramps and sump pits for installation of dewatering pumps or
other purpose, as required by the Engineer. These shall be excavated and the
excavation finished to lines and grades shown on the drawings and to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
5) In case of loose excavation, where the surface is left as excavated, or is to be covered
by pitching, formation of rain cuts and gullies shall be avoided by proper drainages.
Any gullies formed shall be made good, by properly packing excavated rock spoil in
them. All holes left by removing boulders shall also be filled in with rock spoil.
6) Where plain surfaces are required, such faces of excavation shall be formed in such a
manner that would least shatter the rock mass. Only light blasting, ream holes pre
splitting or similar methods shall be allowed in areas adjacent to such faces.
7) All excavations, done beyond the lines and dimensions shown on the drawings, which
are to be covered by concrete shall be filled back with the concrete of the same quality
or as directed by the Engineer.
8) Blasting within 30m of concrete or grout will be permitted only after concrete or
grout is 7 days old and only after the submission by the Contractor and approval by
the Engineer of a plan showing the relative positions of structures or grouted area and
the areas to be blasted, Contractor’s proposed drilling and blasting plan together with
an outliner of precautions to be taken.
172
9) The open cut excavation shall be staged as shown on the drawings or as required by
the Engineer.
10) At slope surfaces where shotcrete but no rock bolts are to be installed, the Contractor
shall install soil nails to secure the shotcrete lining. The soil nails shall be at least 1 m
long L-shaped steel rebars, diameter 16 mm. At least one soil nail shall be installed
every 4 sqm. Weep holes at least every 2.5 sqm have to be realties provided.
11) Different support systems can be defined in project drawings, such as micropiles
curtains associated or not with retaining RCC walls and permanent anchorages and
have to be followed by the Contractor accordingly specifications and / or indications
given by the Engineer in charge or by DDC.
4.4 Disposal of Excavated Materials
1) The excavated materials suitable for construction shall be stockpiled at locations
approved by the Engineer, if the immediate placement at the final location is not
possible. The excavated material shall be dumped at the final disposal locations and
may require re-handling as directed by the Engineer.
2) The excavated debris from the tunnels should be disposed off outside the Mahananda
WLS as detailed in the plan submitted by the project proponents.
3) Excavated materials which are not suitable for construction and those in excess of the
requirement for construction shall be disposed off in the waste disposal area. Disposal
of all material shall be such that it will not interfere with natural drainage and is as
per the regulations for environmental protection.
4) The Contractor shall ensure that no excavated materials are disposed off in the
streams or at locations, where in the opinion of the Engineer, these are liable to be
washed away by the floods.
5) The Contractor is permitted to utilize the excavated rock spoil, if found suitable, for
conversion into any building material for the contracted work on payment of royalty
charges to Government department as applicable. He shall keep client and Northeast
Frontier Railway completely indemnified against such claims from the Government
department.
6) The Muck dumping yards should be designed as per NEERI GUIDELINES (National
Environmental Engineering Research Institute)
4.5 Drainage
Seepage water from springs or rain water shall be suitably collected and drained away by
gravity, wherever it is possible to do so. Where, however, drainage by gravity is not feasible,
pumping could be resorted to. All stipulations laid down in Section 10 on “Dewatering
Drainage and Pumping” shall be followed.
Drainage organs to mitigate the energy of the water and thus its erosion capacity have to be
stablished as per project drawings or as per Engineer indications.
4.6 Measurement and Payments
1) Payment for open excavation will be made as per Bill of Quantities.
2) Measurement for payment for excavation will be of the in-situ volume defined by the
excavation lines as shown on the drawings, unless otherwise modified or directed by
the Engineer
3) The volume of excavation in each type of material will be worked out from the areas
of cross sections and no distinction will be made whether the material is dry or wet.
No deduction for voids will be made.
4) Cross section will be taken normal to the center line at as close interval as practicable
but, in any case, not more than 5 meters and 3 meters apart in loose excavation and
rock respectively, prior to the starting of excavation, unless some other method is
acceptable to the Engineer in any particular location of the work.
5) The Rates, if not specifically stipulated otherwise, shall be deemed to include the
entire cost , but not limited to the following:
(a) Provision of all labour, equipment and materials required for open excavation
173
in various locations, drilling holes for blasting, developing and improving

controlled blasting methods, performance of blasting, cleaning, washing
protection and maintaining excavated surfaces in satisfactory conditions and
additional excavations if any, required by the Contractor for his construction
methods.
(b) Provision for loading, hauling and dumping the excavated material on
stockpiles, dumping areas or points of incorporation into Permanent Works up
to 2 km from portals, re-handling of materials including segregating, grading,
draining and drying of materials suitable for use of embankment construction
or as backfill.
(c) All delays during excavation work resulting from unfavorable weather
conditions.
(d) Complying with all requirements of statutory laws and regulations relating to
the works and any restrictions resulting there from, obtaining all necessary
permits and licenses for use and transport of explosives and other materials.
(e) Surveying, setting out, checking of excavated profile, layouts and any
subsequent rectification works resulting from unable or incorrect surveys,
provision of suitable equipment for and delays due to carrying out this work.
(f) Furnishing, installation, operation, maintenance and removal of
communication and illumination systems and observing safety precautions.
(g) Recording and preparation of reports related to excavation progress and
procedures.
(h) All work involved with and any partial or short interruptions or
inconveniences caused by the check surveys, installation of instruments and
performance of monitoring, performance of the rock mechanics tests and
geological mapping, for which no separate payment is provided elsewhere in
these specifications.
(i) The supply of geotechnical instrumentation, the installation of the instruments
and the taking of readings will be part of a separate contract under client.
However the Contractor shall provide all auxiliary works and equipment
required for geotechnical monitoring, e.g. staff for assistance in installation of
the instruments, drilling, grouting, lifting equipment, as instructed by the
Engineer, etc. The Contractor shall be responsible and shall provide a proper
protection of installed instruments. The Contractor shall provide immediate
replacement of instruments, which are damaged by construction activities at
his cost.
(j) Drilling holes for blasting.
(k) Developing and improving controlled blasting methods.
(l) Blasting test, explosives and performance.
(m) Shoring and strutting of the excavated area.
4.7 Backfill
1) Backfill shall consist of materials as approved by the Engineer and shall be placed in
locations as directed by the Engineer.
2) Only suitable materials obtained from excavation, if practicable, shall be used for
backfill.
3) Material to be used in backfill shall be free drainage type. Drainage of back fill shall be
assured.
4.8 Payment of Backfill
It shall be deemed to include the entire cost, but not limited to the following:
 Transport and supply of suitable, free-draining material to filling site
174
 Selection, segregation, processing and appropriate temporary storage of excavated

material
 Preparation of the ground surface
 Placing of the fill material in layers not exceeding 300 mm
 Compaction and levelling
Payment for backfill will be made as per Bill of Quantities. Measurement of backfill shall be
done as per cross-sections and approved drawings. Drainage provisions are not
compensated separately.
4.9 Exclusions
1) All costs of dewatering (pumping, drainage boreholes, weep-holes, etc.) shall be
covered by the applicable Unit Rates as specified in the Bill of Quantities.
2) Installation of slope support (shotcrete, wire mesh, soil nails, bolts, erosion
protection, etc.) as shown on the drawings shall be covered by the applicable Unit
Rates as specified in the Bill of Quantities.
3) No Extra measurement for payment or payment will be made for the following:
(a) Over excavation beyond the excavation lines shown on the drawings, removal
of material or backfilling with acceptable material where and when and as
required by the Engineer
(b) Methods adopted for specially controlled excavation at foundation level or near
the faces where plain surfaces are required.
(c) Formation of berms or ramps sump pits for installation of dewatering pumps at
places which fall beyond the specified excavation lines.
(d) Replacement or repair of concrete or other works damaged by blasting.
(e) Over-excavation required for Contractor’s convenience. The concrete required
to fill such excavation shall also be at the Contractor’s expense.
(f) Weep holes in shotcrete.
4.10 Micropiles
4.10.1 General
This Chapter applies to the vertical micropiles in open excavation, foreseen at north portals
as per relevant drawings and/or as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
4.10.2 Materials
Vertical micropiles shall consist of threaded steel pipes bars, dia 139.7 57 mm, 10mm thick
steel grade Fe 510 with screwed joints.
4.10.3 Execution
1) Drilling procedure (dia > 120 mm) shall be carried out by controlling the
straightness and verticality of the hole.
2) The grouting shall be executed through injection pipes fixed to the threaded bar. The
bar shall be prepared with the pipe and inserted into the drilling. In case the hole is instable
and bar cannot be inserted, piped drillings shall be carried out and piping recovered after
bar insertion, before grouting.
3) The bar can be joined in case of long micropiles and transport difficulties. In this case
the joint should provide the same or higher strength than the bar itself.
4) The head of the micropiles shall be able to transfer the foreseen bearing capacity
with the due safety factors. For doing so, a special piece, joined to the bar of the micropiles
by special threaded joint, can be foreseen as per design.
5) Every part of the micropiles should be embedded into grouting mortar or into
concrete, in order to avoid possible buckling of the bar once vertical loads act.
6) Any alternative solution can be provided only after submission of all the due
evidence of equivalence in terms of micropiles strength, total bearing capacity of the pile
groups and economic analyses. The agreement of the Engineer is a necessary condition for
175
the application of any alternative.

7) Before execution, the Contractor shall submit detailed procedure and material
specifications
4.10.4 Test
1) Test micropiles in number of 3 at different depth shall be realised. Test procedure
and loading cycles shall be defined in a specific document including the relevant control
sheets.
2) A suitable contrast for push and/or pull-out test must be provided. In case contrast
micropiles are foreseen, these have to be longer, in a sufficient number for each test, and
realised earlier in order to assure a resistance higher than the one of the test micropiles.
3) During the test, all care should be paid by using due instruments in order to assure
the measurement of the test pile only. Comparisons to fix points have to be provided.
4.10.5 Measurement and Payment
The micropiles shall be measured and paid per running meters installed as per the relevant
drawing or instructed by engineer. The rate shall include all labour, materials, cost of grout
including cement, lead, lift, handling, wastage complete with contractors own equipments for
complete job in accordance to specifications and shown on the drawings or as instructed by
the Engineer.
4.11 Permanent pre-stressed anchorages
Threadbar anchors with Double Corrosion Protection (DCP)`
4.11.1 General
DCP anchors are recommended for anchors with a long service life and for an environment
where aggressive materials are expected.
The permanent threadbar anchors use a double corrosion protection system to fully
encapsulate the steel bars over their entire length.
It consists of cement grout injected into the annular space between the centralised
Threadbar and the high strength corrugated PVC sheathing over the bond and free lengths.
The cement grout inside the corrugated sheathing acts as the first level of protection
embedding the bar in an alkaline environment.
The corrugated PVC sheathing is impermeable to any corrosive substances such as ground
water and gases and acts as the second level of protection. Permanent anchors are
pregrouted in a controlled factory environment to ensure adequate corrosion protection
during transport, storage, installation and design life.
In the bond length, the corrugations of the sheathing transfer the load to the grout in the
drilled hole. In the free length, the load transfer is prevented by inserting smooth sheathing
over the corrugated sheathing.
In order to accommodate for elongation of the anchor during tensioning, a short segment of
the threadbar remains ungrouted underneath the anchor plate. Full encapsulation is
provided at this location by a steel tube welded to the underside of the plate and fits tightly
over the sliding seals at the top of the free length. In addition, the steel tube is filled with
anti-corrosion compound.
The anchor nut and the bar above the anchor plate are covered by removable protective caps
filled with anti-corrosion compound. Caps can be made of either plastic or hot-dipped
galvanised steel. This design permits re-stressing, de-stressing and load monitoring at any
time. The two levels of corrosion protection for couplers in both the bond and free lengths
are achieved by applying anticorrosion compound to the bar and coupler and covering the
splice with a heat-shrink sleeve. For couplers in the free length, an additional debonding
tube is inserted over the DCP couplers to ensure free movement of the couplers during
stressing.
176
4.11.2 Steel Grade

Nominal Diameter (mm) 25
Minimum Ultimate Steel Grade (MPa) 550
Minimum Yield Steel Grade (MPa) 500
Minimum Breaking Load (kN) 270
Minimum Yield Load (kN) 245
Cross-Section Area (mm²) 491
Maximum Thread Diameter (mm) -
Unit Weight (kg/m) 7,0
Minimum Bar Protrusion P* (mm) -
4.11.3 Anchor head dimensions and couplers

Nominal Diameter (mm) 25
Domed Nut L (mm) 40
A/F** (mm) 38
Hex Nut L (mm) 50
A/F** (mm) 41
Coupler C (mm) 115
D (mm) 42
Typical Plate for Rock Anchors W (mm) 200
T (mm) 20
Corrugated Sheathing Diameter (mm) 50
Smooth Sheathing Diameter (mm) -
177
4.11.4 Receiving the anchors specifications

- Check for possible transportation damage.
- Do not use anchors that have been bent or that have any surface damage, do not use bars
as ground for welding, do not allow hot slag to touch the bars, do not weld to bars.
- Handle anchors with care using nylon lifting slings (2 legs minimum).
- Upon unloading, protect the bars from dirt and mechanical damage.
- Important: the bars must not be dropped, thrown or dragged.
4.11.5 DCP couplers in the bond and free lengths
- Grease both bar ends thoroughly.
- Install coupler, bar ends must be centred inside coupler.
- Torque bar against each other.
- If applicable, tighten set-screws against flat side of the bar.
- Grease coupler thoroughly.
- Install heat-shrink sleeve. Important: do not burn the heatshrink sleeve nor the plastic
sheathing.
4.11.6 DCP couplers in the free length only
- Centre coupler tube over the heatshrink sleeve (refer to 2. above) allowing for
displacement of the heat-shrink sleeve during stressing.
- Secure coupler tube firmly by taping both end to the smooth sheathing.
4.11.7 Grout tube and outer spacer assembly
- Install outer spacers (alternatively: segment spacers) within the bond length using
adhesive tape and/or wire at the required spacing.
- If applicable, install grout tube using adhesive tape. The grout tube must start 50 to
100mm from the bottom of the anchor and extend at least 1 metre above the anchor
head.
4.11.8 Drilling
The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting drilling equipment and methods suitable to
establish a stable hole of adequate dimensions, within the tolerances specified. Down-hole
hammers are not permitted unless the Engineer provides written authorization.
Holes for anchors shall be drilled at the location [± 3 inches], orientation [± 3°inclination
and/or lateral direction] and to the length as shown on the Contract Drawings, the approved
Working Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor is to select the diameter of
the hole required to develop the specified pullout resistance. The drill bit or casing crown
shall not be more than 1/8 inch smaller than the specified hole diameter. If caving ground is
encountered the Contract is to adjust his drill method, including drilling fluid, use of drilling
casing, etc.
4.11.9 Installing the bar plates and bar nuts
178
- Install anchor plates pre-filled with anti-corrosion compound over the bar leaving
enough bar protruding behind the plate for the anchor nut and the stressing
coupler.Also, ensure that there is sufficient bare bar (typically 100 mm) inside the steel
tube welded to the steel plate to allow for free movement of the vent cap during
tensioning of the anchor.
- Screw anchor nut tight against the bearing plate making sure that the spherical end of
the nut contacts the plate.
4.11.10 Installing the bearing & wedge washer and anchor nut
- Install the wedge washer (2 pcs maximum) followed by the bearing washer with welded
steel tube prefilled with anti-corrosion compound over the bar leaving enough bar
protruding behind the plate for the anchor nut and the stressing coupler. Also, ensure
that there is sufficient bare bar inside to steel tube welded to the steel plate to allow for
free movement of the vent cap during tensioning of the anchor.
- Screw anchor nut hand tight against the bearing plate making sure that the spherical end
of the nut contacts the plate.
4.11.11 Insertiting the anchor into the borehole
- The bar shall be inserted into the drill hole at a rate that does not damage the sheathing,
coating, and grout tubes; and shall not be driven or forced. When the bar cannot be
completely inserted, the Contractor shall remove it from the drill hole and clean and/or
redrill the hole to permit insertion. The bottom end of the anchorage may be fitted with a
cap or bullnose to aid its insertion into the hole, casing, or sheathing.
- If necessary, water-test the borehole according to the project specifications.
- Using a lifting eye or another equivalent attachment, lift the anchor from the anchor head
end, Important: do not drag.
- Insert the anchor into the borehole gradually making sure that it does not get damaged.
4.11.12 Grouting the anchors with plates and nuts installed
- Grout the anchor along its entire length in one stage according to the project
specification.
4.11.13 Grouting the anchors without plates and nuts installed
- Ensure that the anchor is centred in the borehole.
- Leave enough bar protruding behind the plate for the anchor nut and the stressing
coupler. Also, ensure that there will be sufficient bare bar inside the steel tube welded to
the steel plate to allow for free movement of the vent cap during tensioning of the bar.
Grout the entire anchor in one stage according to the project specifications.
- While the grout is still wet, wash-out half a metre below the location of the anchor plate.
- Install the anchor plate and nut as instructed above (Installing the anchor plates and
anchor nuts).
- Tremmie grout the entire void behind the plate.
4.11.14 Testing and stressing accordingly European technical Approval ETA -05/0122
4.11.15 Installing protective caps
- Pre-fill the caps with anti-corrosion compound and install it over the anchor nut with
corresponding seals.
The measurement is done by m of bar really installed, from top of the bars once coupled.
The payment is done by m of bar really installed and in the prize is included all the materials
and labour activities, including the drilling, cleaning of the hole, redrill if required, installing,
grouting tensioning and protections.
179
5.0 UNDERGROUND EXCAVATION

5.1 General
5.1.1 Description
1) This section applies to the execution of all underground excavation works in any type of
rock or soil. This section does not deal with specific topics of rock classification and
section type choosing; for those items see Section 7 and for Tolerances see Section 6.
Excavation may be carried out by drill and blast using smooth blasting techniques, tunnel
excavator or hydraulic breaker.
2) The Contractor shall adhere to all procedures as detailed on the drawings, described in
the Specification and in the submissions required in accordance with Clause 5.1.3 of this
Specification or other procedure as agreed with the DDC and approved by the Engineer.
3) The Contractor shall carry out excavation and support work so as to accomplish the
requirements of the particular section type nominated and to minimize the deterioration
and loosening of the rock mass surrounding the excavation, to restrict over break and to
prevent damage to the primary lining previously installed.
4) Requirements coming from IRCON / NFR or from the project designer to carry out NATM
tunnel works related with appropriate and safe activities, equipment and installations to
do the defuming, mucking, scaling and inspection, primary support, blasting activities,
survey activities, drain activities, maintenance of the tunnel separated paths for
pedestrian and vehicles, shifting and extension of the different devices (pressurized water
supply, compress air, electrical power supply, lighting, ventilation, instrumentation,
drainage system, pumping system, communication equipment, signalling equipment,
toilets or any other NATM activity) have to be followed by the contractor.
5) The construction of tunnels in the sanctuary area (Mahananda Wild Life, Chapter 17.2) up
to 30m of overburden should only be carried out during the day time. There should be no
blasting inside the tunnels up to 20m overburden, and this work should only be done by
roadheader/excavator/conventional method.
6) Records of the blasting pattern adopted at every blasting process, the geology
encountered to define the pattern and the result of the tunnel profile after blasting
(topographical cross section survey and geological aspects) have to be elaborated daily
and keep on mind and in archives to improve the blasting pattern definition.
5.1.2 References
1) IS: 4756:- 1978 – Safety Code for Tunneling work
2) IS: 3764 –1966 – Safety Code for Excavation work
3) IS: 4081-1967 – Safety Code for Blasting and Related drilling operations
4) IS: 4138-1977 – Safety Code for Working on Compressed Air
5) IS: 7293-1974 – Safety Code for Working with Construction Machinery
6) IS: 5878 (Various parts) – Codes of practices relating to tunneling and underground
excavations
7) Indian Explosive Act -1988
8) Indian Explosive Rules -1983
9) IS: 823 -1964 – Code of procedure for manual metal Arc welding of mild steel
10) IS: 816-1969 – Code of practice for use of Metal Arc welding for General Construction in
Mild steel.
This list is no limited to any other standard indicated in the project design, by the Quality Plan
or by the Emergency and Safety Plan.
5.1.3 Submissions
1) Prior to commencement of any underground excavation the Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer for approval detailed drawings and/or descriptions of proposed excavation
methods and sequences, including necessary site drainage, safety measures and the
results of test programmes carried out.
180
2) The excavation sequence of various underground works shall be presented to the

Engineer in a general schedule for all underground works.
3) Based on the section type classification as defined in Section 7 of this Specification, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a detailed schedule of the working
cycle for excavation and support in each section type. It shall be in accordance with the
progress required to achieve the agreed time scheduled of the overall project.
4) The method of excavation in each type of rock, including the description, specification and
pertinent manufacturer's literature for drilling, mucking and transporting equipment
shall be submitted to the Engineer.
5) The provisions of the Indian Standards related to the use of explosives as mentioned in
Clause 5.1.2 of this Specification shall be applied to the portal and underground works
carried out by drill and blast methods.
6) Particulars of the proposed blast design shall be submitted to the Engineer for each cross
section or subdivided cross section, containing the following information:
7) Drilling pattern, hole diameters, spacing, depth and inclination.
8) Type, strength, amount in terms of weight and cartridges of explosives to be used in each
hole, on each delay and the total for the blast.
9) Distribution of the charge in the holes and priming of each hole.
10) Type, sequence and number of delays, delay pattern; wiring diagram for blast; size and
type of hook-up lines and lead lines; type and capacity of firing sources; type of condenser
discharge blasting machine.
11) Stemming of holes and matting or covering of blast area.
12) Written evidence of the qualifications of the persons who will be directly responsible for
supervising the charging and firing of the round.
13) Prior to dumping or stockpiling of any material the Contractor shall submit layouts of
stockpile and spoil areas for approval to the Engineer. The layouts shall show all
pertinent data in particular working methods, stability calculations and measures,
provisions for security and both temporary and permanent drainage arrangements and
the final landscaping.
14) The Engineer shall be provided with all submissions in sufficient time ahead of
construction works or at dates mutually agreed upon.
5.2 Execution
5.2.1 Equipment
1) Use of equipment and methods that satisfy the requirements of this Section while
preserving and protecting the inherent strength of the material surrounding the tunnel.
Any mechanical equipment for underground excavation works and transportation shall
be suitable for the works specified with respect to performance and current Indian safety
regulations, as well as for compliance with the requirements of the construction
programme, to the approval of the Engineer.
2) The tunnel excavation should be done on the basis of vibration monitoring. Wherever
there are structures near to the tunnel alignment, controlled blasting or mechanical
excavation should be done. See Vibration monitoring, Chapter 17.3.
3) Underground mechanical plant and equipment shall be powered by electricity,
compressed air or diesel engine. Diesel engines must be fitted with filters for the
treatment of exhaust fumes. Petrol or paraffin appliances shall not be used underground.
4) Rock-drilling with air flushing shall not be allowed in underground excavations, unless
required by the ground conditions as approved by the Engineer.
5.2.2 Electrical and Hydraulic Gear used for Construction
1) All electrical supply and distribution equipment shall comply with the recommendations
of BS 6164 Section 7, Clause 25.
2) Do not use oil-filled switchgear underground. Switchgear shall be of the air-break,
vacuum or gas-filled type.
3) Do not use mineral oil filled transformers underground. Transformers shall be dry type,
air-cooled.
181
4) Electrical heaters or radiators having exposed coils or elements shall not be permitted
underground.
5) Provide and maintain electrical installations on the load side of the power points of
supply and take all precautions necessary to ensure the safety of every person on the site.
6) Operate the lighting system at low voltage. The lighting circuit shall be separated from
other sub-circuits.
7) Provide and maintain two battery-operated hand lamps of 20 watts minimum power at
each working face for emergencies and inspection of the works.
8) Provide and maintain 100% standby diesel-driven generators or alternative source of
power supply at each working portal. The generators or alternative supply shall be
capable of operating the lighting system and the pumps required to prevent flooding of
the underground works besides operating all other systems so as to allow the work
function smoothly in event of main power system failure.
9) Test-start standby fuel-driven generators, without load, weekly, to ensure they are in
good working order in case of emergency.
10) House electrical distribution panels and junction boxes in purpose-made sealed cabinets
with approved entry and outlet sockets fully glanded. Provide sealed electrical cabinets
with automatic chemical-spray fire-extinguishing units discharging automatically at 68
°C.
11) Welding Equipment:
12) Perform burning and welding at the surface whenever possible.
13) Welders, equipment and electrodes shall comply with the requirements of AWS D1.1.
14) Electrical Cables:
All exposed electrical cables installed within the tunnel shall comply with the following
requirements:
 Flame retarding properties to IEEE 383.
 Toxicity level: Acid evolution when burned 7%.
 Flame propagation: Oxygen index value 30% minimum.
 Smoke density rating: 35% maximum
Supply cables at 3.3 kV or below shall be 3-core with the armouring used as the earth return in
conditions where the cable is not subject to continuous movement after installation or where
the supply is to a fixed point(s).
For supply to mobile or transportable equipment where operation of the equipment subjects
the cable to flexure, cables shall be sheathed in flame retardant LSFH.
Hydraulic Equipment: Hydraulic oil shall have a minimum flash point of 230°C.
5.2.3 Site Illumination
5.2.3.1 Performance Requirements
1) The Contractor shall install, operate and maintain a lighting system in the underground
works during construction. The lighting intensity along the tunnel shall be at least 75 lux.
2) Each working face shall be brightly illuminated by one or more additional high intensity
movable lamps. Emergency lighting equipment shall be placed within 100 m of the face.
3) Suitable high-intensity movable lamps shall be provided by the Contractor to illuminate
any area in the underground works where testing or other inspection is carried out. The
Contractor shall install a switch connector at every 50 m along the tunnels to provide
lighting for the surveying and monitoring work.
4) Burned-out fluorescent or incandescent lamps shall be replaced every shift.
5) Burned-out high intensity lamps shall be replaced as soon as possible from a reserve
stock, which shall be kept as close as practicable to the working face.
6) All lighting shall be weather-proof.
7) Upon completion of the work, all temporary lighting systems shall be left in place by the
Contractor, with the exception of the power supply source.
5.2.4 Site Communication
1) The Contractor shall provide a suitable system for communication between the
underground work site and workstations outside the tunnel, and maintain such system in
182
working order at all times. An underground station (including telephone socket with bell
and indicator) shall always be within 50 m of the point where major work is being carried
out, and at 200 m intervals along the driven tunnel.
2) The Contractor shall install, operate and maintain a suitable communication system
between the heading and the workstation near the outside portal, and shall maintain this
system in working order at all times.
5.2.5 Definition of Excavation Profile
1) The excavation profiles as shown on the cross section drawings refer to the theoretical
excavation lines (as shown in the Figure. 5.1)
2) Depending on the quality of the rock, an appropriate enlargement of the theoretical
excavation profile shall be made in order to provide enough space for radial
deformations. The payment line (“Therorical excavation line - A Line” as shown in fig. 5.1)
is the line taking into consideration the radial deformations and construction tolerance.
No rock materials will be permitted to remain protruding the minimum excavation line
under any circumstances.
Figure 5.1 – Definition of Deformation Tolerance and Over break
ct - construction tolereance (see typical drawings)

IL – Inner Linnig
ds – sprayed concrete depending
on support class
t - deformantion tolerance depending on support class.
Z - Over break as per technical specification
183
“A” Line Definition – Line within which no unexcavated material shall remain. This line
is the payment line for the different section type.
“B” Line Definition – Line within which neither rock bolts nor sprayed concrete or any
part of the primary support shall intersect with the exception of bolt end hardware.
“C” Line Definition – Line within which the final lining shall be constructed within -
0/+50mm horizontal and -0/+30mm vertically.
3) These values shall be adjusted to suit actual deformations as experience is gained during
excavation. Adjustments shall be made by the DDC and shall be approved by the
ENGINEER and the pay line shall accordingly be modified.
4) The CONTRACTOR shall make all reasonable effort to maintain the excavation profile
as given in the Figure by exercising careful control of drilling and by varying the various
elements of smooth blasting.
5) The CONTRACTOR shall accommodate his construction tolerance for excavation and
support installation within the given value.
6) Over break
(a) Over break is the space created when the ground breaks beyond the pay line
for the various section types. Occurring over break may be caused by improper
workmanship and careless working technique (avoidable over break) and/or
by reasons which cannot be influenced by the Contractor (unavoidable over
break). Unavoidable over break is over break caused by unfavorable geological
conditions.
(b) The Overbreak is whether avoidable or unavoidable shall be decided by the
ENGINEER and his decision in this regard shall be final and binding on the
CONTRACTOR. The quantity for the Overbreak in case decided by the ENGINEER as
unavoidable shall be measured beyond Boundary Surface “Z” as shown in Figure
5.1
(c) In the event of excessive overbreak, support shall be installed immediately as
required to stabilize the ground. The DDC and the ENGINEER shall be informed
immediately. Remedial works shall be discussed and agreed between the
CONTRACTOR and the DDC. The detail design for the repair works shall be done by
the DDC and shall be approved by the ENGINEER. Remedial works shall be
executed before further advance of the face unless approved or directed otherwise
by the ENGINEER.
(d) Where it is decided by the Engineer that excessive over break has been caused by
unforeseeable geological conditions beyond the control of the Contractor and has
not arisen because of incorrect methods of work or carelessness, the cavity or void
formed by the over break shall be measured in-situ. The materials required to
complete the designed repair shall be quantified and approved by the Engineer and
certified for payment only if the cavity or void is beyond Boundary Surface “Z” (Fig.
5.1) and exceeds a volume of 2 m³ per round.
5.2.6 Excavation Requirements

1) All excavations shall be done with utmost care and the method and plant to be used in
execution thereof shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
2) The excavation shall conform to the widths, lengths and depths shown on the project
Drawings and/or shall be carried out in sections and to such dimensions as the Engineer
may direct.
3) In general the primary support must be completed two rounds from the face prior to the
opening of the next round. The round length and construction of the primary support is
184
defined in project drawings.

4) Rock excavation shall be performed by either using modern blasting methods or
excavator or breaker as per the prevailing rock conditions as encountered.
5) Drilling and blasting operations and excavations shall be carried out to meet the
following requirements:
 Minimum loosening at the excavation surface and tunnel walls
 The least possible vibration to be imparted to all tunnel supports or lining
(especially the concrete lining), neighbouring tunnels, and the surrounding mass.
 Pressure wave of such magnitude as not to have any adverse effects on any
formwork, fresh concrete and buildings above ground, neighbouring tunnels, etc.
 The least possible amount of overbreak
 Minimize rock falls in fault zones
6) Smooth blasting techniques use an appropriate number of micro-, milli- and half-seconds
delay - detonators, using suitable types of explosives, or change the blasting pattern or
excavation by line drilling, pre-splitting, perforation barring and wedging or other proven
methods as directed and approved by the Engineer.
7) The diameter and the spacing of the blast holes shall be adapted to the actual rock
conditions on site. The Contractor shall develop and continuously improve the blasting
techniques as the works progress to obtain the best possible excavation surface after
blasting. Foremen and/or engineers have to have experience in the definition of the
blasting pattern day by day. Software tools have to be available on site by the Contractor
to help in the definition of the daily blasting patterns.
8) Damage or alteration at any of the work areas, caused by improper blasting or due to any
other operation executed by the Contractor, shall be repaired or indemnified by him at his
own expense in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. Unstable or loose material
appearing during excavation and which in the Engineer’s opinion may be dangerous for
the personnel or for the Work, shall be removed immediately, and the Contractor shall
have no right to special or additional payment for this operation.
9) Opening up a new round of excavation shall only follow the installation of support
elements of the previous round as instructed by the Engineer.
10) The determination of the support classes shall be governed by the following cost-
influencing factors
 the length of round with which the excavation can be done in a safe manner and
at an acceptable accuracy of profile shape;
 the quantity of tunnel support required for reaching a new state of equilibrium,
derived from the cease of deformations within a defined period of time;
 the excavation- and support sequence.
 the presence of water
 the expected ground conditions in future excavation round lengths
 the 3D monitoring observation.
11) Determination of Support Class shall be done by the Contractor and approved by or
acknowledged by DDC/the Engineer. Unapproved determination of Support Classes shall
not be accepted for payment. Upon diverging viewpoints all efforts shall be undertaken to
reach consensus. The Contractor shall undertake all necessary action for improving
workmanship if so required by the Engineer to keep the rock mass intact to the best
possible extent and hence minimize tunnel support. The interpretation of the
185
geotechnical monitoring programme results shall play a decisive role in finding

consensus. The lack of consensus does not entitle the Contractor to stop works and apply
for time extension.
12) Determination of support classes, Geological Mapping Face and RESS (Rock Excavation
Support System) shall be recorded and kept on site and shall be accessible to the
Contractor, Engineer and DDC at all times into the configuration system accordingly the
Quality Plan. The determination shall be valid until the Contractor or the Engineer
requests a modification of the same at any one time. The request of examining the valid
determination of support classes shall not be denied by the other Party.
13) The subdivision of excavation in accordance with the Support Classes into Top Heading,
Bench and Invert (where an Invert is required) is mandatory.
14) Additional subdivision of excavation areas and face stabilization by means of face
stabilization wedge and/or shotcrete shall be applied wherever ground conditions require
doing so.
15) A flash shotcrete layer shall be applied immediately after excavation where required to
seal and protect material from deterioration and initial loosening. Shotcrete lining shall be
installed in a timely manner so as to maintain the inherent strength of the ground.
16) Should any excavation be made of greater dimensions than shown on the Drawings or
directed by the Engineer, then the excess space shall be filled in with such material and in
such a manner as the Engineer may direct.
17) The excavation of all niches in tunnel side walls shall in general be carried out after
installation of the initial support. Shotcrete and steel arches and girders (if any) in the
tunnel side wall shall be carefully cut along the profile of the all niches & lay by and
excavation shall be carried out in such a manner that the remaining tunnel support will
not suffer any damage. Additional rock bolts shall be installed as required for compensate
the removal of the arches.
18) The Contractor shall wash down exposed rock surfaces in the sidewalls and roof of
underground excavations to remove rock fragments, dust and debris. This washing down
is separate from clean up of surface immediately prior to placement of concrete or
shotcrete. The washing down shall be progressing with the excavation at a time directed
by the Engineer and generally will not be required closer than 30 m from the face unless
there is an immediate need for safety measures by placing shotcrete. Washing down shall
be done by directing a jet of water at the rock surface from a distance of 1 m through a
nozzle of 20 mm diameter and at a pressure of not less than 350 kPa (3.6 kg/cm2) and not
more than 700 kPa (7.2 kg/cm2). The method of performing the work and all equipment
used shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The cost of washing down during
excavation shall be included in the relevant unit rates.
19) All excavations shall be taken down to a firm bottom. Before any foundation material is
placed all loose material and foreign matter shall be removed, and the bottom surface
shall have the approval of the Engineer. The lowest 150 mm or thereabouts of the ground
to be removed shall be left undisturbed shortly before the work of constructing the
foundation is commenced if, in the opinion of the Engineer, such a precaution is necessary.
5.2.7 Safety Precautions
1) The Contractor shall not obtain and make use of any explosives without the express
permission in writing of the local security forces or other authorities concerned. The
Contractor shall comply strictly with the regulations, as required by the authorities
regarding purchase, storage, issuance, supervision by him and security forces, use of
explosives and transport of same to and from Site, all of which shall be deemed to have
been included in the relevant unit prices.
186
2) Blasting is furthermore strictly and in every case subject to the Engineer’s permission.
3) For drill & blast tunnel excavation, only non-electric blasting shall be adopted. A
separate circuit, independent of power and light circuits shall be used for blasting. No
electrically energized circuit shall be installed on the same side of the tunnel with the
blasting circuits. All electric lights or other energized circuits shall be disconnected for at
least 50 m from the point of loading. For loading purposes, the employees shall be
equipped with permissible battery lamps. Adequate warning notices shall be given to all
persons employed indicating the period, or danger at the time of firing and it shall be the
duty of the Contractor to provide adequate shelters or screens for protection of workers
exposed to risk of injury from the explosion or from flying material. After the blast takes
place in the tunnel, the workmen shall not be allowed to go to the face till all the toxic
gases are evacuated from the face.
4) Careful and proper scaling after each blast is imperative. The support elements are
considered to be sufficient for the overall stability of the tunnels. However, the
Contractor shall perform the installation of local rock bolts as required to prevent
loosening of rock blocks in the immediate heading area. Periodical inspection of the
tunnel sidewalls and roof areas shall be performed by the Contractor to detect possible
cracks or signs of instability of the tunnel support. Assessment of cracks shall be made in
association with the results of the geotechnical measurements in co-operation with the
DDC.
5) In rocks with rock burst potential, scaling, shotcreting and rock-bolting equipment must
be used which allows to be operated from a safe distance from newly exposed rock
surfaces.
6) Blasting will be permitted only after proper precautions have been taken for protection
of all persons, work and property.
7) Drilling, blasting, excavating and shotcreting operations shall be conducted by methods
and with equipment which shall positively control dust, fumes, vapours, gases, fibers,
fogs, mists or other atmospheric conditions. Following each round, the broken rock or
muck pile shall be wetted down sufficiently to prevent excessive dust during mucking
operations.
8) The Contractor shall record on agreed forms all blasting events including location, time,
charge, type of explosives, detonator type and arrangement, purpose, etc. These records
shall be available to the Engineer at any time.
5.2.8 Continuous Working
1) To ensure the safety and the security of the works, tunnel excavation shall be continuous
by day and night except as otherwise approved by the Engineer. Shift change has to be at
the work face so that continuous work is assured. If the state of the work permits,
intermissions will be allowed at general holiday periods, provided that the works are
secured in a safe condition.
2) The intermission shall not be allowed to start until all support elements in the Section
type at the particular locations have been completed. No unsecured face and tunnel
profile up to the face is allowed.
3) In addition, the face of any heading shall be sealed with shotcrete (minimum thickness
0.03 m) except in stable rock conditions.
4) The Contractor shall also carry out all additional support measures which may be
required by the DDC and approved by the Engineer.
5) Any indication given by DDC or by the Engineer affecting the stability of the tunnels and
the safety of the works have to be followed by the Contractor.
5.2.9 Drainage during Construction
5.2.9.1 Scope
1
1) The Contractor shall install, operate and maintain all temporary pumping plants and
187
drainage facilities and remove all accumulated silt, suspended solids and debris
necessary for the proper execution and completion of the works. Standing water will not
be allowed. The Contractor shall drill probe holes ahead of the advancing tunnel face and
grout suspect areas or pre-install drainage to divert the underground water before
excavation to control or decrease the inflow volumes so as to excavate successfully and
avoid instability. The Contractor’s proposed methods and strategies for groundwater
control shall be presented in the Contractor’s Methods Statements.
2) As long as tunnel excavation from the North direction toward South direction will
proceed, all inflowing water at that tunnel heading will have to be pumped out.
3) The capacity of pumping plant installed and maintained shall be at least two times the
expected volume of water inflow. In addition, pumps shall be provided at each working
heading of sufficient capacity to maintain acceptable working conditions for excavation
and construction of the lining.
4) No less than three pumping units shall be installed and maintained at each heading to
permit maintenance and repair without shutting down pumping operations.
5) Provide and maintain at each face standby pumps and pipe work of capacity at least
equal to the normal inflow of water. The standby pumps and pipe work shall be ready for
immediate installation as extra capacity to cope with any sudden large inflows that may
occur.
6) Comply with all applicable environmental requirements to minimize effects on the
groundwater table.
7) The Contractor shall remove the temporary drainage system, including pipes, after
completion of the Works, except where permanently embedded.In any case, the removal
has to be approved by the IRCON or its representatives.
8) Where exposure to water causes deterioration of ground, drainage water shall be piped,
not channeled.
9) During excavation of the tunnel, the Contractor shall maintain a ditch on one side of the
tunnel, clear and free of silt and debris at all times and keep the aisles dry. Temporary
collection sumps shall be cleaned and pumps shall be maintained in good condition at all
times. Fences and warning signs shall be placed around sumps. The tunnel roadways
shall be kept trafficable at all times by appropriate water control and by placing of firm
road surfacing material, or by other means as required.The drainage during the
excavation of the tunnels has to follow also the project drawings and IRCON / NFR or its
representative’s indications. Isolated pedestrian path from motorable path has to be
kept all along the tunnels. The fence used for the isolation of these paths has to be visible
permanent and signalled. All the surface of the tunnel paths has to be maintained clean
of dump and water flow, has to be kept levelled and under no deformable conditions.
10) The Contractor shall carry out free unhampered gravity flow and/or continuous
pumping in the presence of water in the tunnel. Water shall be controlled at the heading,
keeping the tunnel invert and any tunnelling machinery clear of water as much as
practical at all times.
11) Drainage during tunnel excavation shall also comply with all requirements as per Section
10.
12) Water pumped or drained out of tunnels shall pass through oil skimmer or other oil
separator, then through sedimentation basin or by other means as approved by engineer
designed for the maximum expected flow. Construction fencing of 1.8m minimum height
or other effective protection shall be installed to prohibit unauthorized persons from
trespassing into the area of the sedimentation pond.
13) The inlet to the ponds shall be designed so that water discharged into the pond will not
stir up sediment previously deposited in that basin. Provision shall be made to repair or
clean the basin during the progress of the works. The outflow channel from the pond
shall be designed and constructed such that soil erosion is prevented. To ensure the
continuing satisfactory operation of the system, accumulations of sand, silt, oil and
188
sludge shall be periodically removed and disposed of to places approved by the relevant
authorities.
14) The Contractor shall take all actions necessary to prevent pollution of creeks, rivers and
other water bodies by clay, silt, oil, grease or other pollutant. The Contractor shall
comply with all standards set up by local authority.
15) Pumps shall only be pneumatic or electric type.
16) Pumped water shall be measures in quantity on a regular, semi-real – time base.
17) Water flow coming from the tunnels has to be measured regularly by the contractor to
have a statistic control of the quantities and origin of the infiltrated water.
18) When tunnel is excavated from top to bottom direction the drainage and pumping
systems have to be reinforced. Contractor has to guarantee similar dry conditions for the
front face and paths for vehicle and pedestrian as if the excavation was done following
the direction bottom to top. No dump areas, no pools no puddles will be allowed.
19) Portal areas have to be provided of provisional or definitive drain system and also all the
conditions to guarantee the use of path for pedestrian and vehicles in safe, dry, clean of
mud and fines and no deformable conditions. Isolated fences have to be installed to
separate the pedestrian area from the vehicles area also in portal areas.
5.2.9.2. Materials and Execution
1) Longitudinal Drainage: The tunnel shall be drained by trenches in the bottom of the
respective heading. In areas of large water inflows, installation of partly perforated or
slotted hard-PVC pipes with a diameter of 150 mm to 300 mm depending on the amount
of water to be diverted may be necessary.
2) In case of descending headings sumps shall be provided at regular intervals from where
the water shall be pumped out of the tunnel.
3) Radial Drains: For concentrated water inflows, relief holes shall be made into the
ground. Perforated hard-PVC pipes, diameter 40 mm - 60 mm shall be installed into the
holes. The space between the pipe and mouth of the borehole shall be sealed with quick-
setting mortar. Quick setting mortar is a material which provides setting and hardening
within a couple of minutes used for temporary fixation or sealing. No specific properties
are required. The mouth of the pipe shall be connected to a hose for diversion to the
temporary longitudinal drainage, to sumps or longitudinal trenches in the bottom of the
respective headings.
4) In wet areas on the rock surface, by water coming from discrete and recognized fissures
and cracks in the rock, this shall be collected by semi-circular pipe portions (preferably
from corrugated, soft-PVC pipes) which are fixed to the rock by quick setting mortar or
shotcrete and diverted to sumps or longitudinal trenches in the bottom of the respective
headings.
5) In wet areas on the rock surface, by water dripping from spread fissures or fracture bed
rock, drainage cushion like extra drain or analysis shall be used fixed by dowels into the
rock, then covered by the structural shotcrete.
6) Wet areas in the shotcrete lining shall be drilled open and treated as above 3) or 4). Weep
holes drilled through the shotcrete up to 1 m into the rock shall avoid the buildup of
excessive water pressure onto the shotcrete lining.
7) The Contractor shall ensure that the pumps installed are kept clean and the drainage
system maintained so that all water during the construction period is adequately
controlled.
5.2.10 Tunnel Maintenance
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the completed underground works
throughout the construction and contract period. As part of this maintenance, remedial work
shall be carried out when repairs are required to the structural or other systems or when
grouting is required to stop water inflow.
189
(a) The Contractor shall monitor the tunnel support systems, and record any damage to
the support systems. If necessary, remedial action shall be taken with temporary
propping, including evacuating the area and posting warning signs accordingly.
(b) The Contractor shall without delay take whatever measures are necessary to repair
the support systems, and carry out the remedial work accordingly.
(c) The Contractor shall, in addition to monitoring the support system, carry out regular
maintenance of the underground works, including but not limited to bench marks, 3D
monitoring, drainage and pumping systems, light bulb replacement, cleaning, water
removal, water pipe maintenance, ventilation system signalling system,
communication system, toilets, containers and emergency equipment, and all cabling,
transformers and pipes for different purposes and its maintenance, and cable
maintenance. Maintenance shall include all repair work required to maintain all
equipment in working order.
5.2.11 Removal of Tunnel Support
The work includes the removal of completed ground support for the excavated section, niches
and other enlargement of the tunnel. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings of temporary
supports and protective facilities for completed structures to the Engineer.
(a) Before any tunnel support is removed, the location shall be pre-supported to prevent
tunnel lining from deformation, distortion or damage.
(b) If necessary, ground stabilization or improvement shall be employed by the
Contractor to stabilize the ground.
(c) This Clause does not apply to the removal of temporary support installed at the
tunnel face or at the top heading invert (shotcrete, wire mesh, face bolts).
5.2.12 Site Traffic on final Excavation level
1) Final excavation levels (formation level) for pavement construction shall be protected
against any wear or deterioration of rock properties following site traffic by backfilling
with rock material excavated in the tunnel or similar to a minimum thickness of 0.5
meters. The access to the main drainage control shafts shall be possible at any time. These
have to be protected and marked on the side wall for later recovery.
2) Pounding water and traffic through pounding water for vehicles or pedestrians shall not
be allowed.
3) Any deteriorated material shall be removed and replaced prior to pavement works as
directed by the Engineer.
4) The backfill material used for protection purposes shall be removed in the main tunnel
only until immediately prior to pavement construction works
5.2.13 Site Traffic on Invert Support
No site traffic shall be allowed to run on unprotected invert structures, temporary or final,
concrete or shotcrete. Structures as such shall be protected against destruction by backfilling
with suitable excavation material from the tunnel or similar with a minimum thickness of 0.5
meters. Backfilling material shall not contain boulders larger than 100 mm diameter.
5.3 Measurement
1) The quantity for underground excavation shall be in cubic meter of all types of in-situ
ground excavated for payment line “A” as shown in Fig. 5.1, and/or as directed by the
Engineer as herein before prescribed and accepted with all its additional requirements.
Within the specified distance as mentioned in concern drawings between theoretical
excavation (payment line “A”) and Boundary Surface “Z”, no separate remuneration for
over break will be made. For the portion of the unavoidable over break that exceeds
Boundary Surface “Z” (see Fig.5.1) and exceeds 2 m³ in volume per round, separate
remuneration shall be made at 50 % of the applicable Unit Rate for excavation quoted in
the Bill of Quantities. The cavity or void formed by the over break shall be measured in-
situ and shall be quantified and approved by the Engineer and certified for payment. The
Contractor shall have no right to claim for additional payment due to increment of
quantity for correcting errors of setting-out incurred from his fault.
190
2) Before commencing excavation of a round and after completion of previous round the
Contractor shall take survey measurements sufficient to define the section type. This shall
be subject to the Engineer’s approval prior to adopting in force.
3) Additional costs for tunnel excavation due to water inflow exceeding 50 l/sec in upward
and downward drives shall be compensated for by separate items as shown in the Bill of
Quantities, independent of the encountered rock class. In upward tunnel drives, the
measurement of the water inflow shall be carried out 25 m behind the tunnel face. In
downward tunnel drives, measurement shall be performed for the water inflow occurring
within the last 5 m behind the tunnel face. For water inflows up to 50 l/sec in upward and
downward drives there shall be no separate payment. The costs shall be included in the
Unit Rates for excavation.
4) Costs for required re-profiling works shall be compensated for only where actual (i.e.
measured) deformations of the primary shotcrete lining have exceeded deformation
tolerances as instructed by the Engineer. The Unit Rates quoted in the Bill of Quantities
shall include excavation, transportation up to 2 km from tunnel portals/access tunnel
portals and disposal of excavation material and support elements as per Clause 4.7 (item
5.b).
5) The quantity for excavation of all tunnel niches & lay by shall be in cubic meter of in-situ
rock. The payment shall be on one-unit rate only as per the Bill of Quantities item for the
same, independent of the section type excavated. The specifications of Clause (1) above
shall apply. No separate payment shall be made for the removal of already installed
tunnel support. These costs shall be included in the Unit Rates for excavation.
6) No separate remuneration shall be paid for the demolition of shotcrete linings at the
tunnel face at portal slopes. These costs shall be included in the Unit Rates for excavation.
7) No separate remuneration shall be paid for the removal of temporary support installed at
the tunnel face or at the top heading invert. These costs shall be included in the Unit Rates
for excavation.
8) No separate remuneration shall be paid for geological mapping during tunnel excavation.
These costs shall be included in the Unit Rates for excavation.
9) Where forepoling is required no separate remuneration for the additional over
break will be made, i.e. the additional over break shall be included in the
excavation costs.
10) No separate remuneration is foreseen for transport of excavation material up to 2 km
from the tunnel portal /access tunnel portal for disposal and compaction of the
excavation material at the disposal site. All transportation and disposal costs shall be
included in the excavation costs. For transportation of excavation material for a distance
exceeding the values above from the tunnel portal / access tunnel portal, separate
payment will be made per cubic meter and km of material transported by a separate item
in the Bill of Quantities.
11) All work involved with and any partial or short interruptions or inconveniences caused
by the check surveys, installation of instruments and performance of monitoring,
performance of the rock mechanics tests and geological mapping, for which no separate
payment is provided elsewhere in these specifications.
12) No payment shall be made for support elements installed during interruptions
at Contractor’s choice
13) The supply of geotechnical instrumentation, the installation of the instruments will be
part of this contract and shall be paid as per relevant schedule of BOQ, however taking of
readings and supplying to DDC/IRCON will also be part of this contract and is inclusive in
cost. The Contractor shall provide immediate replacement of instruments, which are
damaged by construction activities at his cost.
5.4 Payment
1) The quantities determined as provided above shall be paid for at the contract Unit Rates
respectively for each of the particular pay items shown in the Bill of Quantities, which
price and payment shall be full compensation for all the costs of labour, supervisors,
191
materials, the Contractor’s equipment, auxiliary facilities, draining and all other work
necessary in the proper completion of the work prescribed in this Section.
2) Payment shall be made for excavation within the payment line (Fig. 5.1). No payment
shall be made for over break which in the opinion of the Engineer is considered as
avoidable. In case of unavoidable over-break, payment shall be made at 50% of the rate as
given as in the Bill of Quantities based on measurement as stated above.
3) Reimbursement for excavation will exclusively be based on the section type as
determined for the top heading. For bench and invert the same unit rates per cubic meter
as for the top heading shall apply.
5.5 Geotechnical and Instrumentation
1) The supply and installation of geotechnical instruments and 3D monitoring bireflex
targets shall be done by the contractor according to approved drawing and instruction of
the Engineer of IRCON. Observing and recording the measurements of all the geotechnical
instruments installed inside the tunnel as well as portal areas will be carried by the
contractor. Recording shall be done by a dedicated person from the contractor in
presence of IRCON/DDC. Contractor need to submit all Recordings to IRCON/DDC on
daily basis. The further data processing & interpretation shall be carried out by
IRCON/DDC.
2) The Monitoring, recording of bi-reflex targets shall be done by IRCON/DDC in which the
CONTRACTOR shall provide all assistance and equipment required for monitoring.
The measurements shall be done on the basis of actual number of instruments installed at
site. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacement of instruments, which are
damaged by construction activities at his own cost.
3) The accepted quantity measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit
prices respectively for the pay items shown in the Bill of Quantities which price and
payment shall be full compensation for all labour, supervisors, materials, the
CONTRACTOR’s equipment and installation or any other contingencies.
192
6.0 PROFILE CONTROL AND TOLERANCES

6.1 Profile Control
6.1.1 Scope
The Contractor is required to perform a careful and systematic checking of the final
clearance of the primary tunnel lining in order to accommodate the designed nominal
thickness of the secondary (inner) lining without interfering with the clearance
requirements of the underground structure.
6.1.2 Method of Profile Control
1) For tolerances and profile control for the shotcrete lining see Clause 6.1.3
2) It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the minimum clearance for the final
(inner) lining as shown on the drawings is provided. On approval the Engineer will
issue instructions with regard to the systematic checking of the geometry of the
template during profiling operations.
3) The Contractor may prefer to use advance surveying techniques and data processing
to establish the final clearance profile. In which case he shall define a method of
marking out areas of deviation from the theoretical profile to be approved by the
Engineer.
6.1.3 Execution
1) After mucking activity, and prior to the application of any primary support layer, the
cross section of the excavated tunnel has to be scanned or topographically surveyed.
2) Immediately after completion of primary support installation of each excavation
round, the Contractor shall perform a profile check and submit the records to the
Engineer. This control is done before application of the last shotcrete layer. Final
control before application of water proofing system.
3) The checking of the final clearance shall not proceed before the geotechnical
measurements show that the radial displacements at any position of the tunnel have,
in the opinion of the Engineer, largely stopped.
4) The final clearance profile after the completion of support works of the tunnel and
after deformation as per 6.1.3 of this Clause shall conform to the minimum clearance
profile as indicated on the drawings. Pre-final control is required before water
proofing system is applied. Final control is required after the execution of the lining.
5) For the shotcrete lining a deviation of the theoretical excavation line is given due to
overbreak, construction tolerance and deformation. The surface irregularities shall
not exceed 100 mm over a length of three (3) meters.
6) In case of an existing under profile, the Contractor shall submit a proposal for the
remedial works to the Engineer for approval.
7) No reshaping (re-profiling) of the tunnel support shall be carried out without the
8) Geotechnical measurements before, during and after the respective reshaping
measures shall be carried out in compliance with the relevant design. The
measurement points such as convergence bolts and/or extensometers shall be
retained or substituted well in advance in order to establish "transfer - zero -
readings".
9) Geotechnical measurement stations shall not be removed and abandoned without the
10) Maintenance works to keep the geometry of the gantry surface has to be guaranteed
to guarantee the surface irregularities shall not exceed 30 mm over a length of ten
(10) meters.
6.1.4 Records
193
1) Records shall be kept for each stage of the remedial measures executed into the
configuration system as per stablish into the Quality Plan.
2) The final clearance profile shall be recorded at intervals in longitudinal direction and
points along the periphery of the tunnel as proposed by the Contractor following the
recommendation of the DDC and as approved by the Engineer.
3) For the shotcrete lining, the final checking of the clearance profile after completion of
re-profiling and surface preparation in compliance with this Specification shall be
done in presence of the Engineer/DDC.
6.2 Construction Tolerances
6.2.1 Tolerances for horizontal and vertical Alignment
See Chapter 2.9.
6.2.2 Tolerances for Lining
1) No reduction of the theoretical thickness of the inner lining is permitted unless
approved by the Engineer. To achieve this requirement, no support elements such as
primary shotcrete, rock bolts and steel ribs etc. shall penetrate into the theoretical
outer boundary of the inner lining, as shown on the drawings.
2) In the area of the invert and the foundation beams, no rock parts or rock peaks shall
protrude into the theoretical excavation line.
6.2.3 Tolerance for Excavation Level on Invert
1) For tunnel sections with no concreted invert arch the Contractor shall excavate the
bottom level of the invert with an accuracy of +0 to -100 mm related to the theoretical
excavation line of the invert.
2) If the bottom excavation level, after cleaning loose materials etc. is more than 100 mm
below the designed theoretical excavation line, the Contractor shall backfill such areas
up to the designed, theoretical level by means of sub-base material or as directed and
3) For tunnel sections with a concrete invert arch no reduction of the designed, theoretical
thickness of the concrete structure is permitted. Over excavation must be compensated
with concrete as specified. The inside face of the invert arch may deviate not more than ±
50 mm in elevation from the theoretical cross section.
194
7.0 ROCK CLASSIFICATION
7.1 General
1) This section covers the description of rock mass types and rock classes relevant to the
underground excavation with respect to the geotechnical properties of rock
encountered and its behaviour under the influence of tunnel construction. The
terminology “rock” in this context shall also include soil conditions
2) The defined rock classes reflect the possible excavation round lengths and the support
and drainage requirements under consideration of the behaviour of the rock mass.
The rock (ground) classes are derived not only from the rock parameters, but also
from considerations of a number of external factors such as overburden, size of
excavated section and length of round, driving sequence, ground water, water
infiltration, results from geotechnical measurements, etc. which can essentially
influence the classification.
7.2 Application and Procedure
1) Rock (ground) classes are determined on the grounds of the appearance of the rock at the
excavation face of the tunnel before the commencement of the respective excavation
sequence.
2) The results of geotechnical measurements under similar rock conditions shall be taken into
account for prediction of deformations and for the determination of rock classes.
3) Depending on the size of the overall excavation and the ground conditions, subdivisions for
the excavation may become necessary and may influence the classification and its
evaluation.
4) In case of a drive subdivided into top heading - bench - invert excavation, the rock conditions
of the top heading drive shall govern the classification.
5) The behaviour of the rock (ground) in a newly exposed round is time dependent, i.e. rock
mass quality will decrease with the free span if no support is installed within a reasonable
time. Accordingly, the maximum length of a round which can be excavated and supported in
time is a criterion for the rock classification.
6) The rock (ground) classification at the face for each round shall be jointly agreed between
the CONTRACTOR and the DDC/IRCON. In case of disagreement, the decision of the
DDC/IRCON is binding. For approval, the ENGINEER shall be informed of the rock class
determined and the associated support system required.
7) The classification shall be done in writing on jointly agreed form-sheets. The classification
record is a collection of all classification sheets, which shall be kept accessible for
consultation and modification whenever drivage works are under progress into the
configuration system accordingly defined in the Quality Plan.
8) Notwithstanding the duties of the DDC and approvals by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR is
solely responsible for the safety of the works under construction.
7.3 System Description
1) The rock classification system for the Tunnel follows in general the standard classification
used in Austria, with project-specific adaptations.
2) After determination of Rock Mass Types, establishing of Rock Mass Behaviour Types is
performed. Construction measures are derived from the rock mass behaviour under
consideration of the actual boundary conditions. Rock classes are then determined based on
the behaviour types and the excavation and support methods.
3) Difficult ground conditions frequently require adjustments of the tunnel support during
drivage works as experience is gained. The support shown on the drawings for a particular
rock (ground) class is regarded as the standard for that rock (ground) class.
195
Rock bolt types and numbers and the positioning and inclination may be changed. Shotcrete
thickness and number of layers of wire mesh and the spacing of lattice girders may be
changed. Also, special treatments for the ground can be required, such as deep drains,
umbrella arch, fiber glass bolts or VTR pipes allowing repetitive grout injections. Any change
to the standard support system and to the excavation works to suit varying ground
conditions needs the agreement of the DDC.
7.4 Ground Types
Ground types are described in the Geotechnical Interpretative Report (GIR). The GIR is not a
contract document and is for information and guidance to tenderer and due to uncertainties
of geological condition, changes in the Geology can be expected. The contractor shall be
bound to carry out the works at the agreed rates, terms, and conditions and shall not be
entitled to any claims, whatsoever, due to changes of geological conditions.
7.5 Ground Behaviour Types
A general indication of tunneling conditions is described by means of Ground Behaviour
Types. Following GBT are applicable to the Tunnel Projects (according to “Conventional
Tunneling – The Austrian Draft”, Austrian Society for Geomechanics, 2003):
Description of potential failure

Behaviour Type
modes/mechanisms during excavation of the
(BT)
unsupported rock mass
1 Stable Stable rock mass with the potential of small local gravity
induced falling or sliding of blocks
2 Stable with the Deep reaching. Discontinuity controlled, gravity induced

potential of falling and sliding of blocks, occasional local shear failure
discontinuity
controlled block fall
3 Shallow shear failure Shallow stress induced shear failures in combination with
discontinuity and gravity controlled failure of the rock
mass.
4 Deep seated shear Deep seated stress induced shear failures and large
failure deformation
5 Rock burst Sudden and violent failure of the rock mass, caused by
highly stressed brittle rocks and the rapid release of
accumulated strain energy
6 Buckling failure Buckling of rocks with a narrowly spaced discontinuity set,

frequently associated with shear failure
7 Shear failure under Potential for excessive overbreak and progressive shear
low confining failure with the development chimney type failure, caused
pressure mainly by a deficiency of side pressure
8 Raveling ground Flow of cohesion less dry or moist, intensely fractured

rocks or soil
9 Flowing ground Flow of intensely fractured rocks or soil with high water
content
196
10 Swelling Time dependent volume increase of the rock mass caused

by physical-chemical reaction of rock and water in
combination with stress relief, leading to inward
movement of the tunnel perimeter
11 Heterogeneous rock Rapid variations of stresses and deformations, caused by

mass with frequently block-in-matrix rock situation of a tectonic melange
changing (brittle fault zone)
deformation
characteristics
7.6 Rock Classes
Based on the anticipated Rock Mass Behaviour the excavation sequences and required
support measures were developed and summarized in rock classes as shown in the Tender
Drawings for Excavation and Support of the Main Tunnel and evacuation tunnels, if any.
7.7 Payment
1) The Contractor shall provide all necessary assistance to DDC/Engineer to carry out rock
classification which shall include, but not be limited to, providing experienced man
power as Contractor’s representative, stoppage of work, clearing of site, access to
different parts of heading and walls.
2) The cost of all such works shall be deemed to be included in unit rates of Underground
Excavations and nothing shall be payable extra on this account.
197
8.0 PRIMARY TUNNEL SUPPORT

8.1 General
This section covers the requirements for materials and application of the primary tunnel
support which shall be considered necessary to establish the stability of the excavated
tunnels.
8.2 General Requirements
8.2.1 Construction Method
The Contractor shall understand and recognize the technical and design concepts of the
construction method and shall appreciate the function and merits of each component of the
tunnel support.
8.2.2 Submissions
1) Prior to the commencement of any works covered by this Specification, the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer for approval a comprehensive programme for material
testing and quality control covering all elements of the tunnel support.
2) Manufacturer's certificates of compliance shall be submitted certifying that the
materials used meet Specification requirements.
3) The method of installation of each type of support element including description,
Specification and pertinent manufacturer's literature for drilling, rock bolting etc. shall
be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer.
4) The Engineer shall be provided with all submissions in sufficient time ahead of the
construction works, or at such dates as mutually agreed upon.
8.2.3 Records
1) Comprehensive records containing all particulars of the tunnel support actually
installed and its performance in the course of the works shall be prepared and
maintained by the Contractor and made available to the Engineer on a daily basis.
These records shall include type, quantity, timing and location of support elements
installed the clearance profile after installation of support, deviations from the
standard support systems, observations of excessive deformations, shotcrete cracking,
etc. Observations of excessive deformations, shotcrete cracking shall be notified
immediately to the DDC and the Engineer.The record includes the topographical
survey prior and after the installation of the primary support, the face geological
mapping and the RESS (Rock Excavation Support System). The records are include in
the configuration system accordingly the Quality Plan.
2) The Contractor shall keep a record of the chainage of each face position and shall keep
this record updated as the face progresses. This record shall be available for
consultation at any time at a convenient location close to the relevant face.
3) All the above records will be submitted daily to the Engineer for approval. If and when
submission shall occur on software base, without further compensation.
8.2.4 Implementation of Tunnel Support Work
1) The type and amount of tunnel support to be installed immediately after excavation is
directly related to the rock classification and Section Type selection as established. The
standard primary support associated with the established rock classification and
Section Type system is shown on the drawings. However, as a consequence of
variations from the anticipated rock conditions the standard support systems as
shown on the drawings for each rock class may require modifications and adjustment
during construction as directed by the DDC and approved by the Engineer and in
accordance with Chapter 7 of this Specification.
2) The Contractor shall ensure that support elements will be installed or applied in such a
manner and sequence as to prevent avoidable disintegration and loosening of the rock
mass surrounding the excavated tunnel.
198
8.2.5 Clearance Profiles

See Chapter 5 of this Specification.
8.2.6 Equipment and Material Supply
1) Any mechanical plant and equipment for installation of underground support shall be
suitable for the works specified with respect to performance and current Indian safety
regulations and shall also be of sufficient capacity to fulfill production requirements in
terms of the construction programme.
2) Proper maintenance of equipment and adequate provision of spare parts shall be
made to ensure the immediate availability of equipment required for support
installation whenever underground excavation works are under progress and shall
also be of sufficient capacity to fulfil production requirements in terms of the
construction programme.
3) Unimpeded supply of materials to all working faces required for support construction
shall be ensured at all times. It shall be recognized that for excavation in poor rock
this pre-requisite is strongly related to safety matters of tunnel construction.
4) The Contractor shall provide each tunnel heading with the necessary materials and
equipment to deal quickly and effectively with emergency situations, such as
unexpected unstable rock conditions, heavy water inflows etc., which cannot be
handled with the regular procedures of tunnel support installation.
5) The Contractor shall maintain on site or have immediately available at least one
month´s supply of any of the support elements required according to the Section
Types scheduled on the drawings and according to the work programme to prevent
delays on the work.
6) Maintain constant and adequate supply of shotcrete at tunnel heading during
excavation, such that shotcrete may be applied at any time.
7) Provide adequate means of identifying the materials delivered to the site with the
corresponding certificates. The identification shall remain with the material up to a
convenient location adjacent to the element for which it is intended. The identification
shall be possible within the time required for a site supervision by The Engineer, his
Representative or the DDC.
8) All the information regarding certificates for machinery, equipment, materials,
suppliers, subcontractors and human resources has to be recorded into the
configuration system accordingly the Quality Plan.
8.3 Sprayed Concrete (Shotcrete)
8.3.1 General
Shotcrete for the purpose of this work shall only be wet mix shotcrete unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer. This Section specifies basic and minimum materials and
construction standards for coarse-aggregate shotcrete (both wet & dry type) for use as
structural support for underground works and for application on excavated slopes.
8.3.2 Standards
Shotcrete materials, production methods or application testing and admixtures shall
conform to the following Indian Standards or, where not covered by these standards, to the
equivalent International Standards. In case of conflict between the following standards and
the specifications given herein, the specifications shall take precedence.
1) Indian Standard:
i. IS: 456 – 2000, Plain and Reinforced Concrete - Code of Practice
ii. IS: 269 – 1989, Specification for 33 grade ordinary Portland cement
iii. IS: 1489 – Part 1: 1991, Specification for Portland pozzolana cement Part 1
Fly-ash based
199
iv. IS: 1489 – Part 2: 1991, Specification for Portland-pozzolana cement Part 2
calcined clay based
v. IS: 383 – 1970, Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural
sources for concrete
vi. IS: 516 -1959, Method of test for strength of concrete
vii. IS: 9012 – 1978 (Reaffirmed 1987), Recommended practice for shotcreting
viii. IS: 2645 – 2003, Integral Waterproofing Compounds for Cement Mortar and
Concrete – Specification
ix. IS: 9103 – 1999, Concrete Admixtures – Specification
x. IS: 12269 – 1987, Specification for 53 grade ordinary Portland cement
xi. IS: 8112 – 1989, Specification for 43 grade ordinary Portland cement
xii. IS:7861 I & II
xiii. IS: 1199
xiv. IS: 5878 all parts
2) European Standard:
i. European Specification for Sprayed Concrete, EFNARC 1996
ii.
EN 480-12 Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Test methods.
Determination of the alkali content of admixtures
iii. EN 14889-1 Fibers for concrete - Part 1: Steel fibres - Definitions,
specification and conformity
iv. UNI EN 14487-1:2006 Sprayed concrete - Part 1: Definitions, specifications
and conformity
v. UNI EN 14487-2:2007 - Sprayed concrete - Part 2: Execution
vi. UNI EN 14488-1:2005 Testing sprayed concrete - Part 1: Sampling fresh and
hardened concrete
vii. UNI EN 14488-2:2006 Testing sprayed concrete - Part 2: Compressive
strength of young sprayed concrete
viii. UNI EN 14488-3:2006 Testing sprayed concrete - Part 3: Flexural strengths
of fibre reinforced beam specimens
ix. UNI EN 14488-4:2005 Testing sprayed concrete - Part 4: Bond strength of
cores by direct tension
x. UNI EN 14488-5:2006 Testing sprayed concrete - Part 5: Determination of
energy absorption capacity of fibre reinforced slab specimens
xi. UNI EN 14488-6:2006 Testing sprayed concrete - Part 6: Thickness of
concrete on a substrate
xii. UNI EN 14488-7:2006 Testing sprayed concrete - Part 7: Fibre content of
fibre reinforced concrete
xiii. UNI EN 14721:2007 - Test method for metallic fibre concrete - Measuring the
fibre content in fresh and hardened concrete
xiv. UNI EN 934-5:2008 - Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout - Part 5:
Admixtures for sprayed concrete - Definitions, requirements, conformity,
marking and labelling
3) American Standards for Testing Materials:
i. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ii. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
iii. ASTM A820 - Standard Specification for Steel Fibers for Fiber-Reinforced
Concrete
iv. ASTM C 1018-89 – Standard test method for flexural toughness and first
crack strength for fibre reinforced concrete
4) American Association of State Highway and Transposition Officials (AASHTO):
i. AASHTO T26 - Standard Method of Test for Quality of Water to be used in
Concrete.
200
5) British Standards Institution:

i. BS 5328 – Methods for specifying concrete, including ready-mixed concrete
8.3.3 Definitions
1) Shotcrete is concrete which is conveyed to the place of installation in a closed hose or
tube, applied and compacted by jetting onto a surface at high velocity from a nozzle to
produce a dense homogeneous mass.
2) Wet shotcrete method is mixture of cement and aggregate weigh batched and mixed
with water at site or in mixer trucks prior to being conveyed through a pipeline to a
nozzle where air is injected and the mix projected without interruption into place.
3) Dry shotcrete method is a mixture of cement and aggregate weight or volume batched,
thoroughly mixed dry and fed into a purpose-made machine wherein the mixture is
pressurized, metered into a dry air stream and conveyed through hoses or pipes to the
nozzle before which water as a spray is introduced to hydrate the mix which is
projected without interruption into place.
4) Nozzle is an attachment at the end of the shotcrete material hose from which material
is jetted.
5) Rebound is material having passed through the nozzle which does not conform to the
definition of shotcrete as defined above
6) The early strength development of shotcrete with time from the time of spraying until
24 hours after spraying is specified in Clause 8.3.5.1.1.
7) Final strength of shotcrete is the strength at an age of 28 days.
8) Reference shotcrete is made of the same mix as in-situ shotcrete, but not containing
accelerator. Reference shotcrete shall be sprayed into panels by means of the same
shotcrete equipment and sampled, cured and tested in the same conditions as
shotcrete.
9) Accelerator is an admixture to produce a fast setting and early strength development of
the shotcrete.
10) European Specification for Sprayed Concrete, EFNARC 1996 specifies the below
preconstruction tests has to be also followed:
Composition of the sprayed concrete is determined in the course of preconstruction
tests in which the required properties are checked. Examples of properties to be
checked:
Fresh concrete:
• Water demand, workability, pumpability,
• Sprayability / rebound
• Slump, density
• Dosage of accelerator
Hardened concrete
• Compressive strength at 7 and 28 days
• Absorbed energy
• Residual strength
• Flexural strength
• Fibre content (glued fibers have to be used)
• Bond
• Quantity of steel fibers and technical specifications
• Type of steel fiber (glued steel fiber have to be used to improve homogeneous
distribution avoiding balling tendency)
8.3.4 Materials
(a) all materials like
- Cement
- Aggregates
201
- Admixtures
- Steel ribs
- Bolts
Shall be furnished by certified supplier, previously agreed by the Engineer.
For all mentioned material & minimum of two suppliers shall be agreed.
Test for every combination of shotcrete and concrete mix design shall be carried out for the
certification on site.
All mentioned material shall be stocked on site at the minimum quantity and amount to
allow the supply substitution without break of stock and consequent stop of excavation
progress. The steel fibers can be substituted by wire mesh, equally stocked on site.
8.3.4.1 Cement
1) The type of cement to be used for shotcrete shall be according to IS 456: 2000 and
approved by client.
2) The cement content shall be designed to meet the strength requirements of shotcrete
applied in the field
3) A specific fineness of the cement after Blaine between 3,500 and 5,000 cm2/g is
recommended to achieve sufficient early strength of the shotcrete.
4) The maximum temperature of the cement in the mixing plant silos should be limited to
70°C and it should not exceed 60°C at the time of mixing. Cement should be fresh and
stored in a dry area / silo.
5) The compatibility between shotcrete accelerator and cement shall be checked at the
site laboratory upon the arrival of each back (rack) of cement to site.
6) The source of suitable cement for shotcrete shall not be varied during the entire tunnel
excavation and support duration.
8.3.4.2 Aggregates
1) Maximum aggregate size shall be 12mm for wet concrete and 16mm for dry concrete.
2) All fine and coarse aggregates to be used shall be supplied from approved sources,
which shall not be changed without permission in writing from the Engineer.
Aggregates shall confirm to the requirements of IS 456: 2000.
3) The aggregates shall be clean, strong and durable, suitably graded and shall not contain
detrimental amounts of dust, mud, clay or organic impurities.
4) The content of chloride ion shall not exceed 0.35% by mass of cement.
5) The coarse aggregates shall not contain a large quantity of long stone pieces.
6) The maximum size of the aggregates shall not exceed 12 mm for wet process or 16 mm
for dry process. The proportion of aggregate larger than 8mm in size should not exceed
15% for the wet process in order to minimize rebound.
7) The grain size distribution shall be as shown in Table 8.1
8) It is the responsibility of the Contractor to choose the most suitable grading for the
process and materials available.
9) Frozen aggregates shall not be used. Minimum temperature of the aggregates shall be
5°C.
10) The amount of fine particles under 0.1mm shall not exceed 8%.
11) During rainy and cold weather periods, the aggregates for the dry process shall be
stored undercover for at least 48 hours before being used and kept sufficiently dry.
Table 8.1 Recommended grain size distribution of aggregates for wet-mix shotcrete
Standard Sieve Sieve Size [mm] Passing in %
ASTM 12.5 96-100
IS 10 92-98
202
IS 4.75 70-80
IS 2.36 50-60
IS 1.18 24-34
IS 0.60 20-28
IS 0.30 10-17
IS 0.15 5-12
8.3.4.3 Admixtures
1) Admixtures shall be conform to IS: 9103 for the improvement of performance,
workability, etc. may be added, with the approval of the Engineer.
2) Technical criteria, approved documentation, test reports and test certificates shall be
furnished to the Engineer for approval.
3) Admixtures shall be stored under the conditions specified and recommended by the
manufacturers. The related storage Specifications and recommendations shall be
presented to the Engineer before approval of such admixtures.
4) The manufacturer’s safety instructions shall be observed.
5) Plasticizers and Super plasticizers
Plasticizers and super plasticizers are used to achieve pump-able concrete with
minimum water content. Plasticizers shall be checked regularly, or as required by the
Engineer, for setting time, water reduction and development of strength as compared
with the base concrete. Compatibility of plasticizers with cements, latent hydraulic
binders and accelerators shall be verified by observation in the field suitability tests.
The effects and optimum dosages of plasticizers and super plasticizers shall be
determined by the field suitability test to achieve the shotcrete properties as required
in this Specification.
6) Microsilica. Given the beneficial effects produced by silica fume on the durability and
permeability of concrete, regardless of other beneficial effects such as decreased
rebound better work-ability, it is recommended the use of this additive at a rate of 35
kg / m³ (about 7-8% by weight of the cement).
Adding microsilica usually between 5% and 10% weight of the cement , although in
rare cases may even use doses of up to 20% .The microsilica has high pozzolanic
power and increases the concrete properties such as impermeability, resistance to
sulphate attack , frost resistance , etc. . The use of microsilica can have two reasons: as
a substitute for part cement, generally for economic reasons, or as an additive for
improving properties of both fresh and hardened state. Some advantages of using
microsilica are:
• Improved pumpability ( lubricates and reduces the risk of segregation )
• Reduces wear on the pumping equipment
• Increases cohesion and reduces the consumption of accelerator, positive for the
correct development of mechanical strength.
• Increases the adhesion between the support and shotcrete and between different
layers of gunite.
• Improved mechanical strength, impermeability and resistance to sulfates.
• Reduce the rebound.
• Reduces the risk of alkaline reaction.
7) Fly ash
Additives, such as fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag and silica fume for the
improvement of performance, workability, etc. may be added, with the approval of
Engineer. The performance of the shotcrete mix with additives shall be determined by
field suitability tests.
203
8) Accelerators
i. Accelerators are used to produce a fast set and to get sufficient early strength
development. Accelerating admixtures shall be compatible with the cement
used. The compatibility shall be tested in the laboratory by the Manufacturer
and verified by the Contractor in field suitability tests to achieve the required
properties for early and final strength as specified in Clause 8.3.8 of this
Specification.
ii. The dosage rate to be used shall be determined by field suitability tests to
produce early and final strength of shotcrete according to Clause 8.3.5.1.1. The
compatibility of the accelerator with the cement used shall be verified through
conformity with the required early strength and maximum strength loss
according to Clause 8.3.5.1.1.
iii. Only alkali-free accelerators shall be used. The alkali content shall be less than
1% mass (Na2O-equivalent, EN 480-12).
iv. An addition to the dosage rate determined by the field suitability tests shall not
exceed 2% of the cement content of the mix design by weight. The dosage of
accelerator shall be kept to the minimum required for spraying in situ.
v. Automatic devices shall be used to add the accelerator.
9) Hydration Control Admixtures
i. Hydration Control Admixtures are added to the concrete to prevent cement
hydration and thus maintain workability and extend the open time from
mixing to application.
ii. To reactivate and neutralise the hydration control effect, a suitable
accelerator (activator) is added during spraying. The activator shall be
compatible with the hydration control admixture following the
manufacturer's recommendation.
iii. The effects and optimum dosages of hydration control admixtures shall be
determined by the field suitability tests to the approval of the Engineer to
achieve the required open time and workability and the shotcrete properties
as required in this Specification.
10) Internal curing admixtures may be added to the basic mix of the shotcrete to reduce
loss of water and thus shrinkage and cracks and improve the strength and the bond to
the substrate and between layers. They can replace the use of external curing agents
or other types of curing. The effects shall be determined by field suitability tests. The
use of internal curing admixtures is subject to the Engineer’s approval.
11) Glued steel fibers.
Fibre-reinforced sprayed concrete has now become much more important due to the
development of new and more effective types of fibre, its increasing availability and
its inclusion in various standards. It can be considered the perfect combination with
sprayed concrete. Like conventional concrete, sprayed concrete is a brittle material
with limited tensile and bending strength but very good compressive strength. It is
certainly possible to reinforce sprayed concrete with conventional steel
reinforcement, but its installation is very labour intensive, time-consuming and
frequently in conditions that are still safety critical. Also, reinforcing bars are not well
adapted to the flexible layer thickness design of sprayed concrete. This is why it
makes sense to use fibre-reinforced sprayed concrete. Its main advantages are:
• homogeneous distribution of the fibre reinforcement in the sprayed concrete
• great improvement in the sprayed concrete ductility
• higher tensile strength in bending
• greater security due to high post-cracking strength
• increased impact resistance
• improved adhesive strength
204
• reduced early shrinkage cracking behaviour

• increased fire resistance.
The following guidelines apply to fibre-reinforced sprayed concrete production:
 the fresh concrete consistency must be more plastic so that the fibre-reinforced
sprayed concrete can be pumped
• due to the larger surfaces, the lubricant and adhesive film requirement is greater and
therefore the binder content must be increased
• the adhesive properties are improved by the use of silicafume
12) Rebound
Next table shows the rebound values expected from the contractor:
Position of the Percentage Dry Shotcrete Percentage Wet

surface Shotcrete
Slabs 5 – 10 % 2–5%
Walls 15 – 30 % 5 – 10 %
Crown 25 – 40 % 10 – 15 %
8.3.4.4 Water
Water shall comply in all respect with IS 456: 2000.
8.3.4.5 Additives
1) Additives, such as fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag and silica fume for the
improvement of performance, durability, workability etc. may be added, with the
approval of Engineer. The performance of the shotcrete mix with additives shall be
determined by field suitability tests.
2) Additives intended to be used shall be included in the tests as described in Clause 8.3.8
of this Specification.
3) Additives shall be stored under the conditions specified and recommended by the
manufacturers. The related storage Specifications and recommendations shall be
presented by the Contractor to the Engineer for approval before use of such additives.
8.3.5 Mix Design
The mix for shotcrete shall be designed by field suitability tests to meet the requirements of
this Specification. The following factors should be taken into consideration:
 Material and gradation curves of aggregates
 Cement content
 Water-cement ratio
 Plasticizer or super plasticizer type and dosage, if any
 Hydration control admixture type and dosage, if any
 Internal curing admixtures, if any
 Accelerating admixtures
 Early and final strength
 Strength loss to reference shotcrete
 Energy absorbed.
 Residual strength.
 Rebound
 Temperature of the mix
 Establish target slump and slump retention of the mix for optimum performance
and placement
 Other additives, if any
8.3.5.1 Cement Content
1) For the dry shotcrete process the quantity of cement shall not be less than 350 kg/m³
dry mix.
205
2) For the wet shotcrete process the minimum cement content shall be 350 kg/m³.
3) Variation from the above cement content for special cases may be agreed on site
between the Engineer and the Contractor. The cement content shall be designed to
meet the strength requirements of shotcrete applied in the field.However it may be
noted that no payment shall be made to the contractor for any additional consumption
of cement as specified in 8.3.5.1(2) above.
8.3.5.1.1 Requirements for shotcrete
1) Early Strength
i. The early strength of shotcrete shall conform to the early strength class J2
according to Figure 8-1.
ii. The measurement of early strength (from minutes up to 24 hrs) shall be done
by using the penetration needle, Hilti Shot-bolt system (or equivalent). Cores
stronger than 10N/mm2 should be used for testing of shotcrete.
Figure 8-1: Early Strength Requirement for Shotcrete
2) Further Strength Development

i. The 72 hours strength of the shotcrete shall be at least 12.5 N/mm2.
ii. The strength of the shotcrete after 7 days shall be at least 70 % of the specified
28 day strength of the mix.
3) Final Strength
i. The final strength of shotcrete shall conform to the values specified in Table 8-
2. In addition, the long term strength shall be determined at a sample age of 6
months. Any decrease of the long term strength compared to the 28 days
strength shall lead to further investigations and possible adjustments in the
mix design.
ii. A factor of 0.85 between the Field Suitability tests and the Quality Control
tests allows for effects of in-situ installation conditions.
iii. Cylinder specimen with a diameter of 100mm and a length of 100mm are
considered equivalent to cube.
iv. Specified strength is based on statistical minimum strength (5% fractal). Data
based on the average of tests shall exceed the specified strength by 5 N/mm2.
206
Table 8-2 – Required final strength of shotcrete characteristics

GRADE (acc. to IS 456 : 2000) M25 M30
Characteristic compressive cube1) strength at 28 days (determined 25 30

by Field Suitability Tests2)) [N/mm2]
In-situ strength requirements (determined by Quality Control 21 25.5
Tests2)) [N / mm2]
8.3.6 Batching, Mixing and Transportation

Truck mixers to be used for the transportation of shotcrete underground must be fitted with
approved exhaust filters.
8.3.6.1 Dry Shotcrete Process
1) Cement and aggregates shall be batched in the proportions specified and designed.
Measurement shall be done by weight. At the time of batching all aggregates shall have
been dried or drained sufficiently to result in a stable moisture content, which shall not
exceed 7 %.
2) Mixing of cement and aggregates shall be performed mechanically with a pan type
mixer. Shotcrete shall not be used unless placing can be completed within a period of
90 minutes from the time of mixing unless a hydration control admixture is used that is
suitable to inhibit setting and retain consistence for the time span required until
placing the shotcrete. The hydration control admixture must be approved by the
Engineer.
3) The mixing time shall be in accordance with BS 5328.
4) A system of delivery notes shall be maintained to record the date, the time of mixing,
mix design number, quantity, delivery point, time of delivery and completion of
placing. The delivery notes shall be available to the Engineer for inspection.
5) For the dry process, powder or liquid type accelerating admixtures shall be added to
the dry-mix. The powder type accelerator shall be proportioned and added just before
the dry mix enters the shotcrete machine through a mechanical device (dispenser).
Periodic calibration checks shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation. Liquid type accelerator is delivered by a special dosage pump and
added to the dry-mix at or near the nozzle. Dosage pump and the hoses to the nozzle
shall be kept in good order.
6) Dry-Mix delivered to the shotcrete machine shall have a minimum temperature of 5°C
and a maximum temperature of 32°C.
7) During hot weather periods the water content of the aggregates for the dry process
shall be kept above 4%, in order to avoid cement loss at the rotor of the shotcrete
machine.
8) During transportation the dry mix shall be effectively protected against the influence of
weather.
8.3.6.2 Wet Shotcrete Process
1) Only liquid types of accelerator apply to the wet process; these shall be added at or
near the nozzle. The delivery from the accelerator pump must be controlled to be
proportional to the output of the concrete pump. Accelerator pump calibration shall be
periodically checked in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The
nozzle must be such as to ensure a homogeneous mixture of the accelerator with the
wet-mix.
2) Shotcrete shall not be used unless placing can be completed within a period of 120
minutes from the time of mixing unless a hydration control admixture is used that is
suitable to inhibit setting and retain consistence for the time span required until
placing the shotcrete. At high temperatures hydration control admixtures shall be used
at all times to ensure fresh concrete and sufficient open time.
207
3) Concrete delivered to the shotcrete machine shall have a minimum temperature of

15°C and a maximum temperature of 32°C.
4) A system of delivery notes shall be maintained to record the date, the time of mixing,
mix design number, quantity, and delivery point, time of delivery and completion of
placing. The delivery notes shall be available to the Engineer for inspection.
5) Steel Fibre Shotcrete
The readiness to apply steel fibre shotcrete in tunnelling increases with demands on
safety, process, technological streamlining and reducing the construction time, which
facilitates the use of the material as well as costs, which are saved compared with a
conventional reinforced concrete structural solution. With regard to the shotcreting
method steel fibre concrete offers the advantage that there is no need for the extremely
complicated and time-consuming installation of reinforcement
The construction process is speeded up. Furthermore the initial securing of the rock
sets in at an early stage. Loosening of the rock occurs between driving the cross-section
and activating the support given tricky geological conditions. In the case of poor rock
conditions early activation of the bearing effect of the support helps achieve the target.
This early bearing behaviour is attained by the speedy installation method and the early
setting strength. The addition of the steel fibres in the shotcreting process generally
takes place via dosing units for the ready mix in the concrete plant. In the case of steel
fibre shotcrete the rebound, which leads to a slight fibre content in the tunnel shell
compared with the ready mix, must be taken into consideration. Owing to the driving
process orientation of the fibres perpendicular to the direction of placement is to be
observed, something which can be assessed as positive regarding the bearing
characteristics. In the case of steel fibre shotcrete the 2 previously mentioned effects
lead to test specimens being produced and evaluated to establish the energy absorption
capacity under the same conditions prevailing at the subsequent structure. The longer
and thinner the steel fibres are the more positive their influence on the ductility,
bearing capacity and energy absorption capacity of the steel fibre shotcrete is. However
the fibre length should be restricted to some 35 mm on account of processibility and
should not exceed 2/3rd of the hose diameter.
Steel wire fibres are mixed with concrete, in order to improve various mechanical
properties of the concrete quite apart from enhancing the bearing effect. The decisive
characteristics, which are considerably improved through the addition of steel wire
fibres, include:
 increased ductility given tension and pressure
 enhanced impact strength
 improved fatigue behaviour
 low propensity for spalling
 increased durability
 slighter crack widths in operational state
 bending tensile capacity in all 3 spatial directions
Compared to applying conventional reinforced concrete the application of steel fibre
concrete affords clear advantages in conjunction with the shotcreting method in
tunnelling. In particular these relate to increased industrial safety, cost saving for the
reinforcing operations as well as making the entire work cycle more straightforward
and quicker. The sprayed layer is more homogeneous as no spraying shadows occur on
account of spraying through reinforcement. In addition there is the fact that less
overbreak has to be sprayed as the rock contours can be followed better.
In Europe steel fibres for application in concrete have to be accorded the CE marking.
The minimum requirements for steel fibres are described in the standardised norm EN
14889-1 [6]. The norm establishes requirements for concrete,
208
mortar and grouting mortar for bearing and other purposes. There are 2 different
systems for certificating the conformity:
System 1 – steel fibres for bearing purposes and
System 3 – steel fibres for other purposes.
The norm defines bearing purposes as follows: "when applying fibres for bearing
purposes the added fibres contribute towards the bearing capacity of a concrete
element”. Accordingly a System "1” certification of the conformity is necessary for
practically all relevant cases. Thus only steel fibres monitored and certificated in
accordance with System "1” with the relevant EU certificate of conformity should be
applied in order to avoid any confusion. The norm contains the permissible tolerances
for the properties of the fibres applicable in each case. In order to present differences in
the capabilities of the individual types of fibres in a clear manner the influence on the
concrete’s strength is tested on a reference concrete. The minimum amount of added
steel fibre is defined, which is necessary to attain a residual bending tensile strength of
1.5 N/mm2 given a crack opening width of 0.5 mm and of 1.0 N/mm2 given a crack
opening width of 3.5 mm in a test procedure in accordance with DIN EN 14651.
The European norm for shotcrete EN 14887-1 defines the application of fibres and
describes necessary test methods to determine the ductility and capabilities of various
fibre concretes. Two different test methods are included in this norm: statically
undefined slab tests to determine the energy absorption capacity (system bearing
capacity) according to EN 14488-5 and statically defined beam tests to determine the
cross-section bearing capacity according to EN 14488-3. Thus the EN 144887-1 refers
to other European norms relating to test methods.
Batching, mixing and placing

SFRS can be used for the dry shotcreting method as for the wet one. The SFRS can be
applied by the conventional equipment. When steel fibres glued together in compact
bundles are used, no special equipment is required for mixing. The bundles can be
added to the dry aggregates, as well as to the already mixed concrete. As soon as the
mixing process starts, these bundles spread immediately throughout the entire mass
and owing to the action of the moisture of the mixture and also the scouring effect of the
aggregates, they separate into individual fibres. When all fibre bundles are separated,
the shotcrete mixture is homogeneously reinforced. By contrast, loose fibre types,
particularly those with high aspect ratios, are difficult to add to the concrete and to
spread evenly in the mixture.
Recently an appropriate dosing equipment has been developed for glued steel fibres
which allows the addition of steel fibres in an automatic way. This equipment can be
connected to any standard concrete batching or mixing plant.
The use of automatic dosing equipment makes it possible to eliminate the need for
additional personnel but makes it also possible to have a clear control of the added fibre
dosage.
Steel fibres
Steel wire fibres, added as one more component to the shotcrete mix, guarantees a
uniform reinforcement and an end product with homogenous characteristics.
Steel fibres do reinforce the whole shotcrete matrix resulting in:
 an efficient crack control and
 a ductile behaviour.
Structural applications however, require a tougher quality control. The proper
characteristics have to be checked depending on the application of the steel fibre
reinforced shotcrete :
 preliminary control is needed on the production level of each component,
such as cement, admixtures, steel fibres
209
 before starting up a job preliminary testing has to be done using the mix
and the equipment selected for the job to check compatibility of all
components and factors involved
 this allows to start the job in a well prepared way to keep quality control
easy and simple during tunnelling.
Control in advance includes material testing. Steel fibres should have an official quality
label, such as ISO.
Preliminary testing has to check the proper steel fibre reinforced shotcrete
characteristics, such as crack control and/or ductility.
8.3.7 Placing of Shotcrete
1) Rock or previously applied shotcrete surfaces to be shotcreted shall be carefully
cleaned of all loose material, scale and other contaminations. It may be necessary to
use compressed air and a water jet.
2) The optimum distance between nozzle and surface of application is 1.0 to 1.5 meter.
The nozzle shall be positioned at right angles to the surface of application.
3) If the design thickness must be applied in more than one layer, then the previous layer
must have developed sufficient strength to support the additional layer(s).
4) Steel ribs, roof ties, wire mesh and other reinforcement shall be embedded in shotcrete
as shown on the drawings. The minimum cover of wire mesh and re-bars applied at the
inner side of a tunnel lining shall be provided considering the environment condition
as severe.
5) If more than one layer of reinforcement is used, the second layer shall not be
positioned before the first one is embedded and covered with shotcrete. Exemptions
are to be approved by the Engineer.
6) In sound rock the shotcrete shall follow the rock surface with proper rounding of
notches and corners. At projections of sound and hard rock edges, the actual shotcrete
thickness may be locally reduced to two thirds of the specified thickness. This shall
apply only to rock with UCS > 30 N/mm2.
7) Rebound shall be removed immediately after finishing of each shotcrete application. In
particular at horizontal shotcrete connections due to separate excavation sequences
and at all construction joints the rebound shall be removed, if necessary by pneumatic
hammers, prior to further application of shotcrete.
8) Under no circumstances rebound material shall be worked back into the construction.
The work shall be continuously kept free of rebound material.
9) Measures to establish the thickness of shotcrete shall be set up by the Contractor and
approved by the Engineer. These may include visual guides installed prior to
Shotcreting, holes drilled after completion of Shotcreting or a full control by laser
scanning.
10) If deemed necessary by the Engineer, curing of the shotcrete shall be performed by
water spraying or other appropriate measures subject to the approval of the Engineer
in the first 48 hours after application.
11) Major ground water seepages shall be drained off prior to spraying or after application
of a first sealing layer.
12) Nozzle men shall be trained in the correct application of shotcrete.
13) The static compressed air capacity measured at the shotcrete pump shall be according
to the manufacturer’s recommendations and generally as per EFNARC guidelines G
8.3.2 for wet process and G8.3.3 for dry process.
14) Full personal protection equipment to protect the nozzle man from eye and skin
contact and inhalation of shotcrete and/or admixtures shall be provided. The
admixture manufacturer’s precautions and actions for accidental contact shall be
provided and adhered to.
8.3.8 Testing of Shotcrete
210
8.3.8.1 Field Suitability Tests

1) Field Suitability Tests shall be carried out to determine Early and Final Strength and
establish a suitable range of accelerator dosage of shotcrete applied in the field.
2) For each type of accelerating admixture and mix design a trial mix shall be sprayed into
test panels (3 nos. per trial mix) under site conditions. At least 3 different dosages of
the accelerating admixture shall be tested following the recommendation of the
accelerator manufacturer. The range of accelerator dosage shall conform to the
recommendations by the accelerator manufacturer.
3) The ambient temperature for the test shall be in accordance with the actual conditions
in the tunnel.
4) The compressive strength development up to 1.2 N/mm2 shall be determined
indirectly by the Penetro-meter.
5) The compressive strength development in the range between 1 and 16 N/mm2 shall be
determined onto a shotcrete lining, using the HILTI shot bolt method (or equivalent).
6) The compressive strength in the range above 10 N/mm2 shall be determined by
crushing of cylindrical shotcrete specimens. After spraying, the test panels shall be
covered and not be moved for 18 hours after spraying. Cores for strength testing shall
be obtained from the panels between 18 and 24 hours after spraying. The cores for
determination of Final Strength shall be stored in water until 3 days before testing. The
specimens shall have a diameter of 100mm and be cut to a height of 100mm. The
Engineer may also require the drilling of cores from the test panels perpendicular to
the spraying direction.
7) The average value of five test results shall exceed the strength requirements for Field
Suitability Tests specified in Clause 8.3.5.1.1(3) by 5 N/mm2.
8) It must be demonstrated in field tests that a shotcrete thickness of min. 150mm can be
applied within 5 minutes in any direction.
9) Absorption energy tests and residual strength test accordingly EN 14487 and EN
14488 have to be carried out also to define the composition of the shotcrete with glued
steel fibers to obtain the absorbed energy of 700 joules.
8.3.8.2 Quality Control Tests
To ensure the specified quality of shotcrete in the structure, quality control tests shall be
performed as follows.
1) Aggregate
During construction, the aggregate gradation shall be tested every 14 days or as
directed by the Engineer and shall comply with Clause 8.3.4.2 of this Specification.
2) Early and Final Compressive Strength
i. One test shall be made for every 100m³ to 300m³ of shotcrete applied,
measured in theoretical quantities and as directed by the Engineer. The early
strength shall be tested up to 30 minutes according to Clause 8.3.5.1.1 of this
Specification. 12 or 16 cores shall be drilled per test from panel casted at site.
Each 4 cores shall be tested at 1 day, 3 days and 7 days and 28 days.
ii. Every 500m³ of shotcrete applied, measured in theoretical quantities, the in-
situ final strength of shotcrete shall be tested. The specimens shall be
prepared by means of core drilling at random places from the lining 1 to 2
days before testing. The specimen shall have a diameter of 100mm and cut to
a length of 100mm. The average 28 days strength of 4 cores shall exceed the
strength specified in Clause 8.3.5.1.1 (3) for quality control tests by 5 N/mm2.
The Engineer may call for such testing also at 56 days.
3) Shotcrete Thickness Testing
The Engineer may call for confirmatory shotcrete thickness testing of the in-situ tunnel
lining. The basic test shall consist of 4 nos. drill holes drilled on a 1m² pattern. The
211
average thickness of the 4 holes shall exceed the specified design thickness. If not, the
Engineer shall propose remedial measures and/or further drill testing.
4) Slump Testing
The Engineer may from time to time request slump testing at the pump, in order to
confirm that the delivered mix is within  25mm of the target slump range established
by the trail mix/suitability test work.
8.3.8.3 Additional Testing for Design Purpose
1) The Engineer may call for permeability tests as required for design purposes.
Permeability tests shall be on in-situ cores taken from the tunnel. One set of cores shall
be taken from the top heading and/or bench and/or invert, away from the construction
joints, in order to give information on the permeability of intact shotcrete. Another set
of cores shall be taken at the top heading-bench joint and/or the bench-invert joint in
order to give information of the permeability of construction joints.
2) The Engineer may call for additional compressive strength tests on cores taken from
test panels in the direction perpendicular to the spray.
3) To define the composition of the shotcrete initial tests have to be done for approval
prior its use. For the shotcrete with glued steel fiber, absorption energy test and
residual strength have to be carried out for the composition approval.
8.3.9 Compressive Strength Failures
This Clause deals with the course of action to be taken in the event of cores not meeting the
strength requirements as specified in Clause 8.3.5.1.1 of this Specification.
8.3.9.1 Failure of 1, 3 or 7 day compressive strength tests:
1) Inform the Engineer
2) Immediate examination of tunnel lining in suspect area
3) Immediate examination of elements concerned in making, transporting and placing of
shotcrete
4) Assess the results of the geotechnical monitoring program
5) Prepare to take further tests, including in-situ cores
6) Take further compression tests as soon as possible
7) The Engineer may order measures for strengthening of the area
8) If the strength is lower than 80% of the specified stress the Engineer may reduce the
unit rate for shotcrete accordingly.
8.3.9.2 Failure of Final Strength tests:
1) Inform the Engineer
2) Further cores shall be taken from the tunnel lining in the vicinity of the failed specimen
to establish the area of non-conformance
3) Assess the results of the geotechnical monitoring program
4) The Engineer may order measures for strengthening of the area
5) Same as (8) above
8.3.10 Measurement
1) For surface works (slopes) the quantities of shotcrete to be paid for shall be measured
by the unit of cubic meters of shotcrete installed as shown on the drawings and/or
directed by the Engineer herein before described and accepted with all its additional
requirements in accordance with the Unit Rate quoted in the Bill of Quantities. No
separate remuneration for filling of over breaks will be made unless Clause (3) below
applies.
2) For the primary lining of the tunnel, the quantities of shotcrete to be paid for shall be
measured by the unit of square meters of shotcrete installed at the specified thickness
as shown on the drawings and/or directed by the Engineer herein before
212
described and accepted with all its additional requirements in accordance with the
Unit Rates quoted in the Bill of Quantities. No separate remuneration for filling of over
breaks will be made unless Clause (3) below applies. For face sealing, filling of over
breaks under Clause (3) below and for widening of top heading footings, the quantities
of shotcrete to be paid for shall be measured by the unit of cubic meters of shotcrete
installed as shown on the drawings and/or directed by the Engineer herein before
described and accepted with all its additional requirements in accordance with the
Unit Rate quoted in the Bill of Quantities.
3) If geological over break was unavoidable and exceeds “Boundary Surface “Z” and 2 m³
in volume, separate payment shall be made for the filling of that overbreak beyond the
payline with shotcrete according to the Unit Rate accepted in the Bill of Quantities. The
cavity or void formed by over break shall be measured in-situ and shall be quantified
and approved by the Engineer and certified for payment at the following rates:
i. At full unit rate for quantity beyond “Boundary Surface Z”;
ii.
At 50% unit rate for boundary between the payline and the boundary surface
Z
iii. Profile variation between line A and Boundary surface Z is considered as
Technical overbreak due to the spreading of the peripheric blast drilling and
effect of blasting. It is not paid separately.
4) Where fore-poling is required, no separate remuneration for the additional
shotcrete will be made other than according to the drawings, i.e. the costs for the
additional shotcrete shall be included in the primary shotcrete lining costs.
Additional costs for shotcrete for the widening of top heading footing shall be
compensated for by a separate item in the Bill of Quantities.
8.3.11 Payment
1) The accepted quantity measured as provided above shall be paid for at the Unit Rates
shown in the Bill of Quantities which price and payment shall be full compensation for
all labour, supervisors, materials, the Contractor’s equipment, transportation,
preparations, storage, cleaning of application surfaces, operating, removal of rebound,
temporary protection, testing, curing and all costs required for production and
application of shotcrete and for any other contingencies as well as the costs of
obtaining shotcrete test cores and of testing holes backfill.
2) For the purpose of payment, shotcrete surface area shall be considered at the pay-line,
which in this case is defined at the exposed face of the theoretical shotcrete lining,
inclusive of the design deformations tolerance as applicable, as per the drawing. The
thickness defined for the current Section Type defines the Unit Price to be paid.
8.3.12 Steel fibre Reinforced Shotcrete & Synthetic fibre
8.3.12.1 General
1) If deemed appropriate and approved by the DDC, the Contractor may spray steel fibre
reinforced shotcrete in the locations in the underground structures where plain
shotcrete is indicated on the drawings. In that case, the thickness of the steel fibre
reinforced shotcrete shall be the same as shown on the drawings for plain shotcrete.
2) For application of fibre reinforced shotcrete, the Wet Method shall be used.
3) When steel fibre reinforced shotcrete is used, the installation of reinforcement mesh,
as shown on the Drawings, shall be omitted unless otherwise requested by the DDC.
4) Prior to application of fleece or waterproofing membrane a fine-grained shotcrete
layer shall be applied to the surface of steel fibre reinforced shotcrete even if the
213
irregularities of the steel fibre shotcrete surface are within the tolerances indicated in
Section 11. For details of the waterproofing membrane, fleece and fine-grained
shotcrete layer refers to Section 11 of the Specification
8.3.12.2 Material
1) Cement, aggregates, except for grain size distribution, and admixtures shall be in
accordance with the requirements of Clause 8.3 of the Specification.
2) The maximum grain size of the aggregates shall be 8mm. The grain size distribution of
Table 8-1 shall be adjusted accordingly and shall be approved by the DDC.
3) The types and dimensions of steel fibres shall be suitable for shotcrete application and
the requirements of shotcrete reinforcement. The steel fibres shall be supplied by a
supplier approved by the Engineer before their use in the Works. Steel fibres shall in
general comply with the following requirements
(a) Deformed ends
(b) Dimensions: minimum length 18 mm, aspect ratio (ratio between fiber length and
fiber diameter) greater than 40
(c) Tensile Strength: more than 500 N/mm2.
4) Additional requirements for the steel fibre shotcrete shall be the same as specified
above for plain shotcrete. Further more, steel fibre shotcrete shall have a minimum
flexural toughness of 2.5 for index (I 5) and 5.0 for index (I10) according to ASTM C
1018-89.
8.3.12.3 Testing
1) Testing for steel fiber reinforced shotcrete, shall be carried out in the same manner as
specified in Section 8.3.8.
2) The characteristic ultimate residual tensile strength of fiber reinforced shotcrete fR3k
must be evaluated by performing experimental tests according to EN 14651 (Europian
Standard, EN14651, Test method for metallic fibered concrete – Measuring the flexural
tensile strength (limit of proportionality (LOP)), residual). Brussels, 2005. The
characteristic ultimate residual tensile strength of fiber reinforced shotcrete fFtuk is
then computed from fR3k.
3) The flexural toughness of steel fibre shotcrete shall be tested according to ASTM C
1018-89. Field suitability tests shall be performed for different quantities of steel Fiber
in the shotcrete. During construction, the flexural toughness shall be measured for
every 200m3 of steel Fiber shotcrete installed.
4) The actual fiber content of steel fiber shotcrete shall be tested by washing out and
weighing the steel fibers from a 10 ltr container of fresh shotcrete. Three tests shall be
performed for every 100m3 of steel/ synthetic fibre shotcrete applied.
8.3.12.4 Construction Requirements
1) The production transport and application of steel fiber reinforced shotcrete shall be as
detailed in Section 8.3.
2) The wet Shotcreting method shall be used. For the shotcrete equipment, the
manufacturer’s specification shall explicitly include that the equipment is designed for
the use of fiber reinforced shotcrete. All equipment shall be approved by the DDC
before use.
3) The quantity of steel fibers in the shotcrete shall be as determined during the
suitability tests. Any change to that quantity needs to be supported by test results
during construction and requires the approval of the Engineer. The minimum amount
of steel fibers in the shotcrete shall be 30 kg/m3 of concrete for steel fibre and 7
kg/m3 of concrete for synthetic fibre.
214
4) During storage, steel fibers and wire mesh shall be protected from corrosion.
Corroded steel fibers shall not be used.
8.3.12.5 Measurement and Payment
1) For the primary lining of the tunnel, the quantities of steel/ synthetic fibre reinforced
shotcrete (SFRS) to be paid for shall be measured by weight of steel fibres installed as
shown on the drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer. The accepted quantity
measured as provided above shall be paid for at the Unit Rates shown in the Bill of
Quantities which price and payment shall be full compensation for all labour,
supervisors, materials, the CONTRACTOR’s equipment, transportation, preparations,
storage, cleaning of application surfaces, operating, removal of rebound, temporary
protection, testing, curing and all costs required for production and application of SFRS
and for any other contingencies as well as the costs of obtaining shotcrete test scores
and of testing holes backfill.
2) For the purpose of payment, shotcrete surface area shall be considered at the pay-line,
which in this case is defined at the exposed face of the theoretical shotcrete
lining, inclusive of the design deformations tolerance as applicable, as per the
drawing. The thickness defined for the current Section Type defines the Unit Price to
be paid.
8.4 REINFORCING STEEL
8.4.1 General
Specifications for steel reinforcement of in-situ concrete see Section 15 of this Specification.
This Section includes additional requirements for steel reinforcement of the primary
support.
8.4.2 Wire Mesh (Welded Wire Fabrics)
8.4.2.1 Material
Steel wires shall be of strength grade Fe 500 according to IS 1786. The dimensions of the
steel wire mesh shall be as specified in the Tender Drawings. The steel wire mesh shall be
delivered to the site in flat mats or pre-bent to the specified shape.
8.4.2.2
9.4.2.2 Installation
The steel wire mesh shall be installed such that it follows as closely as possible the
irregularities of the excavation surface or previous layers of shotcrete. It shall be firmly fixed
to prevent vibration and change of position during spraying of shotcrete. The steel wire
mesh shall be installed in the longest practical length. The overlap of the steel wire meshes
applied in the shotcrete lining shall be at least twice the pitch distance in circumferential and
one pitch distance in longitudinal direction.
8.4.3 Roof Ties/ Tie Rods
9.4.3.1 Materials
8.4.3.1
For roof ties, reinforcing bars of strength grade Fe 500 according to IS 1786 shall be used.
8.4.3.2
Roof ties shall be attached securely to the rock and in front of the previously placed wire
mesh. The position of the roof ties shall correspond to the line of the rock bolts to be
installed and so that the rock bolts will pass through the section of the roof tie.
8.4.4 Reinforcing Steel Bars
For support purposes, reinforcing steel bars are required as an additional reinforcement of
215
the shotcrete lining in heavily stressed areas, depending on the local ground conditions and
as shown on the Tender Drawings.
9.4.4.1 Materials
8.4.4.1
1) Reinforcing steel bars shall be of strength grade Fe 500 according to IS 1786.
2) No reinforcement bars shall contain flash welds.
3) Water quenched and heat tempered reinforcing bars will not be permitted.
8.4.4.2
1) Reinforcing steel bars shall be attached securely to the previously placed shotcrete
layer or wire mesh.
2) Overlaps shall be arranged as shown on relevant drawings.
8.4.5
Measurement and Payment
For measurement and payment, refer to the clause 14.9
8.5 STEEL RIBS
8.5.1 General
This Chapter applies to the supply and installation of the steel ribs required and used
as support in underground excavations as per drawings. The Contractor is required to
provide supply for all the profiles as specified in tender drawings.
8.5.2 References
National Standards:
IS: 2062 – 1992 Steel for General Structural Purposes - Specification
IS: 1786 – 1985 (Reaffirmed 2000), Specification for high strength deformed steel bars and
wires for concrete reinforcement
1) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
(a) ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
2) American Welding Society (AWS):
(a) AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel
8.5.3 General Requirements
1) Steel ribs shall be effective as primary support immediately after excavation and shall
subsequently act as reinforcement and load distributing members for the shotcrete
lining.
2) The steel ribs shall be manufactured to meet the geometrical requirements for the
excavation geometries for each Section Types including the relevant tolerances.
3) Curving and bending of any kind of profile should be smooth, continuous and circular,
without bending or torsion of it.
4) When handling and shipping steel ribs, prevent bending, scraping or overstressing
members.
5) Block projecting parts likely to be bent or damaged during handling should be repaired
with wood or other material.
6) Replace pieces bent or damaged unless repair is possible.
8.5.4 Submission
1) Clause 8.2.2 of this Specification.
2) Shop Drawings for the fabrication of the steel ribs
216
3) Prior to the beginning of the work, the following shall be submitted:

i. Complete fabrication details of the steel ribs
ii. Installation procedures and layout
iii. Details of joints, connections, spacers, geometry etc.
iv. Certificates of compliance of the materials.
8.5.5 Design of steel ribs
1) Steel ribs are three-dimensional, steel frames manufactured in compliance with the
required excavation geometry of the tunnel.
2) Shop drawings shall comply all the geometric requirements and allow for being
mounted within the theoretic excavation section considering the convergences at the
erection moment and respecting the shotcrete thickness and cover.
8.5.6 Lattice Girders
1) Lattice girders shall consist of three primary bars, connected by stiffening elements
of the manufacturer's design. They shall be designed so as to:
(a) Facilitate shotcrete penetration into and behind the girder, thereby
minimizing the creation of projection shadows.
(b) Provide good quality bonding between the steel and shotcrete, to form a
composite structure in the sense of a continuous reinforced shotcrete lining.
1) Allow the placing of bolts through them (passing between the two lateral couples of
bars)
2) A minimum 5% of the total moment of inertia shall be provided by the stiffening
elements. This percentage is calculated as an average value along repeatable lengths of
the lattice girder.
3) To ensure stability against buckling, the maximum spacing between stiffening elements
shall be less than three times the cross sectional height of the girder.
4) In case of fabrication on site, the Contractor shall submit a detailed method statement
for approval to the Engineer.
5) The Contractor shall submit related detailed drawings of the lattice girders, showing
also the number of sections in the frame and details of the connection between the
sections. The detail to be approved by the Engineer.
6) Lattice girders for squeezing ground Support Classes shall incorporate yielding
Couplings at the locations where lining stress controllers are to be placed.
i) Lattice Girders shall be effective as primary support immediately after excavation
and shall subsequently act as reinforcement and load distributing members for the
shotcrete lining.
ii) The lattice girders shall be manufactured to meet the geometrical requirements
for the excavation geometries for each rock class including the relevant tolerances
as specified in Clause 9.5.7.
iii) When handling and shipping lattice girders, prevent bending, scraping or
overstressing members.
iv) Block projecting parts likely to be bent or damaged during handling with wood or
other material.
v) Replace pieces bent or damaged unless repair is possible.
8.5.6.1 Materials
1) Each of the primary bars of a lattice girder segment shall be composed of only one piece
of high strength steel having a yield strength of 500 MPa or stronger.
2) The connection elements at the end of lattice girder segments shall be constructed of
217
angled structural steel having a yield strength of 250 MPa or stronger, or of welded flat
steel ensuring similar strength characteristics.
8.5.6.2 Manufacturing of Lattice Girders

Geometry
The lattice girders shall be fabricated to meet minimum clearances shown under
consideration of inaccuracy of placement during construction and material tolerances.
8.5.6.3 Welding of Lattice Girders
Testing of materials and workmanship shall be carried out in accordance with AWS D1.4. If
the testing performance is of low quality an approved testing agency shall execute this work.
1) The manual metal-arc welding process shall be employed. The manufacturer shall be
responsible for ensuring that the capacity of the welding plant and ancillary equipment
is adequate for the welding procedure to be used and for maintaining all welding plant
and ancillary equipment in good working order.
2) Covered electrodes complying with UNI EN ISO 2560 shall be used. Electrodes shall be
selected with regard to the particular application (welding position, joint design).
Electrodes shall be stored in their original containers in a dry, preferably heated place
adequately protected from the effects of the weather and in accordance with the
manufacturer’s Specification.
3) Surfaces to be welded shall be dry. Fusion faces and the surrounding surfaces shall be
free from heavy scale, moisture oil, paint or any other substance which might affect the
quality of the weld. Slag shall be removed from each run of weld metal before a further
run is superimposed. The most favorable welding position for each case shall be chosen.
4) For the cutting of the steel profiles the manual flame cutting process may be employed.
Also sawing is permitted.
5) Further preparation of joint and fusion faces shall be done by grinding.
6) Parts to be welded shall be assembled such that the joints are easily accessible and
visible to the operator.
7) Slag shall be removed from all welds in order to allow visual inspection.
8) Welding operations shall be supervised by a suitably trained supervisor who shall have
particular production experience. The welding supervisor is responsible for the
following duties listed hereunder:
9) employment of the welders or skilled operators and supervision of their work
10) selection, use and storage of suitable welding filler metals and auxiliary materials
11) selection and use of satisfactory welding apparatus, welding plant and welding fixtures
12) visual and dimensional checking of the weld seams as described under 16)
13) Welders shall pass the acceptance test as described under 16).
14) Prior to commencement of each welding connection type three sets of joints shall be
manufactured by each welder under conditions of the regular manufacturing process
for inspection. These joints shall be inspected by the Engineer.
15) Routine inspection of welded joints shall be done by spot checking of not less than 10
per cent of the welded joints in compliance with 16) by the Engineer.
16) Acceptance Test and Routine Inspection shall be done in accordance to the criteria as
described in Table 8-3. Visible defects exceeding the limits as shown in Table 8-3 shall
be removed and replaced by adequate means.
Undersize welds 0.1 (10 %)

Undercuts Permitted to a limited extent
Visible pores some, 10% by area
Visible slag inclusion permitted to a limited extent not continuous
218
Open end craters slight depressions permitted

Lack of fusion permitted, but no large and no continuous areas
Cracks Individual small local cracks permitted

Excessive asymmetry of welds side ratio <1.0 : 0.6
Table 8.3 - Acceptance Test
8.5.7 HEB or ISSC column or equivalent Ribs
1) As already prescribed for the previous steel ribs, the HEB140 or ISSC140 column or
equivalent type ribs can be used for the support of the tunnel profile. These are foreseen
in geo-mechanical contexts that require immediate support before shotcrete could be
installed and where lattice girder ribs can become unstable because of lateral torsion.
These conditions can become real in extremely fractured rock mass or in non-squeezing
but raveling fault material.
2) The subsequent ribs are interlocked with connection bars allowing for the stability
during erection of the newly placed one.
3) Separate elements shall be connected by means of coupled plates to be bolted in order
to recreate the static continuity.
4) The joints should be perpendicular to the rib axis. In case of invert arch, the connection
at the sidewall foot element should provide for perpendicular joint to the invert arch. In
case of primary support at the crown and at the sidewall directly on the ground, this has
to be provided with steel plates.
8.5.8 Installation of Steel ribs
1) Install to conform to the excavated shape. Consider inaccuracy of construction and
tolerances of materials.
2) Steel ribs shall be erected to the lines and levels as indicated on the drawings. The exact
excavation levels will however be determined by the Contractor to match best his
equipment and construction method subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3) Secure steel ribs by use of spacers as well as temporary wood blocking, mortar sacks or
other appropriate means to maintain position during shotcreting.
4) Steel ribs shall be embedded in shotcrete, in order to get contact between rock and steel
ribs by a solid shotcrete packing which shall have a minimum cover to steel of 20 mm.
5) Provide butt plates for steel girder segments and expansion unit in invert as required.
Ensure tight connection of all elements such that the static efficiency of the cross section
is maintained.
6) By the use of TH44 profiles with sliding joints, these joints do not have to be covered
with shotcrete since their deformation is not at still. Once this will be the case, the
sliding guides have to be fully screwed until complete block and the shotcrete layer can
be complete for full embedding the ribs.
7) The steel ribs shall be erected perpendicular to the tunnel axis.
8) In case sufficient overbreak at ribs footing is real, this has to be preliminary filled by
concrete or shotcrete up to the theoretic footing level.
8.5.9 Installation of Latice Girder
1) Install to conform to the excavated shape. Consider inaccuracy of construction and
tolerances of materials.
2) Lattice girders shall be erected to the lines and levels as indicated on the drawings. The
exact excavation levels will however be determined by the CONTRACTOR to match
best his equipment and construction method subject to the approval of the ENGINEER.
3) Secure lattice girders by use of spacers as well as temporary wood blocking, mortar
219
sacks or other appropriate means to maintain position during shotcreting.

4) Provide butt plates for steel girder segments and expansion unit in invert as required.
Ensure tight connection of all elements such that the static efficiency of the cross
section is maintained.
5) Lattice girders shall be embedded in shotcrete, in order to get contact between rock
and lattice girder by a solid shotcrete packing which shall have a minimum cover to
steel of 20 mm.
6) The lattice girders shall be erected perpendicular to the tunnel axis.
8.5.10 Measurement
1) The quantities of steel ribs, to act as part of the primary support, to be paid for shall be
measured by the unit of metric tons herein before described and accepted with all its
additional requirements. Measurements shall be based on the length of the steel ribs as
shown on the approved shop drawings, multiplied by the weight per linear meter of the
steel ribs including weight of the welding if any, or as otherwise directed or authorized
by the Engineer.
2) The quantities of lattice girders, to act as part of the primary support, to be paid for shall
be measured by the unit of metric tons herein before described and accepted with all its
additional requirements. Measurements shall be based on the length of the lattice girder
as shown on the approved shop drawings, multiplied by the weight per linear meter of
the lattice girder, or as otherwise directed or authorized by the ENGINEER.
3) Steel work used for temporary work will not be measured.
8.5.11 Payment
The accepted quantity measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit
prices respectively for the pay items shown in the Bill of Quantities which price and payment
shall be full compensation for all labour, supervisors, materials, the CONTRACTOR’s
equipment and installation or any other contingencies. No separate payment will be made
for furnishing, erecting and removing of tie bars, spacers, timber foot block and wedges,
blocking and struts. All costs for such works shall be included in the unit prices of the
Bills of Quantities for underground excavation or for furnishing and placing of steel ribs
8.6 Fore poling

8.6.1 General
Fore-poling is a pre-excavation support element required for tunnel excavation works. Fore-
poling shall be applied in rock and soil conditions, which tend to produce over break,
collapses or material inflows immediately following excavation. Fore-poling may be applied
locally or systematically as circumstances require for the safety of the works and to prevent
over break which is always in connection with erection of steel girders. All fore-poling must
be fully embedded in the mortar.
8.6.2 Material
Boreholes stable:
1) Steel pipes with a minimum outer diameter of 40 mm shall be used. Wall thicknesses of
steel pipes shall not be less than 4 mm.
2) Dowels (spiles) consisting of deformed high yield steel bars grade Fe 500 with a
minimum diameter of 25 mm shall be used instead of steel pipes, if approved by the
ENGINEER.
220
Boreholes not stable:
Self-drilling bolts shall be used as fore-poling elements where stability of the predrilled
boreholes cannot be achieved, due to the encountered ground conditions. Self drilling bolts
shall be installed upon instruction of the Engineer only and shall have a yield load of at least
200 KN. The grout used for self drilling bolts shall be in accordance with the requirements of
the bolt manufacturer. Where required by the Engineer, grouting shall be carried out
simultaneously with drilling to achieve a better grouting effect along the bolt.
8.6.3 Installation
1) Fore-poling shall be applied as shown on the drawings or as instructed by the DDC and
2) Forepoling elements at 300 to 500 mm centres shall be inserted into the predrilled
holes (steel pipes or dowels) at the face or drilled into the face (selfdrilling bolts) from
the face of the drivage towards the unexcavated ground as shown on the Tender
Drawings.
3) The length of forepoling elements shall be according to the drawings or at least 1.50
meter longer than the applied length of round, as instructed by the ENGINEER.
4) Forepoling requires the installation of lattice girders to support it (it cannot work in
console).
5) Grouting of fore-poling pipes and dowels with cement mortar, either before or after the
insertion of the pipes, to be determined by the DDC and the Engineer.The grouting
process has to be controlled by the use of injection pipes and obturators allowing the
extraction of the air into the hole and controlling the grout coming to the bottom
extreme of the bar or pipes.
6) Fore-poling shall be properly supported by the steel ribs and the shotcrete above the
steel ribs. Therefore, Shotcreting of the gap between steel ribs and rock in the portions
of fore-poling shall be completed after the installation of fore-poling.
7) Spacing between consecutive fore-poling pipes or bars around the crown of the
excavation profile must comply with the distance specified on the drawings, but shall be
adopted by the DDC to the prevailing geological conditions of the tunnel face.
8.6.4 Pipe Roof / Umbrella

A pipe roof is a special type of long fore-poling (typically 9 – 15 m). The fore-poling elements
shall consist of steel pipes with a minimum outer diameter of 76 mm and a minimum yield
load of 1200 KN. The length and spacing of the pipes shall be as shown on the drawings. The
pipes shall be grouted with cement mortar by the use of injection pipes and obturators
allowing the extraction of the air into the hole and controlling the grout coming to the
bottom extreme of the pipe.
8.6.5 Measurement
The quantities of fore poles to be paid for shall be the theoretical length of the steel pipes,
dowels or self drilling bolts herein before described and accepted with all its additional
requirements included in the unit price. Measurements shall be based on the dimensions
shown on drawings or as otherwise directed or authorized by the Engineer.
8.6.6 Payment
shall be full compensation for all labour, supervisors, materials, the Contractor ’s equipment,
drilling, installation and grouting or any other contingencies.
8.7 Rock Bolts
8.7.1 General
1) The provisions contained hereunder apply to all rock bolts installed either locally or in
221
a systematic pattern in the roof, side walls, and invert of the tunnels. Rock bolts are
part of the primary support, with the purpose of activating the composite action
between the surrounding rock and the shotcrete, contributing to the load bearing
capacity of the primary tunnel lining and creating arch of rock with increased
characteristics because of the increased apparent tensional strength in radial direction.
Rock bolts occasionally required for the support of the tunnel face during the advance
are covered likewise under these provisions.
2) Rock bolts shall be installed according to the lengths and rock bolt patterns shown on
the drawings for each relevant standard support system unless otherwise determined
by the DDC subject to approval of the Engineer.
8.7.2 References
1) Indian Standards:
(a) IS: 1786 – 1985 (Reaffirmed 2000), Specification for high strength deformed
steel bars and wires for concrete reinforcement.
2) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
(a) ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
(b) ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement
(c) ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
(d) ISRM - Doc.2, Part 1 "Suggested Method for Rock-bolt Testing".
8.7.3 Definitions
1) Self-drilling bolts are a combined system of rock bolt and drill rod. During drilling, the
bolt is used as the drill rod fixed with a drill bit. Rod and bit remain in the hole as a
rock bolt, which is grouted through the flushing hole. In case of collapsing boreholes,
this system still enables the installation of rock bolts. Special provisions also allow the
grouting to be carried out simultaneously with the drilling operation to achieve a
better grouting effect.
2) Swellex-type rock bolts (friction anchored rock bolts) are mechanically folded steel
tubes. High water pressure inflates the tube and adapts its shape to the irregularities of
the borehole.
3) Fiberglass bolts are long fiberglass element of various shape (tubular, plates, Y or
combinations and similar) for the support and consolidation of the excavation face in
case of worst rock conditions like e.g. by the crossing of faults or heavily fractioned
zones.
4) SN-Bolts are made of deformed steel bars and fully bonded with the surrounding rock
by cement mortar. The hole is filled with grout before insertion of the bolt. The
abbreviation SN descends from the mine "Store Norfors" in Sweden where it had been
applied first.
8.7.4 Materials
8.7.4.1 Self-drilling bolts
1) Self drilling bolts minimum diameter 25mm for forepoling/Rock bolting/Face bolting
shall have a minimum yield load of 200 KN.
2) Self drilling bolts installed at slopes shall have a minimum yield load of 200 KN.
3) Selfdrilling bolts installed as micropiles shall have a minimum yield load of 450 KN.
4) Self drilling bolts for pipe roofs shall have a minimum yield load of 1200 KN
5) The yield load shall also apply to threads, nuts, anchor plates and couplings.
6) The steel rods shall have a corrugated surface.
8.7.4.2 Swellex-type bolts ( or similar)
1) Swellex-type bolts for local or systematic rock bolt patterns shall have a minimum
yield load of 150 KN.
222
2) Bolt face plates shall be such as to allow transfer of the anchor force at the head of the
rock bolt to the shotcrete, steel girder or rock surface.
3) For installation of bolts, equipment as recommended by the manufacturer of the bolts
shall be used.
8.7.4.3 SN-bolts
1) SN-Bolts shall consist of rebars with a minimum diameter of 25 mm and shall be of
minimum steel grade Fe 500.
2) The yield loads of the bolts shall also apply to the thread, nut, anchor plate and
coupling, if any.
3) Rock bolts shall be made of deformed reinforcing steel with a corrugated surface. One
end shall be fitted with a suitable thread which is to receive an anchor plate and fixing
nut.
4) Anchor plates with a size of 200x 200 mm and a thickness of 12 mm or as specified in
drawings shall be used unless instructed otherwise by the DDC and approved by the
Engineer based on support necessities. The shape shall allow a uniform seat, even if the
bolt is not installed exactly perpendicular to the surface below.
5) Washers and nuts shall allow the secure transfer of the anchor force to the anchor
plate.
8.7.4.4 Mortar grout for Anchors
1) The cement mortar grout shall consist of sand, cement and water or neat cement and
water. Cement based grout with admixture in order to obtain a good workability and a
compensated shrinkage of the grout body around the anchor bars are accepted.
Submission for approval of such grout mix is required.
2) Ordinary Portland cement shall be used.
3) Sand for grouting purpose shall be clean mineral sand, uniform in quality and from an
approved source. This material shall be approved by the Engineer.
4) Water shall be clean, free from oil, acid, alkaline, organic and other deleterious
substances.
5) Additives for the improvement of workability may be used.
6) The cement mortar grout shall be mechanically mixed to produce a uniform
consistency.
7) The cement mortar grout shall correspond to concrete grade M20 according to IS 456:
2000.
8.7.4.5 Fiber Glass Bolts
In case of Road Header excavation fiber glass bolts of similar ultimate load as steel bolts shall
be used for face bolting. Bolts shall be either threaded rods or self drilling bolts. Bolts shall
be grouted with cementicious material or similar in accordance to the manufacturer’s
requirement.
8.7.5 Execution
The introduction of cement mortar grout to the borehole may be carried out by pump or
compressed air displacement vessel. The installation procedure of specialized products shall
be as per the suggested method by the manufacturer duly approved by the Engineer.
8.7.5.1 Self drilling bolts
1) Self drilling bolts shall be used in ground conditions where the effective installation of
other types of rock bolts is impossible.
2) Self drilling bolts shall be placed by drilling the rod into the ground without
withdrawing the rod.
3) Self drilling bolts shall be grouted through the flushing hole immediately after
completion of the drilling operation or simultaneously with the drilling, as required by
the Engineer. For grouting process the grouting pump recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer shall be used.
223
4) The grout mix, grouting pressure and quantity shall be as advised by the supplier and
be approved by the Engineer.
8.7.5.2 Swellex-type bolts or similar
1) Boreholes for the rock bolts shall be drilled to the depths as required. The boreholes
shall be cleaned of all drill cuttings, sludge and debris.
2) The installation of rock bolts shall be done not later than two hours after drilling of the
borehole.
3) Installation / inflation of the bolts shall follow the manufacturer's recommendations.
Specific inflation plant shall be used. The rock bolt shall be drained after inflation.
8.7.5.3 SN–Bolts
1) Boreholes for all rock bolts shall be drilled to the depths as required by the lengths of
rock bolts specified for the respective Section Types and at diameters, which ensure
best workability for grouting, coupling and installation. The minimum diameter of the
boreholes shall be 10 mm larger than the diameter of the rock bolts/couplings
installed.
2) The boreholes shall be cleaned of all drill cuttings, sludge and debris.
3) Prior to the installation of the rock bolt, the entire borehole shall be filled with cement
mortar by inserting the grout hose to the full depth of the hole and withdrawing as the
grout is pumped in. The nozzle shall be kept buried in the grout as the pipe is
withdrawn so that air is displaced as the hole is filled. The bolt is then pushed into the
hole.
4) The nut of the grouted rock bolts shall be tightened not later than 12 hours after
installation to achieve a force at the anchor plate of approx. 20 kN. This force shall be
applied by a calibrated torque wrench.
5) In case of confined working space and/or great length of rock bolts, coupling shall be
permitted. The number of coupled parts shall be kept to a minimum. However, the load
capacity of such coupled rock bolts shall not be less than that of a standard integral
rock bolt. Special attention shall be paid to the grouting procedure in order to ensure
full embedment of the bolt by grout.
6) In case of coupled rock bolts, partly collapsed boreholes, or major water-flow from the
borehole, grouting may be done after installation of the bolt (post-grouting). The hole
is then grouted by a special attachment which allows the mouth of the borehole to be
sealed whilst the grout is pumped in. Air is displaced from the hole via a tube which is
attached to the full length of the rock bolt as it is installed. Grout is then pumped in and
the hole can be seen to be full, when grout escapes from the end of the tube.
8.7.6 Testing
8.7.6.1 Grout mortar
1) Prior to acceptance tests of rock bolts, tests with available cements and sands shall be
carried out to determine an appropriate mix design to achieve the specified strength
and a proper workability in association with the grouting equipment used.
2) Additives may be used to improve workability. The influence of the additive to the
strength development shall be followed by tests as described under this Clause.
3) The grout mortar shall be tested on cubes 5x5x5 cm. The cubes shall be cured in water.
4) Five numbers of cubes shall be prepared for each compressive strength test. The
resultant strength is the average evaluated from the three remaining values after
elimination of the highest and the lowest.
5) During construction, cube sample shall be taken weekly at each five bolts drivage from
the grouting hose at the nozzle. Preparation and evaluation shall follow the procedure
as described above.
224
8.7.6.2 Pull Out Tests on Rock Bolts

Pull-out tests shall be performed on basis of ISRM Doc.2, Part 1 "Suggested Method for Rock
bolt Testing".
1) Proof Tests
i) A detailed test program set up on basis of above mentioned document shall be
approved by the Engineer prior to all testing work.
ii) Specifically deviations from the ISRM suggested method shall be approved by the
Engineer.
iii) A test report shall be issued immediately after completion of the tests. It shall be
submitted for approval to the Engineer.
iv) For each type of rock bolt submitted information shall comprise:
 type of bolts
 testing equipment
 location and installation records
 applied testing loads and records of deformation
 otherwise the evaluation of test results as specified in ISRM's document
 interpretation and suggested action for failed pull-out tests
v) Proof tests shall be carried out for all types of bolts to be used for this project
prior to the commencement of tunnelling to demonstrate the effect and the
service capacity of the bolts in the field.
vi) The tests shall be performed in similar geological ground conditions as expected
during tunnel drive. The location of the bolts to be tested shall be selected by the
Engineer.
vii) A minimum of five bolts of each type shall be tested. Depending on the testing
procedure and the test results the Engineer may require further bolts to be
tested.
viii) Adequate testing equipment, as specified in the above mentioned ISRM document
shall be provided to record bolt elongation, movement of the bolts and tension
forces.
ix) The maximum load to be applied shall be the bolt´s yield load or as otherwise
2) Testing during Tunnel Driving
The Engineer will select rock bolts for testing of production bolts. For each type of rock
bolts five bolts will be selected from the first 100 bolts placed in the tunnel. From the
remaining bolts five per 500 bolts will be selected for testing purpose. The testing force
to be applied shall be equal to 80% of the rock bolt yield load.
i) Bolts which fail the tests or which are pulled out shall be replaced.
ii) For each failure, the Engineer shall require further bolts to be tested in the
vicinity.
iii) Otherwise as Clause i) to ix) in 1) above.
8.7.6.3 Installation Records
Comprehensive records about details of the installation of rock bolts during drivage, such as
grout consistency, drilling depth, length and type of rock bolts, deviations from the
theoretical position, type and time of grouting, time of tightening, special observations, etc.
shall be kept for each round by the Contractor and countersigned by the Engineer’s
supervisory personnel. Copies of these records shall be submitted to the Engineer.
8.7.7 Measurement
225
The quantities of rock bolts to be paid for shall be the number of various types and lengths of
rock bolts as shown on the drawings and/or directed by the Engineer as herein before
described and accepted with all its additional requirements.
8.7.8 Payment
shall be full compensation for all labour, supervisors, materials, the Contractor ’s equipment,
drilling, installation, grouting and testing for rock bolts or any other contingencies. No
payment shall be made for unqualified rock bolts.
8.8 Grouting
Grouting works will be carried out according to 3 different procedures for following works:
 Filling grouting of micropiles (umbrella)
 Low pressure grouting for void filling and primary consolidation around the tunnel
in case of partial collapse or loose material or blocks
 High pressure grouting for the consolidation of annular portions around the tunnel
or the upper part of the tunnel section.
The grouting of anchors (SN) and of self-boring anchors is not subject of following procedures
and are dealt with in article 8.7.
The contact grouting of the concrete final lining is not subject of following procedures and are
dealt with in article 12.
8.8.1 Filling grouting of micropiles
Minimum pressure will be applied for the sole filling of the piles and of the annular gap
between pile and drilling hole walls. The sealing of the hole mouth by horizontal micropiles
is required prior to the grouting. Ventilation and grouting pipes have to be provided. The
grouting is to be considered concluded when the grout mix is weeping from the ventilation
pipe and a minimum pressure is applied.
Grout mix design requires for a stable mix with following characteristics:
 w/c = 0.7
 cement with Blaine > 4'500
 Marsh time < 40 sec
 stable admixture: < 3-5% bleeding in 2h
 w/c ratio to be adjusted for respecting Marsh time and stability characteristics
 Number of tests have to be carried out for qualify the grout mix; no changes in the
mix design is allowed without new serial tests. Two different suppliers of the
cement should be qualified.
Furthermore:
 During the grouting process, the grout mix shall remain agitated for avoiding
bleeding.
 Old grout mix cannot be used.
 The flow rate of the grouting pumps shall remain constant during the grouting
procedure.
 The pressure measurement device for the grouting should be installed near the
hole mouth.
 After grouting, the holes shall remain plugged until no fluid runs through.
8.8.2 Low pressure grouting for void filling and primary consolidation around the tunnel
226
This grouting works will be carried out through radial or sub-radial perforations up to 5 m
depth into the rockor using VTR tubes with manchette valves. Loose material at collapse
locations or collapse prone locations will be consolidated through cement grout of the
existing voids. The pressure is limited to 5 to 8 bars measured at the grout hole mouth. The
detailed procedure according to the local conditions at the location requiring for high
pressure grouting will be defined at the moment requiring for this intervention. Following
concept is valid as general methodology and can be modified or adapted by the Engineer as
required by the local conditions and scope to be achieved.
Grout mix design requires for a stable mix with following characteristics:
 w/c = 0.7
 if required, fluidifier-plastifier (SIKA intraplast or equivalent) 2% might be used
 in this case, w/c should be lowered to 0.6 for keeping same Marsh time and
stability characteristics
 serial tests have to be carried out for qualify the grout mix; no changes in the mix
design is allowed without new serial tests. Two different suppliers of the cement
should be qualified.
Furthermore:
bleeding.
 Grout holes should be freed from debris and sludge with high pressure air.
 The sealing of the hole mouth with packers is required for proceeding with the
grouting.
 The grout process proceeds from the bottom to the top.
 In case of continuing low pressure, increase of pumping rate.
 Ending of grouting procedure after reaching pumping rate below 1 l/min and the
final maximum pressure to be constant during 3-4 minutes.
 In case of communication to another grouting hole in vicinity (within the
surrounding segments), the hole should be plugged to allow the completion of the
grouting
procedure.
packer (the packer is installed within the shotcrete).
8.8.3 High pressure grouting for the consolidation of annular portions around the tunnel or
the upper part of the tunnel section
227
This grouting works will be carried out through radial or sub-radial perforations up to 10 m
depth into the rockor using VTR tubes with manchette valves. Low resistant rock masses
around the tunnel will be consolidated through cement grout. The strength of the rock mass
will be increased and the permeability reduced. The pressure and the grout take (volume per
linear meter of hole) are limited by the G.I.N. principle. The detailed procedure according to
the local conditions at the location requiring for high pressure grouting will be defined at the
moment requiring for this intervention. Following concept is valid as general methodology
and can be modified or adapted by the Engineer as required by the local conditions and
scope to be achieved.
Grout mix design requirements for a stable mix with following characteristics:
 w/c = 0.7
 if required, fluidifier-plastifier (SIKA intraplast or equivalent) 2% might be used
 in this case, w/c should be lowered to 0.6 for keeping same Marsh time and
stability characteristics
 serial tests have to be carried out for qualify the grout mix; no changes in the mix
design is allowed without new serial tests. Two different suppliers of the cement
should be qualified.
Furthermore:
 The pressure will be measured at the nearest to the hole mouth.
bleeding.
 Grout holes should be freed from debris and sludge with high pressure air.
 The sealing of the hole mouth with packers is required for proceeding with the
grouting.
 The grout process proceeds from the bottom to the top.
 In case of continuing low pressure, increase of pumping rate.
 Ending of the grouting procedure after reaching the selected G.I.N. value.
 The grouting devices should be able to provide and support pressures up to 50
bars.
 Ending of grouting procedure after reaching pumping rate below 1 l/min and the
final maximum pressure to be constant during 3-4 minutes.
 In case of communication to another grouting hole in vicinity (within the
surrounding segments), the hole should be plugged to allow the completion of the
grouting
procedure.
packer (the packer is installed within the shotcrete).
228
 The grouting process should be regulated and registered for every grout hole
(specific procedure to be prepared) by means of the Lutz device or equivalent. This
device acts directly on the valve allowing the stop of the grouting by reaching the
fixed G.I.N. value.
 The data should be downloaded in csv values or equivalent readable format within
2 hours from the grouting process. The printed certificates from the Lutz device (or
equivalent) should be submitted to the Engineer in charge within the day.
 Secondary, tertiary and quaternary grouting could be required if the required
result (resistance or water-tightness) is not achieved.
The contractor will communicate to the Engineer/DDC about the achieved results after
analysis of all the submitted data.
TAM grouting method which uses Tube-A-Manchette PVC diam. int, 40mm and diam. ext.
50mm and pipe and double-packer is carried out by combining controlled compensation
grouting and Permeation grouting. TAM pipe is usually perforated at intervals of 30~50 cm
and is used with an inner grouting pipe containing two packer elements. TAM pipes
installed in the ground will allow grouting to be carried out individually and repeatedly. It
provides precise control and flexibility which are needed in the process of controlling
settlement of buildings, roads and tunnels.
A manchette tube is a PVC or metallic pipe in which rubber sleeves cover holes that are
drilled in the pipe at specific intervals. The tubes are inserted into holes that have been
bored into the "work area" (soil, rock, concrete, etc.) known as the "grout zone". Grout is
pumped to a packer that has been slid into the tube. Seals on the packer force the grout
through the holes in the tube, past the flexible rubber sleeve, and into the grout zone to help
stabilize and/or seal it.
Stages:
 Running a hole diameter min 3 ", which passes through the ground to be treated
accordingly project drawings or as specified by the Engineer.
 Placement of a rigid PVC pipe with an internal diameter 40mm (or metallic pipe)
suitably prepared with valve-featured with spacings between 30 and 50 cm. The
material is injected until complete filling of the annular space between the PVC
tubing and the ground material (sheath).
 With the aid of a double packer from the lower valve injection is executed the
injection accordingly the pressure and procedure specified, which will promote
rupture of the sheath and the introduction of a predetermined volume of material
into the ground in as many stages as needed.
 The injection starts when the material injected into the sheath have reached minimal
resistance, preventing its return to the surface and consequently the adjacent soil
treatment. The waiting time to handle and hardening of the sheath is up to 24 hours.
 The injection process is as follows:
o The "Dual Shutter" should be positioned at the desired level to isolate the
headlines located on the upper and lower levels.
o In the case of rock, can be used obturator expandable isolating each section
to be treated.
o The material must be injected with enough pressure to break through the
sheath.
o During the injection of the material, the pressure must be such to allow flow
of material with the specified volume.
o After injection of a certain volume of material (usually between 20 and 100
liters), the process should be stopped, noting to this valve the opening
229
pressure values and injection.

o The double packer is then positioned at the next higher level of valves and
the injection cycle is repeated at this level.
Injection equipment must compose a circuit, as follows:
 clay crusher
 hydrating and homogenizing tank clay provided with blades to move the mud
constantly. It cab chosen to use interconnected tanks with lower capacity, which are
fitted with pump to circulate the mud between them.
 high turbulence mixer fitted turbine with minimal rotation of 1,700 rpm, in its lower
part
 grout shaker capacity of the mixer, able to keep the grout in agitation. Between the
mixer and the stirrer is installed a sieve with 2 mm opening, which should be easily
removable for regular cleaning.
 triplex piston pump, with the ability to inject flow rates of 50 liters / minute at
pressures of 50 kg / cm² in holes that are distant at least 50 meters from the central
injection.
 Pressure Stabilizer able to reduce manometer oscillations. They have to be installed
into the circuits as many as needed, to achieve stability. Gauge 4 “manometer,
provided with saves-manometer device with capacity between 10 and 100 kg / cm².
 Double packer with diameters accordingly diameter pf the pipe with spacing of fence
around 0.5 meters, expansive or fixed type, in sufficient quantity to the injection in
several holes simultaneously.
During the work, the grout must be controlled from the following measures previously
obtained in the laboratory density, sedimentation factor and flow time.
The density defines the composition. The sedimentation factor defining stability. The flow
time sets the fluidity (injection capacity). The control feature is done by measuring the
density of the mixture: soil + water, and the final mixture: cement + water + soil.
The injection grout is prepared by turbulent agitation of the hydrated clay with cement and
water, until the perfect homogenization of this mixture is achieved. The dose of the features
should be considered the amounts of water used for hydration of the clay.
Before the beginning of work and after injection to define the type of clay to be used in the
treatment, a series of tests with various mixtures must be made, until reaching the
composition to be used. When there is need for rapid injection of the phases, the sheath is
composed of trace rich in cement, usually with a factor water / cement = 0.5 (by weight).
After injection into the sheath, the individual injections are started on each valve-headline,
usually from the bottom of the hole. The first step is applying increasing pressure to the
valve opening-headline, perceived by the sudden drop in pressure registered on the
pressure gauge and the immediate absorption of the material. If the valve cannot be opened
the injected grout, its opening can be caused by water injection.
The maximum pressure used to provide the valve opening-headline must be recorded in
proper document, accordingly configuration system and Quality Plan.
After the opening of the valve, the pressure registered by the manometers falls, and from
this point the pressure of the injection starts its rise.
If at any given time, the injection pressure stabilizes or even decreases, it may be that the
breaking plan has intercepted a void that is being filled with injected material. After this
cavity is filled, the pressure probably will again rise, indicating its filling.
In the initial phase of setting traces of grout and during the implementation process of the
injection works, different controls are performed. The objective is to determine the
characteristics of the injected material.
Basically, these controls are:
 visual (continuous);
230
 density (daily) and for each prepared trace, and

 flow time (daily).
During the execution of holes, all information deemed of interest should be recorded, such
as:
 presence of voids;
 water levels;
 loss of water etc.
The pipe installation must be registered positioning and spacing of the valves, taking as a
reference the level of the mouth of the hole, which allows the correct positioning of the
double packer during the injections.
During the injection into the sheath should be recorded mainly the composition used,
volumes and loss of injected material, if any.
The injections in the ground, in addition to the volumes injected per valve, it must be
registered the opening pressure (Pa) of the valves and the final injection pressure (Pf).
For each hole must be prepared a notes book containing all data from drilling to the
injection.
The criteria to stop the injection are defined based on the analysis of the data observed
during the work, specifically for each case of work.
To perform tests of grout should be installed on site a small laboratory equipped with:
 Density-meters with scale to allow density variation of reading 0.01 g / cm³.
 Marsh Funnel with output length of 5 cm and diameter 5 mm.
8.9 Lining Stress Controllers (LSC)

8.9.1 General
Lining Stress Controllers (LSC) are support elements which are applied in the shotcrete
lining of rock classes with squeezing rock conditions as shown on the respective support
drawing. The LSC shall increase the deformability of the shotcrete lining in a controlled
manner by yielding of the deformation elements and thus prevent damages due to high
lining stresses resulting from large rock deformations.
8.9.2 General Requirements

1) LSC shall be effective as primary support element in the shotcrete lining and act as
deformation elements to limit shotcrete lining stresses due to large rock deformations.
2) The LSC shall be manufactured to meet the geometrical requirements as shown on the
drawings and as instructed by the ENGINEER on site during construction and as
specified in Clause 8.5.7.
3) The type of LSC (type “A” or type “B”) actually installed shall be decided prior to
construction by the DDC and approved by the ENGINEER.
4) The deformation elements used for the LSC will have to be optimised in shape and
dimension prior to construction.
4) The deformation elements used for the LSC will have to be optimised in shape and
dimension prior to construction.
5) Adjustments in layout will be made on site by the DDC according to the actual
displacements and according to the type of deformation elements used for the LSC.
8.9.3 Submission
1) Clause 8.2.2 of this Specification.
2) Shop Drawings
3) Prior to the beginning of the work, the following shall be submitted:
a. Complete fabrication details of the Lining Stress Controllers
b. Installation procedures and layout
231
c. Details of joints, welds, geometry etc.

d. Certificates of compliance of the materials.
8.9.4 Design of Lining Stress Controllers

1) The LSC are manufactured of steel plates and/or steel tubes and reinforcement bars in
compliance with the required geometry as instructed by the DDC.
2) The LSC shall consist of 2 steel plates (top and bottom) for load transmission and
connection to the shotcrete lining. Top and bottom steel plates are connected by
deformation elements, which are oriented rectangular to the base plates and welded to
them.
3) For the deformation elements two types shall be considered:
Type A: The deformation element is formed by a corrugated steel plate, which is bended
several times by 90 degrees and has several rectangular horizontal slots. Thickness and
actual shape of the corrugated steel plate and the imperfections (slots) will be adjusted
during construction on basis of actual displacements of the tunnel.
Type B: The deformation element is formed by a cylindrical steel tube, with triangular
slots located close to the base plates. Thickness and actual shape of the steel tube and the
imperfections (slots) will be adjusted during construction on basis of actual
displacements of the tunnel.
4) Actual type of deformation element to be applied in the works shall be instructed by the
DDC.
5) To achieve satisfactory connection to the shotcrete lining, U-shaped reinforcing steel
bars shall be welded to the top and bottom steel plate of the LSC as shown on the
drawings.
6) In case of fabrication on site, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed method statement
for approval to the ENGINEER.
7) The CONTRACTOR shall submit related detailed drawings of the LSC, to be approved by
the ENGINEER.
8.9.5 Material
Steel Plates and tubes shall be of Grade A according to IS 2062/1999. The dimensions of the
steel plates / tubes shall be as specified on the drawings.
8.9.6 Manufacturing of Lining Stress Controllers

8.9.6.1 Geometry
The LSC shall be fabricated to meet the geometrical requirements as shown on the drawings
and as instructed by the ENGINEER on site during construction.
8.9.6.2 Welding of LSC

Testing of materials and workmanship shall be carried out in accordance with AWS D1.4.
The specifications for welding as defined in 8.5.7.2 shall apply.
8.9.6.3 Installation of Lining Stress Controllers (LSC)

1) LSC shall be installed before spraying of shotcrete lining
2) LSC shall be installed at levels as indicated on the drawings. The exact installation
levels may however be adjusted slightly by the CONTRACTOR to match best his
equipment and construction method subject to the approval of the ENGINEER.
3) Install LSC to conform to the excavated shape and shotcrete lining. Consider
inaccuracy of construction and tolerances of materials.
4) The length of LSC shall be adjusted to the round length
232
5) Secure lattice girders by use of spacers as well as temporary wood blocking, mortar
sacks or other appropriate means to maintain position during shotcreting.
6) The LSC shall be installed between lattice girders and shall be fixed to the lattice
girders.
7) Lattice girders at level of LSC shall not be embedded in shotcrete.
8) The lattice girders at level of LSC and the LSC shall be covered during spraying of
shotcrete lining to prevent filling of deformation slots with shotcrete. A continuous
deformation slot in the shotcrete lining shall be achieved at installation level of LSC.
9) Provide good quality bonding between the top and bottom steel plates and the
shotcrete, to form a composite structure in the sense of a continuous reinforced
shotcrete lining.
10) The permanent closure of deformation slots shall be done only after the deformation
velocity has decreased sufficiently and as instructed by the DDC.
11) Permanent closure of deformation slots to form a continuous shotcrete lining shall be
performed by shotcrete and grouting as appropriate.
12) The remaining voids between deformed deformation elements and rock surface shall
be grouted.
8.9.7 Measurement
8.9.1 1) The quantities of LSC, to act as part of the primary support, to be paid for shall be
measured by the unit of metric tons herein before described and accepted with all its
additional requirements. Measurements shall be based on the number of LSC
installed in the cross section multiplied by the applicable length of tunnel where LSC
are installed multiplied by the weight per linear meter of LSC, or as otherwise
directed or authorized by the ENGINEER.
2) Steel work used for temporary work will not be measured.
8.9.10 Payment
8.9.10.1 The accepted quantity measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit
equipment and installation or any other contingencies.
233
9.0 GROUNDWATER CONTROL MEASURES

9.1 General
This Section specifies minimum requirements for materials, equipment, and construction
standards for groundwater control measures in tunnels. For the removal of water from
surface and underground work sites,
9.2 Exploratory and Drainage Drillings
1) Exploratory drilling shall be carried out where unfavorable geological conditions are
anticipated and groundwater spouting is occurring at the tunnel excavation face.
2) Exploratory drilling that the Contractor requires and the Engineer has approved or that
the Engineer directs to perform shall be measured and paid for. However, when
tunneling is interrupted because of such kind of drilling, the Contractor shall not claim
to extension of time therefore.
3) The Contractor, if necessary in his opinion, may drive pilot hole prior to excavation at
his own cost and duty.
4) Probing ahead of the tunnel face shall be carried out by systematic probes to be drilled
such that information on the presence, pressure and quantity of water in the ground is
maintained for a distance of at least 10m in front of the tunnel face. Further information
such as colour of flushing water, fines, drilling time, etc. shall be recorded.
5) Exploratory drillings:
Exploratory drillings shall be carried out where usally a head of the excavated face to
explore or check geological/ hydrogeological conditions to br encountered during
advanced excavation or in the opinion of the Engineer. Number, location, direction,
diameter and length of exploratory drillings shall be as instructed by the Engineer
according to actually encountered geological conditions. Exploratory drillings shall
conform to Chapter 9.2 of this specification.
Generally, four exploratory drillings shall be carried out from the tunnel excavation
face with a minimum length of 15 m. The overlap of consecutive horizontal drillings
shall be minimum 5 m. The orientation of exploratory drillings shall be:
1 horizontal drilling in the excavation face center
2 drillings, one on the right and one on the left hand side, with an angle of 15 °
sideward and 10° upwards, or as instructed by the Engineer.
After excavation and installation of the primary support in the tunnel, systematical
vertical drilling in the tunnel invert with 6 m length shall be performed if instructed
by the Engineer.
9.2.1 Equipment
1) The Contractor shall provide drilling machine for drilling, if necessary, for core drilling
and non-core drilling.
2) Drilling machine shall be capable of drilling in any direction and at any inclination angle
required where as core drilling necessary, the drilling machine shall be capable of
drilling exploration holes and other drilling holes for coring.
3) All the drilling machines shall be with the capacity of placing down casing and taking it
back and getting rock cores with a specific diameter.
4) The drilling machines shall be facilitated with equipment for washing holes
continuously with water during or after drilling.
9.2.2 Measurement
234
The quantities of Exploratory and/or drainage drillings to be paid for shall be linear meter of
various diameters and drilling length as shown on the drawings and/or directed by the
Engineer as herein before described and accepted with all its additional requirements. The
measurement shall be made from the upper end of the hole to its bottom with an accuracy of
0.1 m.
9.2.3 Payment
equipment, drilling, installation or any other contingencies.
9.3 Strata Grouting
9.3.1 General
This section specifies grouting of materials under pressure in rock strata for consolidation of
fractured rock or for filling of cavities and voids in the rock surrounding the tunnel.
1) Ground treatment includes grouting or other ground improvement proposed by the
Contractor to stabilize weak, permeable or potentially unstable ground, where to
control the flow of water or for any other purpose.
2) Ground improvement includes penetration grouting with cement, micro-fine cement or
chemicals. The Contractor may determine other means of ground improvement with the
3) The need for ground treatment shall be based on:
a. Geotechnical investigations
b. Monitoring results
c. Probes and probe holes
d. Water-flow quantities at tunnel faces
e. Existence of cavities
f. Any other indications that the ground to be excavated is soft, shattered,
fissured or heavily water bearing, making instability or excessive displacement
probable.
9.3.2 References
The concrete materials, production, methods, testing and admixtures shall conform to Indian
Standards or where not covered by these Standards, to the equivalent International
Standards.
Indian Standards
a. IS: 456 – 2000, Plain and Reinforced Concrete - Code of Practice
b. IS: 516 – 1959 (reaffirmed 1999), Method of test for strength of concrete
c. IS: 1199 - 1959 (reaffirmed 1999), Methods of sampling and analysis of
concrete
d. IS: 9103 – 1999, Concrete Admixtures – Specification
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
b. ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
c. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement
d. ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
9.3.3 Submission
1) Full product data for all chemical grout or other proposed grout materials.
2) Mix designs for proposed grout mixtures to be utilized.
235
9.3.4 Records to be retained

1) Method Statements shall be prepared and the following particular matters shall be
included.
a. Plans for grouting work shall include, but shall not be limited to :
Work plan: A detailed work plan specifying:
 Basic type, objectives and principles of ground improvement scheme.
 Analyses to support the grout application design.
 Location, size and depth of each grout hole.
 Target grout volumes at each location.
 Details of grout type and application method, and proposals to
demonstrate suitability of the grout type.
 Grout pipe installation procedures.
 Injection procedures and sequences.
 Data recording and reporting methods.
 Field quality control procedures and quality assurance.
 Schedule of the grouting work and relationship to anticipated tunnel,
excavation or filling work.
 Locations and types of instrumentation.
b. Plant and Equipment Detail: Relevant data concerning the plant and
equipment which shall include, but not be limited to the following:
 Layout plans of grout pipes showing the depths of injections, the angles,
and other data prior to tunnelling.
 Complete details and sequence of operations relating to the grout plant,
including the manufacturers’ catalogs concerning each component of
the plant.
 Detailed procedure for each type of grouting
 Estimate of the quantity of grout to be used
2) Grouting Records
a. Keep accurate and up-to-date records of all grouting work. These records shall
include grout ingredients and mix proportions, gel time (if applicable),
injection date and time, injection rates, volumes, pressures, maps showing
locations, details and other relevant data.
b. Display data in an acceptable chart-type graphical format that facilitates rapid
visual evaluation of the results of the work.
c. Record and provide particular circumstances, such as geologic and
groundwater conditions, groundwater flow, indications of success or failure of
ground improvement work; include sketches and photos as required.
3) Samples
Samples of materials proposed to be used in ground treatment work.
4) Certificates
Where grouting is used, records of each point of injection with the quantity and type of
grout used, the pressure applied, and the depth of the hole.
9.3.5 Quality Assurance
1) Planning for grouting and the actual placement of grout pipes, grout mixing and
injection shall be performed by an experienced grouting crew who has completed at
236
least five grouting projects of similar scope and purpose during four years preceding
this Contract, and who is experienced in the use of the proposed grouts and grouting
methods.
2) Personnel Qualifications: On-the-job supervision of all grouting shall be under the
direction of a grouting supervisor with at least three years of recent actual field
supervision in the method of grouting proposed.
9.3.6 Material
1) Chemical Grout
i. Chemical grout shall be non-toxic and so designed as to remain effective for
the period during which it is required to be effective. Chemical grout shall not
contaminate or alter the chemical and physical properties of the groundwater.
ii. The reagent shall be such as to allow the gelling time of the grout to be varied
to suit the grouting procedure being used. The type, temperature and means
of mixing the grout constituents shall be such that the gel time can be kept
constant.
iii. The viscosity of chemical grout shall be kept to a minimum and constant until
gelling time.
iv. Material for chemical grout shall be continuously mixed, not batch mixed.
2) Cement Grout:
i. Cement used in grouting works shall be as specified in ASTM C150 or
sulphate resistant cement if required based on the geotechnical investigation.
ii. Chemical additives shall be as specified in ASTM C494.
3) Compaction Grout:
i. The fine aggregate shall be uniform well graded natural sand satisfying the
following grading criteria:
ii. l00 % passing the No. 4 sieve;
iii. The fraction passing the No. 200 sieve shall be between 15-30 percent;
iv. The clay content shall be less than 1%.
v. The natural fines may be supplemented with aggregate washings, or fly ash.
Bento-nite shall only be added in the case of the grout mix plugging under the
specified pressures.
vi. Water: Potable, free of impurities that will affect the grout and shall be as
specified in IS 456: 2000.
vii. The mix for compaction grouting shall be a mixture of the specified fine
aggregate with sufficient water to produce a pumpable grout having a slump
range between 15 and 40 mm as specified in ASTM C143. Any mix exceeding
50 mm slump shall not be injected but shall be wasted or recycled and
remixed through the holding tank and pump until the specified slump is
reached.
4) Protection of Materials:
i. Deliver materials in undamaged, unopened containers bearing the
manufacturer's original labels and store and handle in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer.
ii. All materials shall be non-toxic and non-corrosive and shall be protected
from contamination or pollution at all times.
9.3.7 Drilling
1) Grout holes shall be drilled either with percussion type or rotary type drilling
equipment.
237
2) The diameter at the bottom of the grout holes shall not be less than 35 mm. For
percussion drill holes the diameter of the drilling bit shall be at least 8 mm larger than
the diameter of the couplings used for the drill rods.
3) Only water shall be used for flushing during drilling unless directed otherwise by the
Engineer. All holes shall be thoroughly cleaned immediately after drilling using water
and/or air under pressure. After washing, downward holes shall be kept plugged until
the commencement of grouting operation.
9.3.8 Water Pressure Tests
1) The Contractor shall propose maximum pressures to be used for grout injection at each
location. The pressures specified shall be got approved from the Engineer.
2) As directed by the Engineer, water pressure tests shall be carried out in accordance
with Clause 9.3.8(1) of this Specification.
9.3.9 Mixing of Grout
1) All grout mixes shall be prepared using high speed, high shearing action mixers to
produce a grout of uniform consistency.
2) When, prior to pumping, mixed grout is to be stored for short periods, purpose made
agitator tanks shall be used.
3) When clay or bentonite additives are used, separate mixing tanks shall be provided for
mixing and agitation.
4) Water meters shall be provided for accurate measurement of water used for mixing.
Pressure gauges, safety valves, by-pass valves etc. shall be provided where required on
mixers, agitators, pumps and injection hoses.
9.3.10 Grouting Operation
1) Provisions shall be made to permit accurate control of grouting pressures and volumes
as in Clause 9.3.9(4).
2) All hoses and piping should be of a small diameter to ensure a high velocity flow
without segregation.
3) Grouting operation shall be performed without major interruptions.
4) In case of an interruption before completion of grouting (plant breakdown), the hole
shall be washed with clean water.
5) Until experience of the ground conditions is gained, grouting shall proceed with caution.
Safety valves shall be tested before each application.
6) Grouting in the tunnel shall be performed in a manner that pressures are equally
distributed and do not overstress the initial tunnel lining and in accordance with Clause
9.3.8(1) of this Specification.
7) Strata grouting shall start with neat cement grout. Depending on the grout taken the
water/cement ratio may be reduced subsequently. In case of large grout takes,
injections shall be continued with cement mortar grout. Final injections shall be done
with neat cement grout again.
8) In case of no pressure building up when using a sand/cement mix, grouting shall be
stopped and the hole washed. After a few hours, grouting shall recommence using a
sand/cement grout until the desired pressure builds up.
9) In case of any grout communicating between holes, grouting shall be done
simultaneously or holes where grout issues shall be plugged.
10) Grouting is completed, when the required pressure can be kept constant over a period
of 10 minutes.
11) Records of all details of grouting works such as location, inclination, diameter of
boreholes, drilling time, equipment used, water pressure tests, mix, quantity, pressure
of grouting, development of and special events during grouting operation etc. shall be
kept by the Contractor , countersigned on site by the Engineer's supervising personnel
and submitted to the Engineer.
9.3.11 Plant and Equipment
238
Design all plant and equipment used in ground treatment works for the procedure with
which it is to be used. It shall be maintained in good operating condition at all times.
9.3.12 Execution
1) Where ground treatment by grouting is to be carried out ahead of excavation, drill
holes to a distance and to a pattern into the zone to be treated and grout injected under
pressure. Where necessary perform secondary grouting by drilling out a previously
drilled and grouted hole, flushing with water, and re-injecting with grout.
2) Install gauges adjacent to the point of injection and use to measure the grout injection
pressure.
9.3.13 Field Quality Control
1) Take grout samples periodically during pumping times and check for grout quality, gel
times and neat strength.
2) Where grouting is carried out to reduce soil or rock permeability, make field
permeability tests in boreholes before and after grout injection and calculate
permeability changes.
3) Measure grout intake at each hole and record together with average and maximum
pressures employed. At the end of each day, compare quantities so recorded with
quantities measured at the grout pump in order to identify any irregularities.
4) Where grouting is carried out to increase soil or rock strength, take core samples of
grouted materials to examine for grout intake and for tests for unconfined compressive
strength.
5) Perform water acceptance tests of grout holes before grouting in a manner that shall
permit the measurement of the volume of the flow of water at various pressures.
9.3.14 Measurement
The quantities of strata grouting to be paid shall be the weight of the cement used. It shall be
measured by the Engineer for payment as herein described and accepted with all its
additional requirements.
9.3.15 Payment
shall be full compensation for drilling, washing of the consolidation grouting hole and the
inspected holes, the supply, mixing, grouting of the grout, test and quality control inspection,
the supply of all labour, supervisors, materials, the Contractor ’s equipment and materials
and all work necessary for consolidation grouting.
239
10.0 DEWATERING, DRAINAGE AND PUMPING

10.1 Scope of Work
1) The specifications described herein under relate to the work of dewatering, drainage
and pumping to be carried out by the Contractor, which shall include supply of all
labor, construction plant and materials and performance of all services required to
remove service water and natural surface flow of ground water seepage from the
working areas on the surface as well as from the underground sites for the
construction of various structures covered under the contract.
2) The Contractor shall design, furnish, build, install, operate, maintain and remove all the
temporary dewatering facilities as specified herein or as required by the Engineer.
10.2 Submittals
1) Within 30 days after the date of issue of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall
submit, to the Engineer, the detailed design of dewatering system.
2) This design shall be consistent with the outline description submitted by the
Contractor with his bid and shall include the following:
(a) Design assumptions and calculations
(b) Layouts of drainage facilities
(c) Layout and capacity of pumps and pipes, sumps, drains both open and
covered, well points etc. and details of standby dewatering arrangements.
(d) Any other arrangements or installation, the Contractor may propose for
dewatering of the working areas both in open and underground
Construction sites.
3) At least 30 days prior to the scheduled construction of the particular work, the
Contractor shall submit, to the Engineer, full details of the equipment to be installed
and all necessary construction details required for dewatering purpose.
10.3 General
1) Dewatering of the surface as well as the underground construction sites shall be
undertaken by gravity, wherever possible. Where, however, dewatering by gravity is
not practical, pumping sumps and pumping systems shall be resorted to after this
mode has been approved by the Engineer.
2) Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, water inflows or potential water inflows into the
excavation are to be reduced or controlled by grouting, the Engineer may direct that
these inflows be grouted in advance, in accordance with the provisions set out under
Section 9.
3) Whenever more than one agency are working in the same or adjacent areas, the
Contractor, who has already provided the drainage facility, shall extend this facility to
the other agencies also, who shall pay for such facility at mutually agreed rates. In case
of dispute, the apportioning of such expenditure shall be decided by the Engineer,
whose decision shall be final. In no case shall any Contractor be permitted to stop the
drainage system.
4) In case there is flow of water passing through the sites of two or more agencies, the
drainage shall be attended to the extent directed by the Engineer by the agency in
whose site the origin of the water is located. Out of the sites of both the agencies, the
agency working on the upstream side of the flow shall attend to the drainage as
directed.
5) The pumped water carried in pipes or flumes shall be discharged at poin,t sufficiently
away from the edge of foundation excavation as directed by the Engineer. Care shall be
taken to ensure that there is no seepage and flow of water back to the pit working area.
240
10.4 Dewatering of Surface Construction Sites

10.4.1 General
1) The Contractor shall perform all works necessary to drain the surface construction
sites of rain, ground water and service water. The work shall include, but not be limited
to the following:
(a) Design and construction of drainage, ditches, pits and pump sumps.
(b) Design, furnishing, operation and maintenance of dewatering equipment.
(c) Relocation of dewatering facilities required for the performance of other
works.
(d) All auxiliary works required for safe and continuous dewatering of the
construction sites.
2) Dewatering of surface construction sites located near a river/stream shall be done
upto the existing water level in the river/stream by gravity as directed by the Engineer.
Suitable drainage shall be made joining the course downstream of the construction site
to provide required gradient to facilitate proper and efficient dewatering. Below the
water level of the stream, dewatering shall be done by pumping water collected in the
sumps and discharging the same into course of the river/stream d/s of the
construction site.
10.4.2 Requirements and Design
1) The Contractor shall design and install complete facilities at the surface construction
sites.
2) The surface water dewatering systems shall be designed to accommodate, without
undue disruption to the work, any rainfall event and taking into account the extent of
the sites to be dewatered and the dewatering arrangements proposed.
3) Claims for extension of time due to delays caused by unfavorable weather conditions
will not be considered. The design of the drainage system should consider all
eventualities.
4) The Contractor shall provide adequate pumping capacity, including standby units, to
handle all water entering into any of surface construction sites. In addition, he shall
provide sumps and pumps in the immediate vicinity of the of the structure foundation
using such water conductors as are necessary to conduct the water away from the
excavation and concrete placement operations in an approved manner, so that such
operation shall be kept free from standing or running water.
5) Power for operating the dewatering system shall be arranged by Contractor. The
Contractor shall also make his own arrangement for sufficient stand by power at his
cost to carry on the works during any interruption of power.
6) The Contractor shall ensure that all drainage water is disposed off without causing
interference to his own or other Contractor s operations elsewhere on the site and that
no drainage water runs into adjacent works.
7) The dewatering systems shall be designed and installed in such a way that
modifications and extensions to the systems with a view to capacity augmentation are
possible while they are in full operation.
8) All the components of the dewatering systems shall be installed and operated in
accordance with the approved method and the construction time schedule, or
approved modification thereof.
9) The approval by the Engineer of the dewatering system shall not relieve the Contractor
from being fully responsible for the design, construction, operation, maintenance,
safety and removal of the facilities provided for the dewatering system and he shall be
liable for any damage or delays caused by its failure. The Contractor shall indemnify
client against claims made by a third party arising out of any such failure.
10.4.3 Materials and Execution
1) Drainage ditches shall be excavated along the top of excavated slopes and on the berms.
241
Such ditches shall be kept well back from the excavation edges in order to prevent
saturating the upper part of the slopes. The ditches shall be regularly cleaned out of all
accumulated silt and other matter so that water may flow freely at all times.
2) Where excavation is to be made below the ground water table, the Contractor shall
lower the water table sufficiently below any working surface by means of properly
screened wells and/or ditches to ensure that the foundation surfaces remain free of
standing water and undamaged by the passage of construction traffic. All ditches shall
be outside the foundation areas. The Water shall be collected and removed by pumping,
if no outflow by gravity is possible.
3) Where concrete is to be placed, the water table shall be maintained below the lowest
part of the finished excavation for minimum one day following the raising of structure
above the natural ground water table, and for such additional time as may be necessary
to preclude damage to structure foundation.
4) In trenches and foundations, the dewatering shall at all time enable to carry out the
excavation work in dry, and in a manner that will prevent loss of fines from the
foundations.
5) Upon completion of dewatering, temporary pipes and pumps sumps beneath
permanent structures shall be closed off and completely filled with grout, mortar or
concrete as required by the Engineer.
10.5 Dewatering of Underground Construction Sites
10.5.1 General
1) The Contractor shall perform all works necessary to collect and drain service and
infiltrating ground water, convey it to main conduits, and lead it out from underground
works.
2) The Work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
 Design and construction of pits and trenches
 Design, furnishing, operation and maintenance of dewatering equipment.
 Relocation of dewatering facilities required for the performance of other
underground works.
 All auxiliary works required for the safe and continuous dewatering of the
underground sites.
3) Exploratory holes shall be drilled to provide information on the inflow of water into the
tunnels as the excavation proceeds. Where the indications are that flows are likely to be
large, grouting to seal off the water flows and drilling of drainage holes may be ordered
by the Engineer.
10.5.2 Requirements and Design
1) The Contractor shall design and provide a complete dewatering system for both the
downstream and the upstream headings.
2) After breakthrough in the tunnel, the drainage water from the downstream heading
shall be taken over by the upgrade dewatering system of the upstream heading
(dewatering by gravity).
3) All excavated areas shall be drained off all service and ground water. In order to keep
the construction areas free from water, the dewatering systems shall be able to operate
at any time during the whole construction period in any part of the works at the
required design capacity.
4) The Contractor shall provide adequate pumping capacity, including a sufficient number
of standby pumping units, to handle all water entering into any portion of
Underground works. These units shall be connected to the dewatering systems in such
a way that proper and uninterrupted drainage is guaranteed throughout the entire
construction period.
5) Power for operating the dewatering system shall be arranged by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall also make his own arrangements for sufficient standby power at his
cost to carry on the works during any interruption of power.
242
6) All components of the system shall always be maintained in ready-for-service

condition and all access to pumps and other equipment shall be kept in good condition
under the most adverse conditions.
7) The Contractor shall ensure that all drainage water is disposed off without causing
interference to his own or other Contractor’s operations elsewhere on the site, and that
no drainage water runs into adjacent works.
8) The dewatering system shall be designed and installed in such a way that modifications
and extensions with a view to capacity augmentation, to the system are possible while
they are in full operation.
9) All the components of the dewatering system shall be installed and operated in
accordance with the approved method and the construction time schedule, or
approved modification thereof.
10) The approval by the Engineer of the dewatering system shall not relieve the Contractor
from being fully responsible for the design, construction, operation, maintenance,
safety and removal of the facilities provided for the dewatering system and he shall be
liable for any damage or delays caused by its failure. The Contractor shall indemnify
the client against claims made by a third party arising out of any such failure.
10.5.3 Materials and Execution
1) The Contractor shall construct the drainage trench at the invert of the tunnel as
required at site.
2) After the excavated profile has been checked, the ground water which runs or drips
into the excavated space shall be diverted into the drainage trench by means of water
collectors and pipes for collecting the seepage water from rock surfaces. Damp
surfaces or seepage areas with low volume inflows can be sealed off with a quick
setting sealing compound.
3) Special care shall be exercised where excavation passes through material which is
liable to soften or swell when it comes in contact with water. In such locations, water
entering the excavated space shall be collected as soon as possible and conveyed
away/disposed off in such a way that the water does not come in contact with such
material. Should the Contractor neglect to observe this requirement and a
deterioration of the tunnel invert results from water being allowed to flow over or
stand upon the sensitive or swelling material, the Engineer may order the removal of
the affected material and its replacement with concrete. The Engineer may order
installation of additional rock supports in connection with such remedial work. All this
without additional remuneration.
4) If any water from another portion of the underground works flows into a lower section
where concreting is being done, which is likely to be affected by water, all such water
shall be diverted past this area in such a way that no damage occurs to the concrete.
The length of the affected sections over which water has to be diverted shall be
ordered by the Engineer.
5) The Contractor shall perform regular checking and cleaning of the drawing trench and
all dewatering equipment and accessories during the construction period.
6) The dewatering facilities shall be kept in operation according to the approved
schedule, which be related to the progress of the work. No pumps shall be stopped, no
pipes, ducts, trenches, etc. shall be taken out of service without the permission of the
Engineer.
7) Any openings such as pipes, boreholes, ducts, pumps sumps etc. used for temporary
drainage purposes in any part of the work shall be completely sealed by filling with
grout, mortar or concrete when no longer required, unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer in writing. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing before any such
openings are permanently closed.
10.6 Measurements and Payments
10.6.1 Dewatering of surface Construction sites
243
Measurement for payment and payment for dewatering the surface construction sites will be
made as per the following:
1) Measurement for payment and payment for furnishing, transportation and installation
of equipment including pumps and pumping of water from the surface construction
sites will be made as entered in the Bill of Quantities, which shall include, but not be
limited to the following:
 Design of all dewatering system
 All costs and labour for excavation, construction and protection of drainage
ditches, wells, pits and pump sumps.
 Capturing and conveying the water into the drainage system
 All costs of furnishing, transportation, installation, operation, maintenance
and removal of pumps including pneumatic pumps, electric powers,
regardless of the amount of water.
 All costs of furnishing, installation, maintenance and removal of pipelines
and all other accessories.
 Grouting of pipes and pump sumps, if required
 All auxiliary works required
2) The unit rate of dewatering (as entered in the Bill of Quantities) shall hold good for any
quantity of dewatering to be done by the Contractor without any variation/ deviation.
3) The Contractor shall install necessary meters for registering the total pumping being
done and get it approved by representative of the Engineer. In the event of a diesel
pump being utilized, the HP of the pump will be converted into KWHr as per the
standard conversion formula.
10.6.2 Dewatering of Underground Construction Sites
Measurement for payment and payment for dewatering the underground construction sites
will be made in the following:
1) Measurement for payment and payment for furnishing, transportation and
installation of equipment including pumps and pumping of water from the
underground construction sites will be made as entered in the Bill of Quantities,
which shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
 Design of all dewatering system
 Excavation of drainage trenches and sumps etc.
 All costs of furnishing, transportation, installation and removal of all pumps
including pneumatic pumps, sumps and electric power etc.
 Furnishing installation and removal of pipe lines and all other accessories
 Moving of the pumps and pipes as necessary between different locations
 Operation and maintenance of the dewatering system and disposal of all
water up to the disposal points specified by the Engineer.
2) The Unit Rate of dewatering (as entered in the Bill of Quantities) shall hold good for
any quantity of dewatering to be done by the Contractor without any variation/
deviation.
3) The Contractor shall install necessary meters for registering the total pumping being
done and get it approved by representative of Engineer. In the event of a diesel pump
being utilized, the HP of the pump will be converted into KWHr as per the standard
conversion formula.
10.6.3 Exclusions
No extra measurement for payment or payment will be made for the following:
1) Diverting or discharging water during any concreting operations. The exclusions

shall not apply in case of tunneling in the downgrade and when such concreting is
carried out prior to the breakthrough.
244
2) Any work or materials required as a result of Contractor’s non-observance of the

requirements concerning sensitive or swelling ground when the excavated surface
have been allowed to become unsuitable due to the action of ground or service
water.
3) Any dewatering done by pumping by the Contractor in contravention of the
instruction of the Engineer.
245
11.0 WATERPROOFING AND PERMANENT GROUNDWATER

DRAINAGE
11.1 Waterproofing and Protective Felt
11.1.1 General
This section covers the waterproofing for all underground structures by means of a
continuous waterproofing membrane installed to the outside of the final (inner) concrete
lining. It does not include provisions for other elements such as water stops in concrete,
sealing of joints etc.
The waterproofing shall be such that all underground structures with waterproofing are
watertight. In case of leakage, provision shall be made for these to be repaired. Tunnel
sections along which the installation of a waterproofing system will be required, will be
determined by the Engineer.
11.1.1.1 Description
1) The purpose of the membrane waterproofing to underground structures is to prevent
leakage of groundwater into the tunnel and to protect the final concrete lining against
deleterious chemical influences. Waterproofing shall be applied to crown and
sidewalls above footing or invert arch level. The waterproofing membrane shall
always be located between primary shotcrete lining and the final concrete lining. No
membrane waterproofing will be provided for tunnel inverts.
2) The waterproofing system shall consist of two layers: the first shall consist of a
protective felt fastened to the shotcrete surface; the second layer shall be the actual
waterproofing membrane properly fixed by special means as recommended by the
manufacturer.
3) While the sealing function shall be provided by the membrane, the layer of felt is
required to protect the waterproofing membrane against damage from contact with
the shotcrete surface, to prevent interlocking between concrete and shotcrete in case
of differential movements of primary shotcrete lining and final lining, and to provide a
drainage layer allowing to drain off groundwater into the longitudinal lateral drainage
pipes, thus preventing a build-up of hydrostatic pressure on the tunnel lining.
4) Where reinforcement is foreseen, an additional internal specific protective membrane
shall be placed. This has similar characteristic like the waterproofing membrane but
is not continuously seceded is providing with a special colories coating for identifying
possible prefacing or shearing of the water proofing one.
11.1.1.2 Submissions
The following submissions shall be furnished for approval in accordance with the contract
requirements:
1) Certificates of compliance attesting that the materials meet specification
requirements.
2) Manufacturer's instructions for installation of felt backing and waterproofing
membrane, including procedures for preparation, fixing, welding and splicing,
flashing etc.
3) Manufacturer's and installer's qualifications to include evidence of experience of
the manufacturer and the installers, as well as resume of lining installation
supervisors
4) Samples as listed hereafter:
Membrane : One square meter of each type membrane.
Protective felt : One square meter of each type of felt.
Protective membrane : One sqm of each type of membrane
Welded splice : 1 m of welded membrane splice for each type of
membrane.
246
Fixings and fittings : 10 samples from different lots of rondels and

nails, 2 samples of sealing flanges for projections
passing through the membrane.
5) Shop drawings shall be submitted for approval showing all necessary installation
details for felt and waterproofing membrane, including installation sequence,
position of joints, treatment of projections, connection to waterproofing of
structures in open cut, local reinforcements etc.
11.1.1.3 Quality Assurance
1) General
Supply and install suitable products designed and manufactured specifically for
application in tunnels under conditions similar to those encountered on this project and
having had acceptable performance.
2) Manufacturer’s Qualifications
Select a manufacturer (or manufacturers) who are (are) regularly engaged in the
production of similar materials for tunnel structure and has demonstrated successful
application on at least five recent projects of comparable nature.
3) Supervision and Training

Manufacturer's representative shall be present at least during the first 10 working days of
installation and later as often as necessary.
Execute all installation and testing under the direct supervision of an individual with
recent, continuous, acceptable experience in the installation of tunnel membrane linings.
Provide all personnel involved in lining installation and testing with adequate training
prior to beginning lining work.
4) Installation records are to be submitted to the Engineer for approval with all relevant data
for all seam checks etc. these records shall form part of the submission to obtain approval
to proceed with the installation of the inner concrete lining.
11.1.2 Materials
11.1.2.1 Protective Felt
The protective felt shall be a continuous filament non-woven poly-propylene geo-textile of
uniform thickness and surface texture meeting the requirements listed below.
Table 11.1 – Protective Felt Required Characteristics
Property Specified Value Standard
Unit weight 700g/m2 min DIN 53854
Thickness at 0.02 bar 4.0 mm min DIN 53855/3
Thickness at 2.0 bar 1,9 mm min DIN 53855/3
Tensile strength 1000 N/5cm min DIN 53857/2
Extension at break 70 % min DIN 53857/2
Extension at 30% of tensile strength
20 % min DIN 53857/2
Permeability in plane
at 0.02 bar 5x10-1 cm/s min *
at 2.00 bar 5x10-2 cm/s min *
Resistance against acid and alkaline Loss of strength SN 640 550
solutions, pH 2-13 10% max. DIN 53857/2
Resistance to Punching 2000 N DIN 54307
11.1.2.2 Waterproofing Membrane

247

1) The waterproofing membrane shall be made of one of the
following materials or similar and shall meet the requirements
listed below.
2) The membrane shall be supplied with a single layer, i.e. a thin
sheeting of different colour, bonded to one side, which is intended
to facilitate the de-tection of damages..
ECB Waterproofing Membrane (ethylene-copolymer bitumen)
* Cubic specimen with edge length of 10 mm.
Table 11.2- Waterproofing Membrane characteristics

Thickness 2.0 mm min DIN 53370
Tensile strength 10 N/mm2 min DIN 53455
Elongation at failure 500% min DIN 53455
Compressive strength at 20% strain 2
2.5 N/mm min* DIN 53454
Tear propagation strength 150 N/mm min DIN 53363
Resistance under water pressure waterproof at 10
bar for 10 hours DIN 16726
Strength of welded seam 2
7.2 N/mm min DIN 16726
Dimensional stability after accelerating ageing +/- 2% max DIN 16726
Material characteristics during and after storage at
80o C: no blisters DIN 16726
- General appearance <-3%
- Dimensional stability, long. and transverse <+10%
- Variation of tensile strength, long. and
transverse <+10%
- Variation of elongation at failure, long. and no fissures
transverse
- Folding at a temperature of -20 degrees C
Water absorption 1% max DIN 53495
Behaviour after storage in acid and/or alkaline
solutions: DIN 16726
- Variation of tensile strength, long. and <+20%
transverse
- Variation of elongation at failure, long. and
transverse <+20%
- Folding at a temperature of -20 degrees C no fissures
Shear strength of splice with bitumen 100N/50 mm DIN 16726
Behaviour during perforation test no perforation at DIN 50014
750 mm height of
fall
Compressive strength at 20% strain 2.5 N/mm2 min* DIN 53454
Resistance under water pressure waterproof at 10
bar for 10 hours DIN 16726
Strength of welded seam 2
7.2 N/mm min DIN 16726
Dimensional stability after accelerating ageing +/- 2% max DIN 16726
248
Material characteristics during and after storage at

80o C: no blisters DIN 16726
- Dimensional stability, long. and transverse <+10%
- Variation of tensile strength, long. and
transverse <+10%
- Variation of elongation at failure, long. and no fissures
transverse
- Folding at a temperature of -20 degrees C
Behaviour after storage in acid and/or alkaline
solutions: DIN 16726
transverse
- Variation of elongation at failure, long. and
transverse <+20%
- Folding at a temperature of -20 degrees C no fissures
Behaviour during perforation test no perforation at DIN 50014
750 mm height of
fall
PVC Waterproofing Membrane (poly-vinyl-chloride)

* Cubic specimen with edge length of 10 mm.

Compressive strength at 20% strain 2.5 N/mm2 min* DIN 53454
Resistance under water pressure waterproof at 10 bar DIN 16726
for 10 hours
Strength of welded seam 13.5 N/mm2 min DIN 16726
Dimensional stability after accelerating +/- 2% max DIN 16726
ageing
Material characteristics during and after
storage at 80o C: no blisters DIN 16726
- Dimensional stability, long. and <+10%
transverse
transverse no fissures
- Variation of elongation at failure, long.
and transverse
- Folding at a temperature of -20
degrees C
249

Behaviour after storage in acid and/or
alkaline solutions: DIN 16726
transverse
- Variation of elongation at failure, long. <+20%
and transverse
- Folding at a temperature of -20 no fissures
degrees C
Behaviour during perforation test no perforation at 750 DIN 50014
mm height of fall
11.1.2.3 Accessories
Fixing material, flashing, reinforcement for expansion joints, sealing flanges and preparation
of corners and intersections shall be made as recommended by the manufacturer of the
membrane.
11.1.3 Execution
11.1.3.1 Surface Preparation
1) All surfaces to which waterproofing is to be applied shall be sufficiently clean,
smooth and free from deleterious materials and projections.
2) The following treatment of surfaces shall be performed prior to the installation of
waterproofing:
a) For the fixing of the protective felt and the waterproofing membrane, a minimum
shotcrete (without fibres) cover of 30 mm to rock is required.
b) Irregularities of the shotcrete lining surface shall be eliminated by means of
additional shotcrete. The ratio of the diameter to depth of irregularities shall be not
less than 5:1 (see Figure 11.1). Rounding at rock bolts (where applicable), etc. shall
have a min. radius of 0.3 m.
c) Transitions and intersections of tunnel profiles shall be rounded off with a
minimum radius of 500 mm.
d) Protruding steel bars, wires, spacers, pipes etc. shall be cut off unless treated with
additional shotcrete cover.
e) Exposed steel parts such as rock bolts, if not intended to remain accessible, shall be
covered with shotcrete.
f) All shotcrete surface shall finally be smoothened with fine-graded shotcrete
(rounded aggregates, grain size 0 - 8 mm), applied in a layer of 30 mm minimum
thickness.
250
Figure 11.1 - Requirements on surface irregularities of shotcrete.
11.1.3.2 Application
11.1.3.2.1 General
Prior to the application of the waterproofing, all surfaces to which it shall be applied, shall
be inspected and approved by the Engineer.
The application shall follow the written instructions of the manufacturer. Generally
procedures are the following:
11.1.3.2.2 Preparations
Special preparations will be required for waterproofing at tunnel intersections and for
projections passing through the membrane. They shall be carried out according to the
manufacturer's recommendation.
11.1.3.2.3 Fixing of Felt
The protective felt (geotextile) of minimum 4mm thickness for protection of water
proofing membrane and drainage on the finished outer lining surface shall be attached to
the shotcrete surface using suitable fixings specified by the manufacturer. Depending on
the location 2 to 4 nos. fixing elements shall be used per square meter. The felt shall be
laid with sufficient slack to avoid overstress during concreting. Adjacent sections of felt
shall be overlapped by 100 mm and joined by point welding or similar suitable method.
Along the bottom of the tunnel side walls the felt shall extend sufficiently to cover the
lateral drainages as shown on the drawings.
11.1.3.2.4 Fixing of Waterproofing Membrane
251
The waterproofing membrane shall be installed to cover the felt and shall be attached to
the felt fixings by means of thermal welding. No perforation of the membrane shall be
allowed for installation purposes. The waterproofing membrane shall be laid with the
signal layer towards the inside and with sufficient slack to prevent overstressing during
concreting. Excessive black causing the pending during concrete paving are to be avoided.
Adjacent sheets of waterproofing shall be joined by a double weld. Along the bottom of
the tunnel side walls the membrane shall extend sufficiently to cover the lateral drainages
as shown on the drawings. Connections to the waterproofing of structures in open cuts
shall be carried out according to drawings to be furnished by the supplier.
11.1.3.2.5 Fixing of Protective Membrane
With ho joining procedure, the protective membrane is fixed to the water proofing one by
means of thermal welding or by gluing of Velcro and felt disks systems on the two
membranes and connecting the m.
11.1.3.3 Testing of Seams
11.1.3.3.1 General
All seams shall be tested and records of these tests shall be submitted by the Contractor
to the Engineer.
11.1.3.3.2 Seam Test with Compressed Air
For seams between adjacent sheets of waterproofing membrane the testing for tightness
shall be carried out by means of compressed air pumped into the test channel which is
formed by the double welded joint. Initial test pressure shall be 2 bars for a test period of
5 minutes or 1.5 bar for a test period of 10 minutes. The joint shall be considered
waterproof if the loss of air pressure is in both cases not more than 20%.All the welding
have to be tested (100%).
11.1.3.3.3 Seam Test with Vacuum Equipment
For the testing of areas of membrane of limited size such as special configurations of
joints or local repairs with patches, vacuum equipment shall be employed, as instructed
by the Engineer. This equipment consists of a vacuum bell which, after being fitted tightly
over the area to be tested, is evacuated by pumping in order to detect leaks in the
membrane.
11.1.3.3.4 Protective Measures
Every care shall be taken not to damage the waterproofing membrane during or after
installation. Any damages occurred shall be reported to the Engineer, repaired and tested
before the casting of the final concrete lining.
The quantities of the protective felt and waterproofing membrane to be paid for shall be
measured by the unit of square meters installed. The finished area shall be measured
after the fixing and finishing of the work and shall not include overlaps, folding, welding
seams and any wastage etc. The accepted quantity measured shall be paid for at the unit
rates shown in the Bill of Quantities. The payment shall include all materials and work
required to carry out the work in accordance to specifications and shown on the drawings
or as instructed by the Engineer.
11.2 Permanent Groundwater Drainage
11.2.1 General
1) This Chapter applies to the installation of the permanent groundwater drainage
system in the tunnel.
2) This Chapter covers the requirements for the permanent groundwater drainage
system inside the tunnel.
3) The drained groundwater will flow from the highpoint of the tunnel to the lowest
252
point due to gravity

4) The permanent groundwater drainage of the tunnel shall consist of a main
collector pipe along the entire length tunnel and lateral drainage pipes
(perforated) with transversal connection pipes to the main collector pipe every
50 m along tunnel sections where major water inflow occurs. Along tunnel
sections without major water inflow, the lateral drainage pipes (including the
corresponding connection pipes) will not be installed. The decision of the
groundwater drainage system to be installed along a certain tunnel section will be
made by the ENGINEER.
5) Drainage gutters shall be located along the entire length of the tunnel at the
bottom of either tunnel side wall for collecting groundwater possibly entering
through the tunnel lining. The water shall be diverted into the main collector pipe
by means of transversal connection pipes every 50 m
6) Along tunnel sections with lateral drainage pipes and without invert arch, a
perforated pipe will be installed at the bottom of the tunnel as invert drainage.
7) At the intersections of the main collector pipe with the transversal connection
pipes (i.e. every 50 m), maintenance manholes shall be installed. Manholes shall
also be installed for the maintenance of the invert drainage (every 50 m).
8) For the maintenance of the lateral drainage pipes, cleaning access pipes shall be
installed every 50 m.
11.2.2 Materials
1) The lateral drainage pipes shall consist of circumferentially slotted, hard-PVC
pipes with a minimum diameter of 160 mm as shown on the drawings. The upper
section of the pipe shall be longitudinally corrugated. The slots shall be within the
corrugated area. The width of slots shall not exceed 1.0 mm. The total area of the
slots for water in¬take shall be more than 100 cm2 per metre length of pipe.
2) The main collector pipe shall be a hard-PVC pipe with a diameter of 400 mm.
3) The transversal connection pipes shall be hard-PVC pipes with a minimum
diameter of 160 mm.
4) The cleaning access pipes shall be hard-PVC pipes with a minimum diameter of
160 mm.
5) The invert drainage pipe shall consist of circumferentially slotted, hard-PVC pipes
with a minimum diameter of 400 mm as shown on the drawings. The upper
section of the pipe shall be longitudinally corrugated. The slots shall be within the
corrugated area. The width of slots shall not exceed 1.0 mm. The total area of the
slots for water intake shall be more than 100 cm2 per metre length of pipe.
6) No-fines porous concrete shall be used for embedment of the lateral drainage
pipes and of the invert drainage pipe. No-fines porous concrete shall also be
installed at the bottom of Regular Tunnel Cross Section Type C300 SD as shown
on the respective drawing. No-fines porous concrete shall be composed of
Ordinary Portland Cement and single-sized aggregate of nominal size of 40 mm
according to IS 383 (with a maximum grain size of 40 mm). The ratio of aggregate
to cement shall be 8:1 by volume or 10:1 by mass.
7) Maintenance manholes as well as the drainage gutters shall be made of concrete
grade M30 according to IS 456: 2000.
11.2.3 Execution
1) The water appearing and/or collected during construction behind the
waterproofing membrane shall be diverted permanently into the lateral drainage
pipes installed at the bottom of each sidewall of the tunnel.
253
2) The lateral drainage pipes shall be covered and protected by no-fines porous
concrete.
3) Main tunnel niches shall be installed in the inner concrete lining for permanent
maintenance (flushing) of the lateral drainage pipes.
4) The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the permanent ground water drainage
system is used only for the control of groundwater. Throughout the construction
regular inspection and servicing shall be provided
5) All pipes for control of the ground water shall be installed to line and grade as
shown on the drawings.
6) No-fines porous concrete shall be mixed by machine or by hand to a uniform
colour and consistency before placing. The quantity of water used shall not exceed
that required to coat all of the aggregate particles without forming excess grout.
The no-fines porous concrete shall be compacted by hand only.
The quantities to be paid for shall be measured by the unit of running length of installed
drainage pipes. The finished length shall be measured after the fixing and finishing of the
work and shall not include connections and any wastage etc. The accepted quantity
measured shall be paid for at the unit rates shown in the bill of quantities. The payment
shall include all materials and work required to carry out the work in accordance to
specifications and shown on the drawings or as instructed by the ENGINEER.
254
12.0 CONCRETE WORKS

12.1 Scope of Work
1) The Specifications described herein under cover all labour, materials, equipment
and services related to the concrete work to be carried out by the Contractor
under the Contract.
2) The concrete work shall be performed to the dimensions as shown on the
drawings or as otherwise directed by the Engineer.
3) The Contractor shall cooperate with all other Contractors and organizations
related to the construction of Permanent Works where the materials or
equipment is to be fixed to, or embedded in, the concrete structures.
4) The approval given by the Engineer to the Contractor’s plants and equipment or
their operation, or of any construction methods shall not relieve the Contractor of
his full responsibility for the proper and safe execution of concrete work and / or
any obligations under the Contract.
12.2 Submittals
1) Submittals listed herein are related to the items which require the consent of the
Engineer and are to be made by the Contractor before the appropriate work may
proceed.
2) Within 30 days from the date of issue of the Letter of Acceptance, but before
procuring or mobilizing the equipment to the Site, the Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer, updated and detailed plans and descriptions, consistent with those
submitted with his bid and any subsequent amendments and additions agreed to
by the Engineer and the Contractor, of the following:
a) Aggregate Processing Plant
Description, flow diagrams and drawings in sufficient details to indicate
layout, type and capacity of crushing, screening, washing, conveying and
other aggregate processing and handling equipment.
b) Batching and Mixing Plants
Description, flow diagrams and drawings of the plants, and details of the
equipment, the Contractor intends to use to determine and control the
amount of each separate concrete ingredient and mixing thereof into
uniform mixture.
c) Heating Facilities
Details of methods and equipment which the Contractor proposes to use
for cold weather concreting to comply with concrete temperature
requirements and protection from damage by freezing.
d) Transport and Placing of Concrete
Full details of the equipment and method for transporting the concrete
from the concrete plant to the final point of placing, including, numbers,
type and capacity of transport vehicles, concrete pumps, and details of
standby plant to be installed.
3) At least 30 days in advance of any concrete work being carried out on the Site, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, following information:
a) Details of any admixture and pozzolana which the Contractor proposes to
use, name of manufactures thereof, and information about the chemical
names of the principal ingredients and the likely effect of under or over
dosage. Should the Contractor intend to use an accelerator in any concrete
work for his own convenience, he shall give full details of the type, dosage,
influence on construction, and the cost saving involved.
255
b) Details of surface finishes, treatment of construction joints, and

construction techniques which the Contractor proposes to use in order to
achieve the required concrete surfaces and allowable tolerances.
4) At least 30 days prior to procuring or dispatch to the site of the particular item of
Work to which the submittal relates the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer,
the following:
a) Details covering the properties and performance, including the certified
copies of reports of all tests made by the manufacturers of, expansion
joints fillers, and joint sealing compounds along-with samples of the
products.
b) Details of curing compounds.
c) Details of epoxy mortar for concrete repair.
5) Drawings showing the location of construction joints proposed by the Contractor
which differ from those on the drawings, including formwork and reinforcement
details, shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 30 days prior to the
commencement of work on that particular structure.
6) During the performance of the concrete work, the Contractor shall keep a diary
where he shall record the construction procedures related to concreting. This
diary shall be made available to the Engineer upon request. The records shall
contain at least the following:
a) Commencement and termination of concreting of various parts of the
structures.
b) Quantities and quality of aggregates and cement provided and the storage
from which they were drawn.
c) Temperature of air, water, cement, aggregates and concrete.
d) Meteorological conditions and humidity of air.
e) Personnel employed during various stages of the concreting operation
and name of the responsible inspector or foreman.
f) Equipment used.
g) Directives received from the Engineer.
h) Any special material or procedures employed.
12.3 Standards
1) The concrete materials, production, methods, testing and admixtures shall
conform to the following Indian Standards or where not covered by these
Standards, to the equivalent International Standards:
 IS: 456 – 2000
 IS: 5878 (Part-V) – 1976 (Reaffirmed 1990)
 IS: 516 - 1959 (Reaffirmed 1991)
 IS: 1199 - 1959 (Reaffirmed 1991)
 IS: 457 – 1957 (Reaffirmed 1991)
 IS: 9103 – 1979 (Reaffirmed 1990)
 IS: 7861 (Part-I) - 1975 (Reaffirmed 1990)
 IS: 7861 (Part-II) - 1981 (Reaffirmed 1992)
 IS: 2505 - 1980 (Reaffirmed 1993)
2) In cases of conflict between the above Standards and the Specifications given
herein, the Specifications shall take precedence.
256
12.4 Quality Control and Testing

The quality control and testing of concrete and admixture will be carried out by an
independent authority as determined by the Engineer and the Contractor shall provide all
necessary assistance for sampling of concrete.
12.4.1 Test prior to start of concrete works (Trial Mix Stage)
12.4.1.1 General
1) Immediately after the Aggregate Processing Plant and Batching and Mixing Plant
are established by the Contractor but at least 30 days prior to the Contractor’s
programme to commence any concreting of Permanent Works, the Contractor will
test the materials, propose the composition of concrete mixes and prepare trial
mix of each of the proposed concrete class. The Contractor will prepare the trial
mixes using the cement, water aggregates and admixtures intended for the Work.
Such materials shall be arranged by the Contractor which shall conform to the
requirements specified in section on “Materials for Construction”.
2) This preliminary test programme will include the determination of the following
parameters:
a) Cement properties
b) Characteristics of aggregates
c) Mix water properties
d) Admixture properties
e) Proportion of aggregate ranges in the mix
f) Proportion of uncrushed to crushed aggregates
g) Cement dosage
h) Water Cement ratio (W/C)
i) Workability of concrete mixes
j) Compressive and tensile strength
k) Entrained air
l) Density
m) Water tightness
3) These tests will be carried out until the concrete mixes show appropriate
strength, workability, density, and water tightness without the use of excessive
cement.
4) The mixes for different grades of concrete will be approved by the Engineer.
5) During the progress of the work, the mixes may be changed whenever, in the
opinion of the Engineer, such change is necessary or desirable to obtain the
required strength, workability, water tightness, density, economy, or to limit
shrinkage.
12.4.1.2 Cement, Aggregates and Water
Cement, aggregates and water will be sampled and tested as set out in section on
“Materials for Construction”.
12.4.1.3 Admixtures
1) Admixtures to be used will be tested for their suitability with the cement and
materials to be used on the works and under proposed construction conditions.
2) Admixtures will be sampled and tested as set out in IS: 9103 – 1979 (Reaffirmed
1990).
12.4.1.4 Concrete
1) Concrete test cubes shall be prepared, and cured in accordance with IS: 456-2000.
257
Six test cubes shall be made from the each mix proposed for the different classes
of concrete. Compressive strength of concrete will be tested at 7, 21 and 28 days
as per provision in IS: 456-2000.
2) The consistency of the proposed mixes will be tested by means of slump test.
Specimen for slump tests will be taken from each batch of concrete used to match
the test cubes.
12.4.2 Tests During Execution of Works
1) Samples from the concrete being used for the permanent works, taken either at
the batching and mixing plant or the placing point, shall be cured and tested as set
out in Clause 12.4.1.4 above.
2) In addition to the twenty eight days strength tests, the Engineer, may undertake,
ninety days strength test and also at other ages.
3) Concrete for test specimens for compressive strengths will be collected at random
as it comes out of the mixer or at placing point once every shift or more often as
the Engineer may require, and in quantity sufficient to prepare necessary number
of test pieces from each sample. The concrete so collected shall be a
representative sample.
4) The Contractor shall at all times have access to and association with sampling,
design and test of trial mixes tests of strength and similar other operations to
obtain on the works, concrete of quality density and strength corresponding to
the laboratory tests.
5) Failure on the part of the Contractor to associate with operations aforesaid, shall
not absolve him of the responsibility of producing on the Work, concrete of
specified quality and strength.
12.5 Handling of Aggregates
1) The coarse aggregates shall be stacked in three stock piles, designated 80 mm,
40mm to 20mm and 20mm to 4.75mm nominal size aggregates. A separate stock
pile shall however be made for 150 mm nominal size aggregate.
2) If tests reveal that separation of the 10 mm and lower sizes is required, a separate
pile, shall be made for this aggregate.
3) The fine aggregate, having the required grading, shall ordinarily be stacked in two
piles, one of which is washed and rained and other freshly washed, to minimize
the variation in the moisture content.
4) Where crushed fine aggregate replaces a part of natural fine aggregate, the two
shall be stacked in independent stockpiles.
5) It may be necessary to have two or three piles, by sizes, in case of natural fine
aggregate to get the required grading.
12.6 Batching and Mixing
12.6.1 Batching and Mixing Equipment
1) All aggregates shall be batched by weight.
2) The batching and Mixing Plant shall be of the requisite capacity to maintain the
required progress on different items of work.
3) The Plant shall be capable of determining accurately, by direct weighing, the
prescribed amount of the various ingredient including water, cement, admixtures
and pozzolana etc. and each individual size of aggregate entering the concrete and
combining them to give a uniform mix within the prescribed time and discharging
the mix without segregation.
12.6.2 Mixing
1) All concrete shall be thoroughly mixed in the Batching and Mixing Plants/tilt
batch mixer of an approved type, size and design as to positively ensure uniform
distribution of the components throughout the mass during the mixing
operations.
258
2) Mixing shall be continued until there is a uniform distribution of the materials and
the mass is uniform in color and consistency. If there is segregation after
unloading from the mixer, the concrete shall be re-mixed. Unless other-wise
authorized by the Engineer for mixers of one cubic meter capacity or less, the
mixing of each batch shall continue for 1.5 to 2 min after all materials, except the
full amount of water, are in the mixer. For mixer of larger capacity, the minimum
mixing time shall be increased by fifteen seconds for each additional 0.5 m3.
3) The mixing time shall be increased when, in the opinion of the Engineer, the
charging and mixing operation fail to result in the uniformity of composition and
consistency within the batch and from batch to batch.
4) Separation of coarse aggregate from mortar shall be avoided by proper
arrangement of the discharge so that the concrete falls vertically and not
diagonally into whatever container is to receive it.
5) Should the last fraction of the batch contain an excessive amount of coarse
aggregate, this portion shall be retained and mixed with the succeeding batch.
6) Discharge pipes of all water batches shall be of such a size and so arranged that
the flow into the mixer is completed within the first 25% of the mixing time and
delivered well inside the mixer where it is mixed quickly with the entire batch.
7) Over mixing requiring additions of water to preserve the required consistency
shall not be permitted.
8) On no account shall any addition be made to any component of a concrete batch
once that batch has been mixed and discharged from the mixer, whether for the
purpose of re-tempering or any other reason, without the prior approval of the
Engineer.
12.7 Temperature of Concrete
Placing temperature of concrete for underground and open works shall be maintained
between 10-25 degree centigrade and 10-20 degree centigrade respectively. In cold
weather, the placing temperature of concrete for open works shall not be less than 10
degrees centigrade.
The measures to maintain these temperatures shall, but not be limited to, the following:
1) During hot weather conditions (as per IS:7861-Part-I-1975 (Reaffirmed 1990)
a. Pre-cooling coarse aggregate with refrigerated water or with cold air
blasts.
b. Using cold mixing water by adding ice. Ice, if used, shall preferably be
matched by weight, separately from the water. In short time mixing when
aggregates are pre-cooled substantially, the ice may not completely melt
in the mixer. In such a case, additional mixing time may be required or the
amount of ice limited to about 30% of the mixing water.
c. Using cement having low heat of hydration
d. Insulating water supply lines and tanks or at least painting exposed
portions white.
e. Insulating mixer drums or cooling them with sprays
f. Shading the batching, mixing and conveying equipment.
g. Working only at night.
h. Keeping mixing time and the time required to convey to the point of
placement to a minimum.
i. Spraying forms and reinforcement with water when they are exposed to
direct sun light.
j. Placing concrete in accordance with the procedure set out in IS:7861 (Part
I) – 1975 (Reaffirmed 1990)
259
k. Protecting all freshly placed concrete from exposure to direct sun light.
l. Employing continuous moist curing
2) During cold weather conditions (as per IS:7861-Part-II-1981 (Reaffirmed 1987)
a. Pre-heating coarse aggregates as per provisions of IS:7861-Part II-1981
(Reaffirmed 1987)
a. Using hot water for mixing of concrete
b. Using calcium chloride in concrete about one percent by weight of cement.
Calcium chloride shall, however, not be used in concrete which shall be
subjected to sulphate attack or where galvanized metal parts are
embedded
c. Placing concrete in accordance with the procedure set out in IS:7861
(Part-II) 1981 (Reaffirmed 1992)
12.8 Conveying
1) Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to forms as rapidly as practicable by
methods which shall prevent segregation and/or loss of ingredients. Incase such
separation occurs; concrete shall be remixed before being laid in place.
2) The distance between the mixer and the place of concreting as also the mode of
transport of concrete shall be subject to the prior approval of the Engineer.
3) Concrete shall be deposited in the final position as early as practicable but always
within a period of 60 minutes or initial setting time after mixing. This limit may be
modified by the Engineer to suit working or weather conditions.
4) Plants, such as buckets, cars, conveyors and pumping equipment which may be
used for conveying concrete shall be of such size design and condition as to
ensure an even and adequate supply of concrete at the placement area.
5) Particular attention shall be paid to prevent segregation at the ends of chutes, at
hopper gates and at all other points of discharge.
6) Methods of conveying concrete to any part of the structure wherein the concrete
is loaded into chutes, belt conveyor or other similar equipment and carried in a
thin continuously exposed flow to the forms shall not be permitted except for very
limited or isolated sections of the work, and only when approved in writing by the
Engineer.
7) Where chutes are used, they shall be so constructed and arranged as to permit
continuous flow of the concrete without separation of the ingredients. Chutes
shall not have a slope steeper than 1 V: 2 H.
8) There shall be no vertical drop greater than 1.5m except where equipment
satisfactory to the Engineer is used to confine and control the falling concrete.
9) Concrete may be dropped through flexible elephant trunk chutes, provided some
method is used at the lower end to retard the speed of the falling concrete and
prevent it from segregating.
10) Buckets for transporting concrete shall be manufactured as low-slump concrete
buckets.
11) The conveying plant shall be kept free from hardened concrete and foreign
materials and shall be cleaned at frequent intervals
12) During hot or cold weather, concrete shall be transported in deep containers, on
account of their lower ratio of areas to mass, reduce the rate of loss of water by
evaporation during hot weather and loss of heat in cold weather.
13) All conveying plant shall be supported independently of the forms, except as
specifically permitted by the Engineer.
12.9 Placing of Concrete

12.9.1 General
1) No mortar or concrete shall be placed except in the presence of the Engineer or
260
his authorized representative.

2) The Contractor shall provide Engineer with a weekly placing schedule giving the
detailed location of the pours, the approximate extent of pours and the date on
which the concrete shall be placed.
3) Concrete shall be placed only in locations where authorized and no concrete or
mortar shall be placed until formwork, installation of reinforcing steel, steel ribs,
piping and other embedded parts, preparation of surface and necessary clean up
have been done and checked and certified by the Engineer as being in conformity
with Specifications and drawings.
4) Concrete placed without prior knowledge and approval of the Engineer may be
required to be removed and replaced.
5) Earth foundations on which concrete are to be laid shall be firm drained soil, free
from any soft mud or other objectionable material.
6) Whenever concrete is to be placed on earth, a layer of lean concrete shall first be
placed before placing concrete of the specified grade. The thickness of such layer
of lean concrete shall be as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
7) No concrete shall be placed in running water. Water shall, generally, not be
allowed to flow over freshly poured concrete until final set has been achieved.
8) Immediately, before placing concrete, all such surfaces upon which concrete is to
be placed shall be thoroughly cleaned by the use of high velocity air and water jets
or sand blasting, steel brooms, picks or other effective means, satisfactory to the
Engineer.
9) All pools of water from the surface on which concrete is to be placed shall be
cleaned to ensure proper bonding of fresh concrete with the rock surface. The
method of disposal of water in working site, shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
10) Sufficient mixing and placing capacity shall be provided so that the work may be
kept alive and free from cold joints. Formed concrete shall be placed in horizontal
layers, avoiding inclined layers and construction joints.
11) To get a monolithic placement, it is important that each layer be shallow enough
so that the previous layer is still soft and the two layers are vibrated together.
12) Concrete shall not be allowed or caused to flow horizontally or on slope in the
forms.
13) Concrete placing on slope shall begin at the lower end of the slope and progress
upward, there by increasing compaction of concrete.
14) In pneumatic placement of concrete, usual high velocity discharge shall be
reduced to a point where no separation and scattering of the concrete occurs.
15) In order to reduce bleeding, slump shall not be more than necessary to achieve
proper placement and consolidation.
16) All care shall be taken to avoid separation of coarse aggregate from the concrete.
Obvious groups and clusters of separated coarse aggregates shall not be
permitted. They shall be removed before the concrete is placed over them,
otherwise they may cause serious imperfections in the finished work. Hence
particular attention shall be paid to the tendency for objectionable separation to
occur at the points of discharge so that uniformity and homogeneity of concrete in
placement and good workmanship is assured.
17) The concrete shall drop vertically into the center of whatever container receives
it. To protect the rods, spacers, and embedded features from damage and to
prevent displacement of reinforcement, concrete falling in forms shall be confined
in a suitable drop chute.
12.9.2 Preparation for Placing of Concrete

1) All surfaces on which or against which concrete is to be placed, including surface
261
of construction joints between successive concrete placement, reinforcing steel

and embedded parts, shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirts, mud, debris, grease, oil
dried mortar or grout, laitance, loose particles or other deleterious matter.
2) Surface seepage and other water shall be so controlled, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, that at no time during the placement or hardening of the concrete will it
wash, mix with, or seep into the concrete.
12.9.3 Concrete Placement
1) The method and equipment used for placing concrete shall be such as shall permit
the delivery of concrete of the required consistency into the Work without
objectionable delay, segregation, porosity or loss of workability.
2) All surfaces of forms and metal work including reinforcement bars that have
become encrusted with dried mortar or grout from concrete previously placed,
shall be cleaned of all such matter or grout before the surrounding or adjacent
concrete is placed.
3) Concrete shall be placed in lifts as shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
4) In reinforced concrete works, which have congested parts, care shall be taken to
see that all the bars are properly embedded and that no voids are left. On flat,
horizontal surfaces, where the congestion of steel near the forms makes placing
difficult, a mortar of the same cement sand ratio as is used in the concrete shall be
first deposited to cover the forms.
5) After the surface have been prepared, all approximately horizontal surfaces or
rock and construction joints shall be coated with cement slurry of water cement
ratio approximately of 0.60 by weight or as directed by the Engineer. It shall be
covered with layers of mortar approximately 50 mm to 75 mm thick for rock
surface and approximately 15 mm thick for construction joints. The mortar shall
have the same proportion as that of concrete mix unless otherwise prescribed by
the Engineer. The consistency shall be suitable for placing and working in the
manner hereafter specified. The mortar shall be spread uniformly and thoroughly
with stiff brooms into all irregularities of the surfaces. Concrete shall then be
immediately laid upon the fresh mortar.
6) No concrete shall be placed in running water or during rain, high winds, dust
storms, excessive heat or cold and similar conditions without prior approval of
the Engineer.
7) In all cases, concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable directly in its final
position and shall not be caused to flow by vibrators or otherwise in a manner
which shall permit or cause segregation.
8) The maximum time interval between placing successive layers within a lift shall
not exceed 30 minutes. However, depending upon job requirements and climatic
conditions, the Engineer can allow to increase this time interval using appropriate
methods of vibration/agitation.
9) Concrete shall not be piled up in the forms in a manner that causes movement of
the unconsolidated concrete, or permit mortar to escape from the coarse
aggregate.
12.9.4 Rate of Placing of Concrete
1) Concreting shall be done as a continuous operation until the structure or section
is completed or until a satisfactory construction joint can be made. The Contractor
shall make all arrangement necessary to maintain continuity of concrete placing
in any particular poor during meal periods, shift changes, or any other such
interruptions.
2) Concrete shall not be placed faster than the placing crew can compact it properly.
3) In placing thin members and columns, precaution shall be taken against too rapid
placement which may result in movement or failure of the form due to excessive
262
lateral pressure. An interval of at least 24 hours, unless otherwise approved or

directed by the Engineer, shall elapse between the completion of columns and
walls and the placing of slabs, beams or girders supported by them.
4) The rate of placing shall be such as to have no objectionable effect on placement of
concrete, particularly near forms and in and around embedded equipment where
the rate shall not exceed the limit placed by the Engineer.
12.9.5 Consolidation of Concrete
1) Consolidation of newly placed concrete shall ordinarily be done with internal
vibrators of approved design. The equipment for vibration shall have adequate
power and shall be of high frequency, rugged and reliable.
2) Operators of vibrators shall be experienced, competent in handling these devices.
3) Ample stand-by-units and parts as well as systematic servicing shall be provided.
4) Vibrators shall not be used to cause concrete to move more than a short distance
laterally; otherwise line wet material may run ahead and separate from the coarse
aggregate.
5) Inadvertent or unintended re-vibration of concrete is beneficial provided the
concrete becomes momentarily plastic again during re-vibration. Re-vibration
shall be resorted to only after specific instructions are given by the Engineer.
6) Where vibration is used to full advantage for consolidation of newly placed
concrete, no supplementary rodding or other working of the concrete is
necessary.
7) Concrete shall be compacted and worked into all corners and angles of forms,
obstructions, block-outs, locations with congested reinforcement and around
embedded items. Special care shall be taken to attend to these places with ample,
properly applied additional vibration or rodding as the case may be, without
permitting the concrete materials to segregate.
8) Internal vibrators of approved weight and frequency 7000 to 9000 rpm to secure
maximum consolidation shall be used.
9) External i.e. form vibrators of an approved type shall be used only in inaccessible
locations and where it is impracticable to use immersion type vibrators after their
use has been specifically authorized by the Engineer. The form vibrators shall be
designed to receive vibrations without losing shape and causing leakage of
mortar. Previous test of vibrastors synchrony shall be done before moving for
works under ground.
10) The immersion type mechanical vibrators, complying with IS: 2505-1980
(Reaffirmed-1993). Electric, air driven or diesel shall generally be inserted
vertically and the vibrating head shall be allowed to penetrate under the action of
its own weight. In very shallow concrete, some consolidation can be obtained by
using vibrators in horizontal position.
11) Internal vibrators, when used, shall be inserted at regular intervals and vibration,
with the vibrator fully into the layer being compacted, shall be continued till
acceptable degree of compaction has been achieved taking care to avoid excessive
past and laitance.
12) The entire depth of new layer of concrete shall be vibrated and ordinarily the
vibrators should penetrate the layer below (which has not yet become rigid) for
several millimeters to ensure thorough bond between the layers.
13) Under ordinary job conditions, there is little likelihood of damage from direct re-
vibration of lower layer or by vibration transmitted by embedded steel provided
the disturbed concrete still is or again becomes plastic. Vibrators shall not,
however, be inserted into lower courses that have commenced final set nor shall
they be directly applied to or allowed to disturb reinforcement extending into
hardened or partially hardened concrete.
14) Systematic spacing of points of vibrators shall be established to ensure that no
263
portions of the concrete are missed. It shall be ensured that zones of influence
overlap and the concrete is properly consolidated.
15) In compacting the surface of a concrete lift, the coarser particles of the aggregate
in the surface shall be embedded while the concrete is being vibrated, but the
surface left with the desired degree of roughness.
16) Disturbance of the surface concrete at construction joints during early stage of
hardening shall be on timber walkways constructed so as not to cause injury to
the concrete.
17) When smooth surfaces are required, for all surfaces which shall be permanently
exposed to the weather and for all surfaces next to embedded metal work around
which it is desired to prevent leakage, the adjacent concrete shall be properly
vibrated, spaded or tamped.
18) To ensure even and ensure surfaces which are free from aggregate pockets, honey
combing or air holes, it may be necessary to supplement interval vibration with
hand spading or tamping all along the boundaries of the concrete and around
embedded parts, while the concrete is plastic under vibrating action.
12.10 Concreting in Underground and Open Works
(Tunnel Concrete Lining)
12.10.1 General
1) This Chapter contains specifications for the construction of the inner cast in-situ
concrete tunnel lining (also called final lining or secondary lining), the foundation
beams and the invert arch. These structures will in general be reinforced.
2) Cast in-situ foundation beams will be installed throughout the entire length of the
tunnel. A cast in-situ concrete tunnel lining as well as a concrete invert arch will
be installed along certain tunnel sections only, where required by the geotechnical
conditions as determined by the Engineer.
3) Clause 12.10.1 is a supplement to the specifications for concrete works. In case of
any discrepancies between the specifications of Clause 12.10.1 and other
specifications of this document, Clause 12.10.1 shall apply.
12.10.1.1 Description
1) The inner cast-in-situ concrete lining increases the safety factor of the tunnel
lining system and improves the water tightness of the tunnel
2) The foundation beams form the abutments for the final tunnel lining. They also
form the connecting link in the case an invert arch is required.
3) The invert arch forms the ring closure of the tunnel lining (tunnel tube) where
poor geological conditions prevail. The concrete invert arch has to resist ground
pressures and to provide stability for the whole tunnel structure.
4) The formwork or shutters for the foundation beams, the invert, side walls and
roof arch provide the necessary tools for the construction of the final in-situ
concrete tunnel lining. They shall be constructed of steel in such a manner that the
shape, dimensions and surface finish of the concrete are obtained, as specified.
5) Contact grouting is the injection of grout material under pressure to fill voids
between in-situ concrete lining and the rock or shotcrete or the membrane lining
(waterproofing). A systematic contact grouting shall be carried out in the roof
section of the tunnel after hardening of the concrete lining, and satisfactory
results from the 28 day cube test. Provision shall be made in the roof arch shutter
for the casting of the necessary holes for contact grouting. Positioning of these
grout holes shall be approved by the Engineer.
12.10.1.2 Submissions
1) Working drawings shall be submitted showing the camber of formwork as
264
required for compensation of deflection by concrete placing operation.

2) The Contractor shall submit detailed shop drawings of the formwork for approval
by the Engineer.
3) Separate shop drawings for the formwork for the tunnel cross section and the all
niches & lay by shall be submitted by the Contractor for approval by the Engineer.
4) Test reports shall be submitted for the concrete to be used in accordance with IS:
516.
5) Method statement, plant and material description for contact grouting shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval before commencement of final lining
concreting works.
12.10.1.3 Job Conditions
1) The inner lining in the tunnel shall not be placed until the displacements of the
shotcrete lining at any position on the tunnel periphery have, in the opinion of the
Engineer, practically stopped.
2) The inner lining shall not be placed before the re-profiling operations have been
accepted and approved by the Engineer.
3) The inner lining in the tunnel shall not be placed before the waterproofing system
installed is accepted and approved by the Engineer.
12.10.1.4 Materials
12.10.1.4.1 Formwork
1) Formwork shall be held to comprise all temporary staging and formwork required
and used for the construction of the inner lining.
2) Formwork shall be sufficiently rigid to maintain the forms in their correct
position, shape and profile so that the final concrete structure is within the limits
of tolerances (+/- 10 mm).
3) The formwork shall be made of steel and suitable for repetitive use.
4) The formwork shall be provided with adequate size and number of openings
along each side wall and in the crown. The opening shall be so designed as to
permit the use of vibrators for compacting the concrete, and to permit inspection
of the concrete during placing and of the hardened concrete surface prior to the
striking or the removal of the formwork. Openings for pouring of concrete shall be
located at such heights as to prevent segregation of the concrete. Joints in the
forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of grout and absorption of
water from concrete.
5) The forms shall be maintained at all times in good condition as accuracy of shape,
strength, rigidity, water tightness and smoothness of surface is warranted. All
forms shall be kept clean, free of corrosion and in good repair.
6) The design of the formwork shall be to the approval of the Engineer. Information
shall be given on the maximum poving level difference on the two side walls.
7) The upper sector of the formwork shall have facilities for mounting external
vibrators at regular intervals to ensure thorough compaction of the crown level.
8) The steel form shall be furnished with suitable devices for the erection of stop
ends and to enable chamfers along the periphery at the start/end of each
concreting section in order to produce a clean cut between subsequent poving
and regular surface between pours where the tunnel is on a curve.
12.10.1.4.2 Concrete
1) The concrete grade for inner lining arch, foundation beams and invert arch shall
be M30 according to IS 456-2000.
2) Maximum aggregate size shall be 40 mm for the foundation beams and the invert
arch and 20 mm for the inner lining. Degree of exposure for mix design of
concrete shall be “Severe”.
3) The consistency of the mix shall be chosen to allow placing of concrete by
265
pumping. However, the water / “binder” ratio shall not exceed a value of 0.65 (the
term “binder” shall refer to all cementitious materials used for the concrete).
4) Plasticizers may be used in the concrete mix to improve flow and compaction.
Details of such additives shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to
their use.
12.10.1.4.3 Grout for Contact Grouting
1) Grout shall be based on a mixture of cementious materials and water, but may
contain additives to improve the performance, subject to the Engineer’s approval.
All sources of water to be used with cement shall be approved by the Engineer. If
at any time during construction, water from an approved source becomes
unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall provide satisfactory water from other main
sources.
2) Cementious materials shall conform to current Standards. The grout shall be a
uniform mixture of which the consistency shall be sufficiently fluid but not more
to ensure that the grout flows freely under pressure into all parts of the void.
3) The grout mix shall have low or no bleedability and low shrinkage characteristics.
When set the grout should have the lowest permeability possible.
12.10.1.5 Execution
12.10.1.5.1 Preparation of Formwork Before Concreting
1) The inside surface of forms, except permanent formwork or unless otherwise
agreed by the Engineer, shall be coated with an approved non staining mould oil
to prevent adhesion of the concrete.
2) Release agents shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and shall not come into contact with reinforcement and anchorages.
The composition of the release agent shall be such that it will not interfere with
future surface treatments.
3) Before concreting, all forms shall be thoroughly cleaned. Faces of formwork in
contact with concrete shall be free from adhering foreign matter, projecting nails
and the like, splits or other defects.
4) The formwork shall be erected and anchored in such a way that it rigidly retains
its shape and position during concreting and that surface irregularities in the
concrete are avoided.
5) Formwork shall be erected to such levels as to make allowance for anticipated
deflection of the formwork under load.
6) The Contractor shall not place any concrete in the forms until the Engineer has
given written approval.
7) The Contractor shall prepare the formwork for final lining taking into account the
final alignment of the tunnel. The formwork shall be suitable for the cast of the
final lining both in the straight and curve sections of the tunnel and for all the
recesses, niches, cross passages, trolley refugees, lay-bys and junctions.
8) Topographical survey has to be carried out to the positioning the gantry
accordingly tolerances.
9) After concreting, all the lining geometry has to be submitted to a topographical
control to verify that the theoretical lining showed in project drawings is fulfilled.
If this geometry is invaded by the lining, refurbishment of the lining has to be
carried out under the indications of the Engineer. The tolerance for the lining
position is -0mm/+30mm in vertical and horizontal direction and the work form
has not allow deflexions because poor maintenance of the form work 30mm over
10m length. Meaning of – is in the direction of the centre of the tunnel and +
meaning is in the direction of the surrounding ground.
12.10.1.5.2 Preparation for Placing Concrete
266
Before the concrete lining is cast the Contractor shall thoroughly clean the invert, sides
and roof of the excavation of loose or unsound fragments of rock, mud, debris, standing
water, oil and any other foreign matter.
12.10.1.5.3 Placing of Concrete
1) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details of his proposed tunnel
concrete placing methods, including a description of the equipment to be used.
2) Concrete shall be placed by a displacement type pump or by such method as may
be approved by the Engineer. The method of placing concrete shall be such that
the concrete is not introduced into the formwork at a high velocity and shall be
such that segregation of the concrete does not occur; the concrete pump shall
produce a continuous stream of concrete without air pockets.
3) The casting of the foundation beams and the structural invert arch shall be done
in separate operations before placing the inner lining arch of the tunnel. The
method of placing concrete in the invert shall be subject to approval of the
Engineer.
4) The concrete beams on each side shall be used as abutments for the rails which
are necessary for moving the tunnel formwork. They shall be cured for at least 7
days before the formwork for the inner lining arch is allowed to be placed.
5) Concrete shall be pumped into the formwork through suitable temporary
openings.
6) Concrete in the walls and crown of tunnels shall be brought up in horizontal
layers not exceeding 50 cm, evenly distributed over the concreting section.
7) Maximum level differences shall not exceed the values as specified by the
manufacturer of the formwork.
8) Concrete shall not be pumped into the crown of the arch and allowed to flow
down into the walls and invert. Concrete shall be forced into all irregularities in
the ground or initial support surface by submersive vibrators to fill the void
between that surface and the formwork.
9) Particular care shall be taken to ensure the complete filling of the crown of the
tunnel arch. The Contractor shall include with his details of tunnel concrete
placing methods proposals for satisfying this requirement. Air pockets in the
tunnel roof shall be relieved by ventilation hoses where necessary beyond the
relevant stop-end of the formwork.
10) Cold joints in the inner lining shall be avoided where practicable. A standby
concrete pump and placement line shall be provided during concreting
operations. In the event of continuous placing being interrupted by equipment
breakdown or for any other reason, the Contractor shall thoroughly consolidate
the concrete at such joints to a reasonably uniform and stable slope while the
concrete is plastic and any concrete which remains unconsolidated shall be
removed.
11) In-situ concrete inner lining for tunnels shall be cast in sections of adequate
length (in order to comply with the minimal radius of curvature along the
alignment and within the construction tolerances of the tunnel). Each section shall
be cast in one continuous operation without interruption and construction joints.
All construction joints at the ends of the sections shall be perpendicular to the
gradient.
12) For hot or cold weather concreting refer to Chapter 12.7 of this Specification.
12.10.1.5.4 Compaction of Concrete for Inner Lining
1) The concrete shall be compacted by external vibrators anchored to the formwork
and immersion vibrators operated through the inspection openings in the
formwork.
2) The operating time of the external vibrators shall be kept short in order to avoid
segregation.
267
12.10.1.5.5 Removal of Formwork

1) Formwork shall be so designed as to permit easy removal without resorting to
hammering or levering against the surface of the concrete or injuring the
concrete.
2) Any damages occurring during striking of the formwork shall be made good by
the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3) Form removal shall not be started until the concrete has attained sufficient
strength so that most unfavorable load conditions do not cause any damages to
the structure. The strength of the concrete shall be measured after removal of the
stop-end shutter in the tunnel roof. The minimum strength for removal of the
formwork must satisfy the structural requirements for "dead load" of the lining.
This strength shall be checked by a Schmidt pendulum type hammer, or similar
approved, for low strength concrete, with a piston of 40mm diameter. Prior to the
commencement of concreting works, the instrument shall be calibrated for each
approved concrete mix under particular application.
12.10.1.5.6 Curing of Concrete
1) The sealing agent shall not interfere with the bonding of any subsequent surface
treatment.
2) Curing can be omitted if the humidity and shrinkage measurements prove that no
effect is attained by curing measures.
12.10.1.5.7 Contact Grouting
1) Prior to the commencement of inner lining works, the Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer for his approval full details of the working method and equipment to
be used for contact grouting.
2) At all times the Contractor shall ensure that the grouting operation is under the
direct control of skilled and experienced operatives. The Contractor shall state the
maximum pressures to be used to the approval by the Engineer.
3) Grouting and ventilating pipes shall be positioned prior to concreting.
4) Upon completion of grouting, the Contractor shall cut off all surplus lengths of
pipes and make good the surface to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
5) The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with records of areas grouted, injection
pressures, grout consumption and mix details as the Engineer may so require.
6) The Engineer will require tests to be carried out to confirm that the grout mix and
its constituent materials are in accordance with the Specification. The Contractor
shall carry out such tests and submit the results for the Engineer's approval when
required.
7) Where dry premixes of grout of an acknowledged manufacturer are used, they
shall be mixed to the manufacturer's recommended water/solids ratio. All grout
mixes shall be prepared using high speed, high shearing action mixers.
8) The Contractor may choose to propose a method of concreting in order to
eliminate contact grouting of the tunnel lining. However, if the proposed method
is accepted by the Engineer the requirements of Clause 12.10.1.1 (5) above must
still be met and the cast-in holes used to check that the tunnel lining is complete
as directed by the Engineer.
12.10.2 Concrete in R.C.C. Frames/Walls/Slabs
1) Concrete shall be placed in lifts of heights as shown on the drawings or as directed
by the Engineer. Within each lift, concrete shall be deposited in approximately
horizontal layers about 40 cm in thickness unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer.
2) At locations where lift heights are not shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer for approval, details of the placing procedure he proposes.
No concrete shall be placed at such locations without the prior approval of the
Engineer.
268
3) Slabs shall be placed in one lift unless otherwise indicated or directed by the
Engineer.
4) In walls, lifts shall terminate at such levels as will conform to the structural
requirements.
5) The placement of concrete shall be carried out at such rate and in such a manner
that the formation of cold joints is prevented.
6) Where slabs and beams are placed continuously with walls and columns, the
concrete in walls and columns shall have been in place for at least 2 hours or for a
longer period when so directed by the Engineer before placing concrete in the
slabs and beams.
12.11 Chipping and Roughening of Concrete Surfaces
1) Surface upon or against which additional concrete is to be placed shall be chipped
and roughened to a depth of not greater than 25 mm.
2) The roughening shall be performed by chipping, sand blasting or other
satisfactory methods and in such manner as not to loosen, crack or shatter any
part of the concrete beyond the roughened surface.
3) After being roughened, the surface of the concrete shall be cleaned thoroughly of
the loose fragments dirt and other objectionable substances and shall be sound
and hard and in such condition as to assure good mechanical bond between old
and new concrete.
4) All concrete which is not hard, dense and durable shall be removed to the depth
required to secure a satisfactory surface.
12.12 Defective and Damaged Concrete
Concrete which is damaged from any cause and which is not manufactured placed and
compacted in accordance with these specifications and is found to have lower strength,
density etc. than specified, as determined from test samples or core samples, shall be
removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own costs.
12.13 Finishing of Concrete
12.13.1 Finishing of Formed Surfaces
Except as otherwise specified or directed, all permanently exposed concrete surfaces and
other waterway surfaces requiring durability under water shall be finished in the
following manner:
1) Any damage to finished concrete resulting from the action of removing formwork
or from any other cause shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Immediately on removal of the form, the surface shall be examined and all porous
honeycombed or defective concrete removed and repaired as specified herein.
2) All imperfections or ridges due to joints in the formwork, shall be removed by
light chipping or grinding down if necessary, to produce a smoother surface.
3) When the treatment of a surface has been completed, the surface shall be cured.
4) All patches and mortar filled pits on exposed surfaces shall be neat and of the
same color and texture as the adjoining concrete.
5) The finished surfaces of concrete shall be true, sound, smooth and free from fins,
offsets, pits, depressions, voids, blemishes and other defective concrete and
surface irregularities and shall be in accordance with the requirements for the
particular class of finish specified herein or as shown on the drawings.
6) Finishing work shall be done only by skilled workman in the presence of the
Engineer and shall be performed within 4 weeks of placing.
7) Before final acceptance of the work, Contractor shall clean all exposed concrete
surfaces of all encrustation of cement, mortar or grout, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Concrete shall not be considered finished until all required repair work
and finishing have been completed.
12.13.2 Finishing of Unformed Surfaces
269
Unformed surfaces shall be finished by one or more methods of screeding, floating and
trowelling and working of the surfaces shall be done at the proper time, employing
experience men and shall be just sufficient to produce the desired finish.
1) Screeding
a) It gives the surface its approximate shape by striking off surplus concrete
immediately after completion and shall be accomplished by moving a
straight edge or template with a swing motion across wood or metal
strips which have been established as guides.
b) Where the surface is curved, a special screed shall be used.
2) Floating
Shortly after the concrete is screeded, the surface shall be brought true to form
and grade by working it sparingly with a wooden float. If a coarse textured finish
is specified or if the surface is to be steel trowelled, a second or final floating shall
be performed after some stiffening has occurred and the surface moisture film or
shine has diapered.
3) Trowelling
a) If a smooth dense finish is desired, floating shall be followed by steel
trowelling some time after moisture film or shine has disappeared from
the floated surface and when the concrete has hardened sufficiently to
prevent fine material and water from being brought up to the surface.
Excessive trowelling at an early stage as would tend to produce cracking
or result in surface that is too hard to finish properly shall be avoided.
b) Trowelling shall, therefore, be done at the appropriate time and shall have
the surface smooth, even and free of trowel marks and ripples. A fine
textured surface that is not slick shall be obtained by trowelling lightly
over the surface with a circular motion keeping the trowel flat on the
surface of the concrete. Where a hard steel trowelled finish is required,
trowelling shall be continued unit it no longer produces noticeable
compaction and the surface has a glossy appearance, trowelling pressure
being increased gradually as the operation progress.
c) The use of any finishing tool in areas where water has accumulated shall
be prohibited. Operation on such areas shall be delayed until the water
has been absorbed or has evaporated or has been removed by draining,
mopping or other means.
d) All joints and edges on unformed surface, that shall be exposed to view,
shall be finished with suitable moulding tools with rounded, beveled or
filleted edge, as directed by the Engineer. Unless the use of other slopes or
level surface is indicated on the drawings as directed, narrow surfaces
such a top of wall or tunnel portals shall be sloped approximately 9 mm
per 300 mm of width. Boarder surfaces as walls, roadways platforms and
deck shall be slopped approximately 6mm per 300mm.
e) Where separate floor finish is specified or directed, the concrete shall be
stuck of sufficiently below grads to allow for the subsequent placing of a
finished floor. The surface of such concrete shall be left rough.
f) As soon as the condition of the base permits and before it has hardened
fully, all dirt, laitance and loose aggregate shall be removed from the
surface, by means of water jets and wire brooms leaving the coarse
aggregate slightly exposed and the surface made suitable for taking
further concrete.
12.14 Curing and Protection of Concrete
270
1) Plant and material required for curing and protection of concrete shall be
available at the location of each concrete placement before concrete placement is
started and the water used for curing shall meet the requirements set out
elsewhere in the tender documents.
2) All concrete shall be protected against injury until final acceptance.
3) Exposed finished surfaces of concrete shall be protected from the direct rays of
the sun for at least 72 hours after placement.
4) Fresh exposed concrete shall also be protected from the action of the rains,
flowing water and mechanical injury.
5) No fire shall be permitted in direct contact with concrete at any time.
6) Concrete in which standard Portland cement is used shall be kept continuously
moist for not less than 14 days, for normal concrete and 21 days for concrete
containing pozzolana, by covering with water saturated materials or a system of
perforated pipes.
7) Construction joints shall be cured in the same manner as the other concrete and
shall also, if practicable, be kept moist for at least 72 hours prior to the placing of
additional concrete upon the joint.
8) Horizontal surfaces shall be cured by sprinkling water or by covering with damp
sand or may be cured by the use of wet quilts or mats which will satisfactory
supply the required curing water. If damp sand or quilt is used for curing, it shall
be completely removed. The time of applying damp sand shall be specified by the
Engineer before which curing shall be carried out by other approved methods.
9) The method of keeping formed concrete surface moist shall be continuous
sprinkling or spraying of water as may be necessary to prevent any portion any
portion of the surface from drying during the specified period.
10) The water and other methods of curing shall be so handled as not to stain
concrete surfaces, which shall be exposed.
11) The actual method of curing adopted shall subject to the approval of the Engineer.
12) The Contractor shall have on hand and ready to install before actual concrete
placement is started, all equipment needed for adequate curing and protection at
all locations of concrete placement.
13) In limited areas and for special purpose, the use of an approved and properly
applied compound may be permitted at the discretion of the Engineer to restrict
the evaporation of the mixing water. Such curing compound shall be of the surface
membrane type which will thoroughly seal the surface. Curing compounded shall
not be used on joints where bonding is required.
14) Curing compounds shall be applied according to the manufacture’s
recommendations to provide a continuous uniform membrane over all area.
Curing compounds shall be applied only after moist curing has been carried out
for at least 24 hours.
15) A curing compound shall not be used on any unformed surface, where, in the
opinion of Engineer, the irregularities in that surface would prevent the
membrane forming an effective seal, on any surface which has a temperature
lower than manufacturer’s recommended application temperature, or any surface
where a bond is required for additional concrete, or where a curing compound is
placed on a surface where a bond is required, it shall be removed by sand blasting
or by other means satisfactory to the Engineer.
16) Curing membranes shall be protected from damage at all times.
17) Care shall be taken not to disturb the steel reinforcement projecting from any
placement for at least 24 hour after the completion of such placement.
18) Finished concrete surface shall be projected from stains or abrasion and surface
or edges likely to be injured during the construction period shall be kept properly
projected by leaving forms in place or erecting protective covering satisfactory to
271
be Engineer.
19) In case, the curing operations are inadequate or unsatisfactory, the Engineer shall
be entitled to take such steps as he may deem necessary to make good the
deficiencies and defects.
12.15 Repair of Concrete
12.15.1 General
1) For different types of defects in concrete Contractor has to submit the detailed
methodology for repair of the same, which shall be approved by DDC/Engineer.
2) Repair of concrete shall be performed by skilled workmen and in the presence of
the Engineer.
3) No repair work shall be carried out until the Engineer, has inspected the location
of the proposed repair and accepted the method of repair.
4) The Contractor shall correct all imperfections on the concrete surfaces as
necessary to produce surfaces that shall conform to the required standards.
5) All materials procedures and operations used in the repair of concrete shall be
subject to approval by the Engineer.
6) Surface of concrete finished against forms shall be smooth and free from
projections. Immediately upon the removal of forms and within 24 hours thereof,
wherever practicable, all unsightly ridges or fines shall be removed and any local
bulging on exposed surfaces shall be remedied by tooling and rubbing. All holes
left by the removal of fasteners from the tie rods shall, after being reamed with a
toothed reamer, be neatly filled with dry pack mortar.
7) All honeycombed, porous, fracture or otherwise defective concrete and surface
concrete in which, in the opinion of the Engineer, additions are required to bring
it to the prescribed lines, shall be removed by chipping concrete.
8) The chipped openings shall be sharp edged and keyed, and shall be filled to the
required lines with fresh concrete or as found suitable. Where concrete is used for
filling, the chipped openings shall be not less than 100mm in depth and the fresh
concrete shall be reinforced and doweled to the surface of the openings as
directed by the Engineer.
9) Dry pack mortar shall consist of one part of cement to two parts of sand by
volume and just enough water so that the mortar as used sticks together on being
moulded into a ball by slight pressure of the hands and does not free water when
so pressed but leaves the hands damp. The mortar shall be fresh when placed and
any mortar that is not used with 30 minutes, after preparation shall be wasted
with all consequences to the Contractor.
10) The mortar shall be placed in layers not more than 25mm thickness after being
compacted and each layer shall be thoroughly tamped to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Each layer except the last shall be roughened thoroughly to provide
effective bond with the succeeding layers. The last or finishing layer shall be
smoothened to form a surface continuous with the surroundings concrete. Dry
pack mortar shall be used for filing behind reinforcement or for filling holes that
extend completely through a concrete section. Shotcrete shall be used for holes
too wide for dry pack mortar filing and too shallow for concrete filling and no
deeper than the far side of the reinforcement that is nearest to the surfaces.
11) All patches shall be bonded thoroughly to the surface of the chipped opening and
shall be sound and free from shrinkage cracks and trummy areas.
12) Concrete surfaces where high velocity flows may occur and as required by the
Engineer repair to the surfaces shall be bonded with an epoxy adhesive
acceptable to the Engineer.
13) All repairs to the surface of concrete for flowing water shall be ground smooth to
meet the tolerances set out in these Specifications.
12.16 Construction Joints
272
1) Concrete surfaces, which become so rigid, by reason of limitations in the rate of

placing of concrete imposed by these specifications or by reason of delay in
construction progress, that in the opinion of the Engineer, the new concrete
cannot integrally incorporated with that previously placed, shall be defined as
construction joints.
2) Construction joints shall be located in the positions shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer and the Contractor shall not be permitted to make any
additional joints or deviate from the joints indicated on the drawings without the
written authorization of the Engineer.
3) Joints as exposed surfaces of concrete shall be straight and continuous as shown
on the drawings on otherwise directed.
4) The concrete of the earlier pour shall be hacked to produce a rough surface or
green cut with air-water jet or by sand blasting after the concrete has hardened
sufficiently as directed by the Engineer. Before placing new concrete, the surface
shall be restored to the condition existing immediately after hacking or green
cutting by means of another washing with air-water jet, vigorous brushing, sand
blasting etc..
5) All the points shall be cleaned by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. All intersections of construction joints with concrete faces, which will
be exposed to view, shall be made straight, level and in plumb.
6) All exposed construction joints shall conform to the requirement of aesthetics and
their pattern shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Surfaces of the
construction joints which have been permitted to dry by reasons of the
succeeding layer not placed within the specified moist curing period shall be kept
for at least 72 hours prior to placing the succeeding layers.
7) Horizontal construction joints shall be arranged wherever possible to coincide
with joints in the form-work.
8) To prevent feather edges, the construction joints at the tops of horizontal lifts
near sloping exposed concrete surface shall be inclined near the exposed surface
so that the angle between such inclined surface and the exposed concrete surface
shall not be less than 50 degree.
9) When the work has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, such surface,
shall be roughened and new concrete placed after taking all measures mentioned
at Sl. No. (5) of Clause 12.9.3 hereof.
10) The use of a retarder shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of
producing surfaces at construction joints as specified and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
11) Disturbance of surface concrete at the joints shall be avoided during the early
hardening period. Before placing the succeeding layer, the surface of the
construction joint shall be thoroughly cleaned and loose, defective concrete shall
be removed satisfactorily.
12.17 Expansion and Contraction Joints
1) Expansion and contraction joints shall be constructed at such points and of such
dimensions as indicated on the drawings or as required by the Engineer. The
method and material used shall be subject to the approval of Engineer.
2) Standard bitumen sheets, impregnated with saw dust or any other filler material
and sealing compounds, required to be placed in the expansion joints, shall be
fixed in position as shown on the drawing as directed by the Engineer.
12.18 Embedment in Concrete / Rock
12.18.1 Anchor Bars
1) Wherever indicated on the drawings or directed by the Engineer, holes shall be
drilled into rock to receive bars for anchoring to the rock, concrete or masonry
structures or parts thereof.
273
2) The type and dimensions of the anchor bars, locations, diameter and depths of
anchor bar holes shall be as shown on the drawings or as directed.
3) Anchor rods shall be thoroughly cleaned before being placed in the drill hole. The
hole shall be filled with grout. The grout shall be a workable 1:1 sand / cement
mix with low water cement ratio. Admixtures for fast setting low shrinkage may
also be required.
4) Wherever practicable, anchors shall be installed before the concrete is placed,
except when otherwise provided or permitted.
5) Drilling for the installation of anchors in the concrete shall not be carried out
except with the prior approval of the Engineer.
6) Where the installation of anchors prior to placing of the concrete, is not
practicable, satisfactory formed openings shall be provided for holes drilled for
the purpose and the anchors grouted in the openings at some late date.
7) The anchors shall be protected against disturbance for minimum of 48 hours after
installation or more as required by the Engineer.
12.18.2 Embedded Parts
1) Before placing concrete, care shall be taken to ensure that all embedded parts are
firmly and accurately fastened in place as indicated on the drawings or as
directed.
2) All embedded parts shall be thoroughly cleaned, free from all foreign matter such
as scale, rush, oil etc.
3) The Contractor shall not place concrete on embedded parts unless these are
checked and approved by the Engineer.
4) If concrete is placed by the Contractor without correctly placing in position, the
necessary embedded parts, concrete shall have to be removed and replaced by
him to enable such embedded parts to be installed in position, without any extra
payment to him.
5) Care shall be taken not to disturb or displace embedded parts during concrete
placement.
12.19 Water Stopper
1) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)/ rubber water stops shall be furnished and installed for
water tight construction at various locations of concrete structures / components
covered under these specifications. In order to ensure proper alignment and
fixing of water stops in correct position / place, the same shall be rigidly secured
to the form work or reinforcement steel as direct/approved by the ENGINEER.
Number of joints in PVC/rubber water stops, when installed in place shall be the
barest minimum and joints, thus made, shall be suitably vulcanized/welded by
the use of best method/Engineering practice satisfactory to the ENGINEER.
2) All types of water stops shall be tested in a recognized laboratory prior to
transport to the site. Test specimens shall be furnished by the manufacturer and
the tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s place.
3) Water stops shall be tested as to their tensile strength, elongation, duration, water
absorption, specific gravity, effect of alkali and impact resistance. The PVC Water
stops shall meet the following requirements:
Requirement Method of Test
Tensile strength using die “C” not less than 150 kgf/cm2 ASTM D-412
Ultimate elongation using die “C” not less than 330% ASTM D-412
274
Stiffness in flexure, 6 mm span: not less than 28 kgf/cm2 ASTM D-747
Tear resistance: not less than 30 kgf/cm2 ASTM D-624
Specific Gravity: not less than 1.20 ASTM D-792
Shore Hardness: 60A to 80A
Water Absorption: not more than 5% in a 7 days test
The CONTRACTORs shall submit to the ENGINEER for approval the test results
from recognized institution showing that the material supplied meets the
requirements specified. The ENGINEER may carry out the additional tests, for
which the CONTRACTOR shall supply specimens from the same material to be
used in the work. Test specimens, if required shall be of the shape and
dimensions as required in the individual test methods.
4) PVC water stops will be provided according to drawings in transversal and
longitudinal positions at all along the lining tunnel extension. These bands have to
be welded (heat or vulcanization) among them at the intersection points. For the
fault areas, an Omega PVC band will be affixed to the waterproofing membrane.
The geometry and type of these water stop bands and Omega band are defined in
specific project drawings. To weld the ends of the water stop bands in transversal
joits or in the intersections between transversal and longitudinal water stops
bands the parts that have to be vulcanized have to be prepared. It is responsibility
of the contractor the preparation and the vulcanization of the waterstops unions.
When delivered to site, the waterstop products must be unloaded carefully and
inspected immediately for completeness and integrity, including form and
dimensions. Before installation the waterstops must be kept in a sheltered place
on boards or some other firm base (e.g. pallets, concrete surfaces) and protected
from contamination or damage.
Waterstops must be protected from direct sunlight, especially in summer, e.g. by
covering. In high outside temperatures waterstops must be taken to the point of
installation and laid out under no tension.
Waterstops should be kept in covered storage if possible and then be put in
heated rooms for at least one full day prior to their installation, to make their
handling and installation easier and less prone to damage (thermoplastic
material).
Fixing Internal Waterstops
Internal waterstops are anchored to the reinforcement. The waterstops are fixed
to the edge anchors with the special waterstop clip or, in the case of waterstops
with steel plates (FMS, FS) to the edge perforation of the steel plates at maximum
intervals of 25 cm.
Spacing Between Joints in the Waterstops Themselves
The spacing between two joins in the waterstops themselves should be 0.50 m
minimum. In every configuration the length of the free waterstop ends should be
1.00 m minimum so that these connection joints can be formed easily and
correctly on site.
Embedding of External Waterstops
Waterstops must be free from contamination and ice when casted in. If necessary
they should be cleaned before concreting (e.g. removal of any accumulated site
debris such as sawdust, sand, concrete residues, cement laitance, oil, grease,
snow, ice etc.). This is particularly important for external waterstops in the base
275
of a structure.
Clearance Between Poker Vibrators and Waterstops
The poker vibrators must never touch the waterstop or its fixings (minimum
clearance ≥10 cm). It is usually preferable to compact around external waterstops
with external vibrators, which will also give better compaction around stop end
anchors.
Protection of Exposed Waterstops On Site
The waterstops should be protected from damage until they are fully casted in.
Examples of suitable protective measures are:
For waterstops in walls: cover reinforcement ends with boarding, box in or roll up
and suspend the waterstop till later.
For waterstops to be trafficked: completely cover or bed in sand.
For waterstop ends to be exposed for some time: box in to fully protect
Joints between thermoplastic waterstops are made with a heat welding process.
This process is reversible. The principle of welding consists of softening the
mating surfaces of both of the two parts to be joined by heating them to the
melting temperature, quickly pressing them together, and allowing them to cool.
Welding is not possible merely by heating and softening one of the two pieces to
be welded together.
Although the welding of thermoplastic materials is easier and cheaper on site
than the vulcanising of Elastomers (artificial rubber based materials), it demands
more manual skill and dexterity, as well as ensuring good workmanship and
quality control.
Joints Elastomer (rubber) waterstops which no accepting heat welding process

are made in a vulcanizing process.
This process is irreversible, i.e. it can be carried out only once and therefore
requires careful, consistent and complete execution of all of the working steps.
Standard junctions, e.g. flat cross, vertical T, flat edges etc. are all prefabricated in
our factory using specialist equipment i.e autoclaves.
Therefore only the butt joints should be made on site.
12.20 Measurements And Payments
12.20.1 Concrete
1) Measurement for payment for each grade of concrete, unless specified otherwise
hereafter, will be of the volume placed within the lines, grades, and pay limits
shown on the drawings or as established on the site by the Engineer.
2) Unless otherwise stated, no payment will be made for concrete placed outside
these limits, other than in additional excavation directed by the Engineer and
filling of over-break.
3) Payment will be made at the Unit Rate for different grades and types of concrete
entered in the Bill of Quantities, which shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
a) Excavation, loading, transportation, screening, washing, blending and
storage of aggregates.
b) Batching, supply of mixing water, mixing, transportation, placing and
compacting the concrete.
c) Labor, tools and equipment for cleaning and preparing surfaces prior to
concreting.
d) Formwork
276
e) Forming and treatment of construction joints including furnishing and

spreading of mortar layers before concrete placing
f) Surface finishing
g) Attaining the concrete temperature as specified, and following hot
and/or cold weather precautions.
h) Protection and curing of concrete
i) Repair of defective concrete and scaling of joints
j) Communication system connecting the points of placing concrete with
the relevant mixing plant or delivery equipment.
k) Furnishing samples of materials i.e. cement, coarse and fine aggregates,
water, admixtures as also the samples of concrete, mortar and providing
assistance for sampling required in connection with the tests to be
performed by the IRCON.
l) Chipping and roughening of concrete surface.
m) Use of admixtures
n) Use of curing compounds
o) Embedding fixtures, other installations, electrical, communication
conduits etc.
p) Providing cement slurry/ mortar on rock surfaces and construction
joints.
4) The quantities of all holes and passages and embedded parts not less than 0.10
Cum. or 0.05 Sqm. in cross-section shall be deducted from the total quantity to
arrive at the concrete work for payment.
12.20.2 Tunnel Lining Concrete
1) Measurement for payment for the inner lining in-situ concrete in the tunnel will
be of the theoretical volume of the inner lining as defined on the drawings,
increased by the volume corresponding to the difference between the applied
deformation because convergence C for section type (as approved by the
Engineer, see Figure 5.1) and the actual deformations of the outer lining (e.g., if
applied deformation tolerance is 100mm and actual deformations is 40 mm in
average only, the theoretical thickness of the concrete lining will be increased by
60 mm for the payment).
2) The unit rates for the inner lining concrete shall include, in addition to the works
described above under 12.20.1 (3), the entire cost of the following:
a) Design, furnishing, maintenance, erection, and removal of steel formwork
b) Pumping of the concrete, including furnishing and mixing the necessary
plasticizer
c) Installation of ducts (recesses)
d) Sealing of cracks, cold joints etc. where directed by the Engineer
e) Contact grouting
12.20.3 Reinforced Cement Concrete (RCC)
1) The rates quoted for RCC work in the relevant Item of the schedule of rates and
quantities of Schedule do not include the cost of supplying, cutting, bending,
cleaning, straightening, binding and maintaining in position of steel reinforcement
including labor and the same shall be paid separately under relevant item of the
Schedule of items, rates and quantities. Before starting concreting, the Contractor
shall make certain that the measurement of the reinforcements placed in has been
277
recorded and that the Engineer has certified to the correctness of reinforcement
used. Failure to do so might mean no payment or payment (full or partial or Nil) at
the discretion of the Engineer for the reinforced concrete.
2) Unit weights to be used in determining weight of steel computed shall be as per
standard weight of the bar/section given in I.S Codes. However in case of any
variation found at the time of use, actual sample weight shall be taken and
certified by the Engineer to be used in determining the steel consumed on work.
12.20.4 Exclusions
1) Collecting of seepage water or water inflow from rock surfaces and diverting it
into the drainage systems as specified in section on “Dewatering, Drainage and
Pumping”.
2) Payment for providing and fixing PVC water stopper shall be made separately.
3) Payment for drilling, providing and fixing drainage pipes shall be made under
separate item of Bill of Quantities.
a) Any defective and wasted concrete, concrete which has to be removed and
replaced due to Contractor ’s noncompliance with the Specifications or
Engineer’s directions and all related cost shall be at the Contractor ’s
expense.
b) Any concrete which the Contractor places or uses for his own installation
or for his own convenience.
c) Developing alternative sources of aggregates by the Contractor and the
resulting additional material testing.
d) Pumping of the concrete and plasticizers
e) Pre-cast concrete RCC units damaged by improper storing, handling
transportation.
f) Any replacement of repair of concrete damaged during blasting carried out
by the Contractor.
g) Making stockpiles for coarse and fine aggregate
h) Removal and replacement of any concrete placed without the prior
knowledge and agreement of the Engineer.
i) Removal and replacement of concrete not manufactured, placed and
compacted in accordance with these specifications
j) Curing compound and all operations involved in use.
k) Forming expansion and contraction joints including making drainage and
other holes where such joints occur.
l) Filling of holes left by the removal of concrete cores with the concrete of
the same grade.
m) Removal and replacement of any concrete damaged during the execution
of work.
n) For repairing of concrete as mentioned in 12.15.
12.21 Polypropylene (PP) synthetic fiber:
This chapter contains specifications of polypropylene fibres in concrete to gain higher
fire resistance and a reduction of shrinkage cracks of inner lining concrete.
The Polypropylene (PP) synthetic fiber shall be made of 100% virgin Polypropylene
having length of 24 mm (+/- 0.25 mm) with diameter of around 28 micron having
aspect ratio of approximately 860. The fibers should be having low thermal and
electrical conductivity and shall be 100% alkali proof with high acid and salt resistance.
The minimum dosage of fiber should be 2kg/m3 subjected to change as per the test
278
results. The fiber should be first added in rotating drum and then
sand/cement/chips/water should be added. All the aspects indicated in the EFNARC
guidelines for the polypropylene fiber reinforced concrete have to be obtained to
characterize the concrete after the tests.
12.21.1 Material
1. Fibres shall be 100 % polypropylene and conform to the requirements of European
Standard EN 14889-2 “Fibres for concrete - Part 2.
2. Fibres shall have a round cross section with a diameter of 15 – 20 µm and be slightly
crimped. Fibre length shall be 3 – 6mm.
3. The tensile strength of fibres shall be at least 400 N/mm².
4. The melting point shall be at 150 – 160°C.
12.21.2 Quality Control and Testing
Quality control and testing of concrete with polypropylene fibres shall be carried out in
the same manner as specified in Clause Error! Reference source not found.. In addition the
following shall be carried out
12.21.3 Tests prior start of concrete works
1. The actual fibre content of polypropylene fibre concrete shall be tested by washing
out of fibres of three different fresh concrete samples. Tests shall be performed at
least every 20th concreting section, e.g. at least every 20th block.
2. For every delivery of polypropylene fibres, on 3 samples, each 1 kg and taken from
different packages the following inspections shall be carried out:
• Visual insption of fibres
• Control of length and diameter of fibres
Each sample shall be stored on construction site for at least 2 months after inspection
for further tests
12.21.4 Batching and Mixing
1. Batching and mixing of concrete with polypropylene fibres shall be as detailed in
Clause Error! Reference source not found..
2. Amount of fibres per cum is the dry weight of the fibres. Amount of fibres per cum
concrete shall be 2 kg.
12.21.5 Placing of Concrete

Placing of concrete with polypropylene fibres shall be carried out in the same manner as
specified in Clause Error! Reference source not found. and Error! Reference source not
found.
12.21.1 Measurements and Payments
It will be measure and paid by the theoretical quantity in Kg added to the concrete mix
per m3 of concrete installed.
Inspections and tests to control the quantity of polypropylene fibers in the concrete
shall to be carried out.
Before starting placing concrete with polypropylene fibres, the Contractor shall make
sure that the measurements of polypropylene fibre concrete have been recorded and
that the Engineer has certified the correctness fibres used
279
13.0 FORMWORK
13.1 Scope of Work
1) The Specification described herein under relate to the Formwork. This Work shall
include all labour, plant and materials, and services related to the design,
fabrication, supply, erection, maintenance and removal of formwork and false
work to be carried out by the Contractor under this Contract.
2) The formwork shall be fabricated and erected to the dimensions of finished
surfaces of concrete as shown on the drawings or as otherwise directed by the
Engineer.
13.2 Submittals
1) At least 60 days prior to the construction of steel formwork for the tunnel lining
as also the formwork for other concrete works, the Contractor shall submit, to the
Engineer, the following:
a) Shop drawings, details and structural computations of the formwork
construction.
b)
Details of materials which the Contractor intends to use for the fabrication
of formwork.
13.3 General
1) Forms of formwork shall mean the mould into which concrete is placed.
2) False-work or shoring shall mean the structural supports and bracing for forms
used in any part of the Works.
3) All exposed concrete surfaces having slopes of 1.5:1 or steeper, shall be formed
unless otherwise directed.
4) Where the character of the natural material cut in, to receive concrete is such that
it can be trimmed to the prescribed lines, the use of forms shall not be required
provided the other precautions under Clause 12.9 of Section 12 are carried out by
Contractor.
13.4 Materials
1) Forms shall be timber, steel or other approved material, except that the sheeting
for all exposed surfaces, where form lining is not specified shall, be of tongue and
groove timber of uniform width unless otherwise by the Engineer.
2) All materials used in formwork construction shall be of adequate strength and
quality for their intended purpose and shall be satisfactory to the Engineer.
3) Timber shall be sound, straight, free from warp, decay and loose knots, and shall
be dressed smooth.
4) Where plywood is used, it shall be non-wrinkling and manufactured with special
water proof glues. Plywood sheets shall be of uniform width and length.
5) The surface of steel or steel lined forms shall be smooth. Forms with dents,
buckled areas or other surface irregularities shall not be used.
6) Reuse of forms and form lumber shall be allowed only if they are thoroughly
cleaned and repaired and capable of producing the finish required for the
concrete. Timber or plywood forms required with metal patches shall not be used
unless permitted by the Engineer.
7) Damaged forms or forms which have deteriorated through usage shall not be
used.
280
8) Form oil used on surfaces of timber or plywood forms shall be a straight, paraffin
base refined, pale, mineral oil. The oil used on the surface of steel forms shall be
specially compounded petroleum oil and other oils of animal or vegetable origin
and gums or resins which are heavier in body and frequently darker than straight
petroleum oils shall be used in the case of steel lining forms. The Contractor may
use any other material also for coating of the formwork with the approval of the
Engineer.
9) Forms of like character shall be used for similar exposed surface in order to
produce a uniform appearance.
10) The type, size, shape, quality and strength of all materials from which forms are
made shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor but subject to the approval
of the Engineer.
11) In general, forms for permanently exposed surface shall consist of or shall be lined
with matched or dressed edge grain timber of appropriate thickness, free from
loose or cracked knots.
12) Metal forms or metal-lined forms shall be permitted for permanently exposed
surfaces only when an entire surface is to be built completely with such forms.
13.5 Design, Fabrication, Erection and Maintenance of Formwork
1) Forms and false work shall be designed, fabricated, erected and removed in
accordance with the applicable provisions of the recommended practice for
concrete formwork of IS: 456-2000 as required by the Engineer and as specified
herein.
2) All false work shall be designed to withstand safely all live and dead loads,
necessary pressures, ramming and vibrations without significant deflection from
the prescribed lines, which might be applied to the false work during all stages of
construction, service and removal. Possible higher thickness as indicates on the
drawings shall be considered according to possible actual conditions and to the
contractor procedures for drill & blast, shotcreting, etc.
3) The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the design, construction and
maintenance of all formwork and false work required in the work.
4) Detailed drawings of shoring and false work shall be prepared by the Contractor.
The calculations and drawings shall show the size and specification of the false
work, including the type and grade of all materials used in the construction,
design load on false work supports, horizontal forces imposed on the false work
and used for design purpose, and details of splices and connections, including
nails, spikes and other fasteners. If mechanical equipment such as concrete
buggies, screening machines, etc., are to be used, this information shall be shown
on the drawings.
5) False work shall be constructed only after the false work drawings have been
6) The approval by the Engineer of Contractor’s drawings shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility for the adequacy of form and false-work, or for the
successful completion of the work.
7) The Contractor shall construct the false work strictly in accordance with the
approved false work drawings, one set of which shall be kept on the site at all
times, and no changes shall be allowed without prior written acceptance of such
changes by the Engineer.
8) Forms shall be designed to permit the concrete to be deposited, as nearly as is
practicable, directly in its final position, and to allow inspection, checking and
clean up of the formwork and reinforcement to be completed without delay.
9) Formwork and false work shall be designed, constructed, erected and maintained
such as to confine the concrete without loss of mortar and produce finished
surface which are within the tolerances specified.
281
10) Forms for concrete against which backfill is to be placed or which shall not be
exposed to view, may be constructed of smooth tight boards not less than 25 mm
nominal thickness.
11) Forms for concrete exposed to flow of water or exposed to view shall be
constructed of steel or ply wood which is smooth and free from defects with
matched and sanded joints to give a symmetrical pattern over the entire area.
Chamfer strips, 40 mm by 40 mm, shall be use done all exposed corners, unless
otherwise specified or required by the Engineer.
12) Form ties, supports, anchors, braces, spreaders and other similar devices which
shall be embedded in the concrete for holding the forms shall incorporate
threaded metal bars to facilitate removal of forms. Wood spreaders shall not be
left in the forms. Any metal remaining embedded in the concrete shall be at least
50 mm from the surface of concrete. Holes left in the concrete by removal of parts
of form ties or similar devices shall be well filled with cement mortar and neatly
finished to match the adjacent concrete.
13) Form inserts or other similar permanently embedded items shall be accurately
located and securely fastened in place. The number and location of form ties and
bolts shall be such as to ensure that forms fit tightly against the concrete
previously placed and remain in tight contact during operations.
14) Forms shall be set and maintained within the specified tolerance limits such that
the complete concrete surfaces are within these limits.
15) All form surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before erection and shall be
lubricated with a non-staining mineral oil. All excess oil shall be wiped off the
forms prior to placement of concrete. Oil shall not be allowed to come into
contact with reinforcing steel or other embedded items. For use of timber forms,
the oil shall be capable of penetrating the timber and keeping it sufficiently oily to
eliminate sticking and preventing absorption of water and consequent warping.
16) The oils shall be applied by brush, spray or swab and the forms shall be covered
fully and evenly without excess or drip. Care shall be taken to prevent oil from
getting in the surface of construction joints. Special care shall be taken to oil
thoroughly the form strips for narrow groove seats.
17) Immediately before concrete is placed, all forms shall be inspected to ensure that
they are properly placed, sufficiently rigid, clean, tight and properly surface
treated and free from encrustations of mortar, grout or other foreign materials.
No concrete shall be placed until formwork has been inspected and accepted by
the Engineer. Where forms of continuous surfaces are placed in successive units,
the forms shall fit tightly over the surface so as to prevent leakage of mortar from
the concrete and to maintain accurate alignment of the surface.
18) The formwork for the gate groove areas shall be accurately drilled to be held with
first stage anchor couplings/plates to be embedded in primary concrete, Both
shall be fixed through formwork into the first stage anchor couplings/plates to
ensure that the couplings/plates remain flush with primary concrete face and the
couplings do not get plugged.
19) Where timber forms are used, the laying shall be in the direction which will blend
architecturally into the lines of the structures, as decided by the Engineer.
20) Curved and special forms shall be such that these will result in smooth concrete
surfaces. They shall be designed and constructed so that they will not warp or
spring up during erection or placing concrete.
21) When metal sheets are used for lining forms, the sheets shall be placed and
maintained on the form with the minimum amount of wrinkles, humps or other
imperfections. The use of sheet metal to cover imperfections in the lining of
timber faced forms for surfaces that shall be permanently exposed to view, shall
not be permitted.
282
22) Where plywood or hardboard is used for form lining, the joints between the
sheets shall be smooth and as perfect as practicable and no patching of the
plywood or hardboard shall be permitted for permanently exposed surfaces.
Minor imperfections in the ply wood may be corrected by the use of plastic wood
secured firmly in place and sand papered smooth.
23) Wire ties shall be permitted for the forms when specially approved by the
Engineer and shall be cut off flush with the surface of concrete, after the forms are
removed. Wire ties shall not be used when permanently exposed finished
surfaces are required.
24) Forms shall be so constructed that the finished concrete surfaces shall be of
uniform texture in accordance with the type of finish specified for concrete
surfaces in these Specifications.
25) The erection of formwork in position shall be rapid enough, rigid and strong to
withstand concreting operations and maintain the alignment. Panels of similar
shape shall be identical and inter-changeable.
26) For special section/shapes, timber/steel form shall be used, as approved by the
Engineer.
27) The Contractor shall strengthen or modify the formwork, whenever required by
the Engineer.
28) Unless authorized, suitable mouldings shall be placed to level all exposed edges, at
construction joints, and any other edges shown on the drawings, or as required by
the Engineer. The final detailed drawings shall show any formed recesses, slots,
block outs and similar construction details, which have to be kept into account in
fixing the formwork.
29) Forms shall be maintained, at all times, in good condition, particularly as to size,
shape, strength, rigidity, tightness and smoothness of surface. Local deformations
for the surface of the gantry or uniform deformations bigger than 30mm in 10m
are not allowed.
30) The Engineer will, at any time, have the right to reject formwork which he
considers to be no longer fit for use.
13.6 Removal of Formwork
1) Forms shall not be removed until the concrete has hardened and has attained a
crushing strength of at least twice the stress which the concrete may be subjected
to at the time of removal of forms. Generally not less than EMPa.
2) Duration for which the forms shall remain in place shall be decided by the
Engineer, with reference to weather condition, shape, position of the structure or
structural members and the nature and magnitude of dead and live loads. The
forms shall not be removed without the permission of the Engineer.
3) The following minimum intervals of time shall generally, be allowed between
completion of placing of concrete and removal of forms but the period shall
increased in case of wet or cold weather and also at the option of the Engineer.
Structure Period in days with normal Portland cement
(a) Beam sides, walls columns (Unloaded) 3
(b) Slabs and arches (Props left under) 4
(c) Props to slabs and arches 10
(d) Beam soffits (Props left under) 8
(e) Props to beams 21
(f) Mass concrete 2
The above minimum periods are only recommendatory. The Contractor, may,
where he so desires, extend the above to longer intervals. This shall not, however,
constitute any reason for any claim for extension of time or damage to concrete
283
etc.
4) If the Contractor desires to remove the forms earlier than the period stated above
by addition of cement and/or suitable admixtures in the concrete, so as to gain
early strength without affecting long term strengths, the matter shall be examined
by the Engineer in each case and his decision in the matter shall be final and
binding.
5) Heavy live loads shall not be permitted until after the concrete has reached its
design strength.
6) The forms shall be removed with great caution and without jarring the structure
or throwing heavy forms upon the floor. In order to achieve this end, wedges and
clamps shall be used whenever practicable instead of nails.
7) In order to avoid excessive stress in the concrete that might result from swelling
of the forms, wood forms for wall opening shall be loosened as soon as this can be
accomplished without damage to the concrete. Forms for the opening shall be
constructed so as to facilitate such loosening.
8) The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any damage that may be caused by
negligence, lack of proper precautions or hastiness etc. in the matter of removal of
forms and shall make the same good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
13.7 Measurements and Payments
No separate payment shall be made for formwork and the rates for formwork are deemed
to be included into the quoted rates of relevant items.
284
14.0 STEEL FOR REINFORCEMENT

14.1 Scope of Work
The specifications described herein-under relate to the work which includes all labour,
materials, equipment and services required for the supply, handling, storing, cutting,
bending, cleaning, placing and fastening into position all reinforcing steel, as shown on
the drawings, to be carried out by the Contractor under the Contract.
14.2 Submittals
1) Within 30 days from the date of issue of the Letter of acceptance but before
procuring or mobilization to site, the equipment, the Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer, the description and drawings showing sufficient details of the layout
type and capacity of the equipment proposed for the fabrication of reinforcing
steel.
2) At least 30 days in advance of the reinforced concrete works being carried out on
the site, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, detailed bar list
and bending diagrams showing the number, size, length and bending of all bars
required for various parts of the work on the basis of the reinforcement drawings
issued by the Engineer from time to time during the progress of works.
3) Certificate of testing at the time of procurement submitted to the Engineer as per
Section 3 shall clearly state the unit weight of various type/diameters/ thickness/
sizes of steel.
14.3 Standards
1) The protection coating shall be considered considering the severe condition of
exposure. cutting, welding, placement and binding of reinforcing steel shall
conform to following Indian Standards or, where not covered by these Standards,
to their equivalent International Standards
IS: IRS/CBC
IS: 456-2000
IS : 1786-1985 (Reaffirmed 1990)
IS: 2502-1963 (Reaffirmed 1990)
IS: 2751 -1979 (Reaffirmed 1992)
IS: 9417-1989
In case of conflict between the above Standards and the Specifications given
herein, the Specifications shall take precedence.
14.4 General
1) Steel for reinforcement shall conform to the following or where not covered by
these standards, to the equivalent International standards and as approved by
client :
IS : 432 (Part-1) -1982
IS : 2062 – 1999
IS : 1786 – 1985 (reaffirmed 2000)
2) Cutting, bending, cleaning placing and fastening in position of the reinforcement
steel shall conform to the requirements of relevant Indian Standards and as
shown on the drawings.
Transportation and storage of reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements
outlined in Section 3 of this Specification.
285
14.5 Fabrication
1) All bars shall be cut and bent in accordance with the bar bending schedules
2) Reinforcing steel bars shall be cut and bent on the Site of the Works.
3) Reinforcing steel shall not be straightened or re-bent in a manner that will
damage the materials. Bars with kinks or bends other than those indicated on the
drawings and schedules shall not be used.
4) Shorter lengths of steel shall not be used in place where continuous lengths are
required as per the drawings without the approval of the Engineer. Shorter bars, if
approved for use, shall be lapped or spliced to achieve continuity in accordance
with the requirements of relevant Indian Standards or as approved by the
Engineer.
5) Bars shall be bent cold to the shape and dimensions shown on the drawings using
a bar bender operated by hand or power to attain the proper radii of bends.
6) A hook at the end of the M S bar, if used, shall have an inner diameter not less than
four times the diameter of the bar and shall have length of straight part beyond
the curve of the least four times the diameter of the bar. Hooks shall be used only
where shown on drawings or as required by the Engineer.
7) The radii of bends for stirrups and ties shall not be less than twice the diameter of
the bar.
8) Heating of reinforcement bars to facilitate bending shall not be permitted.
9) The reinforcement available from rejected reinforced concrete shall not be used
without prior approval of the Engineer.
14.6 Placing
1) Before being placed in position, the reinforcing steel shall be thoroughly cleaned
of loose mill scale and rust, grease, paint, or other coatings that would reduce
bond. All splashed concrete which has dried on reinforcing steel shall be removed.
2) Reinforcing steel to be incorporated in the works shall be placed accurately in
positions as shown on the drawings and shall be held firmly in place during the
placing and setting of the concrete.
3) Reinforcing steel shall be so placed that there will be a clear distance of at least 50
mm between the reinforcing steel and anchor bolts or embedded metal work.
4) Reinforcing steel shall be maintained in position by the use of small concrete
blocks, steel chairs, steel spacer, steel hangers and other steel supports and ties,
acceptable to the Engineer at sufficiently close intervals so that they do not either
sag between supports or be displaced during placing of concrete or by any
operation on the work. Wood supports or spreaders shall not be used. All
intersection shall be securely tied except that where the bar spacing is less then
300 mm in each direction, only alternate intersections need be tied.
5) Binding wire and steel chairs shall not be carried to permanently exposed surface
and shall be subject to the same requirements with regard to concrete cover as for
the reinforcing steel.
6) Special care shall be exercise to prevent any disturbances of the reinforcement in
concrete that has already been placed. The reinforcement after being placed in
position shall be maintained in a clean condition until it is completely embedded
in concrete.
7) The longitudinal bars shall be straight and fixed parallel to each other and to the
sides of the form as shown on the drawings. The ties, links and stirrups connected
to the bars shall be tightly fixed so that the bars are properly braced. The inside of
their curved part shall be in actual contact with the bars around which they are
fixed and their position shall be exact as shown on the drawings.
8) Wire for tying reinforcement shall be black annealed iron wire. The diameter of
286
wire shall be adequate and shall have an ultimate strength of 5.63 tonne per Sq.
cm and yield point of not less than 3.87 tonnes per Sq.cm
9) Reinforcement for lining in underground cavities and other locations may be fixed
by means of anchor rod or supporting and hanger rods as approved by the
Engineer. In difficult locations, tack welding of bars at isolated spots may be
permitted to keep these bars in position provided that diameter of the bars is not
reduced adjacent to the weld.
10) The steel bars shall be joined by providing lap joints in accordance with the
requirements of the relevant Indian Standards Sufficient concrete coverage, as
indicated on the drawings shall be provided to protect reinforcement from
corrosion. All protruding bars from concrete to which other bars are to be
attached and which shall be exposed to action of the weather for long period shall
be protected from rusting by thin coat of neat cement grout. Accurate record shall
be kept at all the times of the number, sizes, lengths and weights of bars placed in
position different parts of the work.
11) Where reinforcement bars are bent aside at construction joints and afterwards
bent back into their original positions, care shall be taken to ensure that at no
time is the radius of the bend less than 4 bar diameter for plain mild steel or 6 bar
diameter for deformed bars. Care shall also be taken when bending back bars, to
ensure that the concrete around the bar is not damaged.
14.7 Welding for Reinforcement
1) Lap splices shall not be used for bars larger then 36mm diameter, which may be
welded with the approval of the Engineer. In cases where welding is not
practicable, lapping of bars larger then 36mm may be permitted, in which case,
additional spirals shall be provided around the lapped bars. Where welding is
approved, the Contractor shall prepare at least three samples of butt welds as
directed by the Engineer. These specimens shall be got tested by the Contactor in
recognized laboratory. If the results are satisfactory, the Engineer may allow
welding in place of lap joints. The decision of the Engineer in this regard shall be
final. The joints shall be butt welded by the electric-arc-method. The ends of the
bars shall be cleaned of all loose scale, rust, grease, or other foreign materials and
all welding shall conform to the relevant Standard Specifications for welding of
reinforcement bars used in reinforced concrete construction or as directed by the
Engineer.
2) A weld shall be considered unsatisfactory if it fails to sustain a tensile stress of at
least 90% of the tensile strength of the bar in which the weld has been made.
14.8 Tolerance For Placing Reinforcing Steel.
Unless otherwise required by the Engineer, reinforcement shall be placed within the
following tolerances.
For effective depth of 200 mm or less + 10 mm
For effective depth more than 200 mm + 15 mm
The cover shall, in no case, be reduced by more than one-third of specified cover or 5mm
whichever is less.
14.9 Measurement and Payments
1) Measurement for payment for reinforcing bars and wire mesh will be of the
weight of reinforcement steel including hooks, bends, steel chairs, hanger,
spacers, other supports, ties and anchor rods and splice (overlaps) actually
installed and approved by the Engineer. Actual lengths of reinforcement bars and
actual areas of wire mesh including permissible hooks, bends and splices
(overlaps) will be measured. The weight of the reinforcing bars or wire mesh will
then be calculated for each size of bar / wire mesh from the Unit weights as stated
287
on the certified copies of manufacture’s reports, which the Contractor shall

submit to the Engineer.
2) Before starting concreting, the Contractor shall make sure that the measurements
of reinforcing bars placed in position have been recorded and that the Engineer
has certified the correctness of the reinforcement used.
3) For the purpose of payment, a welded joint will be considered as equivalent to a
length of bar 30 times the diameter of the bar in which the weld is made
4) Payment will be made at the Unit Rate per metric tonne entered in the Bill of
Quantities, which shall include the entire cost of supply, handling, storage, cutting,
bending, placing, wire clips, ties, separators and any other fastening devices.
14.10 Exclusions
a) Wire for tying reinforcement
b) Any additional reinforcement or splices required when Contractor’s casting
sequences differ from construction joints shown on the drawings.
c) Any reinforcing steel placed by the Contractor for his own convenience in
addition to this shown on the drawings
d) Devices small concrete blocks, other supports etc. used to maintain the
reinforcing steel in position.
e) Any reinforcing steel delivered for testing
f) Carrying out tests for checking butt welds to replace lapping / splicing of
reinforcing bars.
288
15.0 SHOTCRETE FOR INNER LINING

15.1 GENERAL
Shotcrete for the Primary Lining (Outer Lining) is specified in Chapter 8.3 of this
Specification. The specifications of Chapter 9.3 shall also apply for the shotcrete used
for the construction of the Inner Lining (Secondary Lining) unless otherwise specified
in this Section.
The early strength requirements for the shotcrete as specified in Clause 8.3.5.1 (1)
shall not apply. The 3, 7 and 28 day strength criteria as specified in Clauses 8.3.5.1 (2)
and (3) shall apply and the corresponding tests shall be carried out as specified in
Clause 8.3.8.
Additional requirements for the shotcrete of the Inner Lining shall be as specified in
the following:
15.2 MATERIAL
1) Shotcrete for the Inner Lining shall only be wet-mix shotcrete.
2) The shotcrete shall comply with the requirements for grade M25 as specified in
Clause 8.3.5.1 (2).
3) The wet-mix for the shotcrete shall have a water/binder ration of less than 0.5. The
term “binder” shall comprise all cementitious material.
4) The maximum accelerator dosage for the shotcrete shall be 5% (of the cement
weight).
15.3 EXECUTION
1) Before applying the shotcrete for the Inner Lining, the surface of the Outer Lining
shall be cleaned by means of a high-pressure water jet.
2) Installation of wire mesh shall be carried out in a way that an overlap of four layers
of mesh does not exist at any location.
3) In case of several shotcrete layers, construction joints shall be staggered.
289
16.0 SCOPE OF ENGINEERING GEOLOGICAL MAPPING AND

FOLLOW-UP
16.1 Introduction
(1) The purpose of engineering geological mapping and follow-up is the
documentation of rock - and rock mass conditions as encountered during
excavation. The documentation shall enable the verification of the suitability of
the designed support and excavation measures, the prediction of rock mass
conditions ahead as well as the interpretation of results of the geotechnical
monitoring concerning ground deformations.
(2) The mapping and documentation of encountered geological conditions during the
excavation shall be based on a uniform legend and shall use uniform terms for the
description of features which have to be recorded.
(3) To facilitate this procedure form sheets shall be used which include all the topics
which have to be recorded if encountered.
(4) In general the mapping shall be performed in a scale 1:100. If necessary, details
shall be mapped in a suitable scale.
(5) Based on the follow-up mapping a vertical as well as a horizontal cross section
shall be drawn, where the actual mapping results are incorporated continuously
on a daily basis.
(6) The vertical section shall be located along the axis of the tunnel. The horizontal
section has to be fixed according to the chosen excavation cross section (full face,
top heading - bench etc.). In case the tunnel is excavated by top heading - bench
excavation the horizontal cross section shall be drawn on the level of the invert of
the top heading. The proposed scale is 1:200 or 1:500; horizontal and vertical
scale shall be the same.
16.2 Geological Documentation
16.2.1 General
The geological documentation shall include one page showing the mapping of the exposed
rock face in a scale 1:100, the full periphery mapping of the crown and side walls in a scale
1:100 as well as a data sheet with all recorded features.
Mapping shall be performed at fresh excavated faces, right after installation of measures,
which enable safe entry to the excavated section.
Terms as given in Clause 16.2.2.2are examples and can be adjusted or supplemented
according to the encountered features.
16.2.2 Terminology
16.2.2.1 Rock Types / Rock Mass Types
1) The rock types shall be filled in with standardised names and terms
2) The rock mass can occur in different qualities according to the influence of weathering,
tectonic stress and/or strain (shearing, faulting, folding). Therefore, the rock mass type
shall be described when different qualities can be distinguished.
16.2.2.2 Discontinuities
(1) Possible types of discontinuities and abbreviations:
B : bedding plane
S : schistosity
J : joint
290
JSL: joint with slickensides

F : fault
A : axis (of fold etc.)
ST : striation
(2) Orientation of discontinuities:
Discontinuities shall be measured in dip direction / dip angle.
(3) Shape of discontinuities and abbreviations:
P : planar
U : undulating
(4) Roughness of discontinuities and abbreviations:
P : polished
S : smooth
R : rough
(5) Persistence of discontinuities and abbreviations:
The persistence of discontinuities shall be related to the size of the unsupported
area (e.g. tunnel face).
H : high, discontinuities can be traced in a length
exceeding the unsupported area
M : medium, discontinuities can be traced within the
unsupported area exceeding the half of its span
L : low, discontinuities can be traced within the
unsupported area less than half of its span
(6) Spacing of discontinuities:
The spacing of discontinuities shall be classified according the following ranges:
> 60 cm, 20 - 60 cm, 6 - 20 cm, 2 - 6 cm, < 2 cm
(7) Filling/Thickness of discontinuities and abbreviations:
The type and the thickness of fillings of open discontinuities shall be described.
Possible types with abbreviations are stated below.
Cl : clay (weathering product)
Qu : quartz
Ca : calcite
Gy : gypsum
MFG : mylonitic fault gouge
MFB : mylonitic fault breccias
MCB : mylonitic crush breccias
O : open without filling
The thickness shall be measured in cm
16.2.2.3 Jointing of Rock Mass
The jointing of the rock mass shall be described by determination of the maximum average
spacing of discontinuities using the ISRM standard terminology (1981).
16.2.2.4 Water
Water seepage shall be described by the determination of location, amount (dry, damp, wet,
dripping, running [l/sec]) and condition [colour, smell] of the water as well as by the impact of
the water on the rock mass [soaking, break down].
291
16.2.2.5 Weathering
The description of the degree of weathering shall be based on the terminology shown in the
following table or on the GSI weathering description (1995).
Table 16.1 – Rock weathering degree
Descriptive term with

Field identification test
Abbreviation
Fresh (F) Rock shows no signs of weathering (discoloration, decomposition).
Rock is locally discoloured (stains of discontinuities, discoloured
Slightly Weathered (SW)
adjacent to discontinuities).
Rock is dis-coloured, discontinuities have discoloured surfaces with
Moderately Weathered (MW)
weathering starting to penetrate inwards.
Rock is discoloured almost throughout. Weathering penetrates
Highly Weathered (HW)
deeply inwards, but corestones are still present.
Rock is decomposed to soil but original fabric and structure are still
Completely Weathered (CW)
visible, occasionally small corestones are possible.
All rock material is converted to soil. The mass structure and material
Residual Soil(RS) fabric are destroyed, change in volume but no significant
transportation.
16.2.2.6 Rock Strength

The description of the intact rock strength should be based on the terminology shown in the
table or, better, on direct, quantitative data (lab tests or Schmidt Hammer in situ tests).
Table 16.2 – Rock strength description

Descriptive term with
Field estimate of strength
abbreviations
Extremely Strong (ES) Rock material only chipped under repeated hammer blows
Very Strong (VS) Requires many blows of a geological hammer to break intact rock specimens
Strong (S) Hand held specimens broken by single blow of geological hammer
Firm blow with geological pick indents rock to 5 mm, knife just scrapes
Medium Strong (MS)
surface
Weak (W) Knife cuts material but too hard to shape triaxial specimens
Material crumbles under firm blows of geological pick, can be shaped with
Very Weak (VW)
knife
Extremely Weak (EW) Indented by thumbnail
16.2.2.7 Behavior of Rock Mass

See section 7.6 “rock mass behaviors class”
16.2.2.8 Over break
In case over break due to geological reasons has been encountered, which exceeds the
tolerance location, shape, and reasons of the over break shall be recorded where possible
16.3 Execution
16.3.1 General
1) The documentation of the tunnels shall be based on the mapping of the face and the
full periphery mapping method. The full periphery mapping method shall be
applied for the permanent walls only.
2) The frequency shall be adjusted to the variability of the encountered ground
conditions. In case ground conditions are frequently changing within one round
length each round shall be mapped. Each drive which is under construction shall be
checked at least once a day.
292
16.3.2 Face Mapping Sheet
(1) The form sheet for mapping shall show the area to be mapped in a scale of 1:100.
(2) The position of the laser beams on the face as well as the steel rib connections may
be marked as drafting guides.
(3) The Face Mapping Sheet shall contain all the details as shown in the Tender
Documents – Volume II “Proformas”
(4) Remarks can be stated directly on the mapping sheet or can be referred to the Face
Mapping Sheet.
16.4 Measurement and Payment
No payment shall be made for the work as described in this Chapter and costs shall be
included in the unit rates for Earthworks (Chapter 4) and Underground excavation
(Chapter 5).
293
17.0 PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENT

17.1 General
The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to protect the environment on and off the site
and to avoid damage or nuisance to persons or to property of the public or others resulting
from pollution, noise or other causes arising as a consequence of his methods of operation.
During continuance of the contract, the Contractor shall abide at all times by all existing
enactments on environmental protection and rules made there under, regulations,
notifications and bye-laws of the State and Central Government, or local authorities and any
other law, bye-law, regulations that may be passed or notifications that may be issued in this
respect in future by the State or Central Government or the local authority.
The Contractor shall implement the Environmental Management Plan (EMP) measures,
enhancement measures and measures as directed by Engineer and Detailed Design
Consultants (DDC) from time to time. Some of these measures as part of EMP are summarized
in Annex- 17.1. The Contractor shall submit a report on compliance as per the monitoring Plan
in Annex 17.2.The Contractor should submit these reports in the format given in Annex 17.3 to
the DDC.
The DDC will review, advise and approve these environmental clearance reports (ECRs)
submitted by the Contractor. Salient features of some of the major laws that are applicable are
given below.
17.1.1 The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974.

This provides for the prevention and control of water pollution and the maintaining and
restoring the wholesomeness of water. “Pollution means such contamination of water or such
alteration of the physical, chemical or biological properties of water or such discharge of any
sewage or trade effluent or of any other liquid, gaseous or solid substance into water(whether
directly or indirectly) as may or is like to, create a nuisance or render such water harmful or
injurious to public health or safety, or to domestic, commercial, industrial, agricultural or other
legitimate uses, or to the life and health of animals and plants or of aquatic organisms.
17.1.2 The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981.

This provides for the prevention, control and abatement of air pollution. ‘Air Pollution” means
the presence in the atmosphere of any ‘air pollutant” which means any solid, liquid or gaseous
substance (including noise) present in the atmosphere in such concentration as may be or
tend to be injurious to human beings or other living creatures or plants or properties or
environment.
17.1.3 The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986.

This provides for the protection and improvement of environment and for matters connected
therewith, and the prevention of hazards to human beings, other living creatures, plants and
property. ‘Environment includes water, air and land and the inter-relationship, which exists
among and between water, air and land, and human beings, other living creatures, plants,
microorganisms and property.
17.1.4 The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991.

This provides for public liability insurance for the purpose of providing immediate relief to the
persons affected by accident occurring while handling hazardous substances and for matters
connected herewith or incidental thereto. Hazardous substance means any
294
substance or preparation, which is, defined as hazardous substance under the Environment
(Protection) Act, 1986, and exceeding such quantity as may be specified by notification by the
Central government. Key Environmental legislation in India is reported in Annex 17.4.
17.2 Noise and vibration monitoring
17.2.1 Blasting vibrations
1. For structures in the proximity of blasting, the peak particle velocity (ppv) shall be
measured at the locations immediately adjacent to the structure nearest to the face being
blasted or any other location where it is necessary to limit vibration.
2. Buildings and structures at Sivok Yard and village in front of T6 portals shall be subjected
to structure’s measurement.
3. As per Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (Wildlife Division), ...’The
construction of tunnels in the sanctuary area up to 30m of overburden should only be
carried out during the day time. There should be no blast inside the tunnels up to 20m of
overburden…’. Thus, sensors for vibration monitoring shall also be placed on surface
above the tunnel alignment up to 50m of overburden.
2. Vibration monitoring proposals shall be submitted to the Engineer for his agreement.
3. The measurement of peak particle velocity shall be obtained from instruments capable of
measuring along three orthogonal axes, one of which shall be aligned parallel to the centre
line of excavation and another shall be vertical. The Contractor is to provide supports for
the measuring instrument if so required by the manufacturer’s instructions.
4. The measurements of the particle velocities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Copies of the readings in an agreed form shall be supplied to the Engineer.
5. Equipment for vibration shall be in accordance with BS 7385 Part 2: 1993.
6. Prior to the commencement of blasting in any location, the Contractor shall demonstrate
by the use of test firings, or by other means, that neither the peak particle velocities given
in BS 7385 Part 2 nor those stated in Particular Specification will be exceeded.
17.2.2 Noise and vibration monitoring
1. Where monitoring is required the Contractor shall provide, calibrate, operate according to
the manufacture’s recommendations appropriate equipment for monitoring construction
noise and vibration throughout the construction period.
2. Noise analysers shall be capable of measuring unattended the equivalent continuous noise
level,
3. Vibration monitoring shall be in accordance with BS 7385.
4. The Contractor shall arrange for adequate standby equipment.
17.2.3 Noise and vibration levels
1. The Contractor shall measure the noise and vibration levels generated by the construction
work during working hours throughout the period of construction.
2. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately whenever the specified noise or
vibration limit has been exceeded, and agree measures to avoid repetition.
3. Any items of plant causing excessive noise or vibration levels shall be removed from the
site and substituted by alternative compliant equipment.
4. The Engineer may instruct the Contractor to device and use an alternative process if a
construction method is causing unnecessary disturbance.
5. (DGMS Circular No. 7 (1997): Depending on the type of structure and the dominant
excitation frequency, the peak particle velocity (ppv) on the ground adjacent to the
structure shall not exceed values given below in the table xx DGMS (India) standards
(1997).
295
17.2.4 Recommendations to reduce impact induced blasting
- Setting of regression line (scale distance and ppv corelation) to calculate maximum charge
per delay with respect to distance for safer blasting operation.
- 100% use of non-electric detonator to keep vibration and noise under limit
- Coupling ratio needs to be near to 100% (explosive dia /hole dia)
- Drilling angles, depths to be accurate as planned
- Adequate and appropriate delays to be used
- Use parallel cuts wherever possible
- Use milli-second delays in cut portion, not half second delays (10ms/ft of burden)
- Use more burn holes (+3) of larger dia (75-110mm)
- Use baby cuts as a must in wedge cuts
- Others
17.2.5 References:
- DGMS technical circular No. 7, 1997

- BS 7385-2: 1993 ‘Evaluation and measurement for vibration in buildings’
- BS ISO 4866: 2010 ‘Guidelines for the measurement of vibrations and evaluation of their
effects on structures’
- IS 14881: 2001 ‘Method for Blast Vibration Monitoring – Guidelines’
- Report of Vibration Monitoring at Pir Panjal Tunnel – T – 80, 2008 by Gulf Oil Corporation
Ltd.
- Specification for tunnelling, Thomas Telford, third edition.
296
ANNEX 17.1 - ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN DURING CONSTRUCTION
The Environmental Management Plan requires the Contractor to implement mitigation measures
to prevent, minimise or offset impacts resulting from the Contractor’s presence and activities
relating to the project. Mitigation measures for impacts due to Contractor activities are considered
for:
Socio-economic environment
Nature / ecology / landscape
Water
Climate / air, soil, agriculture, forestry
Management of Socio-Economic Environment
ACTIVITY IMPACT MITIGATION MEASURES BY THE CONTRACTOR
Establishment Accident risks from Avoid mobilization of heavy equipment at night
and running of mobilizing Oversize vehicles shall display warnings such as
Contractors’ construction flashing lights
workers’ camps, equipment
Warning and/or precaution signs on safety
site clearance
Use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
Instruction on health and safety
First aid facilities at the construction sites
Fencing-off of site
Health and social Induction for all site workers on environmental,
well-being of local occupational safety and health requirements; control
population due to the that induction is carried out.
introduction of Instruct workers not to interfere with local affairs or
workforce from quarrel with local people.
other places
HIV/AIDS education for locals and site workers.
Employ and train local persons to work on the
project.
Establishment of grievance mechanism for local
persons.
Allow local population close to the construction camp
to make use of camp medical facilities.
Concrete batching and aggregate crushing plants
shall be located on the down wind direction of
sensitive areas such as schools, hospitals or human
settlement etc. In unavoidable circumstances, the
time of the operation of the plant shall be limited.
Shielding of crushing plants and other loud plant
with noise barriers or shielding of nearby sensitive
receptors
Restriction of work between 10 pm and 6 am
Outbreak of disease HIV/AIDS education for locals and site workers.
Medical check on all workers after their arrival on
site and unhealthy workers shall not be allowed to
remain on site.
Necessary vaccinations shall be given to the workers
and vaccination records shall be maintained.
297

Site construction camps at least 100 m away from
rivers and as far as possible from local communities.
Provide enough water supplies for workers, and
ensure sufficient sanitation for the camp: the proper
drainage systems, and the proper locations for solid
waste disposal.
Medical treatment for Malaria should be available on
site.
Provide workers with mosquito nets.
Stagnant water anywhere on site shall be prevented,
e.g., by filling in of borrow pits.
Depletion of natural Where local materials must be used, make
resources through agreements with local communities about the areas
demand for building or the volume that can be harvested without
materials, fuel, and significant impact.
food for workers Support community development by paying an
adequate price for any local resources used.
Do not allow construction camps to become
permanent settlements.
Camps will be removed and the area brought back to
pre-construction condition prior to project
completion unless directed otherwise by the
Engineer.
Upon completion of construction, consideration will
be given to transfer camp structures to local people
for community or government use.
Occupational health The Contractor is required to comply with all the
and safety precautions as required for the safety of workmen as
per the International Labour Organisation (ILO)
Convention No. 62, as far as those are applicable to
the Contract.
Workers shall be provided with appropriate personal
protective equipment (PPE) such as safety shoes,
hard hats, safety glasses, ear plugs/mufflers (as per
Factory Act requirements), gloves, etc.
All workers shall receive an induction on health and
safety related to their activities as well as on the
proper use of PPE. All visitors to the Contractor who
intend to move around site must also receive a health
and safety induction. The Contractor shall maintain
records of environmental, health and safety
inductions.
All visitors to the Contractor must be supplied with
PPE before they move around site. These visitors
must be accompanied by Contractor personnel.
The use of PPE shall be monitored.
Where worker exposure to traffic cannot be
completely eliminated, protective barriers shall be
298

provided to shield workers from construction
vehicles. Another measure is to install channelling
devices (e.g., traffic cones and barrels) to delineate
the work zone. This applies to the construction areas.
Provision of distinguishing clothing or reflective
devices or otherwise conspicuously visible material
when there is regular exposure of workers to moving
vehicles.
The following facilities shall be provided at the
workers' camps:
Washing facilities and showers.´
Toilets/sanitation facilities with proper flushing
provisions in accordance with local regulations to
prevent any hazard to public health or contamination
of land, surface or groundwater. These facilities shall
be well maintained to allow effective operation.
Accommodation for taking meals and for shelters
during interruption of work due to adverse weather
conditions.
First aid room or station headed by qualified first aid
personnel or a nurse should be provided at a readily
accessible place for treatment of minor injuries and
as a rest place for seriously sick or injured workers.
The first aid unit shall include an adequate supply of
sterilized dressing material and appliances shall be
provided as per the requirements under the Factory
Act. Depending upon the number, the health facilities
shall be arranged as WHO norms.
Construction equipment shall be operated by
workers who have received appropriate training in
accordance with national laws and regulations.
The drivers and operators of vehicles and materials
handling equipment shall be medically fit, trained
and tested and of a prescribed minimum age as
required by the government rules and regulation.
Safety provisions shall be brought to the notice of all
concerned by displaying a notice board at a
prominent place at the work locations.
The Contractor shall be responsible for observance,
by his sub-contractors, of all health and safety
provisions.
All vehicles used in the construction yard should
have reverse horns.
Work areas should be properly demarcated with sign
boards. The sign boards should be in local language
and English.
Suitable warning should be displayed at all places
where contact with or proximity to electrical
equipment can cause danger.
299

Persons having to operate electrical equipment
should be fully instructed as to any possible danger
of the equipment concerned.
All the electrical equipment should be inspected
before it is taken into use to ensure that it is suitable
for its purpose.
Secure storage areas should be provided for
flammable liquids, solids and gases such as liquefied
petroleum gas cylinder, paints and other such
materials in order to deter trespassers.
Smoking should be strictly prohibited and no
smoking notices be predominantly displayed in all
places containing readily combustible or flammable
materials.
Only suitably protected electrical installations and
equipment, including portable lamps, should be used.
Oil rags, waste and clothes or other substances liable
to spontaneous ignition should be removed without
delay to a safe place.
Fire-extinguishing equipment shall be provided at
construction camps, asphalt plants, storage areas for
combustible materials and other areas where fire
hazards are found. Such equipment shall be properly
maintained and inspected at suitable intervals by a
competent person.
Public health and Barriers (e.g., temporary fence), shall be installed at
safety risks construction areas to deter pedestrian access to the
Tunnel Project except at designated crossing points.
The general public/local residents shall not be
allowed in high-risk areas, e.g., excavation sites and
areas where heavy equipment is in operation.
Speed restrictions shall be imposed on Project
vehicles and equipment when traversing areas with
sensitive receptors (residential, schools, temples,
etc.).
Pollution due to use Placement of hot-mix plants, quarrying and crushers,
and storage of batch mixing plants and discharge of sewage from
hazardous construction camps requires a No Objection
substances Certificate (Consent to Establish and Consent to
Operate) from the State Pollution Control Board
prior to establishment.
Encroachment on The Contractor will pay a fee to villagers for damage
water supply to water systems, based on number of days without
systems water until the system is fixed.
Disruption of Provide diversions where necessary/ possible
existing traffic Prevent landslides to the greatest extent through
careful excavation and/or support measures; clear
any landslides as quickly as possible
300

Allow local population to use blacktopped / secured
access roads
Construction Loss of vegetation No new quarries within provincial and district
and and habitat at the protected areas.
maintenance of quarries and borrow In case of new quarries operation, the quarries will
access roads pits be approved by the relevant Environmental
Monitoring Authorities.
Sourcing of Visual impact spoil Quarries will not be placed very near to the human
materials disposal, borrow pits, settlement.
and quarries
Impact from Pits may be reshaped and left flooded for water
extraction of storage or fishponds. Conversion of borrow pits to
construction fish ponds should be done in concurrence with the
materials local population.
Traffic disruption Employ “flag men” to regulate the traffic flow at
during construction every construction area and at key locations such as
crossings or single-lane sections to minimise
disturbance to local traffic.
Supply of Accidental risk of Install appropriate signs warning drivers to slow
materials to site injury or loss of life down in residential and livestock areas.
/ transport to people and
along access livestock from
roads increased traffic
volume and speed
from the
construction vehicles
Disturbance to local Installation of noise barriers
population at
sensitive areas (e.g.,
schools)
Damage to irrigation Dumping of spoils and fill materials into irrigation
canals due to project canals shall be avoided.
In case of obstruction or damage, irrigation ditches
and ponds shall be cleaned or repaired immediately
to the maximum extent possible.
Open Location of Concrete batching plant and rock crushers shall be
excavation, noisy/dusty located at least 500 m from settlements, schools, and
slope support construction other sensitive receptors.
works, bridges, installations
stations
Noise and vibration All construction vehicles shall have working mufflers
and they will be properly maintained.
Inform people of the possible vibration before using
vibrating rollers near settled areas.
Construction yards shall be located away from
settlement areas.
Activities that will generate high noise levels shall be
scheduled to coincide with periods when people are
301

least likely to be affected. Construction activities will
be strictly prohibited between 10 pm and 6 am in
residential areas.
Respect of religious holidays
Shielding of sensitive receptors with noise barriers
Welding machines operating on electricity and gas
should be used during construction activities.
Generation of muck Proper maintenance of the construction equipment
and wastewater and material transportation trucks.
Underground Generation of muck Proper maintenance of the construction equipment
excavation and wastewater and material transportation trucks.
Noise and vibration All construction vehicles will have working mufflers
Blasting activities should not disrupt the local
population activities.
Time blasting activities so as not to disturb local
people and notify them prior to undertaking such
activity.
If necessary, blasting shall be prohibited between
10 pm and 6 am.
Mobile noise protection curtain at portal areas
(closed for blasting)
Monitoring of noise levels at sensitive receptors
Shielding of sensitive receptors near portal areas
with noise barriers
Control if existing springs / wells are affected by the
tunnel excavation works. If so, study alternatives
with the Engineer in charge.
Muck disposal Noise and vibration All construction vehicles will have working mufflers
Activities that will generate high noise levels will be
scheduled to coincide with periods when people are
least likely to be affected. Construction activities will
be strictly prohibited between 10 pm and 6 am in
residential areas.
Inform people of the possible vibration before using
vibrating rollers near settled areas.
Respecting wishes of Allow input of local population on re-cultivation and
local population landscaping in accordance and coordinate work as
appropriate
Management of Nature / Ecology / Landscape
ACTIVITY IMPACT MITIGATION MEASURES
Establishment Loss of land, Return of re-cultivated land to landowners after
and running of buildings and completion of project
302

Contractors’ livelihoods
workers’ camps,
Biodiversity impact Planning of construction camp layout to ensure
site clearance
minimum encroachment.
No labour camp shall be located within the
Mahananda WLS.
Marked boundaries of camp
Construction camp management plan.
Site Waste Management Plan and its enforcement.
Prevention of poaching of wild animals by
construction workforce
Plan and carry out post construction site clean-up.
Felling of trees Forest clearance from the Department of Forests is
required for use of forest land for non-forest
purposes. Prior permission is required from the WB
Forest Department for work in forest areas and
felling of trees. Cutting of trees needs to be
compensated by afforestation as per the
requirements of the Department of Forests.
Labour force in the labour camps should be provided
with LPG cylinders to avoid encroachment on forest
area during construction phase.
Depletion of natural Where local materials must be used, make
resources through agreements with local communities about the areas
demand for or the volume that can be harvested without
building materials, significant impact.
fuel, and food for All supplies for building camps will be brought from
workers outside the area.
Camps will be removed and the area brought back to
pre-construction condition prior to project
completion.
Upon completion of construction, consideration will
be given to transfer camp structures to local people
for community or government use.
Impacts on wildlife Strict monitoring to prevent tree cutting and
through hunting.
interruption of Restriction of vehicles and personnel to construction
migratory routes site
and other habitat
disturbances
Pollution due to use Construction storage/stockpiles shall be provided
and storage of with bunds to prevent silt run-off.
hazardous Stockpile areas and storage areas for hazardous
substances substances shall be located away from water bodies.
Washing of machinery and vehicles in surface waters
shall be prohibited.
Hydrocarbon, toxic material and (explosives --- if
blasting is necessary) will be stored in adequately
303

protected sites to prevent soil and water
contamination while vehicle maintenance and re-
fuelling will be confined to areas at construction sites
designed to contain spilled lubricants and fuels.
Fuel depot shall be provided with impervious
flooring and bund/containment wall to keep spilled
fuel/lubricant within the depot.
Used oil and other toxic and hazardous materials
shall be disposed of in an authorized facility off-site.
Spill waste will be disposed at disposal sites
approved by local authorities.
All areas intended for storage of hazardous materials
will be quarantined and provided with adequate
facilities to combat emergency situations shall
comply with all applicable statutory stipulations.
The personnel in-charge of these sites will be
properly trained and these areas will be access
controlled and entry will be allowed only through
authorization.
Construction and Land-take Minimise necessary land-take for access roads.
maintenance of No additional or new path will be constructed inside
access roads the forest for any activity related to the project area.
If agricultural land is fragmented, provide accesses
Landslides and Consideration of geological setting during excavation
destabilisation of works and careful excavation.
hill slopes Implementation of slope support measures
immediately after excavation
Muck disposal only in pre-defined locations
Monitoring of destabilised hillsides
Rock fall Anchoring of large, un-jointed rock masses
Strong netting covering slopes to prevent rock fall
reaching roads
Sourcing of Loss of vegetation Avoid unnecessary damage to vegetation.
materials and habitat at the No new quarries within provincial and district
quarries and protected areas.
borrow pits
No cutting of trees outside of the construction zone.
In case of new quarries operation, the quarries will
be approved by the relevant Environmental
Monitoring Authorities.
Definition of site by perimeter fencing
Stopping of work if wildlife habitats are discovered
and abandoning these sites
Erosion and Pile topsoil from digging of borrows pits carefully to
instability of cut one side, where it can be later used for reclamation.
faces and borrow At the end of the construction phase, re-contour
pits borrow pit walls, replace topsoil, and re-vegetate.
304

Re-vegetate all cut slopes.
For re-vegetation purposes, use native varieties
according to the soil type, climate and ease of
maintenance. Saplings shall be planted to coincide
with appropriate season to ensure survival.
Degradation of The contractor shall observe environmentally
quarries and responsible procurement by sourcing materials from
borrow pits authorized quarries. According to the license
conditions, the quarry sites should have an approved
quarry site management and closure plan including
an Environmental Management Plan (EMP).
Priority must be given to the use of existing quarry
sites, if they are available and suitable.
If the contractor shall operate a quarry site, required
environmental permits shall be secured prior to
operation of quarry/borrow areas.
Topsoil, overburden, and low-quality materials shall
be properly removed, stockpiled near the site, and
preserved for rehabilitation.
Contractors shall ensure that borrow pits are left in a
tidy state with stable side slopes and proper
drainage in order to avoid creation of stagnant water
bodies, which are favourable places for mosquito
breeding.
Re-cultivation of Re-cultivate borrow pits and quarries by with native
quarries and species.
borrow pits Restoration of wildlife habitats
Visual impact spoil Where feasible, quarries will be sited away from the
disposal, borrow project area. Blasting and construction of crushing
pits, and quarries plants will be done away from the project. The plants
will not be placed very near to the human settlement.
At sites where quarries must be close to the project,
trees and other vegetation will be left between the
quarry/crushing plant sites and other working areas.
As soon as construction work is over the surplus
earth should be utilised to fill up low-lying areas.
Loose earth should not be allowed to pile up near
site.
Supply of Loss of vegetation Remove and store the topsoil of any important
materials to site due to haulage detours and it should be used for rehabilitation and
/ transport along routes and detours re-vegetation of the area after construction.
access roads
Injury / killing of Enforcement of speed limits on access roads
wildlife
Open excavation, Biodiversity impact Marked boundaries of work areas and enforcement
slope support of work only within these boundaries
works, bridges, Perimeter fencing of construction area
305

stations Felling of trees Afforestation in collaboration with WB Forest
Department
Land-take Minimise necessary land-take
If agricultural land is fragmented, provide accesses
Landslides and Consideration of geological setting during excavation
destabilisation of works and careful excavation.
hill slopes Implementation of slope support measures
immediately after excavation
Muck disposal only in pre-defined locations
Monitoring of destabilised hillsides
Rock fall Anchoring of large, un-jointed rock masses
Strong netting covering slopes to prevent rock fall
reaching roads
Underground Generation of muck
Regular washing of vehicles operating in the tunnels
excavation and wastewater
Muck disposal Destruction of Muck disposal shall only be at pre-defined sites.
agricultural land Where spoil disposal in vegetated sites cannot be
through spoil and avoided, select areas with scrub, bamboo, or
construction waste herbaceous growth over areas of healthy forest.
disposal
No disposal in or adjacent to cultivated areas (unless
such areas lie within the project reserved width, in
which case owners should be compensated)
Landscaping and Re-cultivation of Re-cultivation of all sites used by construction using
re-cultivation of sites topsoil excavated by the project and native plant
site species
Landscaping of sites Landscaping to merge the sites into the surrounding
landscape
306
Management of Water
Establishment Stress on water Store water on site; collected during periods when
and running of resources water is plentiful.
Contractors’ Restrict use of local water resources to ensure that
workers’ sufficient water is available to the local population,
camps, site their livestock and for agriculture.
clearance
Workers shall be provided with potable water supply.
Water pollution Contractor’s Site Waste Management Plan and its
enforcement
Site construction camps at least 100 m away from
rivers and as far as possible from local communities
Construction materials shall be placed away from
drains to prevent blocking of drainage systems.
Materials containing fines shall be stored so as to
prevent siltation.
Surface water quality monitoring in accordance with
monitoring plan and action if defined limit values are
exceeded
Construction camps shall be provided with adequate
drainage to avoid accumulation of stagnant water.
Water transport tanks, storage tanks and dispensing
container should be designed, used, cleaned and
disinfected at suitable intervals in a manner approved
by the competent authority.
Water that is unfit to drink should be noticeably
marked by notices prohibiting workers from drinking
it.
Provision of appropriate sanitary facilities for workers
Provision of drainage channels to intercept polluted
water
Sedimentation basins to remove dust
Water treatment plant
Solid waste from the Wastewater from the construction camps should be
construction camps settled and treated prior letting it out. The wastewater
should not be let down into nearby surface waters.
Provision of appropriate sanitary facilities for workers
Outbreak of disease Provide enough water supplies for workers, and
ensure sufficient sanitation for the camp: the proper
drainage systems, and the proper locations for solid
waste disposal.
Stagnant water should be prevented.
Pollution due to use Hydrocarbon, toxic material and (explosives --- if
and storage of blasting is necessary) shall be stored in adequately
hazardous protected sites to prevent water contamination while
substances vehicle maintenance and re-fuelling shall be confined
to areas at construction sites designed to contain
307

spilled lubricants and fuels.
Fuel depot shall be provided with impervious flooring
and bund/containment wall to keep spilled
fuel/lubricant within the depot.
Used oil and other toxic and hazardous materials shall
be disposed of in an authorized facility off-site.
Spill waste shall be disposed at disposal sites
approved by local authorities.
Adequate precaution shall be taken to prevent
oil/lubricant/ hydrocarbon contamination of channel
beds. Spillage, if any, shall be immediately cleared
with utmost caution to leave no traces.
The personnel in-charge of these sites shall be
properly trained and these areas shall be access
controlled and entry shall be allowed only through
authorization.
Ground and water Collect, store and dispose of POL materials in
contamination by oil, accordance with local law or standard acceptable
grease, fuel, etc. practice.
Construction Disturbance to Divert watercourses crossing access roads underneath
and surface water the roads (culverts, bridges)
maintenance of Collect surface water in channels constructed at the
access roads edges of access roads and provide cross-drainage to
divert water underneath the roads into the nearest
stream/nala
Avoid construction of fords where possible
Pollution of water Immediate clear up of any spillage
along access roads Disposal of excavated material only at pre-defined
disposal areas; no disposal over slopes
Avoid construction of fords where possible
Monitoring of water quality at sensitive locations and
action if defined limit values are exceeded
Sourcing of Impact on Install settlement basins, which allow silt, pollutants
materials downstream and rubbish to settle out of runoff water before it
watercourses flows into downstream water courses.
Drainage of quarries The contractors shall ensure that borrow pits and
and borrow pits quarries are left in a tidy state with stable side slopes
and proper drainage in order to avoid creation of
stagnant water bodies, which are favourable places for
mosquito breeding.
Supply of Risk of accidental Immediate clear-up of any spills to ensure they do not
materials to site spill of toxic enter any watercourses
/ transport materials
along access
roads
Open Water quality Work in rivers will be scheduled during dry season
308

excavation, impacts and work during the monsoon months shall be
slope support minimised.
works, bridges, Immediate stabilization of bare slopes.
stations
Construction storage/stockpiles shall be provided
with bunds to prevent silt run-off.
Stockpile areas and storage areas for hazardous
substances shall be located away from water bodies.
Washing of machinery and vehicles in surface waters
shall be prohibited.
Water pollution Provision of drainage channels to intercept polluted
water
Water treatment plant
Underground De-watering effect / Detection of hydro-geological conditions in advance of
excavation lowering of excavation face through exploratory drill holes
groundwater table Measures taken during construction to avoid excessive
water inflows, such as grouting
Monitoring of groundwater / mountain water level
with piezometers in existing boreholes
Monitoring of existing springs
Collection and storage of water at tunnel portals
Provision of purified water to local farmers for
agricultural or livestock purposes (by pumping if
necessary)
Water pollution Appropriate choice of construction materials (bio-
degradable)
Drainage pipes at low point in excavated tunnel profile
to intercept polluted water and guide to purification
installations
Water purification installations at portal areas.
Monitoring of functionality of water purification
installations and of water quality at portals
Muck disposal Muck disposal on Capture and/or diversion (using pipes) of any water
water-bearing due to water-bearing geological layers away from the
geological layers deposit area (i.e., into a stream)
Siltation of Muck disposal only at pre-defined and approved sites
watercourses due to No disposal into gullies or watercourses.
washing away of
Protection of deposit area with retaining walls
muck
Contamination of Provision of drainage channels to intercept polluted
watercourses due to water
contaminated muck Water treatment plant
Monitoring of contamination of excavated material in
accordance with monitoring plan and action in the
event of limit values being exceeded.
Landscaping Landscaping Creation of natural channels to discharge surface
309

and re- changes to drainage water into watercourses
cultivation of systems
site
Management of Climate / Air, Soil, Agriculture, Forestry

Establishment Loss of land, Return of re-cultivated land to landowners after
and running of buildings and completion of project
Contractors’ livelihoods
workers’
Biodiversity impact Planning of construction camp layout to ensure
camps, site
minimum encroachment.
clearance
No labour camp shall be allowed in the forest area.
Marked boundaries of camp
Construction camp management plan.
Contractor’s Site Waste Management Plan and its
enforcement
Prevention of poaching of wild animals by
construction workforce
Plan and carry out post-construction site clean-up.
Felling of trees Afforestation in collaboration with WB Forest
Department
Solid waste from the Contractor’s Site Waste Management Plan and its
construction camps enforcement
Provide garbage tanks and sanitary facilities for
workers. Waste in tanks should be cleared regularly so
that vector borne infections can be prevented.
Wastewater from the construction camps should be
settled and treated prior to discharge. The wastewater
should not be let down into nearby surface waters.
Garbage will be collected in a tank and be disposed of
periodically.
Special attention will be paid to the sanitary condition
of camps.
Depletion of natural Do not harvest wood resources within project area.
resources through Conduct awareness-raising campaigns on tree
demand for building conservation to workers.
materials, fuel, and
food for workers
Improper disposal of Contractor’s Site Waste Management Plan and its
solid waste enforcement
Segregation of waste shall be observed.
Organic (bio-degradable) shall be collected and
disposed of on site by composting (no burning on
site).
Recyclables shall be recovered and sold to recyclers.
310

Residual and hazardous waste shall be disposed of at
pre-defined disposal sites approved by local
authorities.
Ground Contractor’s Site Waste Management Plan and its
contamination by oil, enforcement
grease, fuel, etc. and Collect, store and dispose of POL materials in
other hazardous accordance with local law / best practice.
substances
Construction Dust/air pollution Maintain all construction vehicles to minimize toxic
and Emissions from vehicle emission.
maintenance of vehicles Ensure catalytic converters are fitted to vehicles.
access roads
Each vehicle being used for the project shall have a
valid Pollution Under Control Certificate.
Sprinkle water on the haulage routes to prevent dust
emission at residential areas.
Speed regulations should be strictly observed, in
particular in residential areas or near schools.
Air quality monitoring at sensitive locations in
accordance with monitoring plan and action if defined
limit values are exceeded
Vehicular noise and Limit construction works to between 6 am and 10 pm
vibrations in or near villages.
Avoid use of vehicles with excessive noise emission,
install and maintain equipment silencers.
Noise monitoring at sensitive locations in accordance
with monitoring plan and action if defined limit values
are exceeded
Department
Soil erosion Slopes excavated to pre-defined inclinations which are
less than the soils’ angles of friction
Drainage channel at top of slopes to prevent water
runoff over slope
Planting of slopes to fix soil
Use of geotextiles to prevent soil erosion
Excavated materials Re-use of uncontaminated rock and soil to the greatest
extent possible (aggregate for concrete, stone walls,
gabion production, landscaping)
Sourcing of Opening of new No new quarries within provincial and district
materials quarry and borrow protected areas.
areas No cutting of trees outside of the construction zone.
Afforestation in collaboration with WB Forest
Department to replace any felled trees
Soil erosion and Minimize major earthworks during the rainy season.
instability of cut During construction, employ erosion prevention
311

faces and borrow measures such as hay bales.
pits Provide vegetative cover on erosion-prone areas.
Install intercepting ditches at the top and at the
bottom of slopes. Use gutters and spillways to control
the flow of the water down slopes.
Provide retaining structures such as gabions, riprap,
or rock material embedded in a slope face, in
combination with vegetation measures, as
appropriate.
Reinforce earth embankment walls as the earth fill is
placed, with anchors compacted into the fill material.
Provide cut off drains to catch water before it reaches
critical areas, and diverging drains, to avoid excessive
concentration of flow.
Impact of borrow Screens should be provided to prevent dust emissions.
pits, and quarries on Air quality monitoring if any sensitive locations are
air quality nearby in accordance with monitoring plan and action
if defined limit values are exceeded
Supply of Construction/traffic Limit transport to between 6 am and 10 pm in or near
materials to site related dust and villages.
/ transport noise impacts in All vehicles delivering material to the site shall be
along access villages areas covered to avoid material spillage.
roads
Avoid use of vehicles with excessive exhaust or noise
emission, install and maintain equipment silencers.
Maintain all construction vehicles to minimize toxic
vehicle emission.
Ensure catalytic converters are fitted to vehicles.
Regularly sprinkle water on haulage routes in village
areas during dry season, maintain the speed of the
vehicles and maintain construction vehicles, cover
haulage trucks with tarpaulins to prevent spillage.
Speed regulations should be strictly observed, in
particular in residential areas or near schools.
Open Interference with Dumping of spoils and fill materials into irrigation
excavation, agriculture canals shall be avoided.
slope support In case of obstruction or damage, irrigation ditches
works, bridges, and ponds shall be cleaned or repaired immediately to
stations the maximum extent possible.
Provision of access to farmed land if the work site
fragments land
312

Removal of topsoil Removal and storage of topsoil in accordance with the
guidelines set out in this report
Department
Dust/air pollution Concrete batching plant and rock crushers shall be
located at least 500 m from settlements, schools, and
other sensitive receptors.
Dust control through frequent water sprinkling,
particularly in dry periods
Use of dust and noise barriers
Avoid use of vehicles with excessive exhaust or noise
emission, install and maintain equipment silencers.
Maintain all construction vehicles to minimize toxic
vehicle emission.
Ensure catalytic converters are fitted to vehicles.
Ground compaction Restrict movements of heavy machinery
Defined construction areas (perimeter fence)
Control vehicle tyre inflation and use vehicles with
large tyres
Soil erosion and Slopes excavated to pre-defined inclinations which are
stability of steep less than the soils’ angles of friction
slopes (e.g., portals) Implementation of support measures as per design
Drainage channel at top of slopes to prevent water
runoff over slope
Planting of slopes to fix soil
Monitoring of slope movement for unstable slopes
Underground Air quality Construction ventilation shall be provided to ensure a
excavation minimum oxygen level is available at the excavation
face and other working areas in the tunnel.
Only electrically powered or diesel vehicles and
equipment shall be allowed in the tunnel.
Sensors shall monitor air quality during construction
and that sufficient levels of oxygen are present.
Washing down of excavation face during scaling
Sprinkling of excavated material with water to control
dust
313

Use of air filtration systems at tunnel portals
Affect of (waste) Water purification installations at portal areas.
water on agriculture Monitoring of functionality of water purification
installations and of water quality at portals
Collection and storage of water at tunnel portals.
Provision of purified water to local farmers for
agricultural or livestock purposes (by pumping if
necessary)
Muck disposal Destruction of Muck disposal shall only be at pre-defined sites.
agricultural land Topsoil from disposal areas shall be removed before
through spoil and muck disposal and stored appropriately
construction waste
disposal
Erosion of muck No disposal into gullies or watercourses.
deposit slopes No disposal by direct tipping of spoil down slope
Slope angles lower than the internal angle of friction
Measures, such as cut off drainage channels, to avoid
water runoff over deposit area slopes
Soil contamination Monitoring of contamination of excavated material in
accordance with monitoring plan and action in the
event of limit values being exceeded.
If large volumes of contaminated soil are present and
are to be deposited, these shall be storage on areas
with sealed surfaces
Landscaping Ground compaction Disposed muck shall be compacted in accordance with
and re- and erosion best practice guidelines as set out in this report
cultivation of Topsoil shall be re-used to re-cultivate slopes or
site terraces.
Plantation (grasses) on slopes to maintain the soil
stability.
Environmental issue Mitigation Measure

All vegetation required to be cleared should be disposed at designated sites of
Site Clearance
Municipal Corporation/Project.
All vehicles delivering material to the site shall be covered to avoid material
spillage.
Construction site should be watered adequately and periodically to minimize
Generation of dust due to fugitive dust generation so that SPM standards are not exceeded.
construction activities All possible and practical measures to control dust emission during drilling
operations shall be employed.
Idling of delivery trucks or other equipment should not be permitted unnecessarily
during periods of unloading or when they are not in active use.
314

Concrete batching plant be located at or near the project site so that there is
Emissions from
no/minimum requirement of delivery trucks.
construction
Exhaust emissions from all construction equipments shall adhere to vehicle
equipments/vehicles
emission norms laid out by Central Pollution Control Board(CPCB)
Escaping of dust from All earthwork and construction material should be stored in such a manner so that
Storage Earthwork generation of dust will be minimized
Generation of Noise due to Welding machines operating on electricity and gas should be used during
construction activities construction activities.
The sitting of construction yard should be done leaving at least 500m distance
from any residential areas. This will allow the noise to attenuate.
Noise generating equipment to be used, shall adhere to emission norms as laid out
by CPCB.
Special acoustic enclosures(by way of noise shields, which can, be either brick
masonry structure or any other physical barrier) should be provided for individual
Noise from construction noise generating construction equipment such as Cement Concrete Mixers,
equipment required to be Generators, Dumpers / Trucks, Bulldozers, Excavators. Damaged silencers to be
used promptly replaced by the Contractor.
Operation hours for noise generating equipments such as pile driving, drilling and
other construction activities, etc. shall be according to prevailing local laws and
pre-approved by IRCON.
Drilling operation should be done intermittently wherever possible.
Construction activities involving noise-making equipment should be avoided
during night-time, especially in the residential areas.
Earplugs/ear mufflers should be provided to workers exposed to loud noise (As
Exposure to loud noise
per Factory Act requirements)
Earth, stone or any other construction material should be properly stored away
from drains so as not to block the flow of drainage system.
Impact on drains
Construction material containing fine particles should be stored in an enclosure
such that sediment laden water does not drain into nearby water body.
Siltation of soil into Nalas near the Portals shall be prevented as far as possible by
Siltation of water Body adapting soil erosion control measures such as turfing/pitching/stepping etc. on
the slopes.
Construction waste includes waste arising from tunnel excavation, land excavation,
site formation, civil / building construction, roadwork, renovation or demolition
Waste collection, recycling activities and mixed site clearance materials.
and disposal during The excavated material collected should directly be kept in the dumpers used for
construction phase transportation. These dumpers carrying soil should not spill during transportation
to the receiving point and they should be covered. The soil/earth construction
spoils will be dumped at designated sites.
Top soil cover should be removed and kept aside to be later used to cover the
fillings.
Soil disposal site/ construction site should be compacted and re-vegetated.
During filling operations both the edges should be protected by pitching /rip-
raping/retaining wall as per the requirement..
Soil Erosion
Adequate measures should be taken to control soil erosion and sedimentation.
Government of India, Ministry of Railways guidelines for earthwork in Railway
projects should be strictly followed.
As soon as construction work is over the surplus earth should be utilised to fill up
low lying area. Loose earth should not be allowed to pile up near site.
315
No lubricants, oils, solvents or paint products should be allowed to discharge into

water courses, either by direct discharge, or as contaminants carried in surface
water runoff from the construction site.
Contamination by aqueous All aqueous wastes and site runoff should comply with the CPCB standards.
waste and sewage etc.
Domestic sewage generated from any additional site toilets and washing facilities
provided for construction workers should be collected separately and disposed off
or appropriately treated to comply with statutory requirements.
Quarry and borrow material such as sand, aggregates etc. should be collected only
from the licenced quarries. According to the licence conditions, the quarry sites
Sourcing quarry materials
should have an approved quarry site management and closure plan including an
Environmental Management Plan (EMP).
The Contractor shall abide by the contract conditions and directions of
DDC/Engineer with respect to sitting of labour camps, if provided.
Providing Labour Camps Labour camps should be provided with proper water supply sanitation, medical
and facilities and educational facilities and labour welfare issues, etc.
Labour force in the labour camps should be provided with LPG cylinders to avoid
encroachment on forest area during construction phase.
The Contractor is required to comply with all the precautions as required for the
Occupational health and
safety of workmen as per the International Labour Organisation(ILO) convention
safety
No. 62, as far as those are applicable to the contract.
Provision of safety
The Contractor shall supply all necessary safety appliances such as safety goggles,
accessories/appliances to
helmets, safety belts, ear plugs, masks etc. to the workers and staff.
each worker
Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent danger from electrical equipment.
Safety precautions All machines/equipment used shall confirm to the relevant Indian standards (IS)
codes and shall be regularly inspected by the Safety officer.
A readily available first aid unit including an adequate supply of sterilized dressing
Availability of first aid kit material and appliances shall be provided as per the requirements under the
at construction site Factory Act. Depending upon the number, the health facilities shall be arranged as
WHO norms.
All anti-malarial measures shall be compiled which also including filling up of
Workers and Commuters
borrow pits.
health and Hygiene
Railway works manual should be strictly followed.
Good disposal practices as recommended in design shall be followed. Temporary
disposal of demolition debris, felled trees or stockyard beyond the project corridor
Debris Disposal must be avoided.
The top soil from the stockpile shall be used to cover disturbed areas and also for
re-development of borrow areas, landscaping and roadside plantation.
316
ANNEX 17.2 - ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN DURING CONSTRUCTION
Environmental
Parameters Standard Location Frequency Duration
Component
Particulate Matter
(PM2.5, PM10) Twice a week,
Batching plant
Sulphur dioxide four weeks in
Contractor’s a season and
(SO2) As per
camp 3 seasons in a
Air Quality Nitrogen oxides NAAQS CPCB
As otherwise year
(NOx) guidelines
directed by the (summer,
Carbon monoxide winter, post
Engineer
(CO) monsoon.
Ammonia (NH3)
At Contractor’s Three times As per

yards near per year (not CPCB
tunnel portals during guidelines.
At batching monsoon) on 24 hours
CPCB
(2) dB(A) plants days when monitoring
Noise noise
site work is in each
standards At tunnel being carried season
portals out and as (summer,
As otherwise directed by winter, post
directed by the the Engineer monsoon)
Engineer
pH
Total dissolved Sedimentation
solids tanks at tunnel
Once every
Total suspended portal areas season;
solids CPCB, Contractor’s As per
Water Quality summer,
MoEF CPCB
(Surface water) Oil and grease camps winter and
Standards guidelines
Chemical oxygen As otherwise post-
demand directed by the monsoon.
Biological oxygen Engineer
demand
317
Environmental
Component
pH
Odour
Colour
Turbidity
Total dissolved
solids
Total hardness as
CaCO3
Springs/wells
Chlorides
in nearby area Once every
Alkalinity as season;
MoEF and Drinking water As per
CaCO3 summer,
Drinking water CPCB tanks CPCB
Residual chlorine winter and
standards As otherwise guidelines
Calcium post-
directed by the monsoon.
Magnesium
Engineer
Sulphate as SO4
Iron
Fluoride
Nitrate
Lead
Zinc
Total coliform
Faecal coliform
Coarse fragments
pH
Electrical
conductivity
Calcium
carbonate
component
Organic carbon
component
Once per Directed by the
Soil Exchangeable Once in a year -
year Engineer
cations (calcium,
magnesium,
sodium,
potassium)
Available nitrogen
Available
phosphorus
Available
potassium
318
Environmental
Component
At sensitive As required
As per
Peak particle DGMS receptors (e.g., by Engineer
DGMS
Vibration circular 7 (during key
velocity (ppv) villages, circular 7 of
of 1997 construction
buildings) 1997
activities)
Inorganic
Contaminants
Arsenic (As)
Lead (Pb)
Cadmium (Cd)
Chromium (Cr)
Cobalt (Co)
Copper (Cu)
Nickel (Ni)
Mercury (Hg)
Zinc (Zn)
Organic 2008
Contaminants Austrian
Contamination of Muck disposal As required
Total organic Deposit
Excavated by the -
Area areas
Material carbon Engineer
Regula-
Hydrocarbon tions
index
Polycyclic
aromatic
hydrocarbon
(Benzo(a)pyren
component)
Further /
alternative
parameters apply
if a contaminant is
geogenic.
Vegetation
mapping
Number of felled
trees
(3) As required
Flora and fauna Number of - by the -
Project area
disturbed Engineer
(wildlife) habitats
Wildlife migration
corridors
319
Environmental
Component
On a case-by-
case basis as
required by
(4) Unstable slopes the Engineer
Slope stability - - in the project and as -
directed by a
area
geologist of
the
Engineer/DD
C
320
ANNEX 17.3 - R-1 (Pollution Monitoring Reports)
Reporting Reporting Reporting Date of Report

frequency Period Submission Reference
Contractor DDC Quarterly

DDC Engineer Quarterly
Monitoring Location Duration of Target Actual date Reason for delay, if

Monitoring Date of any
Monitoring
Air Monitoring
Noise Monitoring
Soil Monitoring
Water quality
Monitoring
Note: Annex Monitoring Report carried out during reporting period.

Certified that the Pollution monitoring has been conducted at all the locations specified in the
Environmental Management Plan (EMP) and as per directions of Engineer.
For Contractor / Monitoring For DDC For Engineer

Agency
321
ANNEX 17.3 - R-2 (Fugitive Dust Mitigation Measures)
Reporting Reporting Reporting Date of Report

frequency Period Submission Reference
Contractor DDC Quarterly

DDC Engineer Quarterly
Chainage Current Construction Measures taken to control

Activity in Brief fugitive dust emission
Certified that the above information is correct.
For Contractor / Monitoring For DDC For Engineer

Agency
322
ANNEX 17.4 - KEY ENVIRONMENTAL LEGISLATIONS IN INDIA
Operational Agencies/Key
Name Scope and Objective Key Areas
Players
To provide for the
Water (Prevention and
prevention and control of Controls sewage and
Control of Pollution Central and State Pollution
water pollution and industrial effluent
Act,1974 as amended up Control Boards
enhancing the quality of discharges
to date)
water
Air (Prevention and
To provide for the
Control of Pollution Controls emissions Central and State Pollution
prevention and control of
Act (1981 as amended of air pollutants Control Boards
air pollution
up to date)
To halt India’s rapid Restriction on de-
Forest Conservation
deforestation and reservation and
Act,1980 as amended Central government
resulting Environmental using forest for non-
up to date
degradation forest purpose
Creates protected
Wildlife Protection areas (national
Wildlife advisory boards;
Act,1972 as amended up To protect wildlife parks/sanctuaries)
Central Zoo Authorities
to date categories of wildlife
which are protected
To provide for the An umbrella Central government nodal
Environment Protection
protection and legislation; agency MoEF; can delegate
Act,1986 as amended up
improvement of supplements powers to state department of
to date
Environment pollution laws Environment
323
18.0 EARTHING SYSTEM
18.1 The need to prevent stray currents due to system of electric traction requires the construction of
an earthing system in the tunnel.
18.2 All metal parts along the tunnels are so connected to the longitudinal earthing wires, which are
connected to a mesh ground plate placed in the bottom of the technical room inside the tunnel,
which has the function of Medium-Low voltage substation.
18.3 The longitudinal and transversal earthing wires are made of bare galvanized iron with a section
of 40x4mm, hungered on both side of the tunnel.
18.4 The connections between longitudinal and transversal earthing wires are made by compression
terminals (brass made connection bolts M8 with correspondent nuts and washes).
18.5 Earthing and bonding shall be provided for all electrical installations and equipment to prevent
the possibility of dangerous voltage rises and to ensure that faults are rapidly cleared by installed
circuit protection.
18.6 Earthing systems shall conform to the following standards
(a) IEE Wiring Regulations (16th edition)
(b) BS 7430;
(c) BS 7375;
(d) IEEE Standard 80 Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding; and
(e) IS 3043:1987 code of practice for Earthing.
324
19.0 CABLE DUCT
19.1 General
This Chapter applies to the installation of the PVC cable duct as per relevant drawings for laying
of all type cables including electrical, signaling, communications etc. as per the requirement of
Railway.
19.2 Materials
Unplasticised PVC rigid pipes of standard lengths with ISI mark with solvent cement joints
including cost of couplers, as per IS: 13592.
19.3 Execution
The cable duct shall be laid / fixed as per the relevant drawings including couplers, jointing
materials i.e. solvent cement or self fit type to be jointed with cement solvent.
19.4 Measurement and Payment
The Unplasticised PVC shall be measured and paid per running meter length installed as per the
relevant drawing or instructed by engineer. The finished length shall be measured after the fixing
and finishing of the work and shall not include connections and any wastage etc. The accepted
quantity measured shall be paid for at the unit rates shown in the bill of quantities. The payment
shall include all materials including all local and central taxes, transportation, freight charges,
inspection charges, loading, unloading, conveyance to the departmental stores / site and stacking
the same in closed shed duly protected from sun rays and rains including cost of jointing material
i.e. solvent cement, etc. complete (self fit type to be jointed with cement solvent) etc. and work
required to carry out the work in accordance to specifications and shown on the drawings or as
instructed by the Engineer.
325
20.0 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC

20.1 The contractor shall be responsible for the safety along the roads related to the site. Where the
work is carried out on the site of, or close to an existing road, the contractor shall maintain the
vehicular and pedestrian traffic safe at all times. If his operations can cause traffic hazards, he
shall repair or fence or take such other measures for ensuring safety which are satisfactory to the
Engineer.
20.2 The contractor shall provide temporary passes and bridges to give an access to the existing
village houses, etc., to the satisfaction or the engineer and authorities concerned whenever he
disturbs such existing way during the execution of works.
326
SECTION- VIII
ANNEXURES/PROFORMAS
327
TABLE OF CONTENT
S.No. Particulars Page No.

1 ANNEXURE – A-SUPPLEMENTARY AGREEMENT 358
2 ANNEXURE-B-FORM OF AGREEMENT 359-360
3 ANNEXURE-C-BANK GUARANTEE FOR ADVANCE PAYMENT 361
4 ANNEXURE-D-BANK GUARANTEE FOR EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT 362-363
5 ANNEXURE-E-PERFORMANCE BANK GURANTEE (UNCONDITIONAL) 364
6 ANNEXURE-F- BANK GURANTEE FOR RELEASE OF 50% OF RETENTION 365
MONEY
7 ANNEXURE-G- LIST OF CITIES 366
328
ANNEXURE – A
SUPPLEMENTARY AGREEMENT
Articles of Agreement made on this …………………………. in the year …………. and between IRCON
INTERNATIONAL LIMITED acting through the Chief General Manager/RP hereinafter called as one
party and ……………………………………………….. of the second part.
Where the party hereto of the second part executed an agreement with the party hereto of the first
part being agreement No. ……………………. dated ………. for the performance of …………………………….
herein called the principal agreement.
And whereas it was agreed by and between the parties hereto that the works would be completed by
the party hereto of the second part on ………… “date last extended” and whereas the party hereto of the
second part has executed the work to the entire satisfaction of the party hereto of the first part and
whereas the party hereto of the first part already made payments to the party hereto of the second
part diverse sums from time to time aggregating to ` …………….. including the final bill bearing voucher
No. ……………… dated …………. (the receipt of which is hereby acknowledged by the party hereto of the
second part) in full and final settlement of all his claim under the principal agreement.
Now it is hereby agreed by and between the parties in the consideration of sums already paid by the
party hereto of the first part to the party hereto of the second part against all outstanding dues and
claims for all works done under the aforesaid principal agreement including / excluding security
deposit, the party hereto of the second part have no further dues / claims against the party hereto of
the first part under the said principal agreement.
It is further agreed by and between the parties that they party hereto of the second part has accepted
the said sums mentioned above in full and final satisfaction of all its dues and claims under the said
principal agreement.
It is further agreed and understood by and between the party that in consideration of the payment
already made under the agreement the said principle agreement shall finally discharged and rescinded
all the terms and conditions including the arbitration clause.
It is further agreed and understood by and between the parties that the arbitration clause contained in
the said principal agreement shall cease to have any effect and / or shall seems to be non-existent for
all purposes.
Signature of the Tenderer/s For& on behalf of
Witness of the signatures Witness …………………..

……………………………
1.
2.
329
ANNEXURE-B
FORM OF AGREEMENT
(To be executed on requisite value of stamp Papers)
AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT made on ____________ day of ________ (Month/year) between Ircon International
Limited, (hereinafter called “the Employer/Engineer”) of the one part and
__________________________________________________ (name and address of the Contractor) (hereinafter called
“the Contractor”) of the other part.
WHEREAS the Employer is desirous that work of

“………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………….” should be executed by the Contractor viz. Contract
No._________________________________ (hereinafter called “the Works”, and has accepted a Bid by the
Contractor for the execution and completion of such Works and the remedying of any defects therein.
NOW THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH as follows:
1. In this Agreement, words and expressions shall have the same meaning as are respectively
assigned to them in the Conditions of Contract hereinafter referred to.
2. The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this
Agreement:
Volume I:
a) The Contract Agreement
b) Letter of Acceptance
c) Notice Inviting Tender with Annexures
d) Form of Bid
e) Instructions to the Tenderers & Appendices
f) Appendix to Tender
g) Special Conditions of Contract - Section I
h)Special Conditions of Contract Section II A and Specifications Section II B
i) Annexures/Forms
j) General Conditions of Contract
Volume II:Technical Documents

Annexure A - Tender Drawings
Annexure B - Geotechnical Interpretative report
Annexure C - Safety & Disaster Management during Construction
Annexure D Attachment for clause 22.2 related to Quality & SHE
Annexure E -Guidelines for Design & Construction of Tunnels – Report
No RDSO/2012/GE:G-0017, June 2012
Annexure F -Guidelines for Safety in Tunnels during Construction –
Report No RDSO/2011/GE: G-0016. June 2012
330
Annexure G -Guidelines for Civil Engg. Inspection, Maintenance and

Safety in existing Tunnels – Report No RDSO/2009/GE:G-
0015, August 2012
Annexure H -PROFORMAS
Volume III: Financial Bid &Bill of Quantities
3. In consideration of the payments to be made by the Employer to the Contractor as hereinafter

mentioned, the Contractor hereby covenants with the Employer to execute and complete the
Works and remedy any defects therein in conformity in all respects with the provisions of the
Contract.
4. The Employer hereby covenants to pay the Contractor in consideration of the execution and
completion of the Works and the remedying of defects therein the Contract Price or such other
sum as may become payable under the provisions of the Contract at the times and in the
manner prescribed by the Contract.
IN WITNESS whereof the parties hereto have caused this Agreement executed the day and year first
before written.
(Name, Designation and address of the (Name, Designation and address of the
authorised signatory) authorised signatory)
Signed for and on behalf of the Contractor Signed for and on behalf of the Employer
in the presence of: in the presence of:
Witness: Witness:
1. 1.
2. 2.
Name and address of the witnesses to be indicated
331
ANNEXURE-C
BANK GUARANTEE FOR ADVANCE PAYMENT
To
Name of Contract:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
Gentlemen:
In accordance with the provisions of the Conditions of contract, Sub-Clause ____ (“Advance Payment”)
of the above-mentioned contract, ________________________________________ [name and address of the
Contractor] (hereinafter called “the Contractor”) shall deposit with IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED
[name of Employer] a bank guarantee to guarantee his proper and faithful performance under the said
Clause of the Contract in an amount of ____________ [amount of Guarantee], ________________________
[amount in words].
We, the ____________________ [name of bank], as instructed by the Contractor, agree unconditionally and
irrevocably to guarantee as primary obligator and not as Surety merely, the payment to IRCON
INTERNATIONAL LIMITED on their first demand without whatsoever right of objection on our part
and without his first claim to the Contractor, in the amount not exceeding ______________ [amount of
Guarantee], ______________________________ [amount in words].
We further agree that no change or addition to or other modification of the terms of the Contract or of
Works to be performed there under or of any of the Contract documents which may be made between
IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED and the Contractor, shall in any way release us from any liability
under this guarantee, and we hereby waive notice of any such change, addition, or modification.
This guarantee shall remain valid and in full effect from the date of the advance payment under the
Contract up to ______ (until IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED receives/recovers full repayment of
advance along with interest accrued thereon from the Contractor).
We, the Bank further agree that this guarantee shall be invokable at our
place of business at New Delhi/NCR/Project HQ (Indicate detail address of branch with Code No.)*.
The branch at New Delhi/NCR/Project HQ is being advised accordingly.
This Bank Guarantee shall be operative only if it is accompanied by a separate advice sent by
(Name of Issuing Bank, with address) on
(Name of Employer’s Bank, with address)
IFS Code through Structured Financial Messaging System (SFMS) and
authenticated by the Employer's Bank.
Yours truly,
SIGNATURE AND SEAL OF THE GUARANTOR
Name of Bank:
Address:
Date:
332
*The Bank should indicate detailed address of New Delhi/NCR/Project HQ branch along with its Code No .
ANNEXURE-D
(To be executed on a non-judicial stamp paper of `100/- only)
BANK GUARANTEE FOR EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT
(Tender Notice No. and date)
Ref: (Bank Guarantee No. and Date)
To
[Acting through ____________________(Tender Inviting Authority) & Address]
WHEREAS,_________________________________ [name of Bidder] (hereinafter called “the Bidder”) intends to

submit his bid dated ________ (date) for_____[name of work] (hereinafter called “the Bid”).
1. KNOW ALL PEOPLE by these presents that We _________________ [name of bank] of

_____________(name of country) having our registered office at ____________(hereinafter called “the
Bank”) are bound unto IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED (hereinafter called “the Employer”) in
the sum of `_________* [amount of Guarantee],________ [amount in words] for which payment well
and truly to be made to IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED. The Bank binds itself, its successors
and assigns by these presents with the Common Seal of the Bank this _______ day of _____ 20__ and
undertake to pay to the Employer up to the above amount upon receipt of their first written
demand, without IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED having to substantiate their demand.
The CONDITIONS of this obligation are:
(i) If the bidder withdraws his tender during the period of tender validity specified in the tender
or extended validity period as agreed to in writing by the tenderer;
or
(ii) If the successful tenderer having been notified of the acceptance of his tender by IRCON
INTERNATIONAL LIMETED during the period of Bid validity:
(a) fails to sign the Contract Agreement in accordance with the terms of the tender;
or
(b) fails to furnish the Performance Guarantee in accordance with the terms of the tender;
or
(c) fails to commence the work within the time period stipulated in the tender.
2. We, the ____________________ [name of bank], and our local branch at New Delhi (Indicate detail
address of local New Delhi branch with Code No.), undertake to pay to IRCON INTERNATIONAL
LIMITED up to the above amount upon receipt of their first written demand, without IRCON
INTERNATIONAL LIMITED having to substantiate their demand, PROVIDED THAT in their
333
demand IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED will note that the amount claimed by them is due to
them owing to the occurrence of one or any of the above conditions, specifying the occurred
condition or conditions.
3. This guarantee will remain valid and in full effect up to and including the date ____________ **.
Any demand in respect of this Guarantee should reach the Bank not later than the above date.
4. We, the ____________ Bank further agree that this guarantee shall be invokable at our place of
business at New Delhi/Project HQ (Indicate detail address of branch with Code No.)***. The
branch at New Delhi is being advised accordingly.
5. This Bank Guarantee shall be operative only if it is accompanied by a separate advice sent by
(Name of Issuing Bank, with address) on
(Name of Employer's Bank, with address)
DATE_______________ SIGNATURE OF THE BANK ____________________
SEAL ________________________
WITNESS _____________
[Signature, name and address]
_______________________________________________________________
*. The Bank should insert the amount of the guarantee in words and figures denominated in
Indian Rupees. This figure should be the same as mentioned in the Tender Notice named on
top.
**. Date to be filled in keeping a margin of minimum 180 days after the last date for submission of
Bids as stated in the “Notice Inviting Tenders” or as executed by IRCON INTERNATIONAL
LIMITED (through corrigenda).
***. The Bank should indicate detailed address of New Delhi/Project HQ branch along with its Code
No.
334
ANNEXURE-E
PERFORMANCE BANK GURANTEE (UNCONDITIONAL)

To
WHEREAS __________________[name and address of Contractor] (hereinafter called “the Contractor”) has
undertaken, in pursuance of Contract No.____________________ dated __________ to execute the work of
“………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………….” (hereinafter called “the Contract.”);
AND WHEREAS it has been stipulated by you in the said Contract that the Contractor shall furnish you
with a Bank Guarantee by a scheduled bank for the sum specified therein as security for compliance
with his obligations in accordance with the Contract;
AND WHEREAS we have agreed to give the Contractor such a Bank Guarantee;
NOW THEREFORE we hereby affirm that we are the Guarantor and responsible to you, on behalf of the
Contractor, up to a total of _______________________________________________________ [amount of Guarantee],
____________________________________________ [amount in words], such sum being payable in the types and
proportions of currencies in which the Contract Price is payable, and we undertake to pay you, upon
your first written demand and without cavil or argument, any sum or sums within the limits of
_______________ [amount of Guarantee] as aforesaid without your needing to prove or to show grounds or
reasons for your demand for the sum specified therein.
We hereby waive the necessity of your demanding the said debt from the Contractor before presenting
us with the demand.
the Works to be performed there under or of any of the Contract documents which may be made
between you and the Contractor shall in any way release us from any liability under this guarantee,
and we hereby waive notice of any such change, addition or modification.
This guarantee shall be valid up to _______ (a date 120 days from the date of completion of the work).
We, the Bank further agree that this guarantee shall be invokable at our place of
business at New Delhi/NCR/Project HQ ( Indicate detail address of branch with Code No.)*. The
branch at New Delhi/NCR/Project HQ is being advised accordingly.
This Bank Guarantee shall be operative only if it is accompanied by a separate advice sent by
(Name of Issuing Bank, with address) on (Name of Employer's
Bank, with address) IFS Code through Structured Financial Messaging
System (SFMS) and authenticated by the Employer's Bank.
Name of Bank:
Address:
Date:
*The Bank should indicate detailed address of New Delhi/NCR/Project HQ branch along with its Code No.
335
ANNEXURE-F
BANK GURANTEE FOR RELEASE OF 50% OF RETENTION MONEY

To
IRCON International Limited,
Name & Address of Project.
[Acting through ______________________(Project In charge) & Address of the Project]

WHEREAS __________________[name and address of Contractor*] (hereinafter called “the Contractor”) has
undertaken, in pursuance of Contract No.____________________________________ dated __________ to execute
________________________________________________________ [name of Contract and brief description of Works]
(hereinafter called “the Contract.”);
AND WHEREAS it has been agreed by you in the said Contract that the Contractor has option to get
release 50% of the Retention Money against un-conditional Bank Guarantee from a Scheduled Bank
acceptable to you as security for compliance with Contractor’s obligation in accordance with the
contract (Sub clause _________)
AND WHEREAS the Contractor has opted to get released the 50% of the retention money against an
unconditional Bank Guarantee;
NOW THEREFORE we hereby affirm that we are the Guarantor and responsible to you, on behalf of the
Contractor, up to a total of _______________ [amount of Guarantee], ___________________________ [amount in
words], such sum being payable in the types and proportions of currencies in which the Contract Price
is payable, and we undertake to pay you, upon your first written demand and without cavil or
argument, any sum or sums within the limits of __________ [amount of Guarantee] as aforesaid without
your needing to prove or to show grounds or reasons for your demand for the sum specified therein.
We hereby waive the necessity of your demanding the said debt from the Contractor before presenting
us with the demand.
the Works to be performed there under or of any of the Contract documents which may be made
between you and the Contractor shall in any way release us from any liability under this guarantee,
and we hereby waive notice of any such change, addition or modification.
This guarantee shall be valid up to _______ (till the IRCON International Limited certifies repayment of
retention money in accordance with Sub-clause 8.5 of General Conditions of Contract).
We, the Bank further agree that this guarantee shall be invokable at
our place of business at New Delhi/NCR/Project HQ ( Indicate detail address of
branch with Code No.)*. The branch at New Delhi/NCR/Project HQ is being advised
accordingly.
This Bank Guarantee shall be operative only if it is accompanied by a separate

advice sent by (Name of Issuing Bank, with address) on
(Name of Employer's Bank, with address)
Name of Bank:
Address:
The Bank should indicate detailed address of New Delhi/NCR/Project HQ branch along with its Code No
336
Sivok-Rangpo Rail Link Project General Conditions of Contract
SECTION- IX
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
337
Sivok Rangpo Rail Link Project General Conditions of Contract
General Conditions of Contract

The Standard General Conditions of Contract, Nov 2018 of the Indian Railwaysshall be followed
with latest correction slips issued from Northeast Frontier Railway.
The General Conditions of Contract, Nov 2018 of Indian Railways, along with latest correction
slips, will form part of the tender/contract documents.
Additional definitions mentioned in these tender documents elsewhere will be followed for GCC,
Nov 2018 also.
In case, there is an ambiguity in any definition, the decision of IRCON regarding the
interpretation shall be final and binding.
Wherever there is conflict in any condition between GCC and special condition mentioned in
tender documents. The condition mentioned in special condition will prevail. However
Engineer-in-charge decision in this connection shall be final and binding.
Copy of General Conditions of Contract, Nov 2018 of Indian Railways are enclosed in a separate
Booklet.
Definitions Given under Clause 1(1) of GCC may be read as under:

Clause As given In GCC of Railway at Page 23 To be read as:
No
1. (1) Definitions : In these General Conditions of Contract, Definitions : In these General Conditions of
the following terms shall have the meaning assigned Contract, the following terms shall have the
hereunder except where the context otherwise requires meaning assigned hereunder except where the
: context otherwise requires :
(a) "Railway" shall mean the President of the Republic of "Railway" shall mean the President of the
India or the Administrative Officers of the Railway or of Republic of India or the Administrative Officers of
the Successor Railway authorised to deal with any the Railway or of the Successor Railway
matters which these presents are concerned on his authorised to deal with any matters which these
behalf. presents are concerned on his behalf.
(b) "General Manager" shall mean the Officer in-charge of "General Manager" shall mean "Chairman cum
the General Superintendence and Control of the Railway Managing Director" of Ircon International
and shall also include the General Manager Limited.
(Construction) and shall mean and include their
successors, of the successor Railway.
(c) "Chief Engineer" shall mean the Officer in-charge of the "Chief Engineer" shall mean the Project Head of
Engineering Department of Railway and shall also IRCON INTERNATIONAL Ltd. (Employer), Chief
include Chief Engineer (Construction), Chief Signal & General Manager of IRCON or any other officer
Telecommunication Engineer, Chief Signal & authorised by the Employer to act on his behalf
Telecommunication Engineer (Construction), Chief and for the purpose of operating the contract.
Electrical Engineer, Chief Electrical Engineer
(Construction) and shall mean & include their
successors, of the Successor Railway.
(d) "Divisional Railway Manager" shall mean the Officer in- "Divisional Railway Manager" shall mean the
charge of a Division of the Railway and shall mean and Project Head of IRCON INTERNATIONAL
include the Divisional Railway Manager of the Successor Ltd.(Employer), Chief General Manager of IRCON
Railway. or any other officer authorised by the Employer to
act on his behalf and for the purpose of operating
the contract.
338
(e) "Engineer" shall mean the Divisional Engineer or the “Engineer” shall mean officer authorized by
Executive Engineer, Divisional Signal & IRCON in direct charge of works.
Telecommunication Engineer, Divisional Signal &
Telecommunications Engineer (Construction),
Divisional Electrical Engineer, Divisional Electrical
Engineer (Construction), in executive charge of the
works and shall include the superior officers of the
Engineering, Signal & Telecommunication, and
Electrical Departments of Railway, i.e. the Senior
Divisional Engineer/Deputy Chief Engineer / Chief
Engineer / Chief Engineer (Construction), Senior
Divisional Signal & Telecommunication
Engineer/Deputy Chief Signal & Telecommunication
Engineer/Chief Signal & Telecommunication Engineer
(Construction)/Senior Divisional Electrical
Engineer/Deputy Chief Electrical Engineer/Chief
Electrical Engineer (Construction) and Chief
Administrative Officer (Construction) and shall mean &
include the Engineer of the Successor Railway.
(f) "Engineer's Representative" shall mean the Assistant "Engineer's Representative" shall mean the officer
Engineer, Assistant Signal & Telecommunication authorized by IRCON in direct charge of works.
Engineer and Assistant Electrical Engineer in direct
charge of the works and shall include any Sr.
Section/Junior Engineer of Civil Engineering/Signal and
Telecommunication Engineering & Electrical
Engineering Departments appointed by the Railway and
shall mean and include the Engineer's Representative of
the Successor Railway.
(g) "Contractor" shall mean the Person/Firm/Co-operative "Contractor" shall mean the Person/Firm/Co-
Society or Company whether incorporated or not who operative Society or Company whether
enters into the contract with the Railway and shall incorporated or not who enters into the contract
include their executors, administrators, successors and with the Railway and shall include their
permitted assigns. executors, administrators, successors and
permitted assigns.
(h) "Contract" shall mean and include the Agreement of "Contract" shall mean and include the Agreement
Work Order, the accepted Schedule of Rates or the or Letter of Acceptance, the accepted Bill of
Schedule or Rates of Railway modified by the tender Quantities and Rates, the General Conditions of
percentage for items of works quantified, or not Contract, Special Conditions of Contract, Appendix
quantified, the General Conditions of Indian Railways to Tender, Form of Bid, and Instructions to the
Standard General Conditions Of Contract – July 2013 As Tenders, Drawings, Specifications and other
On 30th June 2013 Page 24 Contract, the Special Tender Documents.
Conditions of Contracts, if any; the Drawing, the
Specifications, the Special Specifications, if any and
Tender Forms, if any.
(i) "Works" shall mean the works to be executed in “WORKS” shall mean the works contemplated in
accordance with the contract. the drawings and schedules set forth in the tender
forms and required to be executed according to
specifications.
(j) "Specifications" shall mean the Standard Specifications “SPECIFICATIONS” shall mean the specifications
for Materials &Works of Railway as specified by Railway for materials and works mentioned in tender
under the authority of the Chief Engineer or as documents.
amplified, added to or superseded by Special
Specifications, if any.
339
(k) "Schedule of Rates of Railway" shall mean the Schedule "Bill of Quantities (B.O.Q.)"/ “Schedule of Rates”
of Rates issued under the authority of the Chief means list of items of work, their quantities and
Engineer from time to time. rates as accepted and forming part of contract
agreement.
(l) "Drawing" shall mean the maps, drawings, plans and "Drawings" means the Drawings annexed to the
tracings or prints there of annexed to the contract and Contract or referred in it and shall include any
shall include any modifications of such drawings and modifications of such Drawings and further
further drawings as may be issued by the Engineer from Drawings as may be issued or approved by the
time to time. Engineer.
(m) "Constructional Plant" shall mean all appliances or "Contractor" shall mean the Person/Firm/Co-
things of whatsoever nature required for the execution, operative Society or Company whether
completion or maintenance of the works or temporary incorporated or not who enters into the contract
works (as hereinafter defined) but does not include with the Railway and shall include their
materials or other things intended to form or forming executors, administrators, successors and
part of the permanent work. permitted assigns.
(n) "Temporary Works" shall mean all temporary works of "Temporary Works" shall mean all temporary
every kind required for the execution completion works of every kind required for the execution
and/or maintenance of the works. completion and/or maintenance of the works.
(o) "Site" shall mean the lands and other places on, under, "Site" shall mean the lands and other places on,
in or through which the works are to be carried out and under, in or through which the works are to be
any other lands or places provided by the Railway for carried out and any other lands or places
the purpose of the contract. provided by the Railway for the purpose of the
contract.
(p) Period of Maintenance shall mean the specified period Period of Maintenance shall mean the specified
of maintenance from the date of completion of the period of maintenance from the date of
works, as certified by the Engineer. completion of the works, as certified by the
Engineer.
Digitally signed
by Manoj
Kumar Poddar
340 Date:
2019.01.01
17:25:30 IST
Reason: PDF
Authenticated

1TechnicalBid T6 PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

1TechnicalBid T6 PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Construction of Tunnel T-6 Tender Documents

Sivok - Rangpo Rail Link Project Top Sheet

IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED

Construction of T-6 (between Km 14+904 to Km

Delhi Office Siliguri Office

1 TOP SHEET Page – 3

2 SECTION-I / e-PROCUREMENT NOTICE Page – 4 -18

3 SECTION-II / FORM OF BID Page – 19-20

4 SECTION-III / INSTRUCTION TO TENDERERS Page –21-77

5 SECTION-IV / APPENDIX TO TENDER Page – 78-79

6 SECTION-V / SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT I Page – 80-115

7 SECTION-VI / SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT IIA Page – 116-136

8 SECTION-VII / SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT IIB Page –137-322

9 SECTION-VIII/ ANNEXURES/PERFORMAS Page – 323-332

10 SECTION-IX/ STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF Page 333- 336 and A

Tender No:-IRCON/CC/TN/SR-2046/Const./T6/18/04 Date: 01.01.2019

Name of work : Construction of Tunnel T-6 (between Km 14+904 to Km 18+816

Tendered cost / : Rs. 261.41 Crores

Earnest Money : Rs. 1.37 Cr.

Last Date of : 22/01/2019 at 15:00 hrs.

IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED,

2 ANNEX : I TO e-PROCUREMENT NOTICE – SCOPE OF WORK 14

3 ANNEX : IITO e-PROCUREMENT NOTICE – ESSENTIAL QUALIFYING CRITERIA 16

IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED

S Name of work Estimated Cost of Earnest Completion

1 Construction of Tunnel T-6 (between

2.0 Website https://www.tenderwizard.com/IRCON may be referred for detailed

come to the position of such disqualified bidder. Action

18.0 Pre-bid Meeting:

The scope of work is enclosed as Annexure I.

24.4.1 In case of proprietary MSE, proprietor(s) shall be SC/ST.

24.6 If lowest valid bidder is non-MSE firm, then in such a case -

25.0 Policy for Startup India for Startups Registered Firms:

(*Local vendors means a supplier or service provider whose product or service

For & on behalf of

ANNEX - I TO e-Procurement Notice - SCOPE OF WORK

of construction and defects liability period.

Essential Qualification Creteria

Rev. Annexure-II: ESSENTIAL QUALIFYING CRITERIA

NOTES TO ELIGIBILITY CRITERIA:

No Requirement Single Joint Venture

No Requirement Single Joint Venture

Date this________day of __________ 201_.

Instructions to Tenderers (ITT)

a) Client: As indicated in ‘Appendix to Tender’.

b) Employer : IRCON INTERNATIONAL LIMITED address as given in ‘Appendix to Tender’.

1.8 Site Visit

1.9 Site Data

 Annexure A - Tender Drawings

 Annexure B - Geotechnical Interpretative report

 Annexure C - Safety & Disaster Management during Construction

 Annexure D - Attachment for Clause 22.2 of SCC-I

 Annexure E -Guidelines for Design & Construction of Tunnels – Report

VOLUME – III – Bill of Quantities

10 INTEGRITY PACT (IP)

C-4, District Centre, Saket, New Delhi-17

10.7 Name & Address of IEM:

14.4 Care in Submission

17.3 If an e-bid is not substantially responsive, it shall be rejected by the Employer.

22 CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE FEEDBACK AND EVALUATION SYSTEM

25 DETAILS OF DISPUTED STATUS OF BAN/NON-PERFORMANCE

29.0 ELIGIBILITY CRITERIA

declaration before commencement of negotiation:

Date thisday of __ 201_.